Owner's Manual

OWNER’S MANUAL Alhambra 7N5012720BG Inglés (11.16)

7N5012720BG (11.16) SEAT recommends SEAT recommends

Inglés SEAT GENUINE OIL Castrol EDGE Professional Alhambra About this manual The equipment marked with an aster- For the sake of the environment isk* is fitted as standard only in certain versions, and is only supplied as op- Texts preceded by this symbol contain rele- This manual contains a description of the vant information concerning environmental tional extras for some versions, or are equipment supplied with the vehicle at the protection. time this manual was published. Some of the only offered in certain countries. units described herein will not be available ® All registered marks are indicated with Note until a later date or are only available in cer- ®. Although the copyright symbol does tain markets. not appear, it is a copyrighted mark. Texts preceded by this symbol contain additional information. Because this is a general manual for the >> The section is continued on the follow- ALHAMBRA range, some of the equipment ing page. and functions that are described in this man- This manual is divided into six large parts, Important warnings on a given page which are: ual are not included in all types or variants of the model; they may vary or be modified Detailed contents on a given page 1. The essentials depending on the technical requirements and 2. Safety on the market; this is in no way deceptive ad- General information on a given page 3. Emergencies vertising. Emergency information on a given page 4. Operation The illustrations are intended as a general guide and may vary from the equipment fitted Audiovisual material on a given page 5. Tips in your vehicle in some details. 6. Technical data The steering indications (left, right, forward, WARNING At the end of this manual, there is a detailed SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under- reverse) appearing in this manual refer to the Texts preceded by this symbol contain infor- alphabetical index that will help you quickly stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason normal driving movements of the vehicle ex- mation on safety. They warn you about possi- find the information you require. no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook. cept when otherwise indicated. ble dangers of accident or injury. All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error The audiovisual material only is intended to or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print. help users to understand certain car function- CAUTION Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form. alities better. It does not replace the instruc- Texts with this symbol draw your attention to SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act. tion manual. Please use the instruction manu- potential sources of damage to your vehicle. al to obtain more comprehensive information All rights on changes are reserved. and indications. ❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose. © SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.16 Foreword

This Instruction Manual and its correspond- You can access the information in this man- WARNING ing supplements should be read carefully to ual using: familiarise yourself with your vehicle. Read and always observe safety informa- ● Thematic table of contents that follows the tion concerning the passenger's front air- Besides the regular care and maintenance of manual’s general chapter structure. bag ››› page 75, Important information the vehicle, its correct handling will help pre- ● Visual table of contents that uses graphics regarding the front passenger's airbag. » serve its value. to indicate the pages containing “essential” For safety reasons, always note the informa- information, which is detailed in the corre- tion concerning accessories, modifications sponding chapters. and part replacements. ● Alphabetical index with many terms and If selling the vehicle, give all of the on-board synonyms to help you find information. documentation to the new owner, as it should be kept with the vehicle. Related videos

Park Assist ››› page 211 Blind Spot Detector (BSD) ››› page 222

Table of Contents

Seat belts ...... 61 Doors ...... 119 Table of Contents Why wear a seat belt? ...... 61 Sliding doors ...... 119 How to properly adjust your seatbelt ...... 64 Rear lid ...... 122 The essentials ...... 5 Seat belt tensioners ...... 67 Electric windows ...... 125 Exterior view ...... 5 Airbag system ...... 68 Panoramic sliding sunroof* ...... 126 Exterior view ...... 6 Brief introduction ...... 68 Lights and visibility ...... 128 Interior view (left-hand drive) ...... 7 Airbag safety instructions ...... 71 Lights ...... 128 How it works ...... 8 Deactivating airbags ...... 72 Visibility ...... 134 Unlocking and locking ...... 8 Transporting children safely ...... 74 Windscreen wiper and window wiper sys- Before driving ...... 13 Safety for children ...... 74 tems ...... 135 Airbags ...... 17 Child seats ...... 75 Rear vision mirror ...... 137 Child seats ...... 21 Integrated child seat ...... 78 Seats and head restraints ...... 140 Starting the vehicle ...... 24 Adjusting the seats and head restraints ...... 140 Lights and visibility ...... 24 Emergencies ...... 82 Seat functions ...... 144 SEAT information system ...... 26 Self-help ...... 82 Transport and practical equipment ...... 150 Cruise control ...... 32 In case of emergency ...... 82 Transporting objects ...... 150 Warning lamps ...... 32 Vehicle tool kit* ...... 82 Luggage compartment ...... 152 Gearbox lever ...... 34 Changing a wheel* ...... 84 Roof carrier* ...... 161 Air conditioning ...... 36 Tyre repair ...... 85 Storage compartments ...... 163 Fluid Level control ...... 39 Changing the windscreen wiper blades ...... 87 Drink holders ...... 168 Emergencies ...... 42 Tow-starting and towing ...... 87 Ashtray and cigarette lighter* ...... 170 Fuses ...... 42 Emergency locking and unlocking ...... 89 Power sockets ...... 170 Bulbs ...... 43 Fuses and bulbs ...... 90 Air conditioning ...... 173 Action in the event of a puncture ...... 44 Fuses ...... 90 Air conditioning ...... 173 Changing a wheel ...... 45 Changing bulbs ...... 91 Auxiliary heater* (additional heater) ...... 177 Snow chains ...... 49 Driving ...... 181 Emergency towing of the vehicle ...... 50 Operation ...... 99 Address ...... 181 How to jump start ...... 51 General instrument panel ...... 99 Stopping and starting the engine ...... 182 Changing windscreen wipers ...... 54 Instrument panel ...... 98 Instruments ...... 100 Braking and parking ...... 187 Safety ...... 56 Control lamps ...... 105 Gearbox ...... 192 Safe driving ...... 56 Communications and multimedia ...... 106 Run-in and economical driving ...... 197 Safety first! ...... 56 Steering wheel controls* ...... 106 Engine management and exhaust gas purifica- Advice about driving ...... 56 Multimedia ...... 108 tion system ...... 200 Correct position of the vehicle occupants . . . . 57 Three button unit in headliner ...... 108 Driving tips ...... 202 Pedal area ...... 60 Opening and closing ...... 110 Driver assistance systems ...... 203 Vehicle key set ...... 110 Braking and stability systems ...... 203 Central locking and locking system ...... 112 Start assist systems ...... 205 Parking distance warning system* ...... 208 3 Table of Contents

Park Assist system* (Park Assist) ...... 211 Technical data ...... 294 Rear assist* (Rear View Camera) ...... 215 Technical features ...... 294 Cruise control* (Cruise control system - Important information ...... 294 CCS) ...... 219 Towing a trailer ...... 295 Lane Assist system* ...... 220 Wheels ...... 296 Blind spot detector (BSD) with rear cross traffic Engine data ...... 297 alert (RTA) ...... 222 Dimensions ...... 302 Traffic signal detection (Sign Assist)* ...... 227 Tiredness detection (recommendation to take Index ...... 303 a break) ...... 229 Dynamic Chassis control (DCC)* ...... 230 Tyre monitoring systems ...... 231 Towing bracket device ...... 234 Driving with a trailer ...... 234 Advice ...... 244 Care and maintenance ...... 244 Accessories, replacement of parts and modifications ...... 244 Caring for and cleaning the vehicle exterior . . . 250 Caring for and cleaning the vehicle interior . . . 256 Notes for the user ...... 260 Checking and refilling levels ...... 261 Filling the tank ...... 261 Fuel ...... 264 Selective catalytic reduction* (AdBlue) ...... 265 Working in the engine compartment ...... 268 Engine oil ...... 271 Engine coolant ...... 274 Brake fluid ...... 278 Windscreen washer reservoir ...... 280 Vehicle battery ...... 280 Wheels and tyres ...... 284 Tyres ...... 284 Winter service ...... 292

4 The essentials Exterior view

1 ››› page 10 4 ››› page 39 7 ››› page 11 2 ››› page 50 5 ››› page 12 8 ››› page 44 3 ››› page 39 6 ››› page 8

5 The essentials Exterior view

1 ››› page 40 4 ››› page 39 7 ››› page 41 10 ››› page 44 2 ››› page 39 5 ››› page 41 8 ››› page 157 3 ››› page 42 6 ››› page 41 9 ››› page 45

6 The essentials Interior view (left-hand drive)

1 ››› page 8 5 ››› page 32 9 ››› page 25 13 ››› page 34 17 ››› page 16 2 ››› page 16 6 ››› page 32 10 ››› page 36 14 ››› page 11 18 ››› page 13 3 ››› page 24 7 ››› page 26 11 ››› page 24 15 ››› page 11 19 ››› page 15 4 ››› page 25 8 ››› page 26 12 ››› page 18 16 ››› page 42

7 The essentials How it works  ››› in Introduction on page 112 Unlocking and locking  ››› page 110 Doors  ››› page 8, ››› page 9

Locking or unlocking of driver door Fig. 2 In the driver door: central locking button

Locking and unlocking the vehicle using the key ● Locking: press the  ››› Fig. 1 button. ● Locking the vehicle without activating the anti-theft system: Press the  ››› Fig. 1 button for a second time within 2 seconds. ● Unlocking: press the  ››› Fig. 1 button. ●  Unlocking the rear lid: Hold down the Fig. 3 Driver door handle: hidden lock cylin- Fig. 1 Remote control key: buttons. ››› Fig. 1 button for at least 1 second. der.

Locking and unlocking with the central lock- As a general rule, when the driver door is ing switch locked all other doors are locked. Unlocking ● Locking: press the  ››› Fig. 2 button. None manually only opens the driver door. Please of the doors can be opened from the outside. note the instructions for the anti-theft alarm The doors can be opened from the inside by ›››  page 112. pulling the inside door handle. ● Unfold the key shaft ›››  page 110. ● Unlocking: press the  ››› Fig. 2 button. ● Insert the key shaft into the lower opening in the cover on the driver door handle from

8 The essentials below ››› Fig. 3 (arrow) then remove the cover Locking the passenger side door and ● Open the door. upwards. sliding doors manually ● Remove the rubber cap to the front of the ● Insert the key blade into the lock cylinder door. The rubber cap is marked with a lock to unlock or lock the vehicle. symbol  ››› Fig. 4. ● Unfold the vehicle key blade Special Characteristics ›››  page 110. ● The anti-theft alarm will remain active when ● Insert the key shaft horizontally into the vehicles are unlocked. However, it is not trig- opening and moved the coloured lever for- gered ›››  page 112. ward ››› Fig. 5. ● If the driver door is opened, the alarm will ● Replace the rubber cap and close the door. be triggered. ● Check if the door is locked. ● Switch the ignition on. The electronic im- ● Carry out the same operation on the other mobilizer recognises a valid vehicle key and Fig. 4 At the front of the passenger sliding doors if necessary. deactivates the anti-theft alarm system. door: Emergency lock, hidden by a rubber cap. ● Have the vehicle checked by a specialised workshop.  ››› in Introduction on page 90  ››› in Introduction on page 90 Note The anti-theft alarm is not activated when the Note vehicle is locked manually using the key shaft ›››  page 112. The doors can be opened and unlocked individually from the inside by pulling the inside door handle. To open, pull the inner door release lever twice ›››  page 112.

Fig. 5 Emergency locking of the vehicle using the vehicle key

The passenger side door and the sliding doors can be locked manually. The anti-theft alarm is not activated in this case.

9 The essentials

Opening the rear door Opening with the ignition key Emergency unlocking the boot hatch ● Press the  button on the vehicle key until the rear lid opens automatically.

To open using the centre console control ● Press the  button on the centre console ››› Fig. 6. The rear lid will be automatically opened. ● The button is still operative when the ignition is switched off.

Fig. 6 Detailed view of the centre console: Opening the rear lid with the button Fig. 8 From the luggage compartment: re- button for unlocking the rear lid ● Unlock the vehicle or open a door. move the boot hatch cover. ● Raise the rear lid using the button ››› Fig. 7 (arrow).

 ››› in Introduction on page 122

Fig. 7 Opening the boot hatch from the out- Fig. 9 From the luggage compartment: Emer- side gency unlocking of the booth hatch.

Before opening the rear lid, always remove ● Remove equipment to access the inside of any load on its luggage rack ››› in Introduc- the rear lid. tion on page 122. ● Remove the square cover in the inner trim of the rear lid ››› Fig. 8.

10 The essentials

● Push the release lever ››› Fig. 9 A in the di- Electric windows* rection of the arrow to unlock the boot. ● Manually open the rear lid.

 ››› in Introduction on page 90

Bonnet

Fig. 11 Cam under the bonnet

● Opening the bonnet: Pull the lever under Fig. 12 Detail of the driver door: controls for the dashboard ››› Fig. 10 1 . the windows, and the electric child safety lock buttons. ● Lift up the bonnet. Press the release catch under the bonnet upwards Fig. 11. The ar- ››› Buttons on the driver door rester hook under the bonnet is released. 1 For the front electric windows. ● The bonnet can be opened. Release the bonnet stay and secure it in the fixture de- 2 For the sliding door electric windows. signed for this in the bonnet. 3 To lock the sliding doors and their win- Fig. 10 Release lever in the driver's footwell dows. area. ››› in Opening and closing the bonnet  on page 270 Opening and closing the windows  ››› page 268 Opening: Push the  button. Closing: Pull the  button.

To stop the Press or pull on the corresponding win- one touch dow button. » function:

11 The essentials

Press the  button for the electronic ››› in Panoramic sliding sunroof: oper- child safety lock to deactivate the con-  ating on page 126 trols for the electric windows on the  sliding doors and to lock these doors ››› page 126 ››› page 119. The indicator on the but-  ton will light up.  ››› page 13 ››› in Electric windows: functions on  page 125

››› page 125  Fig. 14 On the interior roof lining: press the button and pull on it to raise and lower the sunroof.

Panoramic sunroof* To open the panoramic sliding sunroof, the switch must be in the position 1 .

● Opening: Turn the switch to position ››› Fig. 13 3 . ● Convenience position: Turn the switch to position ››› Fig. 13 2 . ● Closing: Turn the switch to position ››› Fig. 13 1 . ● To tilt open: Push the switch to position ››› Fig. 14 4 . For an intermediate position, Fig. 13 On the interior roof lining: use the ro- hold down the switch until you reach the de- tary button for opening and closing sired position. ● Lowering: Pull the switch to position ››› Fig. 14 5 . For an intermediate position, hold down the switch until you reach the desired position.

12 The essentials

Manually closing the panoramic sun- ● Insert a standard 4 mm Allen key1) into the Before driving roof Allen bolt ››› Fig. 16 A . ● Rotate the Allen bolt to close the panoram- Manually adjusting the front seat ic sliding sunroof. ● Re-install the lining. ● Bring the vehicle to a specialised workshop to check the panoramic sliding sunroof given that the emergency closing operation could damage general operation or the anti-trap function of the panoramic sliding sunroof.

 ››› in Introduction on page 90 Fig. 15 On the interior roof lining: remove cover. Fig. 17 Front left seat controls

The controls are mirrored for the front right- hand seat. Mechanically and electrically adjusted controls can be combined on the seat.

Fig. 17 Function Necessary operations

Pull the lever and move Moving the the seat forwards. The head restraint 1 front seat must be engag- backwards or ed when the lever is re- Fig. 16 Allen bolt to close the panoramic slid- forwards. leased! ing sunroof Adjusting the ● Push open the cover in the direction indica- 2 lumbar sup- Turn the lever. » ted (arrow) ››› Fig. 15. port*.

1) Not included with the vehicle tool kit. 13 The essentials

Fig. 17 Function Necessary operations Fig. 19 Press the corresponding area of the switch: Adjusting the 3 seat backrest Turn the wheel. 1 or 2 Adjust the curve of the lumbar support. angle. 3 or 4 Adjust the height of the lumbar support. Pull the lever up or push Adjusting the down (several times if 4 seat height. necessary) from its home ››› in Electric driver's seat adjustment* position.  on page 141

››› in Manual adjustment of seats on Fig. 19 Adjusting the lumbar support  page 140 The controls are mirrored for the front right- hand seat. Electrical controls on the front seat* Mechanically and electrically adjusted controls can be combined on the seat.

Fig. 18 Press the control in the direction of the arrow:

Move the seat backwards or for- 1 wards.

A 2 and Raise or lower the seat. 3

2 or 3 Adjust the seat angle.

Fig. 18 Adjusting the front left seat forwards Forwards or backwards, the height, the seat angle and B or back- Adjust the seat backrest angle. the front seat backrest wards.

14 The essentials

Adjustment of the head restraint ››› in Removing and installing the head  restraints on page 144  ››› page 57, ››› page 142

Adjustment of the seat belt

Fig. 22 Correct seat belt and head restraint positions, viewed from front and the side.

To adjust the seat belt around your should- ers, adjust the height of the seats or the height of the belt. The shoulder part of the seat belt should be well centred over it, never over the neck. The seat belt lies flat and fits comfortably on the upper part of the body. The lap part of the seat belt lies across the pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat Fig. 20 Front seat: adjustment of the head re- belt lies flat and fits comfortably on the pel- straint. vis.

Grab the sides of the head restraints with ››› page 61 both hands and push upwards to the desired  position. To lower it, repeat the same action, Fig. 21 Positioning and removing the seat ››› page 64 pressing the 1 button on the side. belt buckle. 

15 The essentials

Seat belt tensioners L/R Turning the knob to the desired posi- ● Push the lever ››› Fig. 24 1 downwards. tion, adjust the mirrors on the driver ● Adjust the steering wheel so that you can In the event of a head-on, lateral or rear colli- side (L, left) and the passenger side (R, hold onto the steering wheel with both hands sion, the seat belts on the front seats and the right) to the direction desired. on the outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and outer seats of the second row will tighten au-  Depending on the equipment fitted on 3 o'clock positions and your arms slightly tomatically. the vehicle, the mirrors may be heated bent. The tensioner can be triggered only once. according to the outside temperature. ● Push the lever firmly upwards until it is  Folding in mirrors. flush to the steering column ››› in Adjust- ››› in Service and disposal of belt ten- ing the steering wheel position on  sion devices on page 68 page 58.  ››› in Exterior mirrors on page 139  ››› page 67 ››› in Adjusting the steering wheel po-  ››› page 139  sition on page 58

Adjusting the exterior mirrors Adjusting the steering wheel

Fig. 23 In the driver door: exterior mirror controls Fig. 24 Mechanical steering wheel adjustment Adjusting the exterior mirrors: Turn the knob to the corresponding position: Adjust the steering wheel before your trip and only when the vehicle is stationary.

16 The essentials

Airbags deploy fully when triggered, providing maximum protection. Front Airbags The front airbag for the driver is located in the steering wheel ››› Fig. 25 and the airbag for the front passenger is located in the dash panel ››› Fig. 26. Airbags are identified by the word “AIRBAG”. When the front airbags are triggered they fill the zones marked in red (deployment area) ››› Fig. 25. Therefore, objects should never be placed or mounted in these areas ››› in Front airbags on page 71, Factory-fitted accessories are outside the range of the front airbag for the driver and the front passenger, e.g. the baseplate for the mobile phone support. The airbag covers open out of the steering wheel or dash panel and remain attached to them when the driver and front passenger front airbags are triggered ››› Fig. 26.

 ››› in Front airbags on page 71 Fig. 26 Location and deployment area of the Fig. 25 Location and deployment area of the front airbag for the front passenger front airbag for the driver In conjunction with the seat belts, the front airbag system gives the driver and the front passenger additional protection for the head and chest in the event of a severe frontal collision. Always remains as far away as possible from the front airbag. This way, in the event of an accident, the front airbags can

17 The essentials

Disconnecting the passenger front air- ● The      control lamp on bag the dash panel will remain lit while the ignition is switched on ›››  page 72.

››› in Manual disabling and enabling of the front passenger front airbag with the  key switch on page 73  ››› page 73

Fig. 29 On the driver side: radius of action of Knee airbag the knee airbag.

Fig. 27 In the glove compartment on the front The knee airbag is located on the driver side passenger side: Key switch for enabling and below the dash panel ››› Fig. 28. Airbags are disabling the front passenger front airbag. identified by the word “AIRBAG”. The area framed red ››› Fig. 29 A is covered Disabling the front passenger front airbag by the knee airbag when it is triggered (de- ● Switch the ignition off. ployment area). Therefore, objects should ● Open the glove compartment on the front never be placed or mounted in these areas. passenger side. ● Unfold the vehicle key blade  ››› in Knee airbag* on page 71 ›››  page 110. Fig. 28 On the driver side: location of the ● Insert the key into the slot of the switch for knee airbag deactivating the front passenger airbag ››› Fig. 27. About 3/4 of the key should enter, as far as it will go. ● Then turn the key gently to the OFF position. Do not force it if you feel resistance, and make sure you have inserted the key fully. ● Close the glove compartment on the front passenger side. 18 The essentials

Side airbags seat backrests ››› Fig. 30. Depending on the equipment of the model, the outer seats of the second row of seats may also be fitted with side airbags, located between the seat backrests and the access area. Their position is indicated by the word “AIRBAG”. The red area (dotted line) ››› Fig. 31 shows the field of action of the side airbags. In a side collision, the side airbags are triggered on the affected side of the vehicle, Fig. 31 Range of action of the front and rear thus reducing the risk of injury to passengers side airbags. With 5 and 7 seats. on that side. Fig. 30 On the side of the front seat: location of the side airbag The side airbags are located in the outer cushion of the driver and front passenger  ››› in Side airbags* on page 71

19 The essentials

Head-protection airbags

Fig. 32 On the left side of the vehicle: location and deployment area of the curtain airbag

In a side collision, the curtain airbag on the side affected will be deployed. The airbag covers the windows and pillars. In a side collision, the head-protection airbags for the front and outer rear seats reduce the risk of injury to the areas of the body facing the impact.

 ››› in Curtain airbags* on page 72 Fig. 33 Deployed head-protection airbags.

The curtain airbags are located on the driver and front passenger side above the doors ››› Fig. 32. Airbags are identified by the word “AIRBAG”. The area framed red ››› Fig. 32 is covered by the curtain airbag when it is deployed (deployment area). Therefore, objects should never be placed or mounted in these areas.

20 The essentials

Child seats  ››› in Introduction on page 74 Important information regarding the front passenger's airbag  ››› page 75

Fig. 35 Airbag stickers - version 2: on the front passenger's sun visor  and on the rear frame of the front passenger's door .

A sticker with important information about the passenger airbag is located on the pas- Fig. 34 Airbag stickers - version 1: on the senger's sun visor and/or on the passenger front passenger's sun visor  and on the rear side door frame. frame of the front passenger's door .

21 The essentials

Different mounting systems

Fig. 36 On the rear seats: Possible installations for the child seat.

Always secure child seats properly and safely Specific mounting systems for each country ● Positioning the child seat on the seat ac- in the vehicle according to the child seat A Europe: ISOFIX retaining rings and upper cording to the manufacturer's instructions. manufacturer's installation instructions. retaining strap ››› page 23 and ● The seat belt height adjustment must be as Mounted child seats must rest correctly on ››› page 23. high as possible. the vehicle's seat and must not move or rock B Three-point seat belt and upper retaining ● Fasten the seat belt or pass it around the more than 2.5 cm (1 inch). strap ››› page 22. child seat structure in the manner described Child seats equipped for a Top Tether strap in the manufacturer's instructions. The systems include the child restraint sys- must also be secured using the Top Tether re- ● Make sure the seat belt is not twisted. tem mounting with an upper retaining strap taining strap in the vehicle page 23. Only ››› (Top Tether) and lower anchoring points on ● Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the secure the retaining belt to the rings fitted for the seat. appropriate seat and push it down until it is this purpose and identified as Top Tether. securely locked with an audible click. Not all rings can be used with the Top Tether ● Ensure that the upper belt web lies tightly system. Always tighten the Top Tether retain- on the child seat. ing strap so that the child seat fits snugly Securing child seats with the seat belt against the corresponding seat in the vehi- ● Pull the belt (it must be no longer possible Securing the child seat using the seat belt cle. to pull the lower belt webbing out). ● Please read and observe the child seat manufacturer's handling instructions. 22 The essentials

Removing the child seat seat. The retaining rings are attached to the Securing a child seat using a Top Teth- The seat belt must not be unfastened until seat frames. er retaining strap the vehicle has come to a standstill. Child seats with rigid mounting ● Press the red button on the buckle. The ● Observe the manufacturer's instructions latch plate is released from the buckle. when installing and removing the child seat. ● Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls ● Press the child seat onto the retaining rings up easily and the trim will not be damaged. ››› Fig. 37 in the direction of the arrow. The ● Remove the child seat from the vehicle. child seat must be safely engaged and click audibly into place. ››› in Safety instructions on page 75 ● Pull on both sides of the child seat to en-  sure that it is secure.

Fig. 38 Upper retaining strap hooked in the Child seat with adjustable retaining straps luggage compartment Fix the child seat with the lower an- ● Observe the manufacturer's instructions chor points (ISOFIX)ISOFIX system when installing and removing the child seat. ● Observe the manufacturer's instructions ● Place the child seat on the seat cushion when installing and removing the child seat and attach the retaining strap hooks to the ››› in Safety instructions on page 75. retaining rings ››› Fig. 37. ● Raise the head restraint behind the child ● Tighten the straps evenly using the corre- seat until it engages. sponding adjustment device. The child seat ● Secure the child seat to the lower anchor must sit flush against the vehicle seat. points ››› page 23. ● Pull on both sides of the child seat to en- ● Pull the upper child seat retaining strap sure that it is secure. back to the seat backrest of the rear seat, below or on both sides of the head restraint (depending on the child seat model). ››› in Safety instructions on page 75 Fig. 37 Version 2: identification of the anchor  ● Hook the upper retaining strap to the corre- points for the child seat on the vehicle seat sponding retaining ring (for Top Tether) on the back of the seat backrest on the rear seat There are two retaining rings, the so-called ››› Fig. 38. » lower anchor points, on each rear seat or, where applicable, on the front passenger 23 The essentials

● Push the head restraint down as far as it until it locks. In vehicles with an automatic Start-Stop System* will go. Ensure that it does not interfere with gearbox, the gear lever must be in the P posi- When you stop and release the clutch pedal, the seatbelt from the upper attachment. tion in order to remove the key. If necessary, the Start-Stop system* turns off the engine. ● Tighten the strap so that the top of the press the locking key on the selector lever The ignition remains switched on. child seat rests on the seat backrest. and release it again. ● Unlocking the steering wheel: Put the key ››› in Ignition lock on page 183 into the ignition and turn it at the same time  ››› in Safety instructions on page 75  as the steering wheel in the direction indicated by the arrow. If it is not possible to turn  ››› page 183 the steering wheel, it may be because it is locked. Starting the vehicle Turning on/switching off the ignition, glow Lights and visibility Ignition lock plugs reheating ● Switch ignition on: Turn the key to the 2 Light switch position. ● Switch ignition off. Turn the key to the 1 position. ● Diesel vehicles : The glow plugs reheat when the ignition is switched on

Starting the engine ● Manual gearbox: press the clutch pedal all the way down and move the gearbox lever in- Fig. 39 Vehicle key positions to neutral. ● Automatic gearbox: Press the brake pedal Fig. 40 Dash panel: light control. Switch ignition on: Place the key in the igni- and move the selector lever to the P position tion and start the engine. or into N. Turn the switch to the required position ››› Fig. 40. Locking and unlocking the steering wheel ● Turn the key to the 3 position. The key automatically returns to the 2 position. Do not ● Engaging the steering wheel lock: Remove press the accelerator. the key from the ignition and turn the wheel 24 The essentials

When the igni- Turn signal and main beam lever Hazard warning lights When the ignition tion is switched is on off

Fog lights, dipped Lights off or daytime beam and side  driving light on. lights off.

The guidance lights Automatic dipped  may be switched beam control or day- on. time driving light on.

 Side light on.

Dipped beam off; if Fig. 41 Turn signal and main beam lever Fig. 42 Dash panel: switch for hazard warn- necessary, the side Dipped beam switching lights.  light comes on for a ed on. More the lever to the required position: time. Switched on, for example: 1 Right turn signal: Right-hand parking  Front fog lights: move the switch to the light (ignition switched off). ● When approaching a traffic jam first position, from positions ,  or . 2 Left turn signal: Left-hand parking light ● In an emergency  move the switch completely Rear fog light: (ignition switched off). ● The vehicle has broken down from positions ,  or . 3 Main beam switched on: Control lamp  ● When towing or being towed Switching off fog lights: Push the switch or lit up on the instrument panel.  turn it to the position. 4 Headlight flasher: lit up when the lever is ››› in Hazard warning lights on pushed. Control lamp  lit up.  page 132 ››› in Switching lights on and off on  page 129 Lever all the way down to switch it off.  ››› page 132  ››› page 128 ››› in Switching lights on and off on  page 129  ››› page 129

25 The essentials

Interior lights Windscreen wipers and window wiper Move the lever to the required position blade Interval wipe for rear window. The wiper Button/Position: Function 6  wipes the window at 6-second intervals. Switches interior lights off.  Automatic wipe for cleaning rear win- 7  dows with the lever pressed.  Switches interior lights on.

Switches door contact control on (central position).  ››› in Window wiper lever on page 135 The interior lights come on automatically when the vehicle is unlocked, a door is ››› page 135  opened or the key is removed from the igni-  tion. The lights go off a few seconds after all the ››› page 54 doors are closed, the vehicle is locked or Fig. 43 Operating the windscreen wiper and  the ignition is switched on. rear wiper  Turning the reading light on and off Move the lever to the required position SEAT information system Ambient light: in the door panel, it changes colour (white or red) depending on the driv- 0  Windscreen wiper off. Introduction ing mode. Windscreen wipers interval wipe. Using the control ››› Fig. 43 A adjust 1 With the ignition switched on, it is possible  the interval (vehicles without rain sen- ››› page 134 to read the different functions of the display  sor), or the sensitivity of the rain sensor. by scrolling through the menus. 2 Slow wipe.  In vehicles with a multifunction steering 3  Continuous wipe. wheel, there are no buttons on the windscreen wiper lever. The multifunction display Brief wipe - short wipe. Hold the lever can only be controlled from the buttons on 4  down for more time to increase the wipe the steering wheel. frequency. The number of menus displayed on the in- Automatic wipe for cleaning wind- 5 strument panel will vary according to the ve-  screens with the lever up. hicle electronics and equipment.

26 The essentials

A specialised workshop will be able to pro- ■ Activation ■ Automatic unlocking (Auto. unlock.) gramme or modify additional functions, ac- ■ Programme On / Off On / Off cording to the vehicle equipment. SEAT rec- ■ Disconnection ■ Unlocking doors (Door unlock.: All, ommends taking your car in for technical ■ Timer 1-3 One door, Vehicle side, Individual) service. ■ ■ Day Back Some menu options can only be read when ■ ■ Time Electric windows the vehicle is at a standstill. ■ ■ Minute Off ■ As long as a priority 1 warning is displayed, it ■ Activate All will not be possible to read the menus. To ■ ■ Duration Driver display the menus, confirm the warning by ■ ■ Back OK Operating mode pressing . ■ ■ Heat Mirror angle (Mirror angle) On / Off ■ ■ Ventilation Adjusting mirrors (Adjust. mirrors) ■ Summary of the menu structure ■ Day Individual ■ ■ Default setting Synchronised ■ Multifunction display (MFD) page 29 ■ ››› ■ Vehicle condition ››› page 28 Back ■ Travelling time ■ ■ Configuration ››› page 30 Factory settings (Factory settings) ■ Current fuel consumption ■ ■ Multifunction display data Back ■ Average fuel consumption ■ ■ Travelling time Lights & visibility ››› page 31 ■ Operating range ■ ■ Current fuel consumption Coming Home ■ Distance covered ■ ■ Average fuel consumption Leaving Home ■ Average speed ■ ■ Distance covered Footwell light ■ Digital display of speed ■ ■ Operating range Convenience turn signals On / Off ■ Oil temperature digital display ■ ■ Average speed Default setting ■ Speed warning ■ ■ Digital display of speed Tourist light On / Off ■ or ■ Audio ››› Booklet Radio ››› Booklet Navi- ■ Speed warning Time gation system ■ ■ Compass Winter tyres ■ Navigation ››› Booklet Navigation system ■ ■ Convenience ››› page 31 Language ■ Telephone ››› Booklet Radio or ››› Book- ■ ■ Central locking system (Central locking) Units let Navigation system ■ ■ Second speed display On / Off » ■ Auxiliary heating ›››  page 177 Automatic lock (Auto. lock) On / Off 27 The essentials

■ Autohold ● The selected option is displayed between ■ Service two horizontal lines. In addition, a triangle is  ■ Info displayed on the right . ■ Reset ● To select the submenu, press OK . ■ Default setting Making changes according to the menu ● Use the rocker switch on the windscreen Using the menus on the instrument wiper lever or the thumbwheel on the multi- panel function steering wheel to make the required modifications. To scroll through numbers Fig. 45 Multifunction steering wheel: buttons more quickly, hold the rocker switch down or to access the instrument panel menus turn the thumbwheel more quickly (fast forward or reverse). Enabling the main menu ● Mark or confirm the selected option with ● Switch the ignition on. OK . ● If a message or vehicle symbol is displayed, press OK (››› Fig. 44 A or ››› Fig. 45). ● If managed from the windscreen wiper lev- Main menu er: the main menu list is displayed. ● If managed from the multifunction steering Information and possible configurations of the multifunction display Fig. 44 Windscreen wiper lever: buttons to wheel: the main menu list is not displayed. MFD access the instrument panel menus To scroll through the options of the main (MFD). ››› page 29 menu, press the arrow keys   or   repeatedly ››› page 28. If the radio is on, the station is displayed. Select a submenu Audio In CD mode, the current CD is played. ››› Booklet Radio or ››› Booklet naviga- ● Press rocker switch ››› Fig. 44 B upwards tion system or downwards, or, on the multifunction steering wheel, turn the thumbwheel until you reach the required menu option.

28 The essentials

When the navigation to destination is MFD (multifunction display) menu The current fuel consumption while on, change of direction arrows and a driving is displayed in l/100 km (or Current fuel proximity bar are displayed. These The multifunction display (MFD) has two au- miles per gallon, mpg); when the en- consumption symbols are similar to those used in tomatic memories: 1 - Partial memory and 2 - gine is running but the vehicle is not the navigation system. moving, in l/h (or gallons per hour). Navigation Total memory. The selected memory will be If navigation to destination is not on, shown in the upper right-hand corner of the the direction of travel (compass) and When the ignition is switched on, the the name of the street on which you display. average consumption (in l/100 km or in mpg) is displayed after the vehicle are driving are displayed. Average fuel has moved approximately 100 metres ››› Booklet Navigation system With the ignition switched on, and memory 1 consumption or 2 displayed, briefly press OK to change (328 feet). Otherwise horizontal lines Information and possible configura- are displayed. The value shown is up- tions of the mobile phone preinstalla- from one memory to another dated approximately every 5 seconds. Telephone tion. The memory stores the values for the Booklet Radio or Booklet Naviga- Approximate distance in km (or miles) ››› ››› journey and the consumption from the tion system that can still be travelled with the fuel moment the ignition is switched on until 1 Operating remaining in the tank, assuming the it is switched off again. Information and configurations of the Trip memo- range same style of driving is maintained. If the journey is broken for more than 2 parking heating: ry (for a sin- This is calculated using the current hours, the memory is automatically Parking heat- switching the parking heating on or gle jour- fuel consumption. erased. If the journey is continued in less ing off. Select the operating mode and du- ney). ration. than 2 hours after the ignition is switch- Distance cov- Distance travelled, after ignition is ››› page 177 ed off, the new data is added to the data ered switched on, in km (or miles). already stored in the memory. Current warning or information texts. After the ignition is switched on, the This option only appears when one of The memory records the values for a spe- average speed will be shown after a the following texts is available. The cific number of partial trips, up to a total distance of approximately 100 metres Vehicle status of 19 hours and 59 minutes or 99 hours number of available messages is dis- 2 Average speed (328 feet) has been travelled. Other- and 59 minutes, or 1999.9 km (or miles) played. Example 1/1 or 2/2. Total mem- wise horizontal lines are displayed. for 9999 km (or miles), depending on the ››› page 100 ory (for all The value shown is updated approxi- model of instrument panel. On reaching journeys). mately every 5 seconds. Different setting options, for example, either of these limits, the memory is automatically erased and starts to count Digital display the Convenience, Lighting & Visibility Current speed displayed digitally. menus, and the time, speed warning from 0 again. of speed Configuration with winter tyres, language, units of Oil tempera- measurement, or “Display off”. Updated engine oil temperature digi- Possible displays ture digital ››› page 30 tal display » display This indicates the hours (h) and mi- Travelling time nutes (min) since the ignition was switched on. 29 The essentials

If the stored speed is exceeded (be- Personalising the displays Changing the language of the display Language Speed warn- tween 30 - 250 km/h, or 18 - It is possible to select which of the displays texts and the navigation system. ing at --- km/h 155 mph), an audible warning is given in the multifunction display you wish to see together with a visual warning. Changing the units of measurement for on the instrument panel in the settings Units the temperature, consumption and dis- menu. The units of measurement can also be tance. Changing between display modes modified ››› page 30. Second Switching second speed display on and ● In vehicles without multifunction steering speed off. wheel: press the lever. Check the service notifications or reset ● Vehicles with a multifunction steering Configuration Menu Service the service intervals to zero. wheel: press  or  . Multifunc- Configuration of the multifunction dis- Factory set- Some functions of the Configuration Storing a speed for the speed warning tion display play data that you wish to see on the in- tings menu will be reset to the factory value. data strument panel display ››› page 29. ● Select the display Speed warning at Back The main menu is displayed again. --- km/h. Changing the magnetic region and calibration of the compass. To calibrate the Compass ● Press OK to store the current speed and compass, please follow the instructions switch off the warning. given on the instrument panel display. ● In addition, set the required speed by Changing vehicle convenience functions Convenience pressing the rocker switch on the windscreen ››› page 31. wiper lever  or  buttons on the multifunction steering wheel for 5 seconds. Next, Lights & vis- Configuration of vehicle lighting . press OK again or wait a few seconds. The ibility ››› page 31 speed is stored and the warning activated. Changing the hours and minutes of the ● To switch off, press OK . The stored speed is instrument panel clock and the naviga- deleted. tion system. The time can be set here Time and the choice can be made between the 24-hour and 12-hour display. The S Manually erasing memory 1 or 2 in the upper part of the display indicates ● Select the memory that you wish to erase. that the clock is set to summer time. ● Hold down OK for approximately 2 sec- Changing the visual and audible speed onds. warnings. This function should only be Winter tyres used when the vehicle is fitted with winter tyres, which are not designed for travel at high speeds. 30 The essentials

Submenu Convenience Tilts passenger mirror downwards when All the configurations in the submenu Rear vision Factory set- reverse gear is engaged. This enables Lights & visibility are reset to mirror ad- tings the driver to see the edge of the pave- the predefined factory values. Auto. lock (Auto Lock): automatic justment locking of all doors and boot when ment, for example ››› page 137. Headlamp adjustment for countries in reaching a speed of approximately If synchronised adjustment is selec- which vehicles are driven on the other 15 km/h (10 mph). In order to unlock Exterior mir- ted, when the driver side exterior mirror side of the road. When the mark is acti- the vehicle when it is stopped, push the ror adjust. is adjusted, the passenger exterior mir- Tourist light vated, the headlamps of a left-hand central locking button, pull the door ror is also moved. drive vehicle are adjusted for driving on handle or remove the key from the igni- the left. This function must only be used tion lock if the Auto unlock function Some functions of the Convenience Factory set- for a short period. is enabled. submenu will be reset to the factory val- tings ue. The Configuration menu is dis- Auto unlock (Auto Lock): Unlocking Back played again. all doors and the boot by removing the The Configuration menu is dis- Back ignition lock key. played again. Central locking Door unlock: when unlocking the ve- ››› page 112 hicle with the key, the following doors Personal convenience settings will unlock based on the setting: – All: all of the doors are unlocked. Lights & visibility submenu When two people use a vehicle, SEAT recom- – One door: when unlocking the vehi- mends that each person always uses “their” cle with the key, only the driver's door Coming This permits the adjustment of the time own remote control key. When the ignition is  unlocks. Pressing the button again Home the headlamps stay on after locking or switched off, or the vehicle is locked, the per- unlocks all doors and the boot. unlocking the vehicle, the function can – Vehicle side: the doors on the Leaving also be connected or disconnected here sonal convenience settings are stored and driver's side unlock. Home ››› page 131. automatically allocated to the vehicle key On vehicles fitted with the Keyless ››› page 26. Access ››› page 112 system, when using This permits the adjustment of the the corresponding handle, all doors un- Footwell brightness of the footwell lighting when The values of the personalised convenience lock on the side of the vehicle where the light the doors are open, the function can al- settings of the following menu options are al- key is. so be connected or disconnected here located to the vehicle key:

Adjusting the electric windows: this en- Switching convenience turn signals on ■ Parking heating menu and off When the convenience turn sig- ables the windows to be opened or Convenience ■ Configuration Menu Handling closed when the vehicle is unlocked or nals are connected,, these flash at least turn signals ■ windows locked respectively. The open function three times when the turn signal is Time can only be activated from the driver switched on ››› page 128. ■ Language door ››› page 125. ■ Units ■ Convenience settings menu » 31 The essentials

■ Door unlock (individual opening, Auto Cruise control ● Increasing stored speed during CCS regula- Lock) tion: briefly move the lever toward   + ■ Convenience handling of windows Operating the cruise control system to increase the speed by 10 km/h intervals. ■ Rear vision mirror adjustment By holding it down, the vehicle will accelerate (CCS)* to the desired speed. Release the button to ■ Lights & visibility settings store the current speed. menu ● Reducing stored speed during CCS regula- ■ Coming home and leaving home tion: briefly move the lever toward   – ■ Footwell light to decrease the speed by 10 km/h intervals. ■ Convenience turn signals By holding it down the vehicle will slow The stored settings are automatically activa- down, ceasing to accelerate but not applying ted, at the latest when the ignition is switch- the brakes. Release the button to store the ed on. Please refer to the information and current speed. tips relating to the seat memory ● Switching off the CCS: move the lever to po- ›››  page 144. sition  2 ››› Fig. 46. The system is discon- Fig. 46 On the left of the steering column: nected and the memorised speed is deleted. switches and controls for operating the CCS ››› in Cruise control system operation ● Switching on the CCS: move the lever to   on page 219 1 ››› Fig. 46. The system switches on but it does not control the speed as no speed has  ››› page 219 been programmed. ● Activating the CCS: press the  A ››› Fig. 46 button. It memorises and maintains the current speed. Warning lamps ● Temporarily switching off the CCS: move the lever to  2 ››› Fig. 46 and release it Control and warning lamps or press the brake or clutch pedal. The cruise control system is switched off temporarily. Red warning lamps ● Reactivating the CCS: move the lever to  Do not continue driving!  1 ››› Fig. 46 and release it. The memo-  The electronic parking brake is ››› page rised speed is saved and controlled again. on, the brake fluid level is too 187 low or the brake system is faulty. 32 The essentials

 Do not continue driving! Yellow warning lamps ››› page ››› page Tyre pressure too low. Fault in the engine cooling sys- 284  274 tem.  Front brake pads worn.  ››› page Fault in the tyre pressure gauge.  Do not continue driving! ››› page lights up: ESC malfunction or off. 231  Engine oil pressure too low. 271  page flashes: ESC working. ››› 187 Level of windscreen washer fluid ››› page  Do not continue driving!  too low. 135 ASR manually deactivated. At least one of the vehicles doors ››› page   is open, or is not correctly 119 ››› page ABS faulty or does not work.  Fuel tank almost empty. closed.  261 ››› page  Do not continue driving! Electronic parking brake faulty. flashes: engine oil sensor faulty. ››› page  187 ››› page  The rear lid is open or is incor-  122 lights up: insufficient engine oil. 271 rectly closed. ››› page Rear fog light switched on.  128  Do not continue driving! ››› page Fault in airbag system and seat ››› page   belt tensioners. 72 Fault in the steering. 181 lights up: Driving light totally or ››› page partially faulty. 91 Front passenger front airbag is Engine cannot be started again! ››› page  ››› page   disabled (   "AdBlue" level too low. 265 72 flashes: Fault in the adaptive ››› page   ). light system. 128 Driver or passenger has not fas- ››› page  tened seat belt. 64 Top up "AdBlue", or there is a ››› page lights up or flashes: fault in the  fault in the "AdBlue" system. 265  emission control system. Change ››› page ››› page lights up: pre-heating of diesel  Fuel tank not closed correctly. 192 261 Use the foot brake! engine.  Brake  page Lane Assist is switched on, but ››› page ››› page flashes: fault in the diesel en- ›››  200 not active. 220 187 gine management. ››› page  Faulty generator. fault in the petrol engine man- Other warning lamps 280  agement. ››› page Left or right turn signal.  Diesel particulate filter blocked 128  ››› page ››› page  Fault in the steering system. Hazard warning lights on. 181 82 »

33 The essentials

Change ››› in Control and warning lamps on Selecting reverse gear ››› page  page 105 ● Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot 192 Use the foot brake! right down.  Brake ››› page 105 ››› page  ● With the gearbox lever in neutral, push it 187 upwards, move it to the left as far as it will go and then forwards to select reverse ››› Fig. 47 ››› page Cruise control operating.  219 R . Gearbox lever ● Release the clutch.  Lane Assist is switched on and ››› page active. 220 Manual gearbox ››› in Manual gear change on page 193  Main beam on or flasher on.  ››› page Headlight adjustment (Light As- 128 ››› page 193  sist) on. 

››› page Electronic immobiliser active.  182 Automatic gearbox* ››› page Service interval display  103

Mobile telephone is connected ››› Book-  via Bluetooth to the original tel- let Radio ephone device. or ››› Book- Fig. 47 Gear shift pattern of a 6-speed man- Mobile telephone battery charge let Navi- ual gearbox  meter. Available only for pre-in- gation stalled factory-fitted devices. system The position of the gears is indicated on the gearbox lever ››› Fig. 47. Freezing warning. The outside ››› page temperature is lower than +4°C  102 ● Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot (+39°F). right down. Fig. 48 Automatic gearbox: selector lever po- ● Move the gearbox lever to the required positions. sition. ● Release the clutch. P Parking lock R Reverse gear 34 The essentials

N Neutral (idling) To remove the gearbox cover panel D/S Drive (forward) ● Pull the cover up around the dust guard on +/– Tiptronic mode: pull the lever forwards the gear selector lever ››› Fig. 49. (+) to go up a gear or backwards (–) to ● Take the cover off by passing it over the go down a gear. gear selector lever ››› .

Manual release of the selector lever  ››› in Automatic gearbox* on page 194 ● Press the release lever ››› Fig. 50 in the direction of the arrow and hold it in this posi-  ››› page 193 Fig. 50 Manual release of gear selector lever tion. ● Press the lock button ››› Fig. 49 1 on the ››› page 35  If the vehicle power supply should ever fail gear selector lever knob and place the gear (e.g. discharged battery) and the vehicle has selector lever in the N position. to be pushed or towed, the selector lever must first be moved to position N using the WARNING Manual release of the selector lever manual release mechanism. Never move the gear selector lever from the The emergency release mechanism is located position P while the electronic parking brake underneath the gearbox cover panel to the is deactivated. Otherwise, the vehicle may right-hand side. To release the gear selector accidentally move off on hills or steep slopes lever mechanism, a suitable tool is required, causing serious accidents. (e.g. a screwdriver). CAUTION Preparations If the vehicle is moved on its wheels with the ● Apply the parking brake. If the brake can- engine stopped and the selector lever in posi- not be activated, the vehicle must be alterna- tion N for a prolonged period of time and at tively secured so that it cannot move. high speed, for example for towing, then the automatic gearbox will be damaged. Fig. 49 Remove the lining from the area of ● Switch the ignition off. the gear indication

35 The essentials

Air conditioning

How does the air conditioning work?

Fig. 51 Detailed view of the centre console: Electronic manual air conditioning controls

Fig. 52 Detailed view of the centre console: Climatronic controls

Control button Additional information. Electronic manual air conditioning ››› Fig. 51; Climatronic ››› Fig. 52.

Electronic manual air conditioning: rotate the control to adjust the temperature accordingly. In the  MAX position, the cooling output will be set to 1 Temperature maximum. The air recirculation mode and the cooling system are automatically switched on. Climatronic: the left and right sides can be adjusted separately. Rotate the control to adjust the temperature accordingly.

36 The essentials

Control button Additional information. Electronic manual air conditioning ››› Fig. 51; Climatronic ››› Fig. 52.

2 Fan Electronic manual air conditioning: Setting 0: air fan and air conditioning system (manual) switched off, setting 4: maximum setting of fan.  Climatronic: the power of the fan is automatically adjusted. Rotate the control to manually adjust the fan.

Electronic manual air conditioning: rotate the continuous control to direct the airflow to the desired area. 3 Air distribution Climatronic: the airflow will be automatically adjusted to a comfortable flow. It can also be switched on manually with the buttons 3 .

4 Climatronic: display of the selected interior temperature for the left and right sides.

Electronic manual air conditioning: defrost function. The airflow is directed at the windscreen. In this position, air recirculation is automatically switch-  ed off or is not switched on. Increase the fan power to clear the windscreen of condensation as soon as possible. to dry the air, the cooling system will automatically switch on.

Climatronic: defrost function. The air drawn in from outside the vehicle is directed at the windscreen and air recirculation is automatically switched off.  To defrost the windscreen more quickly, the air is dehumidified at temperatures over approximately +3°C (+38°F) and the fan runs at maximum output.

 The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vents.  Air distribution towards the footwell.  Electronic manual air conditioning: air distribution towards the windscreen and the footwell.  Climatronic: upward air distribution.  Heated rear window: only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a 10 minutes.

 Electronic manual air conditioning: air recirculation ››› page 176.

 Climatronic: manual and automatic air recirculation ››› page 176.

 Instant auxiliary heating on/off button ››› page 177.

  Buttons for the seat heating ››› page 144.

Climatronic: depending on the vehicle equipment there may be a button for the windscreen heating on the air conditioner control panel. The wind-  screen heating only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a few minutes. »

37 The essentials

Control button Additional information. Electronic manual air conditioning ››› Fig. 51; Climatronic ››› Fig. 52.

 Press the button to switch on or off the cooling system.

Climatronic: accept the temperature selection for the driver and front passenger sides. When the SYNC button light is lit, the temperature settings on  the driver side also apply to the passenger side. Press the button or adjust the temperature control for the passenger side in order to set a different temperature. No lamp lights up on the button.

Climatronic: automatic temperature, fan, and air distribution control. Press the button to switch on the function. The control lamp lights up on the  AUTO button.

Climatronic: press the REAR button to adjust the air conditioner for the rear seats from the front seats. A lamp is lit on the REAR button if the feature is  activated. The settings for the rear seats will be displayed. Press the button again to switch the function off or do not touch any other button for around 10 seconds.

Climatronic: Press the REST button to use the heat that the engine produces. When the engine is still warm but the ignition switched off, the heat  given off by the engine can be used to keep the vehicle interior warm. The REST button will light up when the function is switched on. The function will switch off after around 30 minutes and if the battery level is low.

Switch off. a) Electronic manual air conditioning: turn the fan switch to setting 0. Climatronic: press the OFF button or manually set the fan to 0. When the device is switched off the OFF button will light up.

a) Depending on the version of the model.

 ››› in Introduction on page 173  ››› page 173

38 The essentials

Fluid Level control Before refuelling, always turn off the engine, Oil the ignition, mobile telephones, auxiliary Filling capacities heating and keep them off during refuelling. Opening the fuel tank cap Tank level ● The tank flap is at the rear of the vehicle on 70 litres. 8 litre reserve the right. ● Press the rear of the tank flap to open it. Capacity of the windscreen washer fluid con- ● Unscrew the tank cap anticlockwise and in- tainer sert it in the hole in the tank flap hinge Versions without head- ›››  Fig. 235. 3.5 litres light washer system Fig. 54 Engine oil dipstick. Closing the fuel tank cap Versions with headlight 6 litres washer system ● Screw on the tank cap clockwise until it you hear it click into position. ● Press the tank flap until you hear it click in- Fuel to place. The tank flap must be flush with the body contour.

 ››› page 261  ››› page 263 Fig. 55 In the engine compartment: Engine oil filler cap

The level is measured using the dipstick located in the engine compartment ›››  page 271. Fig. 53 Fuel tank flap with tank cap attached. The oil should leave a mark between zones A and C . It should never exceed zone A .

● Zone A : Do not add oil. » 39 The essentials

● B Zone : You can add oil but keep the level ››› in Topping up engine oil on (-13°F) and protects the light alloy parts of in that zone.  page 274 the engine cooling system against corrosion. ● Zone C : Add oil up to zone B . It also prevents scaling and considerably rai-  ››› page 271 ses the boiling point of the coolant. Topping up engine oil To protect the cooling system, the percentage ● Unscrew cap from oil filler opening. of additive must always be at least 40 %, even in warm climates where anti-freeze pro- ● Add oil slowly. Coolant tection is not required. ● At the same time, check the level to ensure you do not add too much. If for weather reasons further protection is necessary, the proportion of additive may be ● When the oil level reaches at least zone B , increased, but only up to 60 %; otherwise an- unscrew the engine oil filler cap carefully. tifreeze protection will diminish and this will worsen cooling. Motor oil specifications When the coolant is topped up, use a mixture Petrol engines of distilled water and at least 40 % of the G13 or G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G) additive With LongLife service VW 504 00 (both are purple) to obtain an optimum anti- VW 504 00, corrosion protection in Coolant specifi- Without LongLife service ››› VW 502 00 Fig. 56 Engine compartment: coolant expan- cations on page 276. The mixture of G13 sion tank cap. with G12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) or Diesel engines G11 (green-blue) engine coolants will signifi- With LongLife service VW 507 00 The coolant tank is located in the engine cantly reduce anti-corrosion protection and compartment ›››  page 271. should therefore be avoided ››› in Coolant Without LongLife service VW 507 00 When the engine is cold, replace the coolant specifications on page 276. when the level is below . Engine oil additives ››› in Coolant specifications on page 276 No type of additive should be mixed with the Coolant specifications  engine oil. The deterioration caused by these The engine cooling system is supplied from ››› page 274 additives is not covered by the warranty. the factory with a specially treated mixture of  water and at least 40 % of the additive G13 (TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixture gives the necessary frost protection down to -25°C 40 The essentials

Brake fluid Windscreen washer maintenance. It is checked as part of the In- spection Service.

››› in Checking the electrolyte level of  the vehicle battery on page 282  ››› page 280

Fig. 57 Engine compartment: brake fluid res- Fig. 58 In the engine compartment: wind- ervoir cap screen washer reservoir top.

The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en- The windscreen washer reservoir is located in gine compartment ›››  page 271. the engine compartment ›››  page 271. The level should be between the  and  To top up, mix water with a product recom- marks. If it is below , please visit a Techni- mended by SEAT. cal Service. In cold temperatures, add anti-freeze.

››› in Checking the brake fluid level on ››› in Checking and topping up the page 279  windscreen washer reservoir on  page 280  ››› page 278  ››› page 280

Battery

The battery is located in the engine compartment ›››  page 271. It does not require

41 The essentials Emergencies Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same ● Then lift the cover out. amperage (same colour and markings) and ● To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box. size. Push the attachment tabs back, in the oppo- Fuses site direction indicated by the arrow until Identifying fuses by colours they click audibly into place. Fuse location Colour Amp rating In is possible that there are more fuses be- Purple 3 hind a cover in the lower left-hand side of the luggage compartment. Light brown 5 Brown 7.5  ››› page 90 Red 10

Blue 15

Yellow 20

White or transparent 25 Fig. 59 On the driver-side dash panel: fuse box cover Green 30

Orange 40

To open the dash panel fuse box ● To remove the cover, move the activation lever in the lower part to the right ››› Fig. 59. ● For right-hand drive vehicles, move the lever to the left.

To open the engine compartment fuse box ● Open the bonnet  ›››  page 268. Fig. 60 In the engine compartment: fuse box cover ● Move the attachment tabs forwards, in the direction indicated by the arrow to release the fuse box cover ››› Fig. 60. 42 The essentials

Replacing a blown fuse Identifying a blown fuse Light source used for each function A fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured Halogen headlights Type ››› Fig. 61. Dipped beam headlights H7 LL ● Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it has Main beam headlights/day- blown. H15 (double element) time running lights (DRL)

To replace a fuse Side lights W5W

● If necessary, remove the plastic pincers Turn signal PY21W NA LL from the fuse box cover. ● Small fuses: lock the pincer in from above AFS bi-xenon main head- Type ››› Fig. 62 A. light Fig. 61 Image of a blown fuse ● Larger fuses: move the pincer sideways Daytime running lights (DRL) P21W SLL over the fuse ››› Fig. 62 B. ● Remove the relevant fuse. Side lights W5W ● Replace the blown fuse by one with an Turn signal PY21W NA LL identical amperage rating (same colour and Xenon bulb. Visit an markings) and identical size. Dipped beam / Main beam authorised workshop ● Replace the cover. for replacement.

Front fog light Type

Bulbs Fog lights HB4 Fig. 62 Removing or fitting a fuse Bulbs (12 V) LED rear lights Type Preparation ● Switch off the ignition, lights and all elec- Full-LED headlights are designed to last the Side/brake light LED trical equipment. lifetime of the car and light bulbs cannot be Turn signal WY21W replaced. In case of headlight failure, go to ● Open the corresponding fuse box an authorised workshop to have it replaced. Reverse lights W16W ››› page 42

43 The essentials

Action in the event of a punc- Repairing a tyre with the anti-punc- ● Remove the lid from the filling tube ture kit ››› Fig. 63 3 and screw the open end of the ture tube into the tyre valve. ● With the tyre sealant bottle upside down, What to do first fill the tyre with the contents of the sealant bottle. ● Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface and in a safe place as far away from traffic as ● Remove the bottle from the valve. possible. ● Place the insert back into the tyre valve us- ● Apply the handbrake. ing the tool ››› Fig. 63 1 . ● Switch on the hazard warning lights. Inflating the tyre ● Manual gearbox: select the 1st gear. ● Screw the compressor tyre inflator tube ● Automatic gearbox: Move the selector lever ››› Fig. 63 5 into the tyre valve. to position P. ● Check that the air bleed screw is closed ● If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from ››› Fig. 63 7 . your vehicle. Fig. 63 Standard representation: contents of the anti-puncture kit. ● Start the engine and leave it running. ● Keep the vehicle tool kit ready* ● Insert the connector ››› Fig. 63 9 into the ›››  page 82. The anti-puncture kit is located under the vehicle's 12-volt socket ›››  page 171. ● Observe the applicable legislation for each floor panel in the luggage compartment. country (reflective vest, warning triangles, ● Turn the air compressor on with the ON/OFF etc.). Sealing the tyre switch ››› Fig. 63 8 . ● All occupants should leave the vehicle and ● Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Use ● Keep the air compressor running until it reaches 2.0 to 2.5 bar wait in a safe place (for instance behind the the ››› Fig. 63 1 tool to remove the insert. roadside crash barrier). Place it on a clean surface. (29-36 psi/200-250 kPa). A maximum of 8 minutes. ● Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously ● Disconnect the air compressor. WARNING ››› Fig. 63 10 . ● If it does not reach the pressure indicated, ● Always observe the above steps and pro- ● Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 63 3 into tect yourself and other road users. the sealant bottle. The bottle's seal will break unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve. ● If you change the wheel on a slope, block automatically. ● Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant is the wheel on the opposite side of the car with distributed throughout the tyre. a stone or similar to prevent the vehicle from moving. 44 The essentials

● Screw the compressor tyre inflator into the Changing a wheel valve.  ››› in Location on page 82 ● Repeat the inflation process. Vehicle tool kit ● If the indicated pressure still cannot be  ››› page 82 reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stop and request assistance from an authorised technician. Full hubcaps* ● Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve. ● When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and 2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph). ● Check the pressure again after 10 minutes ›››  page 86. Fig. 64 Underneath the floor panel of the lug- ››› in TMS (Tyre Mobility System)* on gage compartment: vehicle tool kit.  page 85 1 Adapter for anti-theft bolt ››› page 85 Fig. 65 Removing the full hubcap  2 Towing eye, removable 3 Box spanner for wheel bolts Removing the full hubcap 4 Crank handle for jack ● Take the wheel brace and the wire hook 5 Jack from the vehicle tool kit ›››  page 82. 6 Screwdriver with hexagon socket in the ● Hook the wire through one of the grooves handle on the hubcap. 7 Hook for pulling off wheel trims or wheel ● Insert the wheel brace onto the wire hook bolt caps. ››› Fig. 65 and pull the hub cap in the direction shown by the arrow. »

45 The essentials

Fitting hubcaps The anti-theft wheel locking bolt has a spe- Before mounting the full trim, the anti-theft cial cap. This only fits on anti-theft locking wheel lock must be threaded into position bolts and is not for use with standard wheel bolts. ››› Fig. 68 2 or 3 . Otherwise it will not be possible to mount the full hubcap.

● Press the trim against the wheel so that the Loosening the wheel bolts space for the valve fits over the tyre valve ››› Fig. 68 1 . Make sure that the hubcap is correctly fitted all the way around the wheel. Fig. 68 Changing a wheel: tyre valve 1 and position of anti-theft wheel locking bolt 2 or Wheel bolt caps 3 .

Only use the tool supplied with the vehicle to loosen the wheel bolts. Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turn before raising the vehicle with the jack. Fig. 67 Changing a wheel: Slacken the wheel bolts. If the wheel bolt is very tight, you may be able to loosen it by pushing down on the end of the wheel brace carefully with your foot. Hold on to the vehicle for support and take care not to slip. Fig. 66 Clip for removing the wheel bolt caps Loosening wheel bolts Removal ● Fit the wheel brace as far as it will go over ● Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools) over the the wheel bolt ››› Fig. 67. cap until it clicks into place ››› Fig. 66. ● Hold the wheel brace at the end and rotate ● Remove the cap with the plastic clip. the bolt approximately one turn anticlockwise ››› . The caps protect the wheel bolts and should be remounted after changing the tyre.

46 The essentials

Loosening anti-theft wheel bolts checked as soon as possible with a reliable ● If the wheel bolts are not tightened to the For wheels with full trim, the anti-theft wheel torque wrench. correct torque, they may come loose while lock must be threaded into position ››› Fig. 68 If wheel bolts are rusty and it is difficult to driving, and the bolts and rims may come 2 or 3 . Otherwise it will not be possible to tighten them, the threads should be replaced out. If the tightening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and threads can be damaged. mount the entire hubcap. and cleaned before checking the tightening torque. ● Take the adapter for anti-theft wheel bolts out of the vehicle tool kit. Never grease or lubricate wheel bolts or the Raising the vehicle with the jack wheel hub threads. Although they have been ● Insert the adapter onto the anti-theft wheel tightened to the prescribed torque, they bolt. could come loose while driving. ● Fit the wheel brace onto the adapter as far as possible. WARNING ● Hold the wheel brace at the end and rotate If the wheel bolts are not fitted correctly they the bolt approximately one turn anticlockwise could be released while driving leading to ››› . loss of vehicle control and serious damage. ● Only use wheel bolts which correspond to Important information about wheel bolts the wheel rims in question. The wheel rims and bolts have been de- ● Never use different wheel bolts. signed to be fitted to factory options. If differ- ● The bolts and threads should be clean, free Fig. 69 Jack position points ent rims are fitted, the correct wheel bolts of oil and grease and easy to thread. with the right length and correctly shaped ● To loosen and tighten the wheel bolts, al- bolt heads must be used. This ensures that ways use the wheel brace supplied with the wheels are fitted securely and that the brake vehicle. system functions correctly. ● Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turn In some circumstances, wheel bolts from the before raising the vehicle with the jack. same model vehicle should not be used. ● Never grease or lubricate wheel bolts or the wheel hub threads. Although they have been Wheel bolt tightening torque tightened to the prescribed torque, they The prescribed tightening torque for wheel could come loose while driving. bolts for steel and alloy wheels is 140 Nm. ● Never loosen the bolted joints of wheel Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts rims with bolted ring trims. Fig. 70 Jack mounted on the left rear part of the vehicle »

47 The essentials

The jack may be applied only at the jacking 7. Raise the jack with the handle until it ● You should never place a body limb such as points shown (marks on chassis) ››› Fig. 69. can be inserted below the jacking point. an arm or leg under a raised vehicle that is The mark indicates the jacking points below 8. Ensure that the foot of the jack is firmly solely supported by the jack. the vehicle. The jacking points are on the ribs on the ground and that it is placed im- ● If you have to work underneath the vehicle, behind the front edges ››› Fig. 70. Always the mediately below the lifting point on the you must use suitable stands additionally to relevant jacking point for the wheel to be vehicle ››› Fig. 70. support the vehicle, there is a risk of acci- changed ››› . dent!. 9. Straighten the jack and continue raising Raise the vehicle using only the designated it using the handle until the claw holds ● Never raise the vehicle if it is tilting to one jacking points. the vertical reinforcement beneath the side or the engine is running. ● For your own safety and that of other passen- vehicle ››› Fig. 70. Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised. The vehicle may come loose from the gers, the following points should be ob- 10. Raise the vehicle until the wheel is clear jack due to the engine vibrations. served in the order given: of the ground.

1. Select a suitable flat and firm surface for WARNING raising the vehicle. Removing and fitting the wheel If the vehicle is not correctly raised, it could 2. Switch off the engine, engage a gear fall off the jack causing serious injury. Please (manual gearbox) or place the selector observe the following rules to minimise the lever in position P ›››  page 192 and risk of injury: turn on the electronic parking brake ● You should only use a jack approved by ›››  page 187. SEAT for your vehicle. Other jacks, even those 3. Block the wheel diagonally opposite the approved for other SEAT models, might slip wheel being changed with folding wheel out of place. chocks* or other suitable objects. ● The ground should be firm and flat. If the 4. When towing a trailer: unhook the trailer ground is sloped or soft then the vehicle from the towing vehicle and park it cor- could slip and fall off the jack. If necessary, support the jack on a wide solid base. rectly. ● If the ground is slippery, such as tiles, Fig. 71 Changing a wheel: loosen wheel bolts 5. Loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel to place a non-slip surface (a floor mat, for in- with the socket at the end of the wheel brace be changed ››› page 46. stance) beneath the jack to avoid slipping. Removing the wheel 6. Look below the vehicle for the jacking ● Only fit the jack at the prescribed jacking point ››› Fig. 69 closest to the tyre which points. The claw of the jack should grip the ● Slacken the wheel bolts ››› page 46. has to be changed. reinforcement nerve on the underbody ● Raise the vehicle ››› page 47. ››› Fig. 70. 48 The essentials

● Using the hexagonal socket in the wheel bolts should be easily tightened to the cor- ● Return all tools to their proper storing loca- brace ››› Fig. 71, unscrew the slackened rect torque. tion ›››  page 82. wheel bolts and place them on a clean sur- ● The hexagonal socket in the wheel brace ● Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun- face. should be used for turning wheel bolts only. ted tyre as soon as possible. ● Take off the wheel. Do not use it to loosen or tighten the wheel ● If the vehicle is fitted with a tyre monitoring bolts. system, this should be “reprogrammed” if Putting on the spare wheel necessary whenever a tyre is changed Check the direction of rotation of the tyre ›››  page 231. ››› page 49. Tyres with directional tread pattern ● Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked as soon as possible with a tor- ● Fit the wheel. Tyres with directional tread pattern have que wrench ››› page 47. Meanwhile, drive ● Screw on the anti-theft locking bolt with been designed to operate best when rotating carefully. the adapter in position ››› Fig. 68 2 or 3 in only one direction. An arrow on the tyre clockwise and tighten gently. sidewall indicates the direction of rotation on tyres with directional tread ›››  page 291. ● Replace the other wheel bolts and tighten Always observe the indicated direction of ro- slightly using the hexagonal socket on the Snow chains tation in order to guarantee optimum grip end of the wheel brace. and help avoid aquaplaning, excessive noise Use ● Lower the car with the jack. and wear. ● Tighten all of the wheel bolts clockwise If the tyre is mounted in the opposite direc- When using snow chains, applicable local ››› . Tighten the bolts in diagonal pairs (not tion of rotation, drive with extreme caution, legislation and maximum permitted speed in a circle). as the tyre is no longer being used correctly. limits must be observed. ● Put the caps, trim or full hubcap back on This is of particular importance when the In winter weather, snow chains not only help ››› page 45. road surface is wet. Change the tyre as soon to improve grip but also improve the braking as possible or remount it with the correct di- capacity. WARNING rection of rotation. Snow chains must only be mounted on the If the wheel bolts are not treated suitably or front wheels, even on all-wheel drive vehi- not tightened to the correct torque then this cles, and only with the tyre and rim combina- could lead to loss of vehicle control and to a Subsequent work tions listed below: serious accident. ● On alloy wheels: replace the wheel bolt ● All the wheel bolts and hub threads should Tyre size Wheel rim be clean and free of oil and grease. The wheel caps. ● On plate wheels: replace the wheel hubcap. 205/60 R16 6 1/2 J x 16 ET 33 » 49 The essentials

SEAT recommends you ask a technical serv- Note ice for further information on wheel, tyre and chain sizes. Snow chains are available in different sizes according to the vehicle type. Wherever possible use fine-link chains measuring less than 15 mm (37/64 inch) including the lock. Emergency towing of the vehi- Remove wheel hub covers and trim rings before fitting snow chains ››› . The wheel bolts cle should be covered with caps for safety reasons. These are available from technical serv- Towing Fig. 73 On the rear bumper, to the right hand ices. side: Towline anchorage in position

WARNING Towline anchorages The use of unsuitable or incorrectly fitted Attach the bar or rope to the towline ancho- chains could lead to serious accidents and rages. damage. ● Always the appropriate snow chains. They are located with the vehicle's tools ›››  page 82. ● Observe the fitting instructions provided by the snow chain manufacturer. Screw the towline anchorage into the screw ● Never exceed the maximum permitted connection ››› Fig. 72 o ››› Fig. 73 and tighten speeds when driving with snow chains. it with the wheel brace. Fig. 72 On the right-hand side of the front bumper: Screw in the towline anchorage. Tow rope or tow bar CAUTION When towing, the tow bar is the safest and ● Remove the snow chains to drive on roads without snow. Otherwise they will impair vehicle friendly way. You should only use a handling, damage the tyres and wear out very tow rope if you do not have a tow bar. quickly. A tow rope should be slightly elastic to avoid ● Wheel rims may be damaged or scratched if damage to both vehicles. It is advisable to the chains come into direct contact with use a tow rope made of synthetic fibre or sim- them. SEAT recommends the use of covered ilarly elastic material. snow chains.

50 The essentials

Only secure the tow rope or tow bar to the Situations in which a vehicle should not be ● Vehicles with the Keyless Access locking towline anchorage or specially designed fit- towed and ignition system, since the electronic ting. In the following cases, the vehicle should not steering lock may not unlock. Vehicles with a factory fitted towing device, be towed but transported on a trailer or spe- ● Vehicles with an electronic parking brake, can only be used for towing with a tow bar, cial vehicle: given that it is possible that the brake will specially designed to fit on a tow hitch ball not be disengaged. ● If the vehicle gearbox does not contain lu- ›››  page 234. ● If the vehicle battery is flat, it is possible bricant due to a fault. that the engine control units do not operate Towing vehicles with an automatic gearbox ● If the vehicle battery is flat and, as a result, correctly. the electronic steering lock and electronic Note the following for a towed vehicle: parking brake cannot be disengaged if ap- However, if your vehicle must absolutely be ● Make sure the gear selector lever is in the N plied. tow-started (manual gearbox): position. ● If the vehicle to be towed has an automatic ● Put it into second or third gear. ● Do not drive faster than 50 km/h (30 mph). gearbox and the distance to be covered is greater than 50 km (30 miles). ● Keep the clutch pressed down. ● Do not tow further than 50 km (30 miles). ● Switch on the ignition and the hazard warn- ● If a breakdown truck is used, the vehicle ing lights. ››› in Introduction on page 87 must be towed with the front wheels raised.  ● Release the clutch when both vehicles are Note the following instructions for towing moving. four all-wheel drive vehicles. ››› page 87  ● As soon as the engine starts, press the Instructions for towing all-wheel drive vehi- clutch and move the gear lever into neutral. cles This helps to prevent a collision with the towing vehicle. All-wheel drive vehicles can be towed using a Tow-starting toolbar or tow rope. If the vehicle is towed In general, the vehicle should not be started with the front or rear axle raised, the engine by towing. Jump-starting is much more pref- must be turned off to avoid transmission How to jump start erable ››› page 51. damage. For technical reasons, the following vehicles For vehicles with a double clutched DSG® (di- Jump leads can not be tow started: rect shift gearbox) the instructions for towing If the engine fails to start because of a dis- vehicles with an automatic gearbox apply ● Vehicles with an automatic gearbox. charged battery, the battery of another vehi- ››› page 51. cle can be used to start the engine. Before »

51 The essentials

starting, check the magic eye on the battery ways keep lit cigarettes, flames, sparks and Positive pole on the jump lead con- ›››  page 280. fire far from the battery. Never use a mobile nection points For starting assistance, jump lead cables con- telephone when connecting and removing the forming to the standard DIN 72553 are re- jump leads. quired (see the cable manufacturer instruc- ● Charge the battery only in well ventilated tions). The jump lead cable must be at least areas given that when the battery is charged 25 mm2 in section (0.038 inches2) for petrol by outside assistance, it creates a mix of engines, and 35 mm2 (0.054 inches2) for die- highly explosive gases. sel engines. ● Jump leads should never enter into contact with moving parts in the engine compart- For vehicles whose battery is not in the en- ment. gine compartment, the jump leads should ● Never switch the positive and negative only be connected to the starting assistance poles or connect the jump leads incorrectly. connection points in the engine compart- ● Fig. 74 In the engine compartment: positive ment. Note the instruction manual provided by the manufacturer of the jump leads. pole for starting assistance + .

WARNING On some vehicles, there is a starting assis- CAUTION Incorrect use of jump leads and incorrectly tance terminal in the engine compartment, jump starting could cause the battery to ex- To avoid considerable damage to the vehicle under a labelled cover. plode resulting in serious injury. Please ob- electrical system, note the following careful- serve the following rules to minimise the risk ly: of a battery explosion: ● If the jump leads are incorrectly connected, ● The battery providing current must have this could result in a short circuit. the same voltage (12V) and approximately ● The vehicles must not touch each other, the same capacity (see markings on battery) otherwise electricity could flow as soon as as the flat battery. the positive terminals are connected. ● Never charge a frozen or recently thawed battery. A flat battery can also freeze at temperatures close to 0°C (+32°F). ● If a battery is frozen and/or has been frozen then it must be replaced. ● A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when the battery is being charged. Al-

52 The essentials

How to jump start: description 2. Connect one end of the red jump lead to 8. Start the engine of the vehicle with the flat the positive + terminal of the vehicle battery and wait for 2 or 3 minutes until with the flat battery A ››› Fig. 75. the engine is running. 3. Connect the other end of the red jump Removing the jump leads lead to the positive terminal + in the vehicle providing assistance B . 9. Before you remove the jump leads, switch off the dipped beam headlights if they are 4. For vehicles without Start-Stop system: switched on. connect one end of the black jump lead to the negative terminal – of the vehicle 10.Turn on the heater blower and heated rear providing the current B ››› Fig. 75. window in the vehicle with the flat battery. This helps minimise voltage peaks which – For vehicles with Start-Stop system: con- are generated when the leads are discon- Fig. 75 Diagram of connections for vehicles nect one end of the black jump lead X to a nected. without Start-Stop system. suitable ground terminal, to a solid piece of metal in the engine block, or to the engine 11.When the engine is running, disconnect block itself ››› Fig. 76. the leads in reverse order to the details given above. 5. Connect the other end of the black jump lead X to a solid metal component bolted Make sure the battery clamps have sufficient to the engine block or to the engine block metal-to-metal contact with the battery termi- itself of the vehicle with the flat battery. nals. Do not connect it to a point near the battery A . If the engine fails to start, switch off the starter after about 10 seconds and try again after 6. Position the leads in such a way that they about 1 minute. cannot come into contact with any moving Fig. 76 Diagram of connections for vehicles parts in the engine compartment. WARNING with Start-Stop system. ● Please note the safety warnings referring to Starting working in the engine compartment Jump lead terminal connections 7. Start the engine of the vehicle with the ›››  page 268. 1. Switch off the ignition of both vehicles boosting battery and let it run at idling ● The battery providing assistance must have ››› . speed. the same voltage as the flat battery (12V) and approximately the same capacity (see imprint »

53 The essentials

on battery). Failure to comply could result in Note screen wiper arms return to their initial posi- an explosion. tion. The vehicles must not touch each other, oth- ● Never use jump leads when one of the bat- erwise electricity could flow as soon as the teries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even af- positive terminals are connected. ››› page 87 ter the battery has thawed, battery acid could  leak and cause chemical burns. If a battery freezes, it should be replaced. ● Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettes Changing windscreen wipers Changing the front wiper blades away from batteries, danger of explosion. Failure to comply could result in an explo- Windscreen wipers service position sion. ● Observe the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the jump leads. ● Do not connect the negative cable from the other vehicle directly to the negative terminal of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the battery could be ignited by sparks. Danger of explosion. ● Do not attach the negative cable from the other vehicle to parts of the fuel system or to Fig. 78 Changing the front wiper blades the brake line. ● The non-insulated parts of the battery Fig. 77 Wipers in service position clamps must not be allowed to touch. The jump lead attached to the positive battery The wiper arms can be raised when the wip- terminal must not touch metal parts of the ve- ers are in service position ››› Fig. 77. hicle, this can cause a short circuit. ● Position the leads in such a way that they ● Close the bonnet ›››  page 268. cannot come into contact with any moving ● Switch the ignition on and off. parts in the engine compartment. ● Press the windscreen wiper lever down- ● Do not lean on the batteries. This could re- wards briefly ››› page 26 4 . sult in chemical burns.

Before driving, always lower the wiper arms. Fig. 79 Changing the rear wiper blade Using the windscreen wiper lever, the wind-

54 The essentials

Cleaning windscreen wiper blades ● Insert a new blade of the same length and ● Lifting and unfolding the wiper arms. type in the wiper arm in the opposite direction to the arrow ››› Fig. 79 B and hook into ● Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt place. This feature is operational when the from the wiper blades. knob is in position (arrow A ). ● If the blades are very dirty, a sponge or ● Replace the wiper arm on the rear window. damp cloth may be used ››› in Changing the windscreen and rear window wiper ››› in Changing the windscreen and blades on page 87.  rear window wiper blades on page 87 Change the windscreen wiper blades  ››› page 87 ● Lifting and unfolding the wiper arms. ● Press and hold release button ››› Fig. 78 1 and pull gently on the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow. ● Fit a new wiper blade of the same length and design on to the wiper arm and hook it into place. ● Rest the wiper arms back onto the windscreen.

Lifting and unfolding the wiper arms The wiper arm may only be lifted at the point where it is fastened to the blade.

Changing the rear wiper blade ● Lift and unfold the wiper arm. ● Pull the wiper blade out of its mounting on the wiper arm ››› Fig. 79 (arrow A ). ● Hold down the release button ››› Fig. 79 1 while gently pulling the blade in the direction of arrow B . This may require some strength. 55 Safety

to reduce the risk of damage to the lower part – Adjust front seat, head restraint and mir- Safety of the vehicle and the oil sump when driving rors properly according to your size. over kerbs, or along dirt tracks or unsurfaced – Ensure that the passengers in the rear roads, etc. SEAT recommends you have the Safe driving seats always have the head restraints in guard fitted by a technical service centre. the in-use position ››› page 142. Safety first! WARNING – Instruct passengers to adjust the head restraints according to their height. This chapter contains important information, Driving under the influence of alcohol, drugs, tips, suggestions and warnings that you medication or narcotics may result in severe – Protect children with appropriate child should read and consider for both your own accidents and even loss of life. seats and properly applied seat belts safety and for your passengers' safety. ● Alcohol, drugs, medication and narcotics ››› page 74. may significantly alter perception, affect re- – WARNING action times and safety while driving, which Assume the correct sitting position. Instruct could result in the loss of control of the vehi- your passengers also to assume a proper ● This manual contains important informa- cle. sitting position ››› page 57. tion about the operation of the vehicle, both for the driver and the passengers. The other – Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your sections of the on-board documentation also passengers also to fasten their seat belts contain further information that you should Before setting off properly ››› page 64. be aware of for your own safety and for the safety of your passengers. For your own safety and the safety of your ● Ensure that the on-board documentation is passengers, always note the following points What affects driving safety? kept in the vehicle at all times. This is espe- before every trip: cially important when lending or selling the As a driver, you are responsible for yourself vehicle to another person. – Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turn signals are working properly. and your passengers. When your concentration or driving safety is affected by any cir- – Check tyre pressure. cumstance, you endanger yourself as well as Advice about driving – Ensure that all windows provide a clear and others on the road ››› , for this reason: good view of the surroundings. – Always pay attention to traffic and do not Introduction – Make sure all luggage is secured get distracted by passengers or telephone ››› page 150. calls. Depending upon how you expect to use your – Make sure that no objects can interfere – Never drive when your driving ability is im- vehicle, it may a good idea to protect the en- paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs). gine from below. An undercarriage may help with the pedals. 56 Safe driving

– Observe traffic laws and speed limits. ● “ISOFIX” anchor points for child seats in Correct position of the vehicle the rear side seats with the “ISOFIX” system, – Always reduce your speed as appropriate occupants for road, traffic and weather conditions. ● height-adjustable front head restraints, ● – When travelling long distances, take rear head restraints with in-use position Correct sitting position and non-use position, breaks regularly - at least every two hours. data Technical ● adjustable steering column. – If possible, avoid driving when you are tired or stressed. The safety equipment mentioned above works together to provide you and your pas- WARNING sengers with the best possible protection in Advice When driving safety is impaired during a trip, the event of an accident. However, these the risk of injury and accidents increases. safety systems can only be effective if you and your passengers are sitting in a correct position and use this equipment properly. Safety equipment Safety is everyone's business! Fig. 80 The correct distance between the driv-

Never put your safety or the safety of your er and the steering wheel must be at least 25 Operation passengers in danger. In the event of an acci- cm (10 inches). dent, the safety equipment may reduce the risk of injury. The following list includes most of the safety equipment in your SEAT:

● three-point seat belts,

● belt tension limiters for the front and rear Emergencies side seats, ● belt tensioners for the front seats, ● front airbags, ● knee airbags, Safety ● side airbags in the front seat backrests, Fig. 81 Correct belt web and head restraint ● side airbags in the rear seat backrests*, positions » ● head-protection airbags,

57 Safety

The correct sitting positions for the driver and ● Always keep your feet in the footwell while Adjusting the steering wheel position passengers are shown below. the vehicle is in motion. Read the additional information carefully If your physical constitution prevents you ● Adjust and fasten your seat belt correctly ›››  page 16. from maintaining the correct sitting position, ››› page 64. contact a specialised workshop for help with WARNING any special devices. The seat belt and airbag Also valid for the driver: can only provide optimum protection if a cor- ● Adjust the steering wheel so that there is a Incorrect use of the steering wheel adjustment function and an incorrect adjustment of rect sitting position is adopted. SEAT recom- distance of at least 25 cm (10 inches) be- the steering wheel can result in severe or fa- mends taking your car in for technical serv- tween it and your chest and so that ››› Fig. 80 tal injury. ice. you can hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 ● After adjusting the steering column, push For your own safety and to reduce the risk of the lever ›››  Fig. 24 1 firmly upwards to o'clock and 3 o'clock positions with your injury in the event of an accident or sudden ensure the steering wheel does not acciden- arms slightly bent. braking or manoeuvre, SEAT recommend the tally change position while driving. following positions: ● The adjusted steering wheel must face your ● Never adjust the steering wheel while the chest and not your face. vehicle is in motion. If you need to adjust the Valid for all vehicle occupants: ● Adjust the driver seat forwards or back- steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion, ● Adjust the head restraint so that its upper wards so that you are able to press the accel- stop safely and make the proper adjustment. edge is at the same level as the top of your erator, brake and clutch pedals to the floor ● The adjusted steering wheel should be fac- head, or as close as possible to the same lev- with your knees slightly angled and the dis- ing your chest and not your face so as not to el as the top of your head and under no cir- tance between your knees and the dash pan- hinder the driver's front airbag protection in cumstances below eye level. Keep the back el is at least 10 cm (4 inches) ››› Fig. 80. the event of an accident. of your neck as close as possible to the head ● Adjust the height of the driver seat so that ● When driving, always hold the steering restraint ››› Fig. 80 and ››› Fig. 81. you can easily reach the top of the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the ● Short people must lower the head restraint wheel. ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions to reduce injuries when the driver's front air- completely, even if your head is below its up- ● Keep both feet in the footwell so that you bag deploys. per edge. have the vehicle under control at all times. ● Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 ● Tall people must raise the head restraint o'clock position or in any other manner (e.g. completely. Also valid for the front passenger: in the centre of the steering wheel). In such ● Adjust the seat backrest to an upright posi- ● Move the front passenger seat back as far cases, if the driver's airbag deploys, you may tion so that your back rests completely as possible for optimum protection should sustain injuries to your arms, hands and against it. the airbag deploy. head.

58 Safe driving

Danger of injuries due to an incorrect The following list shows just some examples event of sudden braking or manoeuvres, colli- sitting position of incorrect sitting positions which can be sion or accidents or if the airbag deploys. dangerous to all vehicle occupants. ● Before the vehicle moves, assume the prop- Number of seats er sitting position and maintain it throughout Depending on the equipment, your vehicle Whenever the vehicle is in motion: the trip. This also includes fastening the seat has a total of five or seven seats. Each seat is ● Never stand in the vehicle. belt. data Technical equipped with a seat belt. ● Never stand on the seats. ● Never transport more people than there are seats with a seat belt available in the vehicle. 5 seats ● Never kneel on the seats. ● Children must always be protected with an ● Never tilt your seat backrest too far to the Seats in the Seats in the Seats in the approved child restraint system suited to rear. Advice front second row third row their height and weight ››› page 74. ● Never lean against the dash panel. ● Always keep your feet in the footwell while 2 3 – ● Never lie on the rear bench. the vehicle is in motion. Never, for example, put your feet on the surface of a seat or on 7 seats ● Never sit on the front edge of a seat. the dash panel and never put them out of a window. Otherwise the airbag and seat belt Seats in the Seats in the Seats in the ● Never sit sideways. offer insufficient protection and the risk of in- front second row third row ● Never lean out of a window. jury in the event of an accident is increased. Operation ● 2 3 2 Never put your feet out of a window. ● Never put your feet on the dash panel. WARNING If the seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at ● Never put your feet on the surface of a seat all, the risk of severe injuries increases. Seat Before every trip, adjust the seat, the seat or seat backrest. belt and the head restraints and instruct your belts can provide optimal protection only if passengers to fasten their seat belts proper- the belt web is properly worn. Being seated ● Never travel in a footwell. ly. in an incorrect position means the seat belt ● Never sit on the armrests. Emergencies ● Move the front passenger seat back as far cannot offer its full protection. This could re- ● Never travel on a seat without wearing the as possible. sult in severe and even fatal injuries. The risk seat belt. of severe or fatal injuries is especially height- ● Adjust the driver seat so that there is a dis- ● Never carry any person in the luggage com- ened when a deploying airbag strikes a vehi- tance of at least 25 cm (10 inches) between partment. the centre of your chest and the hub of the cle occupant who has assumed an incorrect Safety sitting position. The driver is responsible for steering wheel. Adjust the driver seat so that WARNING you are able to press the accelerator, brake all passengers in the vehicle, particularly and clutch pedals to the floor with your knees An incorrect sitting position in the vehicle children. slightly angled and that the distance » can lead to severe injuries or death in the 59 Safety

between your knees and the dash panel is at more, an incorrect position is adopted when driver to lose control of the vehicle, increas- least 10 cm (4 inches). If your physical consti- adjusting the seat. ing the risk of a serious accident. tution prevents you from meeting these re- ● Only adjust the height, seat backrest and ● Make sure the pedals can be used at all quirements, contact a specialised workshop forwards or backwards position of the seat times, with no objects rolling underneath to make any modifications required. when there is nobody in the seat adjustment them. ● Never drive with the seat backrest tilted far area. ● Always secure the mat in the footwell. back. The further the seat backrests are tilted ● There must be no objects blocking the seat ● Never place other mats or rugs on top of to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due adjustment area. to incorrect positioning of the belt web or to the original mat supplied by the factory. ● the incorrect sitting position! Only adjust the height, angle and longitu- ● Ensure that no objects can fall into the driv- dinal position of the rear seats when nobody er's footwell while the vehicle is in motion. ● Never drive with the seat backrest tilted is in the way. forwards. Should a front airbag deploy, it ● The seat adjustment and lock areas must could throw the seat backrest backwards and CAUTION injure the passengers of the rear seats. be kept clean. The pedals must always have free and unob- ● Sit as far away as possible from the steer- structed passage to the floor. For example, in ing wheel and the dash panel. case of a fault in the brake circuit, the brake ● Keep your back straight and resting com- Pedal area pedal will need to be pressed further to stop pletely against the seat backrest and the the vehicle. To press the brake pedal down front seats correctly adjusted. Never place Pedals further will require more force than usual. any part of your body in the area of the airbag or very close to it. Do not allow floor mats or other objects to ● If passengers on the rear seats are not sit- obstruct the free passage of the pedals. ting in an upright position, the risk of severe injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt Floor mats should leave the pedal area free web increases. and unobstructed and be correctly secured in the footwell zone. WARNING In the event of failure of a brake circuit, the Incorrect seat adjustment may lead to acci- brake pedal must be pressed harder than dents and severe injuries. normal to brake the vehicle. ● Only adjust the seats when the vehicle is WARNING stationary, as the seats could move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in motion and Objects falling into the driver's footwell could you could lose control of the vehicle. Further- prevent use of the pedals. This could lead the

60 Seat belts

Seat belts This also applies to other vehicle occupants ● Avoid damaging the seat belt by jamming it when driving in town. in the door or the seat mechanism. Why wear a seat belt? ● When travelling, children must be secured ● If the fabric or other parts of the seat belt in the vehicle with a child restraint system are damaged, the seat belts could break in suitable for their weight and height and with the event of an accident or sudden braking.

Introduction data Technical the seat belts correctly fastened ● Always have damaged seatbelts replaced ››› page 74. immediately by seat belts approved for the Check the condition of all the seat belts at ● Instruct your passengers to fasten their vehicle in question by SEAT. Seat belts which regular intervals. If you notice that the belt seat belts properly before driving off. have been worn in an accident and stretched webbing, fittings, retractor mechanism or ● Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the must be replaced by a specialised workshop. buckle of any of the belts is damaged, the Renewal may be necessary even if there is no Advice belt must be replaced immediately by a spe- appropriate seat and ensure it is engaged. Using the latch plate in the buckle of another apparent damage. The belt anchorage should cialised workshop . The specialised ››› seat will not protect you properly and may also be checked. workshop must use the appropriate spare cause severe injuries. ● Never attempt to repair, modify or remove a parts corresponding to the vehicle, the ● seat belt yourself. All repairs to seat belts, re- equipment and the model year. SEAT recom- Do not allow liquids or foreign bodies to enter the buckle fastenings. This could damage tractors and buckles must be carried out by a mends taking your car in for technical serv- the buckles and seat belts. specialised workshop. ice. ● Never unbuckle your seat belt when the ve- Operation hicle is moving. WARNING ● Never allow more than one passenger to Unbuckled or badly buckled seat belts in- share the same seat belt. crease the risk of severe or even fatal injuries. The seat belt cannot offer its full protec- ● Never hold children or babies on your lap tion if it is not fastened and used correctly. sharing the same seat belt.

● Seat belts are the most effective way of re- ● Loose, bulky clothing (such as a jacket) im- Emergencies ducing the risk of sustaining severe or fatal pairs the proper fit and function of the seat injuries in the event of an accident. Seat belts belt. must be correctly fastened when the vehicle is in motion to protect the driver and all vehi- WARNING cle occupants. It is extremely dangerous to drive using dam- Safety ● Before each trip, every occupant in the ve- aged seat belts and could result in serious in- hicle occupants must sit properly, correctly jury or loss of life. fasten the seat belt belonging to his or her seat and keep it fastened throughout the trip.

61 Safety

Warning lamp  Lights up or flashes senger in this seat has fastened “his or her” seat belt ››› Fig. 83. Driver's seat belt not fastened or front pas- The seat belt status is displayed for around senger seat belt not 30 seconds when a seat belt in the rear seats Fasten seat belts! fastened if the front is fastened or unfastened. You can switch off passenger seat is occu- this display by pressing the 0.0 / SET button. pied. The seat belt status flashes for a maximum of Remove any objects from the Objects on the front 30 seconds when a seat belt in the rear seats front passenger seat and passenger seat. is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion. store them safely. An audible warning will also be heard if the vehicle is travelling at over 25 km/h Some control and warning lamps on the in- (15 mph). Fig. 82 Warning lamp on the instrument pan- strument panel will come on to check certain el. functions when the ignition is switched on. The rear seat display can be enabled or disa- They will switch off after a few seconds. bled by a technical service centre. An audible warning will be heard for a maximum of 90 seconds if the seat belts are not fastened as the car drives off and reaches a The protective function of seat belts speed of more than 25 km/h (15 mph) or if the seat belts are unfastened while the vehicle is in motion. The seat belt warning lamp  will also flash. The warning lamp  does not switch off until the driver and front passenger fasten their Fig. 83 Example of seat belt status display for seat belts while the ignition is switched on. the rear seats (here, a 7-seat vehicle) on the instrument panel above, the second row and, Seat belt status display for rear seats below, the third row of seats. The seat belt status display on the instrument panel informs the driver, when the igni- Fig. 84 Drivers with properly worn seat belts tion is switched on, whether any passengers will not be thrown forward in the event of sud- in the rear seats have fastened their seat den braking belts. The symbol  indicates that the pas-

62 Seat belts

Properly worn seat belts hold the occupants minor frontal or side collisions, rear-end colli- in the proper position. They also help prevent sions, rollovers or accidents in which the air- uncontrolled movements that may result in bag trigger threshold value in the control unit serious injury and reduce the risk of being is not exceeded. thrown out of the vehicle in case of an acci- Therefore, you should always wear your seat dent. data Technical belt and ensure that all vehicle occupants Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts have fastened their seat belts properly before correctly benefit greatly from the ability of the you drive off! belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition, the front part of your vehicle and other pas- sive safety features (such as the airbag sys- Head-on collisions and the laws of Fig. 86 The unbelted rear passenger is Advice thrown forward violently, hitting the driver tem) are designed to absorb the kinetic ener- physics gy released in a collision. Taken together, all wearing a seat belt these features reduce the releasing kinetic energy and consequently, the risk of injury. It is easy to explain how the laws of physics This is why it is so important to fasten seat work in the case of a head-on collision: when belts before every trip, even when "just driv- a vehicle starts moving, a type of energy ing around the corner". called “kinetic energy” is created both in the Operation passengers and inside the vehicle. Ensure that your passengers wear their seat belts as well. Accident statistics have shown The amount of “kinetic energy” depends on that wearing seat belts is an effective means the speed of the vehicle and the weight of of substantially reducing the risk of injury the vehicle and its passengers. The higher and improving the chances of survival when the speed and the greater the weight, the more energy there is to be “absorbed” in an involved in a serious accident. Furthermore, Fig. 85 A driver not wearing a seat belt is Emergencies accident. properly worn seat belts improve the protec- thrown forward violently tion provided by airbags in the event of an The most significant factor, however, is the accident. For this reason, wearing a seat belt speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles is required by law in most countries. from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), for example, the corresponding ki- Although your vehicle is equipped with air- Safety bags, the seat belts must be fastened and netic energy is multiplied by four. worn. The front airbags, for example, are only Because the vehicle occupants in our exam- triggered in some cases of head-on collision. ple are not restrained by seat belts, in the » The front airbags will not be triggered during 63 Safety

event of crashing against a wall, all of the oc- Using seat belts How to properly adjust your cupants' kinetic energy will be absorbed solely by said impact. Twisted seat belt seatbelt If it is difficult to remove the seat belt from Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to Fastening and unfastening your seat 50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bod- the guide, the seat belt may have become ies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne twisted inside the side trim after being belt (1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are wound too quickly on unfastening: even higher. ● Pull out the seat belt completely, carefully Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are pulling on the latch plate. not “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-on ● Untwist the belt and guide it back, assist- collision, they will move forward at the same ing it by hand. speed their vehicle was travelling just before the impact. This example applies not only to The seat belt must be fastened even if it is head-on collisions, but to all accidents and impossible to untwist it. In this case, the collisions. twisted area must not be in an area in direct Even at low speeds the forces acting on the contact with your body. Have the seat belt body in a collision are so great that it is not untwisted urgently by a specialised work- possible to brace oneself with one's hands. shop. In a frontal collision, unbelted passengers are thrown forward and will make violent con- WARNING tact with the steering wheel, dash panel, An improperly handled seat belt increases windscreen or whatever else is in the way the risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries. ››› Fig. 85. ● Regularly check that the seat belts and It is also important for rear passengers to their components are in perfect condition. wear seat belts properly, as they could other- ● Always keep your seat belt clean. wise be thrown forward violently through the ● Do not jam or damage the seat belt or rub it Fig. 87 Insert the latch plate into the buckle vehicle interior in an accident. Passengers in with sharp edges. the rear seats who do not use seat belts en- ● Make sure there are no liquids or foreign danger not only themselves but also the front bodies on the latch plate and in the buckle. occupants ››› Fig. 86.

64 Seat belts

● Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is ● The lap part of the seat belt must lie across securely engaged in the buckle. the pelvis, never across the stomach. ● The seat belt must lie flat and fit comforta- Unfastening the seat belt bly. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up The seat belt must not be unfastened until any slack. the vehicle has come to a standstill ››› . data Technical In the case of pregnant women, the seat belt ● Press the red button on the buckle must lie evenly across the chest and as low ››› Fig. 87 B. The latch plate is released from as possible over the pelvis, never across the the buckle. stomach and must be worn properly at all

times during the pregnancy . Advice ● Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls ››› Fig. 88 up easily and the trim will not be damaged. Fig. 88 Position of seat belt during pregnan- Adapting the position of the belt webbing to cy. your size Correct belt position The seat belt can be adapted using the fol- Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle oc- Seat belts offer their maximum protection in lowing equipment: cupants in the position that most protects the event of an accident and reduce the risk them in the event of an accident or sudden of sustaining severe or fatal injuries only ● Belt height adjustment for the front seats. Operation braking ››› . when they are properly positioned. Further- ● Front seat height adjustment. more, if the webbing is correctly positioned, Fastening the seat belt the seat belt will hold the vehicle occupants WARNING Fasten your seat belt before each trip. in the optimum position to ensure the airbag provides the maximum protection. The seat An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause ● Adjust the front seat and head restraint cor- belt must therefore always be worn and the severe or fatal injuries in the event of an acci- webbing correctly positioned. dent. rectly ››› page 57. Emergencies ● The seat belt cannot offer its full protection ● Engage the seat backrest of the rear seat in Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severe unless the seat backrest is in an upright posi- an upright position ››› . or even fatal injuries ››› page 57, Correct po- tion and the seat belt is worn correctly, ac- ● Pull the latch plate and place the belt web- sition of the vehicle occupants. cording to your size. bing evenly across your chest and lap. Do not ● The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie ● Unbuckling your seat belt while the vehicle twist the seat belt when doing so ››› . Safety on the centre of the shoulder, never across is in motion can cause severe or fatal injuries ● Engage the latch plate in the buckle of the the neck or the arm, under the arm or behind in the event of an accident or sudden braking. » corresponding seat ››› Fig. 87 A. the shoulder.

65 Safety

● The seat belt itself, or a loose seat belt, can belt webbing, contact a specialised workshop ● Adjust the rear seat and head restraint cor- cause severe injuries if the belt moves from for help with any special devices to ensure rectly ››› page 57. hard areas of the body to soft areas (e.g. the the optimum protection of the seat belt and ● Engage the seat backrest of the rear seat in stomach). airbag. SEAT recommends taking your car in an upright position ››› . ● for technical service. The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie ● Use latch plate of the belt ››› Fig. 89 1 to on the centre of the shoulder, never across pull the seat belt down. Do not twist the seat the neck or the arm. belt when doing so ››› . ● The seat belt must lie flat and fit comforta- Fastening or unfastening the seat belt ● Engage the latch plate 1 in the buckle of bly on the torso with two buckles the corresponding seat A . ● The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis, never across the stomach. The ● Use the latch plate ››› Fig. 89 2 to pull the seat belt must lie flat and fit comfortably on seat belt across your lap. the pelvis Pull the belt tight if necessary to ● Engage the latch plate 2 in the buckle of take up any slack. the corresponding seat B . ● For pregnant women, the lap part of the ● Pull the belt to ensure that both latch seat belt must lie as low as possible over the plates are securely engaged in the buckles. pelvis and always lie flat, “surrounding” the stomach ››› Fig. 88. Unfastening the seat belt ● Do not twist the seat belt while it is fastened. The seat belt must not be unfastened until the vehicle has come to a standstill ››› . ● Once the seat belt is positioned correctly, Fig. 89 Fasten the seat belt on the centre seat don't pull it away from your body with your in the second row of seats ● Press the red button on the buckle hand. ››› Fig. 89 A . The latch plate is released from ● Do not lie the seat belt across rigid or frag- Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle oc- the buckle. ile objects, e.g. glasses, pens or keys. cupants in the position that most protects ● Press the red button on the buckle ● Never use seat belt clips, retaining rings or them in the event of an accident or sudden braking ››› . ››› Fig. 89 B . The latch plate is released from similar instruments to alter the position of the buckle. the belt webbing. The seat belts for the centre seat in the sec- ● Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls ond row of seats and for the seats in the third up easily and the trim will not be damaged. Note row of seats are fastened using two buckles. If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the correct position of the Fastening the seat belt Fasten your seat belt before each trip. 66 Seat belts

WARNING Using the height adjusters for the front seats is pulled slowly or during normal driving, the and the outer seats of the second row, the system allows for total freedom of movement An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause position of the seat belts can be adjusted in on the shoulder belt. However, during sud- severe or fatal injuries in the event of an acci- the shoulder area according to the height of den braking, during travel in mountains or dent. the occupant: bends and during acceleration, the automat- ● The seat belt cannot offer its full protection ic belt retainer on the seat belt is locked is data Technical unless the seat backrests are in an upright ● Keep the guide device pressed down in the pulled quickly. position and the seat belt is worn correctly, direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 90. according to your size. ● Move the guide device up or down until the Belt tensioners ● Unbuckling your seat belt while the vehicle seat belt lies over the centre of your shoulder is in motion can cause severe or fatal injuries The seat belts on the front seats and the out- ››› page 64. Advice in the event of an accident or sudden braking. er seats of the second row are equipped with ● Release the guide device. belt tensioners. ● Note Pull the belt sharply to check that the de- Sensors trigger the belt tensioners during se- vice is engaged securely. vere head-on, lateral and rear collisions and Seat belts with two buckles include a diagram to show how to fasten the seat belt. retract and tighten the seat belts. If the seat WARNING belt is loose, it is retracted to reduce the forwards movement of vehicle occupants or Never adjust the belt height while the vehicle Operation is in motion. movement in the direction of the collision. Belt height adjustment The belt tensioner works in combination with the airbag system. The belt tensioner will not be triggered in the event of the vehicle over- Seat belt tensioners turning if the side airbags are not deployed. If the belt tensioner is triggered, a fine dust is

Automatic belt retractor, belt tension- Emergencies produced. This is normal and it is not an indi- er, belt tension limiter cation of fire in the vehicle. Seat belts are part of the vehicle’s safety fea- Belt tension limiter tures and consist of the following important functions: The belt tension limiter reduces the force of the seat belt on the body in the event of an Safety Fig. 90 Next to the front seats: belt height ad- Automatic belt retainer accident. » juster Every seat belt is equipped with an automatic belt retainer on the shoulder belt. If the belt 67 Safety

Note ● Never attempt to repair, adjust or remove or Airbag system install parts of the belt tensioners or seat The relevant safety requirements must be ob- belts. Any work must be performed by a spe- served when the vehicle is dismantled or sys- cialised workshop only ››› page 244. Brief introduction tem components are removed. These requirements are known to specialised workshops ● Belt tensioners and automatic belt retain- ››› page 68. ers cannot be repaired and must be replaced. Introduction Front airbags have been installed for both For the sake of the environment driver and passenger. The front airbags can Service and disposal of belt tension Airbag modules and belt tensioners may con- also protect the chest and head of driver and devices tain perchlorate. Observe the legal require- passenger if the seats, seat belts head re- ments for their disposal. straints and, for the driver, the steering If you work on the belt tensioners or remove wheel are correctly adjusted and used. Air- and install other parts of the vehicle when bags are considered as additional safety performing other repair work, the seat belt equipment. An airbag cannot replace the may be damaged. The consequence may be seat belt, which must be worn at all times, that, in the event of an accident, the belt ten- even in front seats where front airbags have sioners function incorrectly or not at all. been installed. So that the effectiveness of the belt tensioner is not reduced and that removed parts do not WARNING cause any injuries or environmental pollu- Never exclusively trust the airbag system as a tion, regulations must be observed. These re- means of protection. quirements are known to specialised work- ● Even when triggered, airbag protection is shops. only auxiliary. ● The airbags provide the best protection WARNING when the seat belts are properly fastened, Improper handling and homemade repairs of thus reducing the risk of sustaining injuries seat belts, automatic belt retainers and ten- ››› page 64, How to properly adjust your seat- sion devices increase the risk of sustaining belt. severe or fatal injuries. The belt tensioner ● Before each trip, every occupant must sit may fail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong properly, correctly fasten the seat belt be- circumstances. longing to his or her seat and keeping it fastened throughout the trip. This rule is valid for all vehicle occupants. 68 Airbag system

WARNING ● Have any repairs or modifications carried cidentally triggered, the detachment of plas- out at a specialised workshop. Specialised tic parts could cause serious injury. Vehicle occupants sitting in the front of the workshops have the necessary tools, diag- vehicle must never carry any objects in the ● Never clean the dash panel and the surfa- nostics equipment, repair information and deployment space between them and the air- ces of the airbag modules with cleaners con- qualified personnel. bags, as this increases the risk of sustaining taining solvents. injuries if the airbag is triggered. This modi- ● Never fit recycled or reused airbag compo- data Technical fies the airbag deployment space or the ob- nents in your vehicle. jects may fly uncontrollably and hit your ● Never modify the airbag system compo- Description of the airbag system body. nents. ● Never carry objects in your hand or on your The airbag system is not a substitute for the Advice lap while the vehicle is in motion. WARNING seat belts. The airbag system offers addition- ● Never transport objects on the front pas- al protection for the driver and passenger in If the airbags are triggered, a fine dust is pro- senger seat. In the event of sudden braking combination with the seat belts. duced. This is normal and it is not an indica- and manoeuvres, the objects may end up in tion of fire in the vehicle. the airbag deployment space and fly uncon- The airbag system comprises the following ● This fine dust may irritate the skin and eyes trollably around the vehicle interior if the air- modules (as per vehicle equipment): bag is activated. and cause breathing difficulties, particularly ● in people suffering from or who have suffered Electronic control unit. Operation ● Vehicle occupants of the front and outer from asthma or other illnesses of the respira- rear seats must never carry any other people, ● Front airbags for driver and passenger tory tract. To reduce breathing difficulties, pets or objects in the deployment space be- get out of the vehicle and open and doors and ● Knee airbag for the driver tween them and the airbags. Make sure chil- windows to breath in fresh air. dren and other passengers also respect this ● Side airbags recommendation. ● Should you touch the dust, wash your ● Head airbag hands and face using a mild soap and water before you eat. ● Airbag control lamp  on the instrument WARNING panel Emergencies ● Prevent the dust from affecting the eyes or The airbag system provides protection for open wounds. ● Key-operated switch for front passenger air- one accident only. If they have been de- ● Rinse your eyes with water if you have dust bag ployed, they must be replaced. in them. ● Control lamp to disconnect/connect the ● Ensure deployed airbags and the system front airbag. » components involved are immediately re- Safety placed with new, SEAT-approved components WARNING for the vehicle. Solvents cause the surfaces of the airbag modules to become porous. If an airbag is ac-

69 Safety

The airbag system operation is monitored danger that during a collision, the system airbags will not be triggered, even though electronically. The airbag control lamp will il- may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly. the accident may cause extensive damage to luminate for a few seconds every time the ig- the car. nition is switched on (self-diagnosis). The following airbags are triggered in seri- Airbag activation There is a fault in the system if the control ous head-on collisions  lamp : The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within ● Driver airbag. ● does not light up when the ignition is thousandths of a second, to provide addi- ● Front passenger front airbag switched on, tional protection in the event of an accident. ● Knee airbag for the driver. ● turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition The airbag system is only ready to function is switched on when the ignition is on. The following airbags are triggered in seri- ● turns off and then lights up again after the In special accidents instances, several air- ous side-on collisions ignition is switched on bags may activate at the same time. ● Front side airbag on the side of the acci- ● illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is dent. In the event of minor head-on and side colli- moving. sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or roll- ● Rear side airbag on the side of the acci- over of the vehicle, airbags do not activate. dent. The airbag system is not triggered if: ● Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac- ● the ignition is switched off Activation factors cident. ● there is a minor frontal collision The conditions that lead to the airbag system ● there is a minor side collision activating in each situation cannot be gener- In an accident with airbag activation: ● there is a rear-end collision alised. Some factors play an important role, ● the interior lights switch on (if the interior such as the properties of the object the vehi- ● light switch is in the courtesy light position); the vehicle turns over. cle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehicle ● the hazard warning lights switch on; speed, etc. WARNING ● all doors are unlocked; Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti- ● The seat belts and airbags can only provide ● the fuel supply to the engine is cut. vation. maximum protection if the occupants are seated correctly ››› page 57. The control unit analyses the collision trajec- ● If a fault has occurred in the airbag system, tory and activates the respective restraint have the system checked immediately by a system. specialised workshop. Otherwise there is a If the deceleration rate is below the predefined reference value in the control unit the 70 Airbag system

Airbag safety instructions ● When driving, always hold the steering Side airbags* wheel on the outer edge of the ring with both Front airbags hands: 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock position. Read the additional information carefully ● Adjust the driver seat so that there is at ›››  page 19. Read the additional information carefully least 25 cm distance between your chest and ›››  page 17. the hub of the steering wheel. If your physi- WARNING data Technical cal constitution prevents you from meeting The airbag is deployed at high speed in frac- WARNING these requirements, make sure you contact a tions of a second. specialised workshop. The airbag is deployed at high speed in frac- ● Always keep the deployment areas of the ● Adjust the front passenger seat so there is tions of a second. side airbags free. as much distance as possible between the Advice ● Vehicle occupants of the front and outer ● Always keep the deployment areas of the front passenger and the dash panel. front airbags free. rear seats must never carry any other people, pets or objects in the deployment space be- ● Never secure objects to the covers or in the tween them and the airbags. deployment area of the airbag modules, e.g. drink holders or phone supports. Knee airbag* ● The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any ● The deployment space between the front Read the additional information carefully heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. passengers and the airbags must not in any ›››  page 18. Operation case be occupied by other passenger, pets ● Do not mount accessories on the doors. and objects. ● WARNING Only used protective covers for the seats ● Never fix any object to the windscreen that are approved for the vehicle. Otherwise, above the front airbag on the front passenger The airbag is deployed at high speed in frac- the side airbag would be obstructed when de- side. tions of a second. ployed. ● ● Do not alter, cover or stick anything to the The knee airbag is deployed in front of the driver's knees. Always keep the deployment steering wheel hub or the surface of the air- WARNING Emergencies bag module on the passenger side of the areas of the knee airbags free. Incorrect handling of the driver's and front dash panel. ● Never not fix objects to the cover or in the passenger seat could prevent the side airbag deployment area of the knee airbag. from deploying properly and cause severe in- WARNING ● Adjust the driver seat so that there is a dis- juries. tance of at least 10 cm (4 inches) between ● Never remove the front seats of the vehicle Safety Front airbags are deployed in front of the your knees and the location of the knee air- or modify any of their components. » steering wheel ›››  Fig. 25 and the dash bag. If your physical constitution prevents panel ›››  Fig. 26. you from meeting these requirements, make sure you contact a specialised workshop.

71 Safety

● Great forces must not be exerted on the ● Do not fit curtains to the windows other   It lights up on the dash panel seat backrest bolsters because the side air- than those expressly approved for use in the bags might not deploy correctly, might not vehicle. Fault in the air- Have the system checked immedi- bag system. ately by a specialised workshop. deploy at all or might deploy unexpectedly. ● Only turn the sun blinds towards the win- ● Any damage to the original seat upholstery dows if there is no object, e.g. pens or garage Front passenger Check whether the airbag should or around the seams of the side airbag units remote controls, secured to the sun blind. front airbag disa- remain disabled must be repaired immediately by a special- bled. ised workshop. Several warning and control lamps light up Deactivating airbags for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- Curtain airbags* ed on, signalling that the function is being Control lamp verified. They will switch off after a few sec- Read the additional information carefully onds. ›››  page 20. If the front passenger airbag is deactivated, the lamp      does not re- WARNING main lit, or if it is lit together with the control The airbag is deployed at high speed in frac- lamp  on the dash panel, there may be a tions of a second. fault in the airbag system ››› . ● Always keep the deployment areas of the head-protection airbags free. WARNING ● Do not fix objects to the cover or in the de- In the event of a fault in the airbag system, ployment area of the curtain airbag. the airbag may not trigger correctly, may fail to trigger or may even trigger unexpectedly, ● Vehicle occupants of the front and outer Fig. 91 Control lamp for disabling the front leading to severe or fatal injuries. rear seats must never carry any other people, passenger front airbag on the dash panel pets or objects in the deployment space be- ● Have the airbag system checked immedi- tween them and the airbags. ately by a specialised workshop. It lights up on the combi-in- ● The built-in coat hooks should be used only  ● Never mount a child seat in the front pas- strument for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any senger seat ››› page 78 or remove the heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. Fault in airbag mounted child seat! The front passenger front Have the system checked immedi- system and seat airbag may deploy during an accident in spite ● Do not mount accessories on the doors. ately by a specialised workshop. belt tensioners. of the fault.

72 Airbag system

CAUTION ● Open the glove compartment on the front WARNING passenger side. Always pay attention to any lit control lamps The front passenger front airbag must only be and to the corresponding descriptions and in- ● Insert the key into the slot of the switch for disabled in special cases. deactivating the front passenger airbag structions to avoid damage to the vehicle. ● Disable and activate the front passenger Fig. 92. About 3/4 of the key should enter, ››› front airbag when the ignition is switched off Technical data Technical as far as it will go. to avoid damage to the airbag system. Manual disabling and enabling of the ● Then turn the key gently to the ON position. ● It is the driver's responsibility to ensure front passenger front airbag with the Do not force it if you feel resistance, and that the key operated switch is set to the cor- make sure you have inserted the key fully. key switch rect position. ● Close the glove compartment on the front ● Only disable the front passenger front air- Advice passenger side. bag when a child seat is to be mounted under ● Check that, with the ignition switched on, exceptional circumstances. the control lamp      on the ● As soon as the child seat is no longer nee- dash panel is not lit ››› page 72. ded on the front passenger seat, reconnect the front passenger front airbag. How to know whether the front passenger ● Never leave the key in the airbag deactiva-

front airbag is disabled tion switch as it could get damaged or acti- Operation vate or deactivate the airbag during driving. The only indication of the front passenger airbag being disabled is that the      control lamp on the dash panel re- Fig. 92 In the glove compartment on the front mains lit (  stays yellow) ››› page 72, passenger side: Key switch for enabling and Control lamp. disabling the front passenger front airbag.

If the      control lamp on Emergencies Read the additional information carefully the centre console does not remain lit or is lit ›››  page 18. in combination with the control lamp  on the dash panel, a child restraint system can- The front passenger front airbag must be dis- not be mounted on the front passenger seat abled when a rear-facing child seat is moun- for safety reasons. The front passenger front Safety ted. airbag may deploy during an accident.

Activating the front passenger front airbag ● Switch the ignition off. 73 Safety

Transporting children safely WARNING ● Children must assume the proper sitting position and be properly belted in while trav- Make sure children are properly belted in and elling. Safety for children correctly secured to avoid severe or fatal injuries while the vehicle is in motion. ● Ensure the seat backrest is upright when a child seat is being used on it. Introduction ● If a child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, the risk to the child of sustain- ● Do not allow the child's head or other part of his or her body to fall into the deployment Read the additional information carefully ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of an area of the side airbags. ›››  page 21. accident increases. ● An inflating front passenger airbag can ● Make sure the belt webbing is correctly Please read the information regarding the air- strike the rear-facing child seat and project it positioned. bag system fully before transporting babies with great force against the door, the roof or ● Never hold children or babies on your lap or and children in a child seat or other child re- the backrest. in your arms. straint system installed on the front passen- ● Never install a child seat facing backwards ● Only one child may occupy a child seat. ger seat. on the front passenger seat unless the front ● If you are using a child seat with a base or passenger front airbag has been disabled. This information is extremely important for foot, always install this base or foot correctly Risk of potentially fatal injuries to the child! driver and passenger safety, particularly that and safely. of babies and children. However, if it is necessary, in exceptional cases, to transport a child in the front passen- ● If the vehicle has a storage compartment in SEAT recommends the use of child seats from ger seat, the front passenger front airbag the footwell in front of the last row of seats, the SEAT accessory programme. These child must always be disabled ››› page 72. If the this compartment cannot be used as de- seats have been designed and tested for use passenger seat has a height adjustment op- signed; on the contrary: It must be filled us- in SEAT vehicles. You can purchase child tion, move it to the highest, most upright po- ing the specially designed accessory so that the base or foot is correctly supported by the seats with different mountings from a techni- sition. If you have a fixed seat, do not install closed compartment and the child seat is se- cal service centre. any child restraint system in this location. cured properly. If this compartment is not ● For those vehicles that do not include a key suitably secured when using a child seat with lock switch to deactivate the airbag, the vehi- Using child restraint systems with a base or a base or foot then the compartment cover cle must be taken to a technical service. foot could rupture in an accident and the child will ● Children up to 12 years old should always Some child retention systems are secured to be ejected and suffer serious injury. travel on the rear seat. the seat using a base or support leg. For cer- ● Please read and observe the child seat tain kinds of equipment the use of an addi- ● Children must always be protected with an manufacturer's handling instructions. tional accessory will be necessary (e.g. an ac- approved child restraint system suited to their height and weight. cessory for the footwell) to fit the child retention system correctly and securely.

74 Transporting children safely

WARNING Child seats ● A suitable child seat that is correctly installed and used on one of the rear seats offer An empty or loose child seat could fly uncon- the most protection possible for babies and trollably around the vehicle interior and Safety instructions small children in most accidents. cause injuries in the event of an accident or sudden braking. Read the additional information carefully Technical data Technical ● When not in use while the vehicle is in mo- ›››  page 21. WARNING tion, always safely secure the child seat or Unbuckling the seat belt while the vehicle is store it in the luggage compartment. WARNING in motion can cause severe or fatal injuries in The lower anchor points for child seats are the event of an accident or sudden braking. not anchors meant to support cargo. Only se- ●

Note The seat belt must not be unfastened until Advice cure booster seats to lower anchor points. the vehicle has come to a standstill. Replace the child seat after an accident, as it may have invisible damage. WARNING Note Child seats with lower anchor points and with Other accessories may be required to fit the Important information regarding the an upper retaining strap must be installed in child retention system with a base or foot se- front passenger's airbag line with the manufacturer's instructions. curity and safely. Contact a technical service Failure to comply could result in severe inju- centre or specialised workshop. Operation ries. Read the additional information carefully ›››  page 21. ● Always secure just one retaining strap from a child seat to a retaining ring (for Top Tether) Read and always observe the safety informa- on the seat backrest on the rear seat in the General information on transporting tion included in the following chapters: boot. children in the vehicle ● Never fix child seats to the cargo anchors in ● Child seats and passenger side airbag Read the additional information carefully the luggage compartment. Emergencies ››› page 76, Use of the child seat on the ›››  page 22. front passenger seat. ● Never secure a child seat to the movable attachment elements for vehicles with an at- Legal regulations and provisions will always ● Safety distance with respect to the passen- tachment element and rail system. take priority over the descriptions of this in- ger airbag ››› in Introduction on page 68. struction manual. There are different regulations and provisions for the use of child seats ● Objects between the passenger and the WARNING Safety passenger side airbag ››› in Front airbags and their mountings (››› table on page 76). on page 71. In general, the rear seat is always the safest In some countries, for example, the use of place for correctly belted in children in the child seats on certain seats in the vehicle event of an accident. may be forbidden. » 75 Safety

The physical principles and the forces acting Categorisation of child seats according to Child seats approved under the ECE-R 44 reg- on the vehicle in the event of a collision or ECE-R44 ulation are fitted with the corresponding ap- other type of accidents also apply to children proval symbol. The sign is an upper-case E in Weight ››› page 64. However, unlike adults and Weight of Installation of the child a circle with the identification number below catego- youngsters, children do not have fully devel- the child seat it. oped muscle and bone structures. In the ry event of an accident, children are subject to a Group 0 up to 10 kg Rear-facing. On rear seats, greater risk than adults of sustaining severe optionally using the ISOFIX Use of the child seat on the front pas- injuries. Group 0+ up to 13 kg system. senger seat1) Given that children's bodies are not yet fully Forward-facing. On rear developed, child restraint systems must be Group 1 9 to 18 kg seats, optionally using the Transporting children on the front passenger used that are especially adapted to their ISOFIX system. seat is not permitted in all countries. Further- more, not all child seats are approved for use height, weight and constitution. There are Forward-facing. On the outer on the front passenger seat. Your technical laws in force in many countries that indicate rear seats or in the centre the use of approved seat systems for trans- seat of the second row of service centre has an updated list of all ap- Group 2 15 to 25 kg porting babies and children. seats and on all seats in the proved child seats. Only used child seats that third row. Optionally with are approved for each vehicle. Only used authorised, approved child seats ISOFIX system. that are suitable for the vehicle. Always con- The front airbag on the front passenger side sult with a technical service centre or a speci- Group 3 22 to 36 kg Forward-facing. is highly dangerous for a child. The front pas- alised workshop should you have any senger seat is life-threatening to a child if he doubts. Not all children fit in the seat of their weight or she is transported in a rear-facing child group. Nor do all seats adapt to the vehicle. seat. Therefore, always check whether the child fits Specific child seat regulations for each coun- properly in the child seat and whether the If a rear-facing child seat is secured to the try (selection) seat can be installed safely in the vehicle. front passenger seat, an inflating front airbag can strike it with such great force that severe Regulation Further information The rear seats are suitable for child seats or fatal injuries may result ››› . Therefore, ECE-R 44a) technical service centre with the ISOFIX system specially designed rear-facing child seats must never be placed for this type of vehicle in accordance with on the front passenger seat when the front a) ECE-R: Economic Comission for Europe Regulation. regulation ECE-R 44. passenger front airbag is enabled.

1) Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when using or installing child seats. 76 Transporting children safely

Only use a rear-facing child seat on the front cordance with current regulations of the ● Move the front passenger seat as far back passenger seat if the front passenger front country in question. as possible and adjust it to its highest posi- airbag is disabled. When it is disabled, the Universal seats for children of groups 0, 0+, tion to keep as far away as possible from the yellow PASSENGER AIR BAG   control 1, 2 or 3 according to the standard ECE-R 44 front airbag. lamp on the dash panel will be lit ››› page 72. can be mounted on the front passenger seat ● Move the seat backrest to the upright posi- If you cannot disable the front passenger data Technical and the rear seats. tion. front airbag and it remains activated, it is ● The seat belt height adjustment must be as forbidden to transport children on the front WARNING high as possible. passenger seat ››› . If a child seat is mounted on the front passen- ● Children must always be protected with an ger seat, the risk of the child sustaining se- approved child restraint system suited to Things to note if using a child seat on the their height and weight. Advice front passenger seat: vere or fatal injuries in the event of an accident increases. Rear-facing child seats must ● The front passenger front airbag must be never be mounted on the front passenger disabled  when using a rear-facing child seat when the front passenger front airbag is Use of the child seat on the rear seat seat ››› page 73. enabled. This is life-threatening to the child ● The seat backrest of the front passenger should the front airbag deploy, as the child If a child seat is mounted on the rear seat, seat would be struck by the inflated airbag seat must be upright. adapt the position of the front passenger and thrown against the seat backrest. Operation ● The front passenger seat must be moved as seat so that the child has enough space. far back as possible. Therefore, adapt the front passenger seat to WARNING the size of the child seat and the height of ● The seat backrest of the front passenger the child. Ensure the passenger is in the cor- seat must be upright. If, in exceptional circumstances, a child must be transported in a rear-facing child seat on rect position  ››› page 57. ● The seat belt height adjustment must be as the front passenger seat, strictly observe the Move the second and third rows of seats fully high as possible. following: back and lock them. Place the seat backs in a Emergencies ● Always disable the front passenger front vertical position and fold the head restraints Suitable child seats airbag and leave it disabled. down. The child seat must be authorised by the ● The child seat must be approved by the manufacturer especially for use on a front manufacturer for use on a front passenger ISOFIX child seats approved for rear seats passenger seat with a front or side airbag. seat with front and side airbag. The rear seats are suitable for child seats Safety ● Follow the installation instructions of the If the front passenger seat is equipped with with the ISOFIX system specially designed child seat manufacturer and observe the retaining rings, the child seat can be secured for this type of vehicle in accordance with warnings. using an approved retaining system provided regulation ECE-R 44. » it is approved for this type of vehicle in ac- 77 Safety

ISOFIX child seats are divided into “specific WARNING facing child safety seat on the front passen- categories for the vehicle”, “limited” or ger seat. “semi-universal”. If child seats are fitted to all the seats in the second row then it is possible that the seats ● Children must always be protected with a Child seat manufacturers supply a list of ve- of this row cannot be folded down from the child restraint system suited to their height hicles with each ISOFIX seat, which includes third row of seats in case of an accident. In and weight. the models for which the ISOFIX child seat in the event of an emergency, passengers in the ● Always fasten children's seat belts correct- question is approved. If the vehicle is inclu- third row of seats will not be able to leave the ly. ded in the manufacturer's list and the ISOFIX vehicle or to help themselves. ● child seat belongs to a seat category inclu- Child seats should never occupy all the WARNING ded in the list, then it can be used in your ve- seats of the second row if other passengers hicle. If necessary, contact the child seat are to occupy the third row of seats. Children must travel in a child seat appropri- manufacturer for an updated list of vehicles. ate to their weight and height while the vehicle is in motion. Group ● Children must always be protected with a ISOFIX child Seat position in (weight Integrated child seat child restraint system suited to their height seat category the rear seats category) and weight. Introduction ● Children must assume the proper sitting Group 0: E IUFa) position and be properly belted in while trav- to 10 kg The integrated child seat is only suitable for elling. E IUFa) children in Group 2 (15-25 kg) and Group 3 ● The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie (22-36 kg), according to the ECE-R44 regula- Group 0+: approximately on the centre of the shoulder, D IUFa) to 13 kg tion. never across the neck or the arm. C IUFa) ● The seat belt must lie close to the upper WARNING part of the body. D IUFa) Child travelling without their seat belt fas- ● The lap belt part must lie across the pelvis, C IUFa) tened or not secured using a suitable re- not across the stomach, and always fit close- straint system may sustain fatal injuries if Group 1: ly. B IUFa) the airbag is deployed. 9 to 18 kg ● Allow the belt to retract until it fits tightly B1 IUFa) ● Children up to 12 years old should always over the child's seat. travel on the rear seat. ● a) Never hold children or babies on your lap. A IUF ● Always disable the front passenger front a) IUF: suitable for “universal” ISOFIX child seats authorised for airbag if, in exceptional cases, you have no use in this group. alternative but to transport a child in a rear-

78 Transporting children safely

● Always use a child seat and the seat belt Unfolding the integrated child seat Lifting the cushion for children who are under 1.5 m tall. The nor- ● Pull the unlock lever ››› Fig. 93 A on the mal seat belt could cause injuries to the cushion in the direction of the arrow abdominal and neck areas. ››› Fig. 93 1 . ● Only one child may occupy a child seat. ● Fold both sides ››› Fig. 93 B up in the di- Technical data Technical ● Read and follow the information and warn- rection of the arrow ››› Fig. 93 2 . ings provided by the child seat manufacturer. ● Push the cushion ››› Fig. 93 C back in the ● Never leave an unsupervised child alone on direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 93 3 until it en- a child seat or in the vehicle. gages. ● All modifications to the integrated child Advice seat must be carried out by a specialised Install the head restraint on the child safety workshop. seat ● Replace the child seat or any seat compo- ● Remove the head support and store it safe- nents damaged or involved in an accident. Fig. 93 Integrated child seats. lift up the ly in the vehicle ››› page 140. cushion ● Make sure that the seat belt guide is instal- WARNING led in the head support of the seat for chil- Loose objects could fly uncontrollably around dren on the window side ››› page 80. Operation the vehicle interior and cause injuries in the ● Enter the child seat head support in the event of an accident or sudden braking. corresponding backrest until it fits correctly ● Do not leave toys or other hard, loose ob- into place ››› Fig. 94. jects on the child seat or on the seat while the vehicle is in motion. ● Make sure that the rear seats and backrests are correctly locked into place, pulling on

both of them. Emergencies

Fig. 94 Integrated child seats. install its head support. Safety

79 Safety

Seat belt routing on the integrated Using the guide handle ››› Fig. 96, position ● Children must assume the proper sitting child seat the seat belt so that the shoulder part of the position and be properly belted in while trav- belt lies on the centre of the child's shoulder. elling. ● The shoulder belt must be positioned Seat belt guide handle against the middle of the shoulder. ● Secure the seat belt guide handle to the ● The seat belt must lie flat and fit comforta- side head restraint on the window side. The bly. guide handle is secured by a button. ● Allow the belt to retract until it fits tightly ● Open the upper button on the seat belt over the child's seat. guide handle and pass the belt webbing be- ● The lap part of the seat belt must lie across low the side head restraint and through the the pelvis, never across the stomach. guide handle. ● Only one child may occupy a child seat. ● Close the button again.

Adjusting the seat belt Removing the child seat Fig. 95 Integrated child seats. adjusting the ● seat belt. Guide the automatic three-point seat belt below the side head restraint. ● Pull the latch plate and slowly place the belt webbing across the child's chest and lap. ● Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the appropriate seat and push it down until it is securely locked with an audible click. ● Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged in the buckle. Fig. 97 Integrated child seats. lowering the WARNING cushion Fig. 96 Integrated child seats. seat belt routing with guide handle The seat belt only offers maximum protection Lowering the cushion from severe or fatal injuries when it is correctly positioned. ● Pull the unlock lever ››› Fig. 97 A on the cushion in the direction of the arrow 1 .

80 Transporting children safely

● Push the cushion down through the central area B in the direction of the arrow 2 until it safely engages ››› . The side supports fold away automatically.

Remove the head restraint on the child safe- data Technical ty seat ● Open the guide lever on the seat belt and guide it by hand to pull the belt back in more easily and without damaging the trim. Advice ● Lift the child seat head restraint to the top. ● Fold the backrest of the rear seat forwards ››› page 144. ● Remove the head restraint on the child safety seat. ● Fitting the head restraint. Operation

CAUTION When lowering the integrated child seat, only press on the centre of the cushion ››› Fig. 97 2 . Otherwise the cushion could bend and not engage properly. Emergencies Safety

81 Emergencies Emergencies First-aid kit Vehicle tool kit* There is a first aid kit ››› page 163 in the rear left-hand side storage compartment of the Location Self-help luggage compartment. The first aid kit must comply with legal re- In case of emergency quirements. Check the expiry date of the contents of the first aid kit. First aid kit, warning triangle, reflective vests and fire extinguishers* Fire extinguisher There is a Fire extinguisher underneath the front passenger seat. The fire extinguisher must conform to legal requirements, be ready for use and be checked regularly. Check the certification Fig. 99 In the luggage compartment, viewed seal on the extinguisher. from inside the vehicle: the vehicle tool kit located in a cavity close to the lock carrier. WARNING When securing the vehicle in case of a break- Loose objects in the vehicle interior can be vi- down, please note the legal requirements for olently thrown in case of a sudden manoeu- each country. Fig. 98 On the rear lid: Warning triangle vre or braking and especially in accidents bracket causing serious injury. Depending on the model, the vehicle tools ● Secure fire extinguishers, first aid kit, re- may be kept in the luggage compartment, in Reflective vests flective vests and warning triangle securely a cavity close to the lock carrier ››› Fig. 99. to their respective supports. Some vehicles will have a driver door com- Loosen the safety straps and remove the ve- partment to store a reflective vest hicle tool kit. For vehicles factory-fitted with winter tyres, you will find additional tools in a ››› page 98. toolbox located in the luggage compartment. Warning triangle WARNING With the boot hatch open, rotate the lock 90° Loose objects in the vehicle interior can be vi- ››› Fig. 98. Lower the bracket and remove the olently fired through the compartment in warning triangle. case of a sudden manoeuvre or braking and 82 Self-help especially in accidents causing serious in- The vehicle tool kit depends on the vehicle Note jury. equipment. The following is a description for a vehicle with all options. The jack does not generally require any main- ● Make sure that the vehicle tools are stored tenance. If required, it should be greased us- safely in the luggage compartment. The individual elements of the vehicle tool ing universal type grease. kit Fig. 100 ››› data Technical WARNING 1 Adapter for anti-theft bolt. SEAT recom- Unsuitable or damaged vehicle tools can mend you carry the wheel bolt adapter in Folding wheel chocks* cause injury or accidents. the vehicle tool kit at all times. The code ● Never work with inappropriate or damaged number of the anti-theft wheel bolt is tools. stamped on the front of the adapter. In Advice case it is lost, another adapter can be or- dered using this number. Note the anti- Note theft bolt code for the wheels and keep it After use, return the jack to its initial position in a place other than the vehicle. using the handle in order to securely store it 2 Towline anchorage, removable. in the vehicle. 3 Wheel spanner. Operation 4 Jack crank handle. The crank handle Components needs to be folded away before returning Fig. 101 To unfold the foldable wedges. it to the tool kit. 5 Jack. Before storing the jack in the tool The folding chocks are in the tool kit kit, fold its hook. ››› Fig. 100. 6 Screwdriver with hexagon socket in the handle for screwing and unscrewing the Assemble the folding chocks Emergencies wheel bolts. The screwdriver bit is inter- ● Lift the base plate ››› Fig. 101 1 . changeable. The screwdriver may be ● Insert the two “tabs” of the mounting plate found underneath the wheel spanner. into the long openings on the base plate 2 . 7 Wire hook for pulling off the wheel cover, integral hubcaps and the wheel bolt Correct use Safety caps. The folding chocks may be used to block the Fig. 100 Components of the vehicle tool kit wheel diagonally opposite to the wheel being changed. » 83 Emergencies

The chocks should be placed directly in front The vehicle only comes with the necessary ● Only use suitable tools that are not dam- and behind the wheel and only be used on tools for changing wheels if factory supplied aged when changing a wheel. firm ground. with winter tyres. If this is not the case, you ● Always stop the engine, turn on the elec- need to go to a specialised workshop to get tronic parking brake and place the gear selec- WARNING the wheels changed. tor lever in position P, for an automatic gear- If the folding chocks are assembled or used You should only change the wheels yourself if box, or engage a gear for a manual gearbox to incorrectly, an accident may occur and seri- the vehicle is parked in a safe place, you are reduce the risk of the vehicle moving acciden- ous injury caused. familiar with the procedure and safety stand- tally. ● Never use damaged chocks. ards and you have all the necessary tools! ● Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked as soon as possible with a reli- ● Never use chocks to immobilize the vehicle Otherwise, you should seek professional as- able torque wrench. on a slope. sistance.

WARNING WARNING Changing a wheel can be dangerous, espe- If the wheel trims are not appropriate or not Changing a wheel* cially on the hard shoulder. Please observe fitted correctly, they could cause major acci- the following rules to minimise the risk of in- dents or damage. Introduction jury: ● Incorrectly mounted wheel trims may come ● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. off while driving and endanger other road Read the additional information carefully Park at a safe distance from surrounding traf- users. ›››  page 45 fic to change a wheel. ● Damaged trims must never be mounted on All Alhambra models have TMS (Tyre Mobility ● When changing a wheel, keep all passen- the wheels. System). gers, and particularly children, a safe dis- ● Always ensure that the brake ventilation tance away from the work area. If a tyre needs to be changed the tools neces- and cooling is not cut off or blocked. This is ● sary are available at spare parts dealers: Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn also valid if hubcaps are fitted later. If there other road users. is not enough air, you may require signifi- ● Jack, ● Ensure the ground on which you park is flat cantly longer braking distances. ● box spanner for wheel bolts, and solid. If necessary, support the jack on a wide solid base. CAUTION ● tool to remove wheel bolt caps ● If you are changing a wheel yourself, you Remove and remount wheel trims taking care should be familiar with the required proce- The tyres mounted on the vehicle are anti- to avoid damage to the vehicle. puncture. The wheels should only be dure. Otherwise, you should seek professio- changed when switching from summer to nal assistance. winter tyres or vice-versa. See ››› page 290 84 Self-help

Tyre repair ● If you have driven with very low pressure or ● Keep children away from the tyre mobility a flat tyre. system. TMS (Tyre Mobility System)* ● If the expiry date on the bottle of tyre seal- ● Never use a jack even if it is approved for ant has passed. the vehicle. Read the additional information carefully ● To reduce the risk of the vehicle possibly Technical data Technical ›››  page 44 WARNING moving on its own, always turn off the en- The Anti-puncture kit* (Tyre Mobility System) Using the tyre mobility system can be dan- gine, set the electronic parking brake and put the selector lever in position P or put into will reliably seal punctures caused by the gerous, especially when filling the tyre at the gear if the gearbox is a manual. penetration of a foreign body of up to about roadside. Please observe the following rules in diameter. to minimise the risk of injury:

4 mm Do not remove foreign ob- Advice jects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre. ● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. WARNING Park it at a safe distance from surrounding A tyre filled with sealant does not have the Once the sealant is in the tyre, make sure to traffic to fill the tyre. check the pressure after 10 minutes driving. same performance properties as a conven- ● Ensure the ground is flat and firm. tional tyre. If the vehicle has more than one damaged ● All occupants, and especially children, ● Never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph). tyre, seek professional assistance. The tyre should always be at a safe distance outside ● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and mobility system is designed for filling one the work area. fast cornering. Operation tyre. ● Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn ● Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximum other road users. Only use the tyre mobility system if the vehi- speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then check cle is properly parked, you know how to do it ● Use the tyre mobility system only if you are the tyre. and the necessary safety measures, and if familiar with the necessary procedures. Oth- you have the right kit! Otherwise, you should erwise, you should seek professional assis- For the sake of the environment seek professional assistance. tance.

● Only use the tyre mobility system in the Once used or expired, dispose of the sealant Emergencies The tyre sealant should not be used in the event of an emergency to get to the nearest according to legal provisions. following cases: workshop. ● ● If the wheel is damaged. Replace the repaired tyre with the tyre mo- Note bility set as soon as possible. ● The outside temperature is lower than ● Sealant bottles can be purchased from ● The sealant is hazardous for your health Safety -20°C (-4°F). SEAT dealers. and if it touches your skin, it must be imme- ● Observe the usage instructions provided by ● If the tear or puncture on the tyre is over 4 diately washed off. the snow chain manufacturer. mm wide.

85 Emergencies

Contents of the tyre mobility system* 8 Tube for inflating tyres Check after 10 minutes of driving 9 12 volt connector Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 102 8 again 10 Bottle of sealant and check the tyre pressure on the gauge 7 . 11 Spare insert for valve The valve insert remover 1 has a gap at the Equal to or below 1.3 bar (19 psi/130 kPa): lower end for a valve insert. The valve insert ● Stop driving! The tyre could not be suffi- can only be screwed or unscrewed in this ciently sealed with the tyre mobility system. way. This also applies to its replacement part ● You should obtain professional assistance 11 . ››› .

WARNING Equal to or above 1.4 bar (20 psi/140 kPa): When inflating the tyre, the air compressor ● Correct the tyre pressure until the correct and the inflator tube may become hot. level is reached ››› page 284. Fig. 102 Standard representation: contents of ● Protect hands and skin from hot parts. the anti-puncture kit. ● Carefully head to the nearest specialised ● Do not place the air compressor or inflator workshop at a maximum speed of 80 km/h tube onto flammable materials while they are (50 mph). The tyre mobility system is located under- hot. neath the floor covering in the boot. It in- ● Ask the workshop to change the damaged ● Before storing the equipment, let it cool. cludes the following components ››› Fig. 102: tyre. ● If a minimum pressure of 2.0 bar 1 Tyre valve remover (29 psi / 200 kPa) cannot be reached, the tyre WARNING 2 Sticker indicating maximum speed “max. is badly damaged. In this instance, the seal- Driving with a tyre that cannot be sealed is 80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph” ant will not be able to seal the tyre. Do not continue driving. Seek specialist assistance. dangerous and may lead to accidents and se- 3 Filler tube with cap rious injury. 4 Air compressor CAUTION ● Do not continue driving if the tyre pressure is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) or lower. 5 ON/OFF switch The air compressor should be turned off after ● Seek specialist assistance. 6 Air bleed screw1) a maximum of 8 minutes since otherwise it will overheat. Before switching it on again, let 7 Tyre pressure monitoring1) it cool for a few minutes.

1) An inflator tube may also be included. 86 Self-help

Changing the windscreen wiper CAUTION If the vehicle comes with the Keyless Access system, towing is only allowed with the igni- blades ● Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers could tion on! scratch the glass. Changing the windscreen and rear ● If products containing solvents, rough The vehicle battery drains if the vehicle is sponges or sharp objects are used to clean towed with the engine switched off and the window wiper blades data Technical the blades, the graphite layer will be dam- ignition connected. Depending on the battery charge status, the drop in voltage may be so Read the additional information carefully aged. large, even after just a few minutes, that no ›››  page 54. ● Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint thinner or similar products to clean the win- electrical device in the vehicle may work e.g. The windscreen wiper blades are supplied as dows. the hazard warning lights. In vehicles with the Keyless Access system, the steering Advice standard with a layer of graphite. This layer is ● In icy conditions, always check that the responsible for ensuring that the wipe is si- wiper blades are not frozen to the glass be- wheel could lock ››› . lent. If the graphite layer is damaged, the fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it may noise of the water as it is wiped across the help to leave the vehicle parked with the wip- WARNING windscreen will be louder. ers in service position ›››  page 54. A vehicle with a flat battery should never be Check the condition of the wiper blades regu- ● To prevent damage to the bonnet and the towed. wiper arms, only leave them in the service ● larly. If the wipers scrape across the glass Never remove the key from the ignition Operation they should be changed if they are damaged, position. lock. Otherwise, the steering wheel lock or cleaned if they are dirty ››› . ● Before driving, always lower the wiper could suddenly lock. The vehicle would not arms. be controlled and a serious accident could Damaged wiper blades should be replaced ensue. immediately. These are available from qualified workshops. Tow-starting and towing WARNING WARNING When towing the vehicle, the handling and Emergencies Introduction braking efficiency change considerably. Worn or dirty wiper blades reduce visibility Please observe the following instructions to and increase the risk of accident and serious minimise the risk of serious accidents and in- Read the additional information carefully injury. jury: ● Always replace damaged or worn blades or ›››  page 50

● As the driver of the vehicle being towed: Safety blades which do not clean the windscreen When towing, always respect legal require- correctly. – The brake must be depressed must hard- ments. er as the brake servo does not operate. » For technical reasons, it is not possible to tow a vehicle if the battery is flat. 87 Emergencies

Always remain aware to avoid collision Fitting the front towline anchorage ● After towing, remove the towline anchorage with the towing vehicle. by turning it clockwise and put the cover back in place. – More strength is required at the steering wheel as the power steering does not operate when the engine is switched off. CAUTION ● As the driver of the towing vehicle: The towline anchorage must always be completely and firmly tightened. Otherwise, it – Accelerate gently and carefully. could be released while towing and tow-start- – Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. ing. – Brake well in advance than usual and brake gently. Fitting the rear towline anchorage CAUTION Fig. 103 On the right-hand side of the front bumper: Screw in the towline anchorage. ● Carefully fit and remove the towline anchorage and its cover to avoid damage to the ve- The location for the removable towline an- hicle (e.g. paintwork). chorage is on the right-hand side of the front ● When towing, fuel could enter the catalytic bumper ››› Fig. 103. converter and cause damage! The towline anchorage should always be kept in the vehicle. Note Note the instructions for towing ● The vehicle can only be towed if the electronic parking brake and steering lock are de- ›››  page 50. activated. If the vehicle has no power supply Fig. 104 On the rear bumper, to the right To fit the towline anchorage or there is an electric system fault, the en- hand side: Towline anchorage in position gine must be started using jump leads to de- ● Take the towline anchorage from the vehi- activate the electronic parking brake and cle tool kit ››› page 82. The location for the removable towline an- electronic steering lock. ● Press on the upper cover and carefully re- chorage is on the right-hand side of the rear ● Vehicles with the Keyless Access locking move it forwards. Allow the cover to hang. bumper ››› Fig. 104. For vehicles with a facto- and ignition system should only be towed ry fitted towing bracket, there is no fitting be- ● Screw in the towline anchorage into its po- with the ignition connected since, otherwise, hind the cover to insert the towline anchor- the electronic steering lock will not unlock. sition anticlockwise as far as it will go age. For towing, fit and use the tow hitch ››› Fig. 103 ››› . Use a suitable tool to firmly ››› page 234, ››› . tighten the towline anchorage in its location. 88 Self-help

Note the instructions for towing Towing advice ● The brake must be depressed must harder ›››  page 50. as the brake servo does not operate. Avoid Towing requires some expertise and experi- hitting the towing vehicle. Fitting the towline anchorage to the rear for ence, especially when using a tow rope. Both ● Note the instructions and information con- vehicles without factory fitted tow hitch drivers should be familiar with the technique tained in the Instruction Manual for the vehi-

required for towing. For this reason, inexper- data Technical ● Take the towline anchorage from the vehicle to be towed. ienced drivers should abstain. cle tool kit in the luggage compartment ››› page 82. While driving, avoid excessive traction forces Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle ● Press on the upper cover and carefully re- and jerking. When towing on an unpaved ● Accelerate gently and carefully. Avoid sud- move it back. This may require some road, there is always a risk of overloading den manoeuvres. and damaging the anchorage points. Advice strength. Allow the cover to hang. ● Brake well in advance than usual and brake ● Screw in the towline anchorage into its po- If the vehicle is towed, with the hazard warn- gently. sition anticlockwise as far as it will go ››› . ing lights on and the ignition switched on, ● Note the instructions and information con- Use a suitable tool to firmly tighten the tow- the turn signal may be used to indicate tained in the Instruction Manual for the vehi- line anchorage in its location. changes of direction. Simply operate the turn cle to be towed. ● After towing, remove the towline anchorage signal lever as usual. Meanwhile, the hazard by turning it clockwise and put the cover warning lights will go off. When the turn sig- Operation back in place. nal lever is returned to the rest position, the hazard warning lights will be turned on auto- Emergency locking and unlock- matically. CAUTION ing ● The towline anchorage must always be Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle completely and firmly tightened. Otherwise, Introduction it could be released while towing and tow- ● Leave the ignition on to avoid locking the starting. steering wheel, to release the electronic Read the additional information carefully Emergencies ● Vehicles with a factory fitted towing brack- parking brake and to activate the turn sig- ›››  page 8, ›››  page 10, et, can only be used for towing with a tow nals, the horn as well as the window wipers ›››  page 13 and window washers. bar, specially designed to fit on a tow hitch The doors, rear lid and panoramic sliding ball. Otherwise, the tow hitch ball and the ve- ● As the power assisted steering does not sunroof can be locked manually and partially hicle may be damaged. Otherwise, a tow rope work if the engine is not running, you will Safety should be used. opened, for example if the key or the central need more strength to steer than normally. locking is damaged. »

89 Emergencies

WARNING Fuses and bulbs ● Never touch the electrical wiring of the ignition system. Opening and closing doors carelessly can cause serious injury. Fuses ● Take care not to cause short circuits in the electrical system. ● If the vehicle is locked from outside, the doors and windows cannot be opened from Vehicle fuses the inside. WARNING ● Never leave children or disabled people Read the additional information carefully Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or alone in the car. They could be trapped in the ›››  page 42 bridging a current circuit without fuses can car in an emergency and will not be able to cause a fire and serious injury. get themselves to safety. Due to the constant updating of vehicles, fuse assignments based on equipment and ● Never use a fuse with a higher value. Only ● Depending on the time of the year, temper- the use of the same fuse for various electrical replace fuses with a fuse of the same amper- atures inside a locked and closed vehicle can age (same colour and markings) and size. be extremely high or extremely low resulting components, it is not possible to provide an ● Never repair a fuse. in serious injuries and illness or even death, up-to-date summary of the fuse positions for particularly for young children. the electrical components at the time of ● Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, staple printing this manual. For detailed information or similar. about the fuse positions, please consult a WARNING technical service. CAUTION Getting in the way of the doors and the pan- In general, a fuse can be assigned to various oramic sliding sunroof is dangerous and can ● To prevent damage to the vehicle's electric lead to serious injury. electrical components. Likewise, an electrical system, before replacing a fuse always turn component can be protected by several off the ignition, the lights and all electrical ● Open and close the doors and the panor- fuses. elements and remove the key from the igni- amic sliding sunroof only when nobody is in tion. the way. Only replace fuses when the cause of the problem has been solved. If a newly inserted ● If you replace a fuse with higher-rating fuse, you could cause damage to another part CAUTION fuse blows after a short time, you must have the electrical system checked by a special- of the electrical system. When opening and closing in an emergency, ised workshop as soon as possible. ● Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre- carefully disassemble components and then vent the entry of dust or humidity as they can reassemble them carefully to avoid damage WARNING damage the electrical system. to the vehicle. ● Always carefully remove the fuse box cov- The high voltages in the electrical system can ers and refit them correctly to avoid problems give serious electrical shocks, causing burns with your vehicle. and even death!

90 Fuses and bulbs

● Protect the fuse boxes when open to avoid Driving with faults and blown bulbs on the are not sure about procedures then visit a the entry of dust or humidity. Dirt and humid- vehicle exterior lighting is against the law. specialised workshop to carry out the neces- ity inside fuse boxes can cause damage to sary work. the electrical system. Additional bulb specifications ● Never touch the bulb glass directly. Finger- The specifications of some headlamp bulbs prints will be evaporated by the heat of the Note and bulbs for the rear lamps fitted at the fac- operating bulb thus “fogging” up the reflec- data Technical tor. ● In the vehicle, there are more fuses than tory may be different to those of conventional ● those indicated in this chapter. These should bulbs. Bulb information is displayed on the The headlamp frameworks in the engine only be changed by a specialised workshop. bulb socket or on the bulb itself. compartment and the rear lamps contain sharp elements. Always protect your hands ●

One component may have more than one Advice WARNING when changing bulbs. fuse. ● Several components may run on a single If the road is not well-lit and the vehicle is CAUTION fuse. not clearly visible to other drivers, there is a risk of accident. ● After changing a bulb, if the rubber covers are not replaced correctly on the headlamp WARNING framework, the electrical installation may be Changing bulbs damaged, especially if water is allowed to en- Failure to replace bulbs correctly may cause ter. Operation serious accidents. Introduction ● Remove the ignition key before working on ● Before carrying out any work in the engine the electric system. Otherwise, a short circuit Changing bulbs requires a certain amount of compartment please read and observe the could occur. warnings ››› page 268. In any vehicle, the en- manual skill. If you are unsure, SEAT recom- ● Switch off the lights and the parking light gine compartment is a hazardous area and mends that you consult a technical service or before changing a bulb. could cause severe injury. request assistance from a specialist. In gen- ● Take good care to avoid damaging any com- Emergencies ● Discharge lamps work with high-voltage eral, a specialist is required if other vehicle ponents. and can cause serious or fatal injury if han- components must be removed or if the dis- dled incorrectly. charge bulbs must be replaced. ● H7 and discharge bulbs are highly pressur- You should store spare light bulbs in the ve- ised and could explode when being changed. hicle for safety-relevant lights. Spare bulbs ● Only replace the bulbs concerned when Safety may be obtained from the technical services. they have cooled. In some countries, it is a legal requirement to ● Never replace bulbs alone if you are not fa- carry spare bulbs in the vehicle. miliar with the operations necessary. If you

91 Emergencies

Control lamp Note A fault in the LED on the rear lights will not be  It lights up indicated. However, if the fault affects all the LEDs then this will be indicated by the control A vehicle exterior  lighting bulb is not Replace the faulty bulb. lamp . working.

Several warning and control lamps light up To replace halogen headlight bulbs for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few sec- Fig. 106 Left headlight. onds. There is no need to remove the headlight to Checking the bulbs of a trailer replace bulbs. For vehicles with the factory fitted towing Complete operations only in the sequence bracket, certain trailer lights are also control- given: led if the power socket is correctly connected. Turn signals (small bulb holder) A fault on a trailer turn signal is indicated on the instrument panel by the turn signal blink- 1. Open the bonnet  ››› page 268. ing twice as fast ( or ) ››› page 128. Fig. 105 In the engine compartment: left- hand side headlight lining. A dipped beam 2. Rotate the bulb holder 1 to the left all the way ● General fault of all turn signals on one side. headlights, B daytime driving lights and C and pull it out backwards together with the bulb. main beam headlights and side lights ● Fault in one rear light (on some models, al- 3. Depending on the model, the bulb is removed di- so the registration light). rectly from the bulb holder or it may need to be ro- tated and then removed. ● Fault in two brake lights. 4. Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical bulb. WARNING 5. Place the bulb holder in the headlight and rotate Observe the safety warnings ››› in Control to the right all the way. and warning lamps on page 105. Dipped beam A and daytime lights B

1. Open the bonnet  ››› page 268.

92 Fuses and bulbs

Dipped beam A and daytime lights B Main beam head- Side lights C lights C 2. Remove the rubber cover on the rear of the headlight. 6. Place the bulb holder in Place the bulb holder in the headlight and pull the headlight and insert 3. Rotate the bulb holder to the left all the way and the wire clip upwards completely. data Technical pull it out backwards together with the bulb. until it clicks into place.

4. Depending on the model, the bulb is removed di- 7. Insert the rubber cover. rectly from the bulb holder or it may need to be ro- tated and then removed. Note

5. Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical bulb. Advice The images show the left hand headlight Fig. 108 Turn signal bulb holder 1 and turn- 6. Place the bulb holder in the headlight and rotate from behind. The structure of the right hand ing light 2 . to the right all the way. side headlight is symmetric. There is no need to remove the headlight to 7. Insert the rubber cover. replace bulbs. Complete operations only in the sequence Main beam head- Side lights C To replace the xenon headlight bulb given: lights C Operation

1. Open the bonnet  ››› page 268. Turn signals 1 Turning lights 2

2. Remove the rubber cover on the rear of the head- 1. Open the bonnet  ››› page 268. light. Rotate the cover ››› Fig. 107 in the direction of the 2. 3. Press the wire clip Pull the bulb holder 3 arrow and remove it. downwards and pull the out backwards together bulb holder 2 out to- with the bulb. Rotate the bulb holder Press the wire clip Emergencies gether with the bulb. 1 ››› Fig. 108 to the downwards and pull the 3. left all the way and pull bulb holder 2 4. Depending on the model, the bulb is removed di- it out backwards to- ››› Fig. 108 out together gether with the bulb. with the bulb. rectly from the bulb holder or it may need to be ro- Fig. 107 In the engine compartment: turn sig- tated and then removed. nal indicator cover.

Depending on the model, the bulb is removed di- Safety 5. Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical bulb. 4. rectly from the bulb holder or it may need to be ro- tated and then removed.

5. Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical bulb. »

93 Emergencies

1 2 Replacing the front bumper bulbs Pull the cover forwards, in the direction of the ar- Turn signals Turning lights 1. row ››› Fig. 109. Place the bulb holder in Place the bulb holder in the headlight and ro- the headlight and pull Unscrew the attachment screw ››› Fig. 109 1 us- 6. tate to the right all the the wire clip upwards 2. ing the screwdriver from the vehicle tool kit way. until it clicks into place. ››› page 82.

Rotate the cover ››› Fig. 107 in the opposite direc- Tilt the headlight slightly forward and extract it 7. tion to the arrow as far as it will go. 3. from its lateral attachments ››› Fig. 110 (small arrows). Always seek the help of a specialist when Release the connector ››› Fig. 110 1 and remove 4. changing the Xenon dipped beam and main it. beam headlamps ››› in Introduction on page 91. Rotate the bulb holder ››› Fig. 110 2 to the left all Fig. 109 On the right-hand side of the front 5. the way, in the direction of the arrow, and pull it bumper: removing the headlights. out backwards together with the bulb. Note The illustrations show the left hand head- 6. Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical bulb. light. The structure of the right hand side Place the bulb holder in the headlight and rotate 7. headlight is symmetric. to the right all the way.

Insert the connector ››› Fig. 110 1 on the bulb 8. holder 2 . The connector must audibly click into place.

Place the headlight into its position ››› Fig. 110 9. (small arrows) and tilt it backwards.

Tighten the attachment screw ››› Fig. 109 1 us- 10. ing the screwdriver.

11. Replace the cover on the bumper ››› Fig. 109. Fig. 110 Changing the bulbs in the headlights

Complete operations only in the sequence given:

94 Fuses and bulbs

Replacing the rear lid bulbs Extract the cover carefully using the flat part of the Replacing the rear bulbs in the body 2. screwdriver from the vehicle tool kit as a lever (››› Fig. 100) on the indent ››› Fig. 111 1 .

Release the bulb holder connector by pulling on 3. the red connector block. Technical data Technical Press on the attachment tabs in the direction of 4. the arrow ››› Fig. 112 and pull out the bulb holder.

5. Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical bulb.

Install the bulb holder. The attachment tabs should Advice 6. audibly click into place.

Fig. 111 On the rear lid: Remove the cover. 7. Insert the cover. The cover should lock into place. Operation

Fig. 112 On the rear lid: remove the bulb- Emergencies holder. Fig. 113 On the side of the luggage compartment: removing the left and right hand side Complete operations only in the sequence rear lights. 1 remove the cap; 2 attach- given: ment screw » Safety 1. Open the rear lid ››› page 122.

95 Emergencies

Rear light, left Rear light, right Rear light, left Rear light, right

Unscrew the attachment screw ››› Fig. 113 2 us- Carefully insert the tail light unit into the opening 4. ing the screwdriver from the vehicle tool kit 13. in the bodywork. To do this, insert the upper rear ››› page 82. The bolt is secured in its position. light unit guide into the attachment ring.

Extract the rear light from the bodywork by careful- Tighten the white attachment screw using the 5. 14. ly pulling backwards. screwdriver from the vehicle tool kit.

Pull the red strip on the connector and extract the Ensure that the tail light unit has been correctly 6. 15. connector. fitted and is firmly secured.

Disassemble the tail light unit and place it on a Replace the cap 7. Move the 12 V power flat, clean surface. ››› Fig. 113 1 and ro- socket support up- 16. tate it 90° in the oppo- wards gently until it is site direction of the ar- Fig. 114 Rear lights in the body: Remove the To change the bulb correctly closed. bulb holder. 1 to 4 : Attachment tab row. To release the bulb holder, press on the attach- Close the storage com- 17. Complete operations only in the sequence 8. ment tabs ››› Fig. 114 1 to 4 in the direction of partment. given. the arrow. 18. Close the rear lid ››› page 122. 9. Remove the bulb holder from the rear light unit. Removing the rear light units 10. Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical bulb. Complete operations only in the sequence given: Place the bulb holder in the tail light unit. The at- 11. tachment tabs should audibly click into place. Rear light, left Rear light, right Insert the connector and press the red attachment 12. 1. Open the rear lid ››› page 122. strip in so that the connector is locked into place.

Open the storage com- Move the 12 V power Assembling the rear light units partments on the left- socket support by 2. hand side of the lug- pressing gently down- Complete operations only in the sequence gage compartment wards ››› Fig. 113 B given: ››› page 163. (arrow).

Rotate the cap 1 90° 3. in the direction of the arrow and remove it.

96 Fuses and bulbs

Changing the number plate light Fixed number plate Bolted number plate Fixed number plate Bolted number plate

light light light light

Press the flat part of the Insert the number plate light carefully into the screwdriver included in 8. opening on the bumper. Ensure that the number Unscrew the number the vehicle on-board plate light is in the correct position. plate light screws using data Technical tools (››› Fig. 100) in the 1. the screwdriver from direction of the arrow, Insert the number plate Tighten the attachment the vehicle tool kit in the groove of the light into the bumper screws for the number (››› Fig. 100). 9. number plate light until it audibly clicks in- plate light using the ››› Fig. 115. to place. screwdriver.

2. Detach the number plate light. Advice

Press on the connector Fig. 115 On the rear bumper: number plate Separate the attach- lock in the direction of lights ment tabs from the rear 3. the arrow ››› Fig. 116 panel of the number 1 and pull out the plate light by pressing. connector.

Rotate the bulb holder Operation in the direction of the Take the bulb holder 4. arrow ››› Fig. 116 2 out of the number plate and extract it together light. with the bulb.

5. Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical bulb.

Insert the bulb holder into the number plate Emergencies Insert the bulb holder light and rotate all the Fig. 116 Number plate light: Remove the bulb 6. into the number plate way in the opposite di- holder. light. rection to the arrow ››› Fig. 116 2 . Complete operations only in the sequence

given: Press on the attach- Safety ment tabs. The bulb Plug the connector into 7. holder must be firmly the bulb holder. attached to the number plate light.

97 Operation

Fig. 117 Dash panel.

98 General instrument panel Operation – Instruments ...... 100 13 Storage compartment ...... 163 – Digital display ...... 100 14 Hazard warning lights switch  . . . 82 General instrument panel – Warning and indication lamps . . . 105 15 Switches for: 9 Steering wheel with horn and – Electronic manual air condition-

ing ...... 173 data Technical Instrument panel – Driver airbag ...... 17 – On-board computer controls . . . . 26 – Climatronic ...... 173 1 Interior door release lever ...... 119 – Controls for radio, telephone, 16 Right seat heating controls  . . . . . 144 2 Central lock button    ...... 112 navigation and speech dialogue 17 Button for: 3 system ››› Booklet Radio Switch for adjusting the exterior – Anti-slip regulation (ASR)  . . 187 Advice mirrors ...... 137 – Paddle levers for tiptronic gear- – Start-Stop operation  ...... 205 – Exterior mirror adjustment      shift (automatic gearbox) ...... 195 – Parking distance warning system – Heated exterior mirrors  10 Windscreen wiper/ windscreen (Park Pilot)  ...... 208 wash lever ...... 135 – Folding exterior mirrors  – Park Assist system  ...... 211 – Windscreen wipers  –  4 Instrument panel controls and light- – Tyre pressure monitor   . . . . . 231  ing control  ...... 128 – Intermittent wipe Operation – Dynamic chassis control (DCC)   5 Headlamp range adjustment  . . . 128 – “Brief wipe” x   6 Light switch  ...... 128 – Windscreen wipers – Opening the rear lid  ...... 122 – Light off -- – Automatic windscreen wash/wipe – Opening and closing of electric  – Automatic dipped beam head- sliding doors  ...... 119  light control -- – Rear window wiper 18 Locking lever to open glove com- – Side/dipped lights   – Automatic rear window partment ...... 163 Emergencies wash/wipe  – Fog lights   19 Position of passenger front airbag – Lever with buttons for controlling on the dash panel ...... 17 7 Lever for ...... 128  the SEAT information system - , 20 Key-operated switch in glove com- – Main beam headlights  / ...... 26 partment for deactivating front pas-  Safety – Headlight flasher 11 Left seat heating controls  ...... 144 senger front airbag ...... 18  – Turn signals 12 Radio or navigation system (fitted 21 Passenger front airbag off warning – Parking lights  at factory) ››› Booklet Radio or lamp ...... 72 8 Instrument panel: ››› Booklet Navigation system 22 Lever for: » 99 Operation

– Manual gearbox ...... 192 29 Steering column adjustment lev- Note er ...... 57 – Automatic gearbox ...... 192 ● Some of the items of equipment listed here 30 23 12 volt power socket ...... 170 Fuse box cover ...... 90 are fitted only on certain model versions or 31 are optional extras. 24 Auto Hold Switch - ...... 205 Lever for:  ● In versions with the steering wheel on the 25 Electronic parking brake switch – Cruise Control System (CCS) – right, the layout of the control elements is   –  –  –  –  . . 219 ...... 187 somewhat different. But the symbols as- 32 26 Start-up push button (Keyless Ac- Open bonnet lever ...... 268 signed to the controls correspond to the sym- cess closing and start-up system) 33 Controls for: bols used in the versions with the steering wheel on the left 27 Ignition lock ...... 182 – Electric windows  ...... 125 28 Pedals ...... 192 – Childproof locks  ...... 119

Instruments

View of instrument panel

Fig. 118 Instrument panel, on dash panel

Details of the instruments ››› Fig. 118: 1 Clock set button1). – Press button  to select the hour or minute display. 100 General instrument panel

– To continue setting, press 0.0 / SET – Press button 0.0 / SET to reset to zero. ● Outside temperature. ››› Fig. 118 7 . Hold button down to ● Compass. scroll through the numbers quickly. WARNING ● Selector lever positions ››› page 192. – Press button  again to end the clock Any distraction may lead to an accident, with ● Recommended gear (manual gearbox) setting. the risk of injury.

››› page 192. data Technical 2 Rev counter (with the engine running, in ● Do not operate the instrument panel con- ● thousands of revolutions per minute). trols when driving. Multifunction display (MFD) and menus for different setting options ›››  page 26. Together with the gear-change indicator, ● the rev counter offers you the possibility CAUTION Service interval display ››› page 103. ● Second speed display (menu Configura- of using the engine of your vehicle at a To prevent damage to the engine, the rev Advice suitable speed. The start of the red area counter needle should only remain in the red tion) ›››  page 26. ››› Fig. 118 indicates the maximum en- zone for a short period of time. ● Start-Stop operation indicator ››› page 102. gine speed working at operating temperature. However, it is advisable to change For the sake of the environment Warning and information texts up a gear or move the selector lever to D (or lift your foot off the accelerator) before Changing up a gear in time reduces fuel con- The system runs a check on certain compo- the needle reaches the red zone . We sumption and noise. nents and functions when the ignition is

››› Operation recommend that you avoid high revs and switched on and while the vehicle is moving. that you follow the recommendations on Faults in the operation are displayed on the screen using red and yellow symbols and the gear-change indicator. Consult the Indications on the display additional information in ››› page 196. messages on the instrument panel display ( page 105) and, in some cases, with audi- A variety of information can be viewed on the ››› 3 Engine coolant temperature display  ble warnings. The display may vary according instrument panel display ››› Fig. 118 4 , de- ››› page 274. to the type of instrument panel fitted. »

pending on the vehicle equipment: Emergencies 4 Displays on the screen ››› page 101. 5 Fuel reserve display ››› page 261. ● Warning and information text. 6 Speedometer. ● Mileage. 7 Reset knob for trip recorder (trip). ● Time. Safety

1) Depending on the vehicle equipment, it is also possible to set the time using the settings menu on the instrument panel display ›››  page 30. 101 Operation

Priority 1 warning (red symbols) temperature. At first this symbol flashes and Second speed display (mph or km/h) then it remains lit until the outside tempera- In addition to the speedometer, the speed Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audible ture rises above +6°C (+43°F) ››› . can also be displayed in a different unit of warnings.  Stop the vehicle! It is dangerous ››› in Control and When the vehicle is at a standstill, with the measurement (in miles or in km per hour). To warning lamps on page 105 ! auxiliary heating on (››› page 177), or when change the units, in the Settings menu, se- Check the function that is faulty and repair it. If necessa- travelling at very low speeds, the tempera- lect the option Second speed ry, request assistance from specialised personnel. ture displayed may be higher than the true ›››  page 26. outside temperature, as a result of the heat Vehicles without menu display on the instru- Priority 2 warning (yellow symbols) produced by the engine. ment panel Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audible The temperatures measured range from ● Switch on the engine. warnings. -40°C to +50°C (-40°F to +122°F). A function fault, or fluids which are below the correct ● Press button  three times. The odometer levels may cause damage to the vehicle ››› in Control Compass display flashes on the instrument panel dis- and warning lamps on page 105 ! play. Check the faulty operation as soon as possible. If neces- With the ignition on and the navigation sys- sary, request assistance from specialised personnel. tem on, the cardinal point corresponding to ● Press button 0.0 / SET once. “mph” the vehicle's direction of travel is displayed or “km/h” is displayed briefly instead of the Informative text on the instrument panel ››› page 103. odometer. ● This activates the second speed display. To Information relating to different vehicle processes. Selector lever positions switch it off, repeat the procedure. The range of engaged gears of the selector Mileage This option cannot be deactivated in models lever is shown on the side of the lever, and destined for countries in which the second The odometer registers the total distance on the instrument panel display. In positions speed must always be visible. travelled by the car. D and S, and with the Tiptronic, the corresponding gear is also displayed. The odometer (trip) shows the distance Start-Stop operating display. travelled since the last odometer reset. The Updated information relating to the status is last digit of the trip recorder indicates distan- Recommended gear (manual gearbox) displayed on the instrument panel ces of 100 metres or one tenths of a mile. The recommended gear in order to save fuel ››› page 205. is displayed on the instrument panel while Outside temperature display you are driving ››› page 192. WARNING When the outside temperature is below +4°C Observe the safety warnings ››› in Control (+39°F), the symbol “ice crystal” (warning of and warning lamps on page 105. risk of freezing) is also displayed next to the 102 General instrument panel

WARNING Compass* ● Adjust and confirm the magnetic zone (1-15). Even though outside temperatures are above freezing, some roads and bridges may be icy. Calibrating compass ● At outside temperatures above +4°C (+39°F), even when the “ice crystal symbol” To calibrate the compass you must be in one Technical data Technical is not visible, there may still be patches of ice of the valid magnetic zones with sufficient on the road. space to be able to trace a circumference ● Do not rely on the outside temperature in- with the vehicle. dicator! ● Switch the ignition on.

● Select the Settings menu followed by the Advice Note option Compass and Calibrate. ● Different versions of the instrument panel Fig. 119 Magnetic zones ● Confirm the message Describe a com- are available and therefore the versions and plete circumference to calibrate instructions on the display may vary. In the The compass does not require calibration in the compass with OK and then trace a case of displays without warning or informa- vehicles for which the navigation system was complete circumference driving at approxi- tion texts, faults are indicated exclusively by mounted at the factory. The option compass mately 10 km/h (6 mph). the warning lamps. disappears. Operation ● When several warnings are active at the The compass in vehicles in which the naviga- When the corresponding cardinal point is dis- same time, the symbols are shown succes- tion system was not mounted at the factory, played, the calibration is complete. sively for a few seconds and will stay on until the fault is rectified. is permanently and automatically calibrated. If electronic or metal accessories (mobile phone, television) are subsequently mounted Service interval display in the vehicle, the compass should be recali- Emergencies brated manually. The service indication is shown on the dash panel display ››› Fig. 118 4 . Adjusting the magnetic zone SEAT distinguishes between services with en- ● Switch the ignition on. gine oil change (Interval Service) and services without engine oil change (Inspection ● Select the Settings menu followed by the Safety Service). The service interval display only option Compass and Zone. gives information for service dates which in- ● Select the magnetic zone corresponding to volve an engine oil change. The dates for the » the position of the vehicle ››› Fig. 119.

103 Operation

other services (e.g. the next Inspection Serv- In vehicles without text messages, a spanner When the service date has past, a minus sign ice or change of brake fluid) are listed on the is displayed on the instrument panel  with is displayed in front of the number of kilome- label attached to the door strut, or in the a figure given in km. The number of kilometres or days. In vehicles with text messages Maintenance Programme. tres shown is the maximum number that may the following is displayed: Service --- be driven until the next service. After a few km (miles) or --- days ago. In vehicles with Services established by time seconds, the display mode changes. A clock or mileage, the service intervals are already symbol appears and the number of days until pre-defined. Resetting service interval display the next service appointment is due. If the service was not carried out by a techni- In vehicles with LongLife Service, the inter- In vehicles with text messages, Service in cal service centre, the display can be reset as vals are determined individually. Technical --- km (miles) or --- days is dis- follows: progress has made it possible to considera- played on the instrument panel. bly reduce servicing requirements. The tech- In vehicles with text messages: nology used by SEAT ensures that your vehi- Service due cle only has an Interval Service when it is Select the Settings menu. necessary. To establish when the Interval After the service date, an audible warning is Service is due (max. 2 years), the vehicle's given when the ignition is switched on and In the submenu Service, select the option Reset. conditions of use and individual driving the spanner displayed on the screen flashes Confirm with OK when requested to do so by the sys- styles are considered. The service pre-warn- for a few seconds . In vehicles with text tem. ing first appears 20 days before the date es- messages, Service in --- km or --- tablished for the corresponding service. The days is displayed on the instrument panel. In vehicles without text messages: kilometres (miles) remaining until the next service are always rounded up to the nearest Reading a service notification Switch the ignition off. 100 km (miles) and the time is given in com- With the ignition switched on, the engine off Press and hold the 0.0 / SET button. plete days. The current service message can- and the vehicle at a standstill, the current not be viewed until 500 km after the last service notification can be read: Switch the ignition back on. service. Prior to this only lines are visible on Release the 0.0 / SET button and, press  for the next the display. ●  Press the button on the instrument pan- 20 seconds. el several times until the spanner symbol is Inspection reminder displayed . Do not reset the indicator to zero between When the Service date is approaching, when ● OR: select the Settings menu. two intervals, otherwise the display will be the ignition is switched on a Service remind- ● From the Service submenu, select the op- incorrect. er is displayed. tion Info. If you reset the display manually, the next service interval will be indicated as in vehicles with fixed service intervals. For this 104 General instrument panel reason we recommend that the service inter- panel display. These may be purely informa- CAUTION val display be reset by a SEAT authorised tive or they may be advising of the need for service ››› Booklet Maintenance schedule. action ››› page 100, Instruments. Failure to heed the control lamps and text messages when they appear may result in Depending upon the equipment fitted in the faults in the vehicle. Note vehicle, instead of a warning lamp, some- ● The service message disappears after a few times a symbol may be displayed on the in- data Technical seconds, when the engine is started or when strument panel. OK is pressed. When certain control and warning lamps are ● In vehicles with the LongLife system in lit, an audible warning is also heard. which the battery has been disconnected for

a long period of time, it is not possible to cal- Advice culate the date of the next service. Therefore WARNING the service interval display may not be cor- If the warning lamps and messages are ignor- rect. In this case, bear in mind the maximum ed, the vehicle may stall in traffic, or may service intervals permitted in the ››› Book- cause accidents and severe injuries. let Maintenance Programme. ● Never ignore the warning lamps or text messages. ● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. Operation Control lamps ● Park the vehicle away from traffic and ensure that there are no highly flammable ma- Control and warning lamps terials under the vehicle that could come into contact with the exhaust system (e.g. dry Read the additional information carefully grass, fuel). ›››  page 32 ● A faulty vehicle represents a risk of accident for the driver and for other road users. If Emergencies The control and warning lamps are indicators necessary, switch on the hazard warning of warnings, ››› , faults ››› or certain func- lamps and put out the warning triangle to ad- tions. Some control and warning lamps come vise other drivers. on when the ignition is switched on, and ● Before opening the bonnet, switch off the switch off when the engine starts running, or engine and allow it to cool. Safety while driving. ● In any vehicle, the engine compartment is a Depending on the model, additional text hazardous area and could cause severe inju- messages may be viewed on the instrument ries ››› page 268.

105 Operation Communications and multimedia

Steering wheel controls*

Operating the audio system + telephone

Fig. 120 Controls on the steering wheel.

The steering wheel includes a multifunction functions without needing to distract the ● control of the available audio functions (ra- module from where it is possible to control driver. dio, audio CD, MP3, iPod®1), USB1), SD1)) and the audio, telephone and radio/navigation the Bluetooth system from the steering wheel.

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephonea) Navigationa)

Turn: Turn volume up/down Turn: Turn volume up/down Turn: Turn volume up/down Turn: Turn volume up/down Turn: Turn volume up/down A Press: Mute Press: Pause Press: Mute Press: Mute Press: Mute

1) Depending on the vehicle equipment. 106 Communications and multimedia

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephonea) Navigationa)

Short press: answer/hang up calls, enable/open the tele- Short press: access to the tele- Short press: access to the tele- Short press: access to the tele- Short press: access to the telephone menu. phone menu on the dash pan- phone menu on the dash pan- phone menu on the dash pan- phone menu on the dash pan- B a) a) a) Hold down: reject incoming a) el . el . el . el . data Technical call/switch to private mode or Hold down: rediala) Hold down: rediala) Hold down: rediala) Hold down: rediala) return to hands-free mode/re- dial

Short press: switch to the previ- Radio/media functionality (ex- C Search for last station ous song No function No functionb)

cept AUX ) Advice Hold down: quick rewind

Short press: switch to the next Radio/media functionality (ex- D Search for the next station song No function No functionb) cept AUX ) Hold down: fast forward

Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument E , F panel panel panel panel panel

G Enable/disable voice controla) Enable/disable voice controla) Enable/disable voice controla) No functionb) Enable/disable voice control Operation

Turn: Acts upon the instrument Turn: Acts upon the instrument Turn: Acts upon the instrument Turn: Next/previous presetc) Turn: Next/previous songc) panel menu depending on posi- panel menu depending on po- panel menu depending on po- Press: Acts on the MFD or con- Press: Acts on the MFD or con- tion sition sition H firms the menu option of the firms the menu option of the Press: Acts on the MFD or con- Press: Acts on the MFD or con- Press: Acts on the MFD or con- dash panel depending on the dash panel depending on the firms the menu option of the firms the menu option of the firms the menu option of the menu option menu option dash panel depending on the dash panel depending on the dash panel depending on the

menu option menu option menu option Emergencies a) According to the vehicle's equipment package. b) When a call is being made, radio/media functionality (except AUX). c) Only if the dash panel is in audio menu. Safety

107 Operation

Multimedia Comfort mobile phone Three button unit in headliner

USB/AUX-IN input Three button unit*

Fig. 122 The phone holder used for connecting the mobile phone to the car aerial is located in the front centre armrest. Fig. 123 Three button unit in headliner: con- Fig. 121 Front centre armrest: USB/AUX-IN in- trols for the telephone management system. put. Depending on the special features and the country, the vehicle may have the Depending on the features and the country, Comfort Function system, with a connection to the vehicle may have a USB/AUX-IN connec- mobile phone the vehicle's external aerial Press it briefly: to accept or end a call. tion. ››› Booklet Media System Plus. Press the button: to reject a call. The USB/AUX-IN input is in the front centre  This system is located in the front centre arm- Press it briefly: to start or stop the voice con- armrest ››› Fig. 121. a) rest compartment. trol function, for example, to make a call. The operating description is located in the re- Press the button for more than 2 seconds: to spective Instruction Manuals of the audio obtain information about the SEAT brand and system or the navigation system.  selected additional services related to traffic and travel.

108 Communications and multimedia

Function Assistance call Activating and deactivating The assistance call  button gives im- Press the button for more than 2 seconds: to mediate help in case of a breakdown. To this Switching on the speech control system obtain help from the network of SEAT dealers  ●  in the event of a breakdown. end, the SEAT dealer network, with its mobile Press the button on the multi-function assistance vehicles, is at your disposal. steering wheel. a) data Technical Not operational if a SEAT Media system 2.2 navigation system ● with voice control is fitted. To establish communication, press the  OR: press the button in the three button button for more than 2 seconds. unit in the headliner . ● Wait for the acoustic signal. Information and assistance calls Note ● Give the command. Calls made with the and buttons take pri- ● Follow the dialogue instructions (extended Advice Communication with the SEAT Customer Care   ority over normal calls. If the or button is dialogue). Service is established using the  and  but- pressed during a normal telephone call, this tons of the three button unit1). The system call will be cut off and a connection will be Ending voice control will automatically connect you with the Assis- made to the information or assistance centre. tance Centre of the relevant country. You will ● Press the  button on the multi-function only be able to make calls if your mobile is Note steering wheel. turned on and connected to the pre-installed ● Operation Any call made to the information service will OR: press the button in the three button Bluetooth. be interrupted if the assistance button  is unit in the headliner . pressed. The connection to the assistance Information call service will then be made (and vice versa). Interrupting the instructions The Information call  button offers in- ● During the instructions, press the  button formation on the SEAT brand and selected Note on the multi-function steering wheel. additional services related to traffic and your ● OR: press the button in the three button Emergencies travel. Mobile phone coverage must be available to place a call to the information and assistance unit in the headliner . To establish communication, press the  but- services. This service might not be available ● You will be able to give a command imme- ton for more than 2 seconds. in some countries. diately afterwards. In countries where there is no information tel-

ephone number, an information call is made Safety after pressing the  button.

1) Depending upon country. 109 Operation Opening and closing Vehicle keys The vehicle keys or new spare keys can be With the vehicle key ››› Fig. 124 or ››› Fig. 125 obtained from a technical service centre, a specialised workshop or approved key serv- Vehicle key set the vehicle may be locked or unlocked re- motely. ice qualified to provide this kind of key. New keys or spare keys must be synchron- Vehicle key The vehicle key includes an emitter and batteries. The receiver is in the interior of the ve- ised before use ››› page 112. hicle. The range of the vehicle key with remote control and new batteries is several me- WARNING tres around the vehicle. Careless or incorrect use of vehicle keys may result in severe injury and accident. If it is not possible to open or close the vehicle using the remote control key, this should ● Always take all the keys with you whenever be re-synchronised ››› page 112 or the bat- you leave the vehicle. Children and unauthorised individuals could lock the doors or the tery changed ››› page 111. boot hatch, start the engine or turn on the ig- Different keys belonging to the vehicle may nition, activating electrical systems, the elec- be used. tric windows, for example. ● Never leave children or disabled people Fig. 124 Vehicle keys Folding the key shaft in and out alone in the car. They could be trapped in the car in an emergency and will not be able to When the button is pressed A , the key shaft get themselves to safety. For example, de- is released and unfolds. pending on the time of the year, tempera- To fold it press button A and fold the key tures inside a locked and closed vehicle can shaft in until it locks in place. be extremely high or extremely low resulting in serious injuries and illness or even death, particularly for young children. Spare key ● Never remove the key from the ignition if To obtain a spare key and other vehicle keys, the vehicle is in motion. The steering may the vehicle chassis number is required. lock and it will not be possible to turn the Each new key must contain a microchip and steering wheel. Fig. 125 Vehicle key for vehicles with electric be coded with the data from the vehicle elec- sliding doors tronic immobiliser. A vehicle key will not work if it does not contain a microchip or the microchip has not been encoded. This is also true for keys cut for the vehicle. 110 Opening and closing

CAUTION Control lamp on the vehicle key Replacing the battery All of the vehicle keys contain electronic components. Protect them from damage, impacts and humidity. Technical data Technical Note ● Only use the key button when you require the corresponding function. Pushing the button unnecessarily could accidentally unlock

the vehicle or trigger the alarm. It is also pos- Advice sible even when you are outside the radius of action. Fig. 127 Vehicle key: battery compartment Fig. 126 Control lamp on the vehicle key ● Key operation can be greatly influenced by cover overlapping radio signals around the vehicle When a button on the vehicle key is pressed, working in the same range of frequencies the control lamp flashes ››› Fig. 126 (arrow) (e.g. radio transmitters, mobile telephones). once briefly. If the button is pressed and

● Obstacles between the remote control and held, the indicator blinks several times (e.g. Operation the vehicle, bad weather conditions and for the convenience opening function). draining batteries can considerably reduce the range of the remote control. When the control lamp does not light upon pushing a button, the batteries of the key must be changed ››› page 111. Emergencies Fig. 128 Vehicle key: removing the battery

SEAT recommend having the batteries changed in a specialised workshop.

The battery is located to the rear of the vehi- Safety cle key, under a cover ››› Fig. 127. When changing the battery, use another battery of the same model and observe the po- larity when fitting it ››› . » 111 Operation

To change the battery Synchronising the vehicle key If the vehicle has the Keyless Access closing ● Unfold the vehicle key blade ››› page 110. and ignition system, it may only be locked If the button  is pressed frequently outside with the ignition off and the driver's door ● Remove the cover from the back of the ve- of the vehicle range, it is possible that the ve- closed. hicle key ››› Fig. 127 in the direction of the ar- hicle can no longer be locked or unlocked us- The battery of an unlocked vehicle parked for row ››› . ing the key. In this case, the vehicle key must a long period (e.g. in a private garage) may ● Extract the battery from the compartment be synchronised once more as follows: run down and fail to start the motor. using a suitable thin object ››› Fig. 128. ● Unfold the vehicle key blade ››› page 110. ● Place the new battery in the compartment, WARNING pressing in the direction of the arrow as ● Remove the cover from the driver door han- shown ››› Fig. 128 ››› . dle ››› page 89. The incorrect use of the central locking system may cause serious injuries. ● Fit the battery compartment cover, pressing ● Press the  button on the vehicle key. For this, it must remain with the vehicle. ● The central locking system will lock all in the direction of the arrow as shown doors. A vehicle locked from the inside can ››› Fig. 127 until it clicks into place. ● Open the vehicle within one minute using prevent any non-authorised individual from the key shaft. opening the doors and accessing the vehicle. CAUTION ● Turn on the ignition using the vehicle key. Nevertheless, in case of emergency or acci- ● If the battery is not changed correctly, the The key has been synchronised. dent, locked doors will complicate access to the vehicle interior to help the passengers. vehicle key may be damaged. ● Replace the driver door handle cover. ● Use of unsuitable batteries may damage ● Never leave children or disabled people the vehicle key. For this reason, always re- alone in the vehicle. The central locking but- place the dead battery with another of the ton can be used to lock all the doors from same voltage, size and specifications. Central locking and locking within. Therefore, passengers will be locked inside the vehicle. Individuals locked in the system vehicle can be exposed to very high or very For the sake of the environment low temperatures. ● Please dispose of your used batteries cor- Introduction ● Depending on the time of the year, temper- rectly and with respect for the environment. atures inside a locked and closed vehicle can ● The vehicle key battery may contain per- Read the additional information carefully be extremely high or extremely low resulting chlorate. Observe the legal requirements for ›››  page 8 in serious injuries and illness or even death, particularly for young children. their disposal. Central locking functions correctly when all the doors and the rear lid are correctly shut. ● Never leave individuals locked in a closed If the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot and locked vehicle. In case of emergency, they may not be able to exit the vehicle by be locked with the key. themselves or get help. 112 Opening and closing

Description of the central locking sys- Automatic unlocking (Auto Unlock) opened during this time, the vehicle will then tem When the key is removed from the ignition automatically unlock. slot, here the vehicle unlocks all doors and The central locking system allows all doors the boot automatically ›››  page 26. and the rear lid to be locked and unlocked Unlocking and locking the vehicle centrally. data Technical Locking the vehicle after the airbags have from outside ● From outside, using the vehicle key. been deployed ● From outside with the Keyless Access sys- If the airbags are deployed due to an acci- tem ››› page 115, dent, the vehicle will be automatically and completely unlocked. Depending on the Advice ● From inside, by pushing the central locking amount of damage, it can be locked follow- button ››› page 114. ing an accident in the following ways: In the submenu Convenience in the Con- figuration menu, or by visiting a special- Function Action ised workshop, special functions of the cen- Lock the vehicle – Switch off the ignition. tral locking system can be switched on or off by pushing the – Open a door of the vehicle and

›››  page 26. central locking close it again. Operation button: – Push the central locking button  . In case of a vehicle key fault or central locking system fault, all doors can be locked or Lock the vehicle – Disconnect the ignition button. unlocked manually. with the vehicle OR: remove the key from the igni- key: tion. – Open a door once. Automatic locking (Auto Lock) – Lock the vehicle with the key. Fig. 129 Buttons on the vehicle key

In this instance, the vehicle locks automati- Emergencies cally when moving at speeds above approx. Note Function Handling the buttons on 15 km/h (10 mph) ›››  page 26. When the If the vehicle key buttons are pressed the vehicle vehicle is locked, the control lamp  of the ››› Fig. 129 or one of the central locking but-  central locking button ››› Fig. 130 lights up in tons is pressed ››› Fig. 130 several times in Unlocking the vehicle. Press button . Keep it yellow. pushed for the convenience

quick succession, the central locking feature Safety opening. is disabled briefly to protect from overloading. The vehicle will then remain unlocked for Lock the vehicle. Press button  . Keep it push- around 30 seconds. If no door nor the boot is ed for the convenience locking function. » 113 Operation

Function Handling the buttons on Unlocking and locking the vehicle extra safety, for example when stopped at the vehicle from inside traffic lights. ● The doors can be opened and unlocked in- Unlocking the rear lid. Press button  . dividually from the inside by pulling the in- Open the sliding door. ››› page 119. side door handle. If necessary, pull the door release lever twice. Please note: depending on the selected func- ● The driver door cannot be locked when tion in the central locking submenu Conven- open. This avoids locking the vehicle key in- ience, you may push the button twice  side the vehicle when there is nobody inside. ›››  page 26 to unlock all doors and the boot hatch. The vehicle key only locks and unlocks the vehicle if it is within range of the vehicle and if the batteries have enough power. When Fig. 130 In the driver door: central locking locking, the vehicle's turn signals will blink. button

If the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot Push the ››› Fig. 130 button: be locked with the key. If you unlock the vehicle without opening any doors or the rear lid,  Unlocking the vehicle. it will lock again automatically after a few seconds. This function prevents the vehicle  Locking the vehicle. from remaining unlocked if the unlocking button is pressed by mistake. The central locking button is still operative when the ignition is switched off. Convenience open/close function The central locking button is only deactivated ● See "Electric windows: functions" if the deadlock is activated ››› page 117. ››› page 125. Please note the following when you use the ● See "Panoramic sliding sunroof: operation" central locking button to lock your vehicle: ››› page 126. ● Do not turn on the deadlock ››› page 117. ● Do not turn on the anti-theft alarm. ● It will not be possible to open the doors or the rear lid from the outside. This may offer 114 Opening and closing

Locking and unlocking the vehicle valid vehicle key is required to be in an area The vehicle will lock again after a few sec- with Keyless Access near ››› Fig. 131 the vehicle and one of the onds if you unlock the vehicle but fail to open sensor surfaces to be touched on the door any door or boot hatch. handles ››› Fig. 132. Unlocking and opening the doors (Keyless-

General information Entry) data Technical If a valid key is located in the proximity of the ● Grip the door handle. In doing this, the car ››› Fig. 131, the Keyless Access lock and sensor surface ››› Fig. 132 A (arrow) is ignition system gives the key entry as soon touched on the handle and the vehicle un- as one of the sensor surfaces on the door locks. Advice handles is touched or the push button on the ● Open the door. boot hatch is operated. The following features are then available without having to On vehicles without a "safe" system: locking Fig. 131 Keyless Access locking and ignition use the vehicle key actively: and unlocking doors (Keyless-Exit) system: in the proximity of the car. ● Keyless-Entry: unlocking of the vehicle with ● Switch the ignition off. the handles on the four doors or the button ● Close the driver's door.

located on the boot hatch. Operation ● Touch the surface sensor B once (arrow) ● Keyless-Go: engine ignition and driving. For on the door handle. The door being operated this to occur, there has to be a valid key in- must be closed. side the vehicle and the ignition push button needs to be pressed ››› page 182. On vehicles with a "safe" security system: ● Keyless-Exit: unlocking of the vehicle with locking and unlocking doors (Keyless-Exit) one of the four door handle. ● Switch the ignition off. Emergencies The central locking and locking systems oper- ● Close the driver's door. Fig. 132 Keyless Access locking and ignition ate in the same way as a normal locking and ● Touch the surface sensor B once (arrow) system: sensor surface A for unlocking in- unlocking system. Only the controls change. on the door handle. The vehicle locks with side the door handle and sensor surface B Unlocking the vehicle is confirmed with a the "safe" security system ››› page 117. The for locking on the exterior of the handle. double flash of the indicator lights; locking door being operated must be closed. Safety by a single flash. ● Touch the sensor surface B twice (arrow) Keyless Access is a key-free locking and igni- on the door handle to lock the vehicle with- tion system to unlock and lock the vehicle out the "safe" security system . without actively using its key. For this, only a ››› page 117 » 115 Operation

Unlocking and locking the boot hatch locked (e.g. by the branches of a bush rub- one of the handle permanently activates, all When the vehicle is locked, the hatch auto- bing against it), all proximity sensors are dis- windows will close. If the water jet or steam matically unlocks on opening if ››› Fig. 131 abled for a time. If this only happens with the is briefly moved away from the sensor sur- there is a valid vehicle key in the proximity. exterior sensor on the driver's door, only this face A on one of the handles and then poin- sensor is disabled. ted at it again, all the windows will probably Open or close the hatch normally open ››› page 116, Convenience functions. ››› page 122. Sensors will again be enabled: After closing, the hatch locks automatically. ● After a time. Note In the following instances, the rear lid does ● OR: if the vehicle is unlocked with the but- ● If the vehicle battery has little or no charge, not lock automatically after closing: ton  on the key. or the vehicle key battery is almost or entire- ly out of charge, it is likely that the vehicle ● If the entire vehicle is unlocked. ● OR: if the boot is opened. will not be able to be lock or unlocked with ● If the key used last is inside the vehicle. All the Keyless Access system. The vehicle can Convenience functions vehicle indicator lights flash four times. The be unlocked or locked manually ››› page 89. vehicle will lock again after a few seconds if To close all electric windows, the sun roof ● If there is no valid key inside the vehicle or no door or boot hatch are opened. and electric tilting panoramic roof with the the system fails to detect one, a warning will convenience feature, keep your finger for a display on the dash panel screen. This could Locking the vehicle with a second key few seconds on the lock sensor surface happen if any other radio frequency signal in- ››› Fig. 132 B located on the exterior part of terferes with the key signal (e.g. from a mo- If there is a vehicle key inside the vehicle and the driver or passenger door handle until the bile device accessory) or if the key is covered it is locked from the outside with a second windows and roof close. by another object (e.g. an aluminium case). vehicle key, the key inside the vehicle is ● If the sensors are very dirty, e.g. have a lay- blocked for engine ignition ››› page 182. In Opening the doors by touching the sensor er of salt, how the sensors on the door han- order to enable engine ignition, the button  surface on the handle takes places in accord- dles operate may be affected. If this is the ance with the settings activated on the menu on the key inside the vehicle needs to be case, wash the vehicle ››› page 250. pressed ››› Fig. 129. Configuration - Convenience ›››  page 26. ● If the vehicle is equipped with an automatic gearbox, it may only be locked in the gear Automatically disabling sensors stick is in position P. CAUTION If the vehicle is not locked or unlocked for a long period of time, the proximity sensor on The sensor surfaces on the door handles the passenger door is automatically disa- could engage if hit with a water jet or high bled. pressure steam if there is a valid vehicle key in the nearby area. If at least one of the win- If the exterior sensor on the door handle is dows is open and the sensor surface B on often activated unusually with the vehicle 116 Opening and closing

"Safe" security system ● Switch the ignition on. When does the system trigger an alarm? ● Press the ignition push button of the The anti-theft alarm siren will be triggered for Function Necessary operations Keyless Access lock and ignition system. about 30 seconds accompanied by optical warning signals for about five minutes when Locks the vehicle with Press the  button once on When the “safe” security system is disabled, the vehicle is locked and the following unau-

the "Safe" security sys- data Technical the vehicle key. tem. the following needs to be taken into account: thorised actions are taken: ● The vehicle can be opened and unlocked Press the  button twice on ● When the door is mechanically unlocked the vehicle key. from the inside using an inside door handle. using the vehicle key without turning the ig- ● The anti-theft alarm is activated. nition within the following 15 seconds. Touch the Keyless Access close and ignition lock sensor ● The vehicle interior monitoring system and ● A door is opened. Advice Locks the vehicle with- surface located on the exteri- the anti-tow system are disabled. out the "Safe" security ● The bonnet is opened. or part of the door handle system. ● twice ››› page 115. WARNING The rear lid is opened. ● When the ignition is switched on with a Press the central locking but- Careless use of the “Safe” security system ton  on the driver door can cause serious injury. non-authorised key. once. ● Never leave anybody inside the vehicle if it ● When the vehicle battery is disconnected. Operation Depending on the vehicle, when disabling has been locked using the key. When the ● When there is movement inside the vehicle "Safe" security system is activated, doors the ignition, a warning on the dash panel (vehicles with interior monitoring). cannot be opened from the inside! screen may display stating that the "safe" se- ● When the vehicle is towed (vehicles with curity system is activated (Lock SAFE or ● When the doors are locked, it is difficult to anti-tow system) get to passengers in the vehicle interior in SAFELOCK). case of an emergency. Passengers could re- ● When the vehicle is lifted (vehicles with an- main trapped inside and unable to unlock the ti-tow system). Disabling the "safe" security system Emergencies doors in case of an emergency. ● Transporting the vehicle on a ferry or by The "safe" security system may be disable in railroad (vehicles with an anti-tow system or one of the following ways: interior monitoring). ● Press the button  on the vehicle key Anti-theft alarm ● Unhitch a trailer connected to the anti-theft alarm ››› page 234. twice. Safety The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to ● Touch the Keyless Access close and igni- break into the vehicle or steal it. How to turn OFF the alarm tion lock sensor surface located on the exteri- or part of the door handle twice ››› page 115. The anti-theft alarm is automatically turned Unlock the vehicle with the unlocking button on when the vehicle is locked with the key. on the key or turn on the ignition with a valid » 117 Operation

key. On vehicles with the Keyless Access sys- Vehicle interior monitoring system Switching off the interior monitoring and the tem, the alarm can also be disabled by grasp- and anti-tow system* anti-tow systems ing the door handle ››› page 115. The interior monitoring is switched off by pressing the remote control lock button  Note twice. ● The alarm will be triggered once more when anybody enters the same zone of surveillance ● Lock all doors and rear lid. or any other zone. If, for example, after open- ● Use the key to lock the vehicle. The interior ing a door, the rear lid is also opened. monitoring and / or anti-towing alarm are ● The anti-theft alarm is not activated when switched off until the next time the vehicle is the vehicle is locked from within using the locked. central locking button  . ● If the driver door is unlocked mechanically To turn off the interior monitoring and anti- tow systems before unlocking the vehicle, for with the key, only the driver door is unlocked, Fig. 133 On the roof console: interior moni- the rest of the doors remain locked. Only toring sensors example in the following situations: when the ignition has been turned on will the ● When leaving animals inside the vehicle  other doors be available - but not unlocked - The interior monitoring system triggers the ››› page 112. and the central locking button will be activa- alarm if the vehicle is locked and movement ted. is detected inside the vehicle. The anti-tow ● When the vehicle must be loaded. ● If the vehicle battery is run down or flat system triggers the alarm if the vehicle is ● When the vehicle is being transported, for then the anti-theft alarm will not operate cor- locked when the system detects the vehicle example, by ferry. rectly. is being raised. ● When the vehicle must be towed with the axle raised. Switching on the interior monitoring and the anti-tow systems Risk of false alarms Close the storage compartment ››› Fig. 133 The interior monitoring system will only oper- 1 on the roof console, otherwise the interior ate correctly if the vehicle is completely monitoring function (arrow) is not guaran- closed. Observe legal requirements. The teed to work freely. alarm may be accidentally triggered in the Use the key to lock the vehicle. If the anti- following cases: theft alarm is turned on, the interior monitor- ● When a window is completely or partially ing and the anti-tow systems are also activa- open. ted. 118 Opening and closing

● If the sunglasses storage compartment in ● When closing, ensure that the door has screen instead of the warning lamp. The indi- the roof console is open. closed correctly. A closed door should be cation is also visible when the ignition is ● When the panoramic sliding sunroof is flush with the corresponding parts of the switched off. The indication disappears completely or partially open. bodywork. around 15 seconds after the vehicle has been locked. ● When suspended objects are hung from ● Open and close doors only when nobody is Technical data Technical the interior mirror (air freshener) or there are in the way of the door. loose papers in the vehicle. ● If the separation net is fitted and moves WARNING Sliding doors (due to heating). A door held open by its retainer could be

● Due to a vibrating mobile telephone inside blown closed by the wind or close if the vehi- Introduction Advice the vehicle. cle is on a hill, causing injury. ● When opening and closing doors, always WARNING use the door handle. Note If a sliding door is not correctly closed, it Upon activating the alarm, if any door or the could open unexpectedly when driving and rear lid is open, only the anti-theft alarm will cause serious injuries. be activated. The interior monitoring and an- Warning lamp ● Stop immediately and close it. ti-tow systems will only be activated when ● When closing, ensure that the sliding door Operation the doors and rear lid are fully closed.  It lights up has closed correctly. A closed sliding door should be flush with the corresponding parts  At least one vehi- Stop driving immediately! of the bodywork. cle door is open or Open the corresponding door and Doors not correctly shut. close it immediately. ● Only open and close sliding doors when no body is in the way of the door. Several warning and control lamps light up Introduction Emergencies for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- WARNING ed on, signalling that the function is being WARNING verified. They will switch off after a few sec- If a sliding door is not fully open, it could close unexpectedly and cause serious inju- If a door is not correctly closed, it could open onds. ries. unexpectedly when driving and cause serious

injuries. If a door is open or incorrectly closed, the ● Always open the sliding door fully. » Safety warning lamp  or  on the instrument pan- ● Always stop immediately and close the el will light up. door. Depending on the vehicle equipment, a symbol may be displayed on the dash panel 119 Operation

WARNING Function Necessary operations Function Necessary operations

Opening sliding doors while driving is dan- Opening the When the sliding door is released, Press the ››› Fig. 135 button on the dash gerous. These doors may be pushed open or sliding door open the door fully by pulling on its panel, on the remote control key and on closed when the vehicle accelerates or brakes from the inside. interior handle ››› Fig. 134 1 . the interior lining of the sliding door. The and cause serious injuries. sliding door opens with the rollback anti- Pull on the inside or outside door Opens the ● Never open the sliding doors when the ve- sliding door trap function as long as the button is not Closing the slid- handle and close the sliding door by pressed again. hicle is in movement. ing door. pushing gently. Make sure that it is electrically. completely closed. Pull briefly on the interior or exterior handle the door. The sliding door opens au- Manually opening and closing the tomatically. sliding door Electric opening and closing of the Press the ››› Fig. 135 button on the dash panel, on the remote control key and on sliding door* the interior lining of the sliding door. The sliding door closes with the rollback anti- Closing the trap function as long as the button is not sliding door pressed again. As it closes, a warning electrically. sound is given. Pull briefly on the interior or exterior door handle. The sliding door closes with the roll-back function. As it closes, a warning sound is given.

Note ● When the fuel tank flap is open, the right- Fig. 135 On the dash panel, on the remote hand side electric sliding door is locked and Fig. 134 On the sliding door. door handle 1 control key and on the interior lining of the can only be opened manually. sliding door: button for opening and closing ● If the window of a sliding door is lowered the electric sliding door. Function Necessary operations them this door cannot open fully.

Open the sliding When the sliding door is released, All of the electric sliding doors can be door from the in- open the door fully by pulling on the opened and closed manually using more side. outside handle. force.

120 Opening and closing

Rollback anti-trap function of the elec- ● The anti-trap function does not prevent fin- Turning on and off the electric child safety tric sliding doors gers or other parts of the body getting Function Necessary operations pinched against the window frame and caus- The rollback anti-trap function of the electric ing injury. To switch sys- Press the button ››› Fig. 136 1 or sliding doors can reduce the risk of injury tem on: 2 . when opening and closing the sliding doors data Technical . To switch sys- Press the button again. ››› Electric child safety lock tem off: If an object gets in the way of the sliding door while it is closing, it will open again. The yellow control lamp  indicates that the feature is on for the corresponding button.

If an object gets in the way of the sliding Advice door while it is opening, the door will be im- WARNING mobilised at this point. When the electric child safety function is acti- ● Check the reason for which the sliding door vated, the sliding door can be opened from does not open or close. the outside only. ● Try to open or close the sliding door again. ● Never leave children or disabled people alone in the vehicle if the doors are to be Operation To close the sliding door without the rollback locked. Therefore, passengers will be locked Fig. 136 In the driver door: electric child safe- inside the vehicle. They could be trapped in anti-trap function ty locks buttons the car in an emergency and will not be able ● Turn off the ignition and turn it on again. to get themselves to safety. Individuals ● Press and hold the  ››› Fig. 135 button. The electric child safety lock avoids opening locked in the vehicle can be exposed to very The sliding door closes with full force. and locking of the sliding door and its elec- high or very low temperatures. tric windows from the inside so that children ● Depending on the time of the year, temper- Emergencies WARNING cannot accidentally open the door while the atures inside a locked and closed vehicle can vehicle is being driven. Using the left-hand be extremely high or extremely low resulting Closing the electric windows without the an- ››› Fig. 136 1 or right-hand side 2 button, in serious injuries and illness or even death, ti-trap function can cause serious injury. the childproof lock is activated on the left- or particularly for young children. ● Always close the sliding doors carefully. right-hand side respectively.

● Nobody should ever get in the way of the Safety electric sliding doors, especially when closing without the anti-trap function.

121 Operation

Rear lid cle. Ensure that nobody remains inside the Warning lamp vehicle. Introduction ● Never allow children to play inside or  It lights up around the vehicle without supervision, espe- The rear lid is open  Stop driving immediately! Read the additional information carefully cially if the rear lid is open. Children could or not correctly Open the rear lid and close it enter the luggage compartment, close the ›››  page 10 shut. again. rear lid and become trapped. Depending on the time of the year, temperatures inside a WARNING Several warning and control lamps light up locked and closed vehicle can be extremely Careless and unsuitable locking, opening and high or extremely low resulting in serious infor a few seconds when the ignition is switch- closing of the rear lid can cause accidents juries and illness or even death, particularly ed on, signalling that the function is being and serious injury. for young children. verified. They will switch off after a few seconds. ● Open and close the rear lid only when no- ● Never leave children or disabled people body is in the way. alone in the vehicle. If the vehicle key or the A warning lamp appears on the dash panel ● Do not close the rear lid by pushing it down central locking button is used, they may be  if the boot hatch is open or not properly with your hand on the rear window. This locked in the vehicle. closed. could break and cause injury. Depending on the vehicle equipment, a sym- ● Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing, WARNING bol may be displayed on the dash panel otherwise, it may open unexpectedly while screen instead of the warning lamp. The indi- driving. A closed rear lid should be flush with Unsuitable or careless unlocking and opening the corresponding parts of the bodywork. of the rear lid could cause serious injuries. cation is also visible when the ignition is ● switched off. The indication disappears ● If there is a loaded luggage carrier on the Always keep the rear lid closed while driv- around 15 seconds after the vehicle has ing to avoid toxic gases entering the vehicle rear lid, it could be unlocked or open but not been locked. interior. recognised as such. An unlocked or open rear lid could open unexpectedly while driving. ● Do not open the rear lid when there is a WARNING load carrier installed. Likewise, the boot hatch cannot be opened when a load is at- CAUTION If the rear lid is not correctly closed, it could open unexpectedly when driving and cause tached to it, for example bicycles. An open Before opening the rear lid, ensure that there serious injuries. rear lid could close itself if there is an addi- is sufficient free space to open and close it, tional weight on it. If necessary, press down for example if you are towing a trailer or in a ● Always stop immediately and close the rear on the rear lid and remove the load. garage. lid. ● Close and lock both the rear lid and all the ● Ensure that the rear lid has been locked in- other doors when you are not using the vehi- to place by the element on the lock carrier when you close it.

122 Opening and closing

Note matically after 30 seconds. This function pre- Opening the rear lid electronically vents the vehicle from remaining unlocked if At outside temperatures of less than 0°C the unlocking button is pressed by mistake. (+32°F), the pressurised gas struts cannot always automatically lift the rear lid. In this Locking is only possible when the rear lid is case, open the rear lid manually. correctly and fully closed. Technical data Technical ● The rear lid is also locked by a central locking. Closing the rear lid ● If the vehicle rear lid is locked or unlocked using the  button, when it is closed once more it will lock automatically. Advice ● A closed but not locked rear lid will lock automatically at a speed above about 9 km/h Fig. 138 Button with rear lid open (7 mph). Opening the rear lid WARNING ● Press and hold the  button on the vehicle key until the rear lid opens automatically.

Unsuitable or careless closing and locking of Operation the rear lid could cause serious injuries. ● OR: press and hold the  button on the ● Never leave the vehicle unattended, or al- centre console for approximately 1 second Fig. 137 Rear lid open: hand grip low children to play inside or around the vehi- ›››  Fig. 6. cle without supervision, especially if the rear ● OR: press the ›››  Fig. 7 boot hatch but- Closing the rear lid lid is open. Children could enter the luggage ton (arrow). ● Grab the handgrip inside the rear lid compartment, close the rear lid and become

››› Fig. 137 (arrow). trapped. A locked vehicle can be subjected to In case of difficulty or obstruction, automatic Emergencies extremely high and low temperatures, de- opening of the rear lid is interrupted. ● Push the rear lid downwards until it locks pending on the time of year, thus causing se- into place in the lock. rious injuries/illness and even death. Electronically opening the rear lid does not work when a trailer is electrically connected ● Ensure that it is correctly closed by pulling and hitched to a factory fitted tow hitch on it firmly. Note ››› page 234. Safety Before closing the rear lid, make sure that the The rear lid can be opened manually by ap- Locking the rear lid key has not been left inside the luggage complying more force. If you unlock the vehicle without opening any partment. » doors or the rear lid, it will lock again auto- 123 Operation

Closing the rear lid Memorising the opening angle compartment, close the rear lid and become ● Press and hold the  button on the vehi- The rear lid must be at least half open to trapped. A locked vehicle can be subjected to cle key for approximately 1 second. memorise an opening angle. extremely high and low temperatures, depending on the time of year, resulting in seri- ●  OR: press and hold the button on the ● Stop automatic opening in the opening po- ous injuries/illness or even death. centre console for approximately 1 second sition required ››› page 124. ›››  Fig. 6. ● Hold down the button ››› Fig. 138 with the WARNING ● press the OR: ›››  Fig. 7 boot hatch but- rear lid open for at least three seconds. The ton (arrow). It is possible that the rear lid does not open opening angle is memorised. completely or, if it is open, closes alone if a ●  Press the button on the open rear lid large amount of snow has built up on it or if a Memorisation is confirmed by blinking of the ››› Fig. 138 ››› . luggage rack is fitted. In this case, the rear lid hazard warning lights and an audible warn- ● Manually push the rear lid down to close it. must be supported. ing. The rear lid will move down to the closed po- To fully open the boot hatch again, the open- CAUTION sition to close and lock itself automatically ing angle must be memorised once more. using the power-close feature ››› . ● When using a trailer, ensure that there is ● Release the rear lid and open it to the sufficient space to open and close the rear In case of difficulty or obstruction, automatic memorised height. lid. closing of the rear lid is interrupted and it will ● Before opening the rear lid, any kind of open slightly. ● Push the rear lid all the way up. To do this, apply a little more force. equipment carrier should be removed, for ex- Check why the rear lid could not close. ample a bicycle carrier. ● Hold down the button ››› Fig. 138 with the Attempt to close it once more. rear lid open for at least three seconds. CAUTION ● The opening angle is reset to the original Interrupting the opening and closing process factory setting. In case of repeated short-term use, the sys- Rear lid opening and closing can be stopped tem is turned off to avoid overheating. by pressing one of the  buttons. Each time WARNING ● When it has cooled, it may be used once one of the  buttons is pressed, the rear lid again. During this time, the rear lid may be Unsuitable or careless closing and locking of moves to its initial position. manually opened or closed applying a little the rear lid could cause serious injuries. more effort. Then, it can be opened or closed by hand. To ● Never leave the vehicle unattended, or al- ● If the vehicle battery is disconnected or the do this, apply a little more force. low children to play inside or around the vehi- fuse blows when the rear lid is open, the rear cle without supervision, especially if the rear lid system must be re-initialised. To do this, lid is open. Children could enter the luggage close the rear lid.

124 Opening and closing

Note For the one-touch closing function: pull the ● Keep the vehicle unlocking or locking but- button for the corresponding window up- ton pressed. All windows which function elec- Before closing the rear lid, make sure that the wards until it reaches the second position. trically will be either opened or closed. key has not been left inside the luggage compartment. For the one-touch opening function: push the ● To interrupt the function, release the lock- button for the corresponding window down- ing or unlocking button. wards until it reaches the second position. data Technical During convenience closing, first the win- Electric windows To stop the one touch function: push or pull dows and then the sliding sunroof will be on the button of the corresponding window. closed. Electric windows: functions In the Configuration - convenience

Resetting one-touch opening and closing Advice menu, there are different settings for operat- Read the additional information carefully The one-touch opening and closing function ing the windows ›››  page 26. ›››  page 11 is not active after the vehicle battery has been disconnected or is flat and will have to After turning off the ignition, the windows WARNING be reset. can be opened and closed for a short time Careless use of the electric windows can using the buttons on the door as long as the ● Close all windows and doors. cause serious injury. driver door or passenger side door is not ● ● Pull the button of the corresponding win- Only operate the electric windows when Operation open. When the key is removed from the igni- nobody is in the way. dow and hold it for one second in this position and the driver door is open, all of the tion. ● Never leave children or disabled people electric windows can be opened or closed at alone in the vehicle if the doors are to be ● the same time keeping the button on the Release the button and pull upwards and locked. The windows cannot be opened in driver’s door pressed down. After a few sec- hold again. The one-touch function is now case of an emergency. ready for operation. onds, the convenience opening or closing ● Always take all the keys with you whenever function will begin page 125.

››› Emergencies The automatic one-touch electric windows you leave the vehicle. After turning off the ig- can be reinitialised individually or several at nition, the windows can be opened and One-touch opening and closing closed for a short time using the buttons on a time. The one-touch automatic opening and clos- the door as long as the driver door or passenger side door is not open. ing is used to open or close the windows Convenience opening/closing ● When transporting children in the rear

completely. It will not be necessary to hold Safety The electric windows can be opened or the button of the corresponding electric win- seats, always deactivate the rear electric win- closed from outside using the vehicle key: dow. dows with the child safety lock so that they cannot be opened and closed. »

125 Operation

Note To close windows without the anti-trap func- Panoramic sliding sunroof* tion The one-touch function and roll-back function will not work if there is a malfunction in the ● Attempt to close the corresponding electric Panoramic sliding sunroof: operating electric windows. Visit an authorised work- window within 10 seconds after by holding shop. the button. The window is closed without the Read the additional information carefully anti-trap function, deactivated for a short ›››  page 12 time. The panoramic sliding sunroof will only work Roll-back function on electric win- ● After more than 10 seconds, the anti-trap with the ignition on. It can be opened or dows function is reactivated. The window will stop closed for a few minutes after the ignition once again if there is another difficulty or ob- has been switched off, provided the driver The anti-trap function of the electric windows stacle. door and the front passenger door are not can reduce the risk of injury when opening ● If the window will still not close, visit a spe- opened. and closing the electric windows ››› . If a cialised workshop. window is not able to close because it is stiff Convenience open/close function or because of an obstruction, it will automati- WARNING The panoramic sliding sunroof can be cally open again. Closing the electric windows without the an- opened or closed from outside the vehicle ● Check why the window does not close. ti-trap function can cause serious injury. using the vehicle key: ● Always close the electric windows careful- ● Attempt to close the window again. ● Keep the vehicle unlocking or locking but- ly. ● If you try within the following 10 seconds ton pressed. The panoramic sliding sunroof ● Nobody should be in the way of the electric and the window closes with difficulty or there is adjusted or closes. windows, especially when the anti-trap func- is an obstruction once again, the one-touch tion is deactivated. ● Release the unlock or lock button to stop closing will stop working for 10 seconds. the function. ● The anti-trap function does not prevent fin- ● If the window is still obstructed, it will stop gers or other parts of the body getting at the corresponding position. When the but- During convenience closing, first the win- pinched against the window frame and caus- dows and then the panoramic sliding sunroof ton is operated within 10 seconds, the win- ing injury. will be closed. dow will close without the anti-trap function ››› . Note WARNING The anti-trap function also operates if the Careless or uncontrolled use of the panoram- windows are closed from the outside of the ic sliding sunroof can cause serious injuries. vehicle using the ignition key for convenience closing ››› page 125. 126 Opening and closing

● Only close the panoramic sliding sunroof Opening or closing the sun blind Anti-trap function of the panoramic and the sun blind when nobody is in the way. sliding sunroof and the sun blind ● Always take all the keys with you whenever you leave the vehicle. The anti-trap function reduces the risk of injury when opening and closing the panoram- ● Never leave children or disabled persons in Technical data Technical the vehicle, particularly if they have access to ic sliding sunroof and sun blind ››› . When the keys. Uncontrolled use of the key could they encounter an obstacle while closing, lock the vehicle, start the engine, turn on the they reopen. ignition and operate the panoramic sliding ● sunroof. Check why the panoramic sliding sunroof or the sun blind did not close. ● The panoramic sliding sunroof can be oper- Advice ated for up to about ten minutes after the ig- ● Attempt to close the panoramic sliding nition has been switched off, provided the Fig. 139 On the interior roof lining: switches sunroof or sun blind once again. driver door and the front passenger door are for the sun blind ● If the panoramic sliding sunroof or sun not opened. blind is still obstructed, it will stop at the cor- Function Necessary operations responding position. Close it without the an- Note ti-trap function.

To open com- Operation ● In case of a fault in the operation of the pletely (automat- Press button ››› Fig. 139 1 briefly. panoramic sliding sunroof, the anti-trap func- ic): Closing without the roll-back function tion will not operate correctly. Visit a special- ● The switch ›››  Fig. 13 should be in the To stop automatic Briefly press the button ››› Fig. 139 ised workshop. “closed” position 1 . operation: 1 o ››› Fig. 139 2 . ● The rotary button of the panoramic sliding ● Panoramic sliding sunroof: within five sec- sunroof remains in the last position selected Hold the button ››› Fig. 139 1 To set the inter- onds of triggering the anti-trap function, pull if the roof is closed using convenience clos- or ››› Fig. 139 2 until the required mediate position: the control all the way back ›››  Fig. 13 (ar- Emergencies ing from outside the vehicle, and will have to position is reached. row 5 ) until the panoramic sliding sunroof be re-positioned the next time you drive. To close com- closes fully. pletely (automat- Press button ››› Fig. 139 2 briefly. ● ic): Sun blind: Within 5 seconds of triggering the anti-trap function, push button

The panoramic sliding sunroof can be operat- ››› Fig. 139 2 until the sun blind closes com- Safety ed for up to about ten minutes after the igni- pletely. tion has been switched off, provided the driv- ● The panoramic sliding sunroof or sun blind er door and the front passenger door are not closes without the anti-trap function. » opened. 127 Operation

● If the panoramic sliding sunroof still cannot Lights and visibility  It lights up be closed, visit a specialised workshop. Left or right turn sig- WARNING Lights nal. The control lamp If necessary, check the vehicle Closing the panoramic sliding sunroof or sun flashes twice as fast and trailer lighting. blind without the anti-trap function can cause Control lamps when a vehicle or serious injuries. trailer turn signal is ● Always close the panoramic sliding sunroof  It lights up faulty. carefully. Replace the corresponding bulb ● Nobody should be in the way of the panor- ››› page 91.  It lights up Driving light totally or amic sliding sunroof or sun blind, especially If all the bulbs are OK, the vehi- partially faulty. Main beam on or cle should be taken to a speci- ››› page 129. when they are closed without the anti-trap flasher on. function. alised workshop if necessary. ● The anti-trap function does not prevent fin- Fault in adaptive ››› page 130.  It lights up gers or other parts of the body getting light. pinched against the window frame and caus- Headlight adjustment ing injury. ››› page 129.  Flashes (Light Assist) on.

Note Fault in the adaptive Contact a specialised workshop Several warning and control lamps light up light system. ››› page 129. for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- The anti-trap function is activated if the win- ed on, signalling that the function is being dows and the panoramic sliding sunroof are  It lights up verified. They will switch off after a few sec- closed from the outside of the vehicle using onds. the ignition key for convenience closing Rear fog light switch- ››› page 125. ››› page 24. ed on. WARNING Observe the safety warnings ››› in Control  It lights up and warning lamps on page 105. Front fog lights ››› page 24. switched on Switching lights on and off

Read the additional information carefully ›››  page 24

128 Lights and visibility

The legal requirements regarding the use of WARNING turn signals are switched on, the active part vehicle lights in each country must be ob- stops flashing and only flashes once in the If the headlights are set too high and the served. new part selected. main beam is not used correctly, there is a The driver is personally responsible for the risk of dazzling or distracting other road ● The turn signal only works when the igni- correct use and adjustment of the lights in all users. This could result in a serious accident. tion is switched on. The hazard warning lights also work when the ignition is switch- data Technical situations. ● Always make sure that the headlights are ed off ››› page 82. In vehicles with tow hitch fitted as standard: correctly adjusted. ● If a turn signal on the vehicle or trailer is ● Never use the main beam or headlight if the trailer is connected electrically and is faulty, the warning lamp flashes twice as fast flasher when it can dazzle others on the road. fitted with a rear fog light, the vehicle’s fog as usual.

light is automatically switched off. Advice ● The main beam headlights can only be switched on if the dipped beam headlights Audible warnings to advise the driver that Turn signal and main beam lever are already on. the lights have not been switched off If the key is not in the ignition and the driver Read the additional information carefully ›››  page 25 door is open, an audible warning signal is Lights and visibility: functions heard in the following cases: this is a remind-

Convenience turn signals Operation er to turn off the lights. Parking light  For the convenience turn signals, move the When the parking light is switched on, (right ● When the parking light is on ››› page 129. lever as far as possible upwards or down- or left turn signal), the front side light and ● When the light switch is in position . wards and release the lever. The turn signal the rear light on the corresponding side of will flash three times. the vehicle stay lit. The parking lights will on- WARNING The control turn signals are switched on and ly work with the ignition off. The side lights or daytime driving lights are

off from the menu Lights & Visibility Emergencies not bright enough to illuminate the road on the instrument panel display Daytime running lights ahead and to ensure that other road users are  page 26. This function can be discon- ››› The daytime running lights reduce the risk of able to see you. nected at a specialised workshop for those accidents by increasing the visibility of the ● Always use your dipped beam head lights if vehicles which do not have the menu vehicle. These are independent lights that it is raining or if visibility is poor. Lights & Visibility.

are built into the headlights and come on Safety each time the ignition is turned on if the light Note switch is in position  or 0. » ● If the convenience turn signals are operating (three flashes) and the other convenience 129 Operation

When the light switch is in position , a Static cornering lights Headlight adjustment photo sensor automatically turns the instru- When turning slowly to change direction or ment and switch lighting on and off. going round a tight bend, the static cornering Headlight adjustment (Light Assist) lights automatically come on. The static cor- The headlight adjustment automatically con- Automatic dipped beam control  nering lights only work at speeds of less than nects and disconnects these lights depend- The automatic dipped beam control is merely 40 km/h (25 mph). ing on the environmental and traffic conditions and on the speed, within the limitations intended as an aid and is not able to recog- The static cornering lights may be incorpora- of the system ››› . This is monitored by a nise all driving situations. ted into the fog lights or the front headlights, sensor located on the inside of the wind- When the light switch is in position , the depending upon the equipment. screen, above the interior rear vision mirror. vehicle lights and the instrument panel and switch lighting switch on and off automatical- WARNING The automatic headlight adjustment auto- ly in the following situations ››› : If the road is not well lit and other road users matically switches on the lights depending cannot see the vehicle well enough or at all, on the vehicles travelling in front and in the Automatic switching Automatic switching accidents may occur. opposite direction, and on other environmental and traffic conditions from an approxi- on off or switch to day- ● The automatic dipped beam control () time running lighting only switches on the dipped beam when mate speed of 60 km/h (37 mph) and turns there are no changes in brightness, and not, them off again at speeds below approximate- The photo sensor detects When adequate lighting is ly 30 km/h (18 mph). darkness, for example, detected. for example when it is foggy. when driving through a ● Never drive with daytime lights if the road tunnel. is not well lit due to weather or lighting con- Switching on and off ditions. Daytime lights do not provide The rain sensor detects When the windscreen wip- Action enough light to illuminate the road properly rain and activates the er has been inactive for a or be seen by other road users. windscreen wipers. few minutes. Switch- – With the ignition on, turn the lights control  ● The rear lights do not come on with the ing on: to the position and put the turn signal and main beam lever in the main beam posi- daytime driving light. A vehicle which does Adaptive headlights (AFS) tion ››› page 129. When the headlight adjust- not have the rear lights on may not be visible ment (automatic lights also) is activated, the The adaptive headlights only operate when to other drivers in the darkness, if it is rain- warning lamp lights up in the dash panel the dipped beam is on and at speeds of over ing or in conditions of poor visibility. display . 10 km/h (6 mph). On bends, the adaptive headlights automatically improve lighting on the road ahead. The adaptive headlights can be switched on and off from the infotainment system. 130 Lights and visibility

Switch- – Disconnect the on button. WARNING “Coming home”: necessary operations ing off: – OR: turn the lights control to a different position to  ››› page 128. The greater comfort that the headlight ad- – Switch off the ignition. – OR: place the turn signal and main beam justment provides (automatic also) must not – Briefly flash the headlights for approxi- lever in the headlight flasher or main beam cause you to take risks. The system is not a mately one second ››› page 129. position ››› page 129. replacement for driver awareness. To switch The “Coming home” lighting comes on Technical data Technical ● Always monitor the lights yourself and ad- system on: when the driver door is opened. The delay The following conditions can cause the head- just them depending on the light, visibility in switching off the headlights is counted from when the last door or boot hatch is light adjustment to fail to turn off the main and traffic conditions. closed. beam or fail to do so in time: ● The headlight adjustment (automatic also) may not correctly detect all situations and in – Automatically at the end of the delay pe- ● Advice On roads with insufficient lighting with very certain situations may only provide limited riod. reflective signs function. – Automatically, if 30 seconds after com- To switch ing on, a vehicle door or the boot hatch re- ● If road users are insufficiently lit up, e.g. ● If the windscreen is damaged or modifica- system off: mains open. pedestrians or cyclists. tions are made to the vehicle lighting, this – When the light switch is turned to posi- ● On closed curves, when the traffic in the may harm the functioning of the headlight tion . opposite direction is partially hidden, on pro- adjustment (automatic lights also), for exam- – When the ignition is switched on. nounced slopes ple, if additional headlight are fitted. Operation ● On roads with traffic in the opposite direc- “Leaving home”: necessary operations Note tion and with a central reservation barrier – Unlock the vehicle when the light switch To switch where the driver can see through gaps or Main beam and flashed headlights can be is in position  and the photo sensor system on: over it e.g. lorry drivers. turned on and off manually at any time with detects darkness. the turn signal and main beam lever ● If the camera is damaged or if the power – Automatically, at the end of the delay ››› page 129. supply has been cut off period. ● In the event of fog, snow or heavy rain To switch – When the vehicle is locked. Emergencies system off: – When the light switch is turned to posi- ● In the event of dust or sand storms “Coming home” and “Leaving home” tion . – When the ignition is switched on. ● If the windscreen is damaged by the impact function (guidance lights) from a stone in the camera's field of vision Lighting around the exterior mirrors ● If the camera's field of vision is misted up, The “Coming home” function should be Safety dirty or covered by a sticker, snow or ice. switched on manually. However the “Leav- The lighting around the exterior mirrors illu- ing home” function is automatically control- minates the door area on entering and leav- led by a photo sensor. ing the vehicles. It comes on when the vehicle is unlocked, when the vehicle door is » 131 Operation

opened and when the “Coming home” or Always fulfil legal requirements for securing a 9. Allow the engine to cool and check if a “Leaving home” function is switched on. If broken down vehicle. In a number of coun- specialist is required. the equipment includes the light sensor, the tries it is now obligatory, for example, to turn lighting around the exterior mirrors only on the hazard warning lights and use a re- If the hazard warning lights are not working, comes when it is dark. flective safety vest ››› page 82. you must use an alternative method of draw- ing attention to your vehicle. This method When being towed with the hazard warning Note must comply with traffic legislation. lights on, a change in direction or traffic lane ● The time taken for the headlights to go off can be indicated as usual using the turn sig- WARNING can be changed in the Lights & Visibil- nal lever. The hazard lights will be interrup- ity menu and the function can be switched ted temporarily. A faulty vehicle in traffic represents a risk of on or off ›››  page 26. accident for the driver and for other road If your vehicle breaks down: users. ● When the “Coming home” function is on, if ● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. the vehicle door is opened there is no audible 1. Park the vehicle a safe distance from warning signal to advise that the light is still Park the vehicle a safe distance from sur- traffic and on suitable ground ››› . on. rounding traffic to lock all the doors in case of 2. Turn on the hazard warning lights with an emergency. Turn on the hazard warning the button  ››› Fig. 140. lights to warn other road users. Hazard warning lights 3. Connect the electronic parking brake ● Never leave children or disabled people ››› page 187. alone in the vehicle if the doors are to be locked. In case of an emergency, passengers 4. Move the selector lever to its intermedi- will be trapped inside the vehicle. Individuals ate position or to P ››› page 192. locked in the vehicle can be exposed to very 5. Stop the engine and remove the key high or very low temperatures. from the ignition ››› page 182. 6. Have all occupants leave the vehicle and WARNING move to safety, for example behind a The components of the exhaust system reach guard rail. very high temperatures. This could cause a 7. When leaving the vehicle, take all keys fire and considerable damage. with you. ● Always park your vehicle so that no part of Fig. 140 In the centre of the dash panel: push 8. Place an emergency warning triangle to the exhaust system can come in contact with button for hazard warning lights. indicate the position of your vehicle to flammable materials (such as dried grass or other road users. fuel). Read the additional information carefully ›››  page 25 132 Lights and visibility

Note hesive strips are used to cover certain parts 1 Instrument and switch lighting of the headlamp cover or the headlights may ● When the headlights are switched on, the The vehicle battery will discharge and run be adjusted at a specialised workshop. For down if the hazard warning lights remain on brightness of the instruments and switch further information, please refer to a special- for too long (even with the ignition turned lighting can be regulated by turning the ised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a off). switch ››› Fig. 141 1 .

technical service. data Technical ● In some vehicles, the brake lights will flash when braking abruptly at speeds of approxi- 2 Headlight range control Note mately 80 km/h (50 mph) to warn vehicles The headlight range control ››› Fig. 141 2 is travelling behind. If braking continues, the Use of the Tourist light option and the modified according to the value of the head- hazard warning lights system will automati- adhesives on the headlights is only allowed if light beam and the vehicle load status. This cally be turned on at a speed of less than ap- they are to be used for a short period of time. Advice offers the driver optimum visibility and the proximately 10 km/h (6 mph). The brake To modify the direction of the headlights per- lights remain lit. Upon accelerating, the haz- manently, please take the vehicle to a speci- headlights do not dazzle oncoming drivers ard warning lights will be automatically alised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a ››› . turned off. technical service centre. The headlights can only be adjusted when the dipped beam is switched on. To reset, turn switch ››› Fig. 141 2 : Adhesive strips for headlights or ad- Headlight range control, lighting of Operation justing headlights the instrument panel and controls Value Vehicle load statusa)

In those countries where vehicles drive on Two front occupants, luggage compart- – the other side of the road to the home coun- ment empty try, the asymmetric dipped beam may dazzle All seats occupied, luggage compartment 1 drivers of oncoming vehicles. Therefore, empty when driving abroad, adhesive strips should Emergencies All seats occupied, luggage compartment be attached to the headlights or the head- 2 lights should be adjusted accordingly. full With trailer and minimum drawbar load Driver only, luggage compartment full With The direction of the headlights can be adjus- 3 ted from the instrument panel, in the Tou- trailer and maximum drawbar load Safety rist light submenu of the Configura- a) If the vehicle load does not correspond to those shown in the tion menu ›››  page 30. Fig. 141 Next to the steering wheel: instru- table, it is possible to select intermediary positions. » ment and switch lighting control 1 and For those vehicles in which it is not possible headlight range control 2 to adjust the headlights from the menu, ad- 133 Operation

Dynamic headlight range control In addition, the lever on the door moulding ● The sun visor can be pulled out of its The control 2 is not mounted in vehicles can also be illuminated. mounting and turned towards the door with dynamic headlight range control. The ››› Fig. 142 1 . headlight range is automatically adjusted ac- Note ● Swing the sun visor towards the door, lon- cording to the vehicle load status when they The reading lights go out when the vehicle is gitudinally backwards. are switched on. locked, or a few minutes after the key is removed from the ignition. This prevents the Vanity mirror light vehicle's battery from discharging. WARNING There may be a vanity mirror, with a cover, on Heavy objects in the back of vehicle may the rear of the sun visor. When the cover is cause headlight dazzle and distract other opened ››› Fig. 142 2 a light comes on. drivers. This could result in a serious acci- Visibility dent. The lamp goes out when the vanity mirror cover is closed or the sun visor is pushed ● Adjust the light beam to the vehicle load Sun visors back up. status so that it does not blind other drivers. WARNING Interior and reading lights Sun visors and sun blinds may reduce visibility when open. Read the additional information carefully ● Always roll or fold sun blinds and visors ›››  page 26 away when not in use.

Storage and luggage compartment lighting Note When the glove compartment and the rear lid The light above the sun visor automatically are opened and closed, a light automatically switches off after a few minutes in certain switches on or off. Fig. 142 Sun visor conditions. This prevents the battery from discharging. Ambient lighting Options for adjusting driver and front passenger sun visors: The ambient lighting in the front covering of the ceiling lights up the controls on the cen- ● Lower the sun visor towards the wind- tre console from above when the side light or screen. dipped beam lights are on.

134 Lights and visibility

Rear side window sun blinds Windscreen wiper and window The antifreeze could freeze on the windscreen wiper systems and reduce visibility.

Control lamp WARNING

Worn or dirty wiper blades reduce visibility data Technical  It lights up and increase the risk of accident and serious injury. Windscreen wip- Top up the windscreen wiper reser- ● Always replace damaged or worn blades or er fluid level too voir as soon as possible blades which do not clean the windscreen low ››› page 280.

correctly. Advice Several warning and control lamps light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- CAUTION ed on, signalling that the function is being In icy conditions, always check that the wiper Fig. 143 On the rear right-hand window: sun verified. They will switch off after a few sec- blades are not frozen to the glass before us- blind onds. ing the wipers for the first time. In cold weather, it may help to leave the vehicle The sun blinds for the vehicle interior are fit- parked with the wipers in service position Operation ted in the side panels of the windows. Window wiper lever ›››  page 54.

● Pull the sun blind by the handle ››› Fig. 143 Read the additional information carefully CAUTION A up to the top. ›››  page 26 If the ignition is switched off while the wind- ● Hook both rings of the fastening rod in the screen wipers are on, the windscreen wipers spaces provided B . Check that the sun blind WARNING carry on wiping at the same level when the Emergencies is securely hooked into the spaces provided Water from the windscreen washer water bot- ignition is switched back on. Ice, snow and when it has been lowered B . tle may freeze on the windscreen if it does other obstacles may damage the windscreen ● To put the sun blind away, unhook it at the not contain enough anti-freeze, reducing for- wiper and the respective motor. top and lower by hand ››› . ward visibility. ● In winter, ensure the windscreen washer Note CAUTION contains enough anti-freeze. Safety ● The windscreen wipers will only function To prevent damage to the blind or the interior ● In cold conditions, you should not use the when the ignition is switched on and the re- trim, do not lower the sun blind “quickly”. wash/wipe system unless you have warmed spective bonnet or rear lid are closed. » the windscreen with the ventilation system.

135 Operation

● The interval wipe speed varies according to Headlight wash/wipe system Rain sensor* the vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle is The headlight washers/wipers clean the moving, the more often the windscreen is headlight lenses. cleaned. After the ignition is switched on, the first and ● The rear wiper is automatically switched on when the windscreen wiper is on and the car every fifth time the windscreen washer is is in reverse gear. switched on, the headlights are also washed. Therefore, the windscreen wiper lever should be pulled towards the steering wheel when the dipped beam or main beam are on. Any Windscreen wiper functions incrusted dirt (such as insects) should be cleaned regularly (e.g. when refuelling). Windscreen wiper performance in different sit- To ensure the headlight washers work cor- uations Fig. 144 Windscreen wiper lever: adjusting rectly in winter, any snow which has got into the rain sensor A If the vehicle the bumper jet supports should be cleaned The activated position provisionally is at a stand- changes to the previous position. away. If necessary, remove snow with an anti- still icing spray. The air conditioner comes on for approximately 30 seconds in air recircula- Note During auto- tion mode to prevent the smell of the matic wipe The wiper will try to wipe away any obstacles windscreen washer fluid entering the that are on the windscreen. The wiper will inside the vehicle. stop moving if the obstacle blocks its path. Intervals between wipes depend on the Remove the obstacle and switch the wiper For the inter- vehicle's speed. The higher the vehicle back on again. val wipe speed the shorter the intervals. Fig. 145 Rain sensor sensitive surface Heated windscreen washer jets The heating only thaws the frozen jets, it The rain sensor controls the frequency of the does not thaw the water in the washer hoses. windscreen wiper intervals, depending on The heated windscreen washer jets automati- the amount of rain ››› . The sensitivity of the cally adjust the heat depending on the ambi- rain sensor can be adjusted manually. Man- ent temperature when the ignition is switch- ual wipe ››› page 135. ed on.

136 Lights and visibility

Move the lever to the required position reduce the effectiveness of the rain sensor or Rear vision mirror ››› Fig. 144: make it react more slowly, later or not at all. ● Cracked windscreen: the impact of a stone 0 Rain sensor off. Introduction will trigger a single wipe cycle with the rain 1 Rain sensor on; automatic wipe if neces- sensor on. Next the rain sensor detects the WARNING sary. reduction in the sensitive surface area and data Technical A Setting sensitivity level of rain sensor adapts accordingly. The behaviour of the sen- The automatic anti-dazzle rear vision mirror contains an electrolytic fluid which may leak – Set control to the right: highly sensi- sor will vary with the size of the damage caused by the stone. if the mirror is broken. This could cause irrita- tive. tion to the skin, eyes and respiratory organs.

– Advice Set control to the left: less sensitive. WARNING ● The electrolytic fluid may cause irritation to the skin, eyes and respiratory organs, partic- When the ignition is switched off and then The rain sensor may not detect enough rain ularly in individuals suffering from asthma or back on, the rain sensor stays on and starts to switch on the wipers. other illnesses. Make sure that adequate operating again when the windscreen wipers ● If necessary, switch on the wipers manually quantities of fresh air enter and leave the ve- are in position 1 and the vehicle is travel- when water on the windscreen obstructs visi- hicle if it is not possible to open all the doors ling at more than 4 km/h (2 mph). bility. and windows. ● If the electrolytic fluid comes into contact Operation Rain sensor modified behaviour Note with eyes or skin, wash the area for at least Possible causes of faults and mistaken read- 15 minutes with plenty of water, and seek ● Clean the sensitive surface of the rain sen- medical advice. ings on the sensitive surface ››› Fig. 145 of sor regularly and check the blades for dam- ● If the electrolytic fluid comes into contact the rain sensor include: age ››› Fig. 145 (arrow). with shoes or clothing, wash the area for at ● Damaged blades: a film of water on the ● To remove wax and coatings, we recom- least 15 minutes with plenty of water. Wash damaged blades may lengthen the activation mend a window cleaner containing alcohol. shoes and clothing before wearing them Emergencies time, reduce the washing intervals or result again. in a fast and continuous wipe. ● If the electrolytic fluid is swallowed, wash ● Insects: insects on the sensor may trigger your mouth with plenty of water for at least the windscreen wiper. 15 minutes. Do not try to provoke vomiting unless recommended by a Doctor. Seek medi-

● Salt on roads: in winter, salt spread in the cal advice immediately. » Safety roads may cause an extra long wipe when the windscreen is almost dry. ● Dirt: dry dust, wax, coating on glass (Lotus effect) or traces of detergent (car wash) may 137 Operation

CAUTION This function can be activated and deactivated by pressing the rear-view mirror switch In the event that an automatic anti-dazzle ››› Fig. 147 2 . When it is activated, the warn- rear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte fluid ing lamp lights up 1 . may leak. This liquid attacks plastic surfaces. Therefore, it should be cleaned as fast as When the ignition is on, the sensor 3 auto- possible with a damp sponge or similar. matically moves the rear vision mirror to the anti-dazzle position depending upon the incidence of the light from behind. Interior rear vision mirror The automatic anti-dazzle function is deactivated when reverse gear is engaged or the in- Fig. 147 Automatic anti-dazzle function for rear vision mirror terior or reading lights are on.

The driver should always adjust the rear vi- Note sion mirror to permit adequate visibility If the light is obstructed or prevented from through the rear window. reaching the sensor, e.g. by the sun blinds, the rear vision mirror with automatic anti- Manual anti-dazzle function for interior rear dazzle function will not operate correctly. vision mirror ● Basic position: point the lever at the bot- Fig. 146 Manual anti-dazzle function for rear tom of the mirror forwards. vision mirror ● Pull the lever to the back to select the anti- dazzle function ››› Fig. 146.

Automatic anti-dazzle function for interior mirror Key to Fig. 147:

1 Control lamp 2 Control 3 Light incidence sensor

138 Lights and visibility

Exterior mirrors Synchronised mirror adjustment steering wheel buttons and select Conven- ● In the Settings - Convenience menu, ience. select whether or not the mirrors should ● Select the Rear vision mirror ad- move in synchronisation ›››  page 26. justment function (if it is already checked, ● Turn the knob to position L. uncheck it and check the option again). Technical data Technical ● Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror. The ● Select reverse gear. right exterior mirror will be adjusted at the ● Adjust the front passenger side exterior same time (synchronised). mirror so that you can see, for example, the ● If necessary the right exterior mirror adjust- kerb area.

ment may need correcting. turn the control to ● The new position of the mirror will be stor- Advice position R. ed automatically and allocated to the vehicle Fig. 148 In the driver door: exterior mirror key that was used to unlock the vehicle. For controls Automatic anti-dazzle exterior mirror, driver vehicles with seat memory, please see side ››› page 144. Read the additional information carefully The automatic anti-dazzle exterior mirror is  page 16 ››› controlled in the same way as the automatic Activating the passenger exterior mirror settings Operation anti-dazzle rear vision mirror ››› page 138. Turn the knob to the required position: ● Turn the exterior mirror knob to position R.  Electric folding exterior mirrors ››› . Store the reverse settings for the passenger ● With the ignition switched on, select re- exterior mirror verse gear. Switch on the exterior mirror heating This only ●  heats up if the ambient temperature is less Select the vehicle key in which the setting ● The stored position of the passenger exteri- than +20°C (+68°F). is to be stored. or mirror for reverse gear is deleted when

● Use this key to unlock the vehicle. driving forwards at 15 km/h (9 mph), or if the Emergencies Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror by turning knob is turned from position R to another po-  the knob forward, backward, to the right or to ● Connect the automatic parking brake. the left. sition. ● Turn the exterior mirror knob to position R Adjust the right-hand exterior mirror by turning (passenger side). WARNING  the knob forward, backward, to the right or to ● Switch the ignition on. Safety the left . Fold and unfold the exterior mirror, taking ● Move the gear lever to neutral. care to avoid injuries. Zero position. Exterior mirror unfolded, exterior ● Only fold or unfold the exterior mirror when mirror heating off, adjustment of exterior mir- ● Access the Settings menu on the instru-  there is no-one in the way of the mirror. ror not possible. ment panel display using the multifunction » 139 Operation

● When moving the mirror, take care not to For the sake of the environment Seats and head restraints trap fingers between the mirror and the mir- The exterior mirror heating should be switch- ror bracket. ed off when it is no longer needed. Other- Adjusting the seats and head wise, it is an unnecessary fuel waste. WARNING restraints Failure to correctly estimate the distance of Note the vehicle behind could lead to serious acci- Manual adjustment of seats ● The exterior mirror heating initially heats dent. up with a high power, after two minutes the Read the additional information carefully ● Rear-view convex or aspheric mirrors in- heat will depend upon the ambient tempera- ›››  page 13 crease the field of vision, however objects ap- ture. pear smaller and further away in the mirrors. ● In the event of a fault, the electric exterior WARNING ● The use of these mirrors to estimate the mirrors can be adjusted manually by pressing The safe driving chapter contains important distance to the next vehicle when changing the edge of the mirror surface. lane is imprecise and could result in serious information, tips, suggestions and warnings accident. that you should read and observe for your own safety and the safety of your passengers ● If possible, use the rear vision mirror to es- ››› page 56. timate distances to vehicles behind you or in other circumstances. ● Make sure that the rear visibility is ade- WARNING quate. ● Adjust the front seats only when the vehicle is stationary. Failure to follow this instruction could result in an accident. CAUTION ● Be careful when adjusting the seat height. ● Before entering a car wash, always ensure Careless or uncontrolled adjustment can that the exterior mirrors are correctly folded cause injuries. in. ● The front seat backrests must not be re- ● Electrically-folding exterior mirrors should clined for driving. Otherwise, seat belts and not be folded and unfolded mechanically as the airbag system might not protect as they this may damage the electrical operation. should in the case of an accident, increasing risk of injury.

140 Seats and head restraints

Electric driver's seat adjustment* Adjusting the rear seats compartment tray. Remove the tray before adjusting the seat backrest. Read the additional information carefully ● Objects in the luggage compartment could ›››  page 14 cause damage when moving the rear seats forwards or backwards.

WARNING data Technical Using the front electric seats in a careless or uncontrolled manner may lead to severe injuries. ● The front seats can also be electrically adjusted when the ignition is switched off. Nev- Advice er leave children or disabled people alone in the vehicle. Fig. 149 Adjusting rear seats ● In the event of an emergency, stop electrical adjustment by pressing any button. Function Necessary operations

Pull the lever and adjust the seat CAUTION

backrest to the required position Operation So as not the damage the electrical compo- ››› . The seat backrest must be engaged when the lever is re- nents of the front seats, do not kneel on the 1 Adjusting the leased! There is a handle instead seats or apply specific pressure to one point seat backrest. of the seat or seat backrest. of the lever on the third row of seats and on the central seat of the second row. It is used in the Note same manner as the lever. Emergencies ● It may not be possible to electrically adjust 2 On the second Pull the lever and move the seat the seat if the vehicle battery is very low. row of seats only: forwards or backwards. The seat move the seat ● Seat adjustment is stopped when the en- must be engaged when the lever backwards or for- is released! gine is started. wards. Safety CAUTION ● Tilting the seat backrest of the second row of seats fully back could damage the luggage

141 Operation

Adjustment of the head restraints ● The head restraint must engage securely in position.

Correct adjustment of head restraints Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the same level as the top of your head and under no circumstances below eye level. Keep the back of your neck as close as possible to the head Fig. 151 Adjust the head restraints in the sec- restraint. ond or third row of seats Adjusting the head restraint for short people Read the additional information carefully ›››  page 15 Lower the head restraint completely, even if your head is below its upper edge. When the All seats are equipped with a head restraint. head restraint is at its lowest, it is possible that a small gap remains between it and the Adjusting height seat backrest. ● Raise the head restraint in the direction of the arrow or lower it ››› Fig. 150 or ››› Fig. 151 Adjusting the head restraint for tall people 1 with the button pressed ››› in Removing Raise the head restraint completely. and installing the head restraints on page 144. Fig. 150 A: Adjust the head restraints with no possibility of lengthways direction adjust- ● The head restraint must engage securely in ment; B: Adjust the head restraints with position. There are three possible positions lengthways direction adjustment on the second row of seats and two possible positions on the third row of seats.

Adjusting the front head restraints ● Push the head restraint forward in the direction of the arrow or backward ››› Fig. 150 1 B with the button pressed.

142 Seats and head restraints

Removing and installing the head re- ● Adjust the head restraint according to the straints correct seat position and secure it ››› page 142.

Removing the front head restraints in vehi-

cles with the lengthways direction adjust- data Technical ment of the head restraints ● If necessary, adjust the seat backrest so that the head restraint can be fitted. ● Push the head restraint up and backward Advice Fig. 153 Fitting the head restraints in the sec- as far as it will go ››› . ond or third row of seats ● Place a flat object, e.g. a plastic card 2 B, All seats are equipped with a head restraint. on both sides between the seat backrest cover and the end protector of the seat backrest Removing the front head restraints in vehi- retaining bar and unlock the retaining bars cles without the lengthways direction ad- with a little pressure.

justment of the head restraints ● Completely pull out the head restraint. Operation ● If necessary, adjust the seat backrest so that the head restraint can be fitted. Fitting the front head restraints in vehicles with the lengthways direction adjustment of ● Push the head restraint up as far as it will the head restraints go ››› . ● Pull out the two retaining bars from the ● Pull out the head restraint pressing the but- head restraint as far as possible. ton completely ››› Fig. 152 1 A. Emergencies Fig. 152 A: Fitting the head restraints with no ● Correctly place the head restraint into the possibility of lengthways direction adjust- guides on the seat backrest and insert it. ment; B: Fitting the head restraints with Fitting the front head restraints in vehicles lengthways direction adjustment without the lengthways direction adjustment ● Push the head restraint down as far as pos- of the head restraints sible until the two retaining bars are secured.

● Correctly place the head restraint into the ● Adjust the head restraint according to the Safety guides on the seat backrest and insert it. correct seat position and secure it ● Completely press the button 1 A and push ››› page 142. » the head restraint downwards.

143 Operation

Removing the head restraints from the sec- ● Always fit and adjust the head restraint Seat functions ond and third row of seats properly whenever a person is occupying a ● Fold the backrest of the rear seat forwards seat. Seat heating* ››› page 152. ● Refit any removed head restraints immedi- ● Push the head restraint up as far as it will ately so that passengers are properly protec- go ››› . ted. ● All vehicle occupants must correctly adjust ● Pull out the head restraint Fig. 153 1 ››› the head restraint according to their height to with the button pressed. reduce the risk of back injuries in the event of ● Fold the backrest of the rear seat back- an accident. The upper edge of the head re- wards until it is engaged. straint must be as close as possible to the same level as the top of your head and under Fitting the head restraints in the second and no circumstances below eye level. Keep the third row of seats back of your neck as close as possible to the head restraint. ● Fold the backrest of the rear seat forwards ● Never adjust the head restraint while the Fig. 154 Detailed view of the centre console: ››› page 152. vehicle is in motion. front seat heating controls, here with the sec- ● Insert the head restraint into the guides on ond temperature level set the seat backrest. CAUTION ● Push the head restraint down while press- When removing and fitting the head restraint, ing the button 1 . make sure it does not hit the headliner of the ● Fold the backrest of the rear seat backward vehicle or the front seat backrest. Otherwise, again until it is engaged. the interior roof and other parts of the vehicle ● Adjust the head restraint to the correct po- could be damaged. sition ››› page 142.

WARNING Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted increases the risk of Fig. 155 Detailed view of the centre console: severe or fatal injuries in the event of acci- controls for the front seat heating in vehicles dents and sudden braking or manoeuvres. equipped with Climatronic

144 Seats and head restraints

The seat cushions can be heated electrically WARNING Lumbar massage function* when the ignition is switched on. The backrest is also heated in some versions. People whose pain and temperature threshold has been affected by some kind of medi- Switch off seat heating if there is nobody in cine, paraplegia or chronic illness (e.g. diabe- the seat. tes) may sustain burns to the back, buttocks and legs from using the seat heaters that data Technical Function Action ››› Fig. 154, ››› Fig. 155 may lead to a long healing process or that may never completely heal. Seek medical ad- Activate Press button . Seat heating is vice if you have doubts regarding your health. switched on fully. ● People with limited pain and temperature Adjusting the Keep pressing button  until the re- thresholds must never use seat heating. Advice heating output quired intensity is set. Fig. 156 On the side of the front seat: lumbar Deactivating Keep pressing button  until all of CAUTION massage function switch. the lights are switched off ● To avoid damaging the heating elements of ››› Fig. 154, ››› Fig. 155. the seat heaters, please do not kneel on the During the massage operation, the lumbar seat or apply sharp pressure to a single point support will move in a way that massages the WARNING on the seat cushion or backrest. lumbar area of the back. While it is operat- Operation Inappropriate use of the seat functions can ● Liquids, sharp objects and insulating mate- ing, the arch of the lumbar support can be cause severe injuries. rials on the seat could damage the seat heat- adjusted using the corresponding control ing. ● Assume the proper sitting position before based on your personal preferences your trip and remain in it throughout. This al- ● In the event of smells, switch off the seat ››› page 57. so applies to the other occupants. heating immediately and have the unit inspected by a specialised workshop. ● Only adjust the seat position memory when Connection Emergencies the vehicle is stationary. ● Press the button  in the control panel of ● Only switch the lumbar massage function For the sake of the environment the seat. on and off when the vehicle is stationary. The seat heating should remain on only when ● Keep hands, fingers, feet and other limbs needed. Otherwise, it is an unnecessary fuel Disconnection away from the seat operating and adjustment waste. ● Press the button  again in the control radius. Safety panel of the seat. »

145 Operation

Automatic off ● Keep the SET button held down for more To activate the memory function of the vehi- ● The lumbar massage will disconnect auto- than one second ››› Fig. 157. cle key matically after approx. 10 minutes. ● Press the required memory button for the Important: a position must be memorised in following 10 seconds. An audible warning the memory. confirms the settings have been stored. ● Open the driver-side door. Seat with position memory* Storing front passenger exterior mirror set- ● Press and hold any memory button. tings for driving in reverse gear ● Within the following three seconds, push ● Connect the automatic parking brake. the button  to open the vehicle on the vehi- ● Move the gear lever to neutral. cle key. An audible warning confirms the settings have been activated. ● Switch the ignition on. ● Press the required memory button. Adjusting the wing mirrors for driving and ● Select reverse gear. assigning driver seat settings to a vehicle key ● Adjust the front passenger side exterior mirror so that you can see, for example, the ● Activate the memory function of the vehicle kerb area. key Fig. 157 Memory buttons on the outside of ● ● Adjust the front seat and the exterior mir- the driver seat The new position of the mirror will be stored automatically and allocated to the vehicle rors. Memory buttons key that was used to unlock the vehicle. ● Lock the vehicle. The settings are assigned to the vehicle key. Individual settings for the driver seat and the Activating exterior mirror settings exterior mirror can be assigned to each memory button. ● With the driver door open and the ignition To deactivate the memory function of the ve- turned off, push the memory button of the hicle key Storing exterior mirror settings for driving corresponding door briefly. Important: a position must be memorised in forwards ● OR: with the ignition switched on, hold in the memory. the corresponding memory button until the ● Connect the automatic parking brake. ● SET memorised position is reached. Press and hold the button. ● Move the gear lever to neutral. ● Within the following 10 seconds, push the ● Switch the ignition on. open button  on the vehicle key. An audi- ● Adjust the front seat and the exterior mir- ble warning confirms the settings have been rors. deactivated. 146 Seats and head restraints

Initialising the seat position memory Convenient entry function for the third ● Push the head restraint down as far as it The position memory system must be restar- row of seats will go ››› page 57. ted if, for example, the driver seat has been ● Push the lever ››› Fig. 158 1 forwards and changed. fold the backrest of the rear seat. This seat folds forward completely ››› and can still

Restarting deletes all memories and assign- data Technical be moved further forward. ments for the seat with position memory. The memory buttons can then be reprogrammed ● Always take care when entering and leav- and the vehicle keys re-assigned. ing the vehicle ››› .

● Open the driver door and do not get into Repositioning the seat in the second row the vehicle. Advice ● Lift the backrest of the rear seat in an up- ● Operating the seat settings from outside right position. The entire seat folds back- the vehicle. wards ››› . ● Move the angle of the seat backrest com- ● Make sure that the rear seat is securely en- pletely forwards. gaged so that the seat belts can provide Fig. 158 Second row of seats: convenient en- ● proper protection in the rear seats. The red Release the control to set the angle and try function controls then press again until an audible warning is mark ››› Fig. 158 2 should no longer be visi- Operation heard. The outer seats of the second row can be fol- ble ››› in Folding down rear seats to create ded to make it easier to get in and out of the load space on page 154. Note third row of seats. Emergency exit function The front passenger side exterior mirror automatically changes from the position stored Folding down the second row seats If the lever ››› Fig. 158 1 does not work, e.g. for reversing as soon as the vehicle moves after an accident, the seats on the second ● If necessary, open the belt loop and wind Emergencies forward at a speed of at least 15 km/h up the seat belt by hand. row can be folded forwards from the third row (9 mph) or when the gear selection lever is to allow vehicle occupants of the third row of changed to a position other than R. ● If necessary, remove the side head restraint seats to get out of the vehicle ››› . of the integrated child seat ››› page 78. ● If necessary, raise the armrests. ● Pull the handle ››› Fig. 158 3 back and

fold the backrest of the rear seat. The com- Safety ● Remove any objects located in the footwell plete rear seat folds forward ››› . » of the second row of seats, where applicable ››› .

147 Operation

WARNING WARNING Folding the backrest of the front pas- Careless or uncontrolled use of the conven- If child seats are fitted to all the seats in the senger seat* ient entry assistant may result in severe in- second row then it is possible that the seats jury and accident. of this row cannot be folded down from the ● Never use the convenient entry function third row of seats in the event of an accident. when the vehicle is in motion. In the event of an emergency, passengers in the third row of seats will not be able to leave ● Avoid trapping or damaging the seat belt the vehicle or to help themselves. when folding the rear seats back. ● Child seats should not occupy all the seats ● Keep your hands, fingers, feet and other of the second row if other passengers are to body parts out of the hinges and the seat occupy the third row. locking mechanism when folding and unfolding. CAUTION ● Mats or other objects can be caught in the Fig. 159 Folding the backrest of the front pas- hinges of the seat backrests or rear seat. This ● Before folding down the rear seat backrest senger seat could prevent the seat backrest from locking for returning it to its position, adjust the front safely when positioned upright. seats so that the head restraints and seat ● All seat backrests must engage correctly for backrests do not hit each other when folding the seat belts on the rear seats to work prop- and unfolding. erly. When the seat backrest of an occupied ● Any objects located in the footwell of the seat is not correctly locked in place, the pas- second row of seats may be damaged on fold- senger can be thrust forward with the seat ing the rear seat forwards. Remove any ob- backrest in case of sudden braking, sudden jects before folding the seat down. manoeuvres or an accident. ● A red mark on the side of the seat ››› Fig. 158 2 indicates that the seat backrest is not engaged. The mark is no longer visible when it is correctly engaged. ● If the seat backrest or seat are folded down and are not correctly locked in place, no pas- Fig. 160 Unlocking the folding backrest of the senger should use them. front passenger seat ● When getting in or out, never lean or hold onto the folded seat on the second row of The backrest of the front passenger seat can seats. be folded and locked horizontally. 148 Seats and head restraints

The front passenger front airbag must be dis- ● The upright backrest of the front passenger ● Never carry people or children on the front abled ›››  page 18 if objects are being seat must safely engage. passenger seat when the seat backrest is fol- transported on the folded front passenger ded. seat. WARNING ● When the backrest of the front passenger Folding and lifting the backrest of the front seat is folded, only the outer seat behind the Folding the backrest of the front passenger passenger seat uncontrollably or without driver on the second row of seats may be oc- data Technical seat paying attention may lead to severe injuries. cupied. This also applies to children sitting in ● Remove any objects from the front passen- ● Only fold and lift the backrest of the front a child seat. ger seat cushion ››› . passenger seat when the vehicle is station- ● Adjust the front passenger seat to its low- ary. Advice est position ››› page 57. ● While the backrest of the front passenger Centre armrest seat is folded, the front airbag must remain ● Push the head restraint down as far as it disabled and the PASSENGER AIRBAG will go ››› page 57. OFF  light on. ● Unlock the backrest of the front passenger ● Keep your hands, fingers, feet and other seat in the direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 159 body parts out of the hinges and the seat 1 . locking mechanism when folding and unfold- ● Fold the backrest of the front passenger ing. Operation seat forwards in the direction of the arrow ● Mats or other objects can be caught in the ››› Fig. 159 2 until it is horizontal. hinges of the backrest of the front passenger seat. This could prevent the seat backrest ● The backrest of the front passenger seat from locking safely when positioned upright. must engage safely in its folded position. ● The upright backrest of the front passenger Fig. 161 Front centre armrest seat must engage. If the backrest of the front

Lifting the backrest of the front passenger Emergencies passenger seat is not locked, it may suddenly seat To lift the central armrest, lift it upwards in move and cause severe injuries. the direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 161, setting ● Check that there are no objects or parts of by setting. the body in the hinge area. WARNING To lower the centre armrest, pull it down- ● Lift the backrest of the front passenger seat Seat anchors and hinges exposed when the wards. Then lower the centre armrest. » by first unlocking it again ››› Fig. 160. backrest of the front passenger seat is folded Safety ● Lift the backrest of the front passenger seat may lead to severe injuries in the event of an until it is upright. The seat backrest must be accident or sudden braking. engaged.

149 Operation

WARNING Transport and practical ● Always ensure that objects inside the vehicle cannot move into the area of the airbags The centre armrest may limit the freedom of equipment while driving. movement of the driver's arm and cause a serious accident. ● While driving, always keep object compartments closed. ● Keep the centre armrest compartments Transporting objects closed while the vehicle is in motion. ● Remove all objects from the front passenger seat when it is folded down. When the ● The centre armrest is not designed for chil- Introduction seat backrest is folded down, it presses on dren to sit on! Sitting in this incorrect posi- small and light objects and these are detection can cause severe injuries. Always transport heavy loads in the luggage compartment and place the seat backs in a ted by the weight sensor on the seat; this vertical position. Always use the anchors pro- sends false information to the airbag control vided with suitable rope to secure heavy ob- unit. jects. Never overload the vehicle. Both the ● While the backrest of the front passenger carrying capacity as well as the distribution seat is folded, the front airbag must remain of the load in the vehicle affect driving be- disabled and the PASSENGER AIRBAG  haviour and braking ability ››› . OFF light on. ● Objects secured in the vehicle should never WARNING be placed in such a way as to make passengers sit in an incorrect position. Unsecured or incorrectly secured objects can ● cause serious injury in case of a sudden ma- If secured objects occupy a seat, this seat noeuvring or breaking or in case of an acci- should not be occupied or used by anyone. dent. This is especially true when objects are struck by a detonating airbag and fired WARNING through the vehicle interior. To reduce the risks, please note the following: The driving behaviour and braking ability change when transporting heavy and large ● Secure all objects in the vehicle. Always objects. keep equipment and heavy objects in the luggage compartment. ● Adjust your speed and driving style to visibility, road, traffic and weather conditions. ● Always secure objects with suitable rope or slings so that they cannot enter the areas ● Accelerate gently and carefully. around the front or side airbags in case of ● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. sudden braking or an accident. ● Brake early.

150 Transport and practical equipment

Transporting a load Driving with the rear lid open WARNING

Secure all objects in the vehicle Driving with the rear lid open creates an addi- Toxic gases may enter the vehicle interior tional risk. Secure all objects and secure the when the rear lid is open. This could cause ● Distribute the load throughout the vehicle, loss of consciousness, carbon monoxide poi- rear lid correctly and take all measures possi- on the roof and in a trailer as uniformly as soning, serious injury and accidents. possible. ble to reduce toxic gases from entering the data Technical vehicle. ● To avoid toxic gases entering the vehicle al- ● Transport heavy objects as far forward as ways drive with the rear lid closed. possible in the luggage compartment and WARNING ● In exceptional circumstances, if you must lock the seat backs in the vertical position. drive with the rear lid open, observe the fol- Driving with the rear lid unlocked or open ● lowing to reduce the entry of toxic gases in- Secure luggage in the luggage compart- could cause serious injuries. Advice ment with suitable straps on the fastening side the vehicle: ● Always drive with the rear lid closed. rings ››› page 152. – Close all windows and the sliding sun- ● Secure all objects in the vehicle. Loose roof. ● Check the headlight adjustment items could fall out of the vehicle and injure ››› page 128. – Turn off the air recirculation for the heat- other road users or damage other vehicles. ing and air conditioner. ● Use the suitable tyre pressure according to ● Drive particularly carefully and think – Open all of the air outlets in the dash the load being transported. Read the tyre in- ahead.

panel. Operation flation information label ››› page 284. ● Avoid sudden manoeuvres and braking giv- – Turn the heating fan and heater to the ● For vehicles with a tyre pressure indicator, en that this could cause an uncontrolled highest level. change the vehicle load status ››› page 231. movement of the open rear lid. ● When transporting objects that protrude CAUTION CAUTION out of the luggage compartment, indicate Objects on the shelf could chafe against the them suitably. Observe legal requirements. An open boot hatch changes the length and height of the vehicle. wires of the heating element in the heated ● If objects must project out of the luggage Emergencies rear window and cause damage. compartment, the rear lid must never be used to “secure” or “attach” objects. Note ● If a baggage rack is fitted on the rear lid, it Driving with the vehicle loaded should be removed before travelling with the Please note the information about loading a rear lid open. For the best handling when driving a loaded Safety trailer ››› page 234 and the roof carrier sys- vehicle, note the following: tem ››› page 161. ● Secure all objects ››› page 151. ● Accelerate gently and carefully. » 151 Operation

● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. WARNING ● While driving, always keep object compart- ● ments closed. Brake early. When the vehicle is not in use or being ● If necessary, read the instructions for driv- watched, always lock the doors and the rear ● Do not place hard, heavy or sharp objects ing with a trailer ››› page 234. lid to reduce the risk of serious injury or inside the vehicle interior, in open storage death. compartments, the rear shelf or on the dash ● If necessary, read the instructions for driv- panel. ing with a roof carrier system ››› page 161. ● Do not leave children unwatched, especially when the boot is open. Children could ● Remove hard, heavy and sharp objects from clothes and pockets inside the vehicle and WARNING climb into the luggage compartment, close the rear lid from inside and be unable to es- store securely. A sliding load could considerably affect the cape themselves. This could lead to serious stability and safety of the vehicle resulting in injury or death. WARNING an accident with serious consequences. ● Never allow children to play in or around The transport of heavy object changes vehi- ● Secure loads correctly so they do not move. the vehicle. cle handling and increases braking distance. ● When transporting heavy objects, use suit- ● Never transport people in the luggage com- Heavy loads that have not been stored or se- able ropes or straps. partment. cured correctly could cause loss of control ● Lock the seat backs in vertical position. and result in serious injury. WARNING ● Vehicle handling changes when transporting heavy objects due to a change in the cen- Unsecured or incorrectly secured objects can tre of gravity. Luggage compartment cause serious injury in case of a sudden manoeuvring or breaking or in case of an acci- ● Distribute the load as uniformly and as low dent. This is especially true when objects are down on the vehicle as possible. Introduction struck by a detonating airbag and fired ● Store heavy objects in the luggage com- through the vehicle interior. To reduce the partment as far from the rear axle as possi- Always transport heavy loads in the luggage risks, please note the following: ble. compartment and place the seat backs in a ● Secure all objects in the vehicle. Always vertical position. Always use the fastening place equipment and heavy objects in the rings with suitable rope or straps. Never over- CAUTION boot. load the vehicle. Both the carrying capacity ● Hard objects on the rear shelf could chafe ● Always secure objects with suitable ropes as well as the distribution of the load in the the wires of the heating element and antenna or straps so that they cannot be pushed in- vehicle have effects on the driving behaviour of the rear window and cause damage. side the cabin and move around the areas and braking ability . ››› around the front or side airbags in the event ● The side window antenna could be dam- of sudden braking or an accident. aged due to chafing from objects.

152 Transport and practical equipment

Note ● If required, remove the head restraints from the integrated seats for children and refit The ventilating slits between the heated rear them ››› page 78. window and the shelf must not be covered so that used air can escape from the vehicle. ● If necessary, raise the armrests. ● Remove objects from the footwell in front of Technical data Technical and behind the rear seat ››› . Folding down rear seats to create load ● Move the rear seat all the way back. space ● Push the head restraint down as far as it will go ››› page 57. ● In the middle seat, close the drinks carrier Advice in the rear of the centre console, if necessary. ● Pull lever ››› Fig. 162 1 back and fold the seat backrest forwards. The complete rear seat folds forward ››› . ● Fold the seat backrest forwards until it

locks into the load surface position Operation ››› Fig. 162 B. ● If necessary, pull on the lever ››› Fig. 163 2 to move the seat to the required position. ● When the seat is folded down, no adults or children should travel in it ››› . Fig. 163 Third row of seats: fold down the Emergencies rear seat to load A then return to position B Folding the seats in the third row of seats for loading Each rear seat can fold down individually to ● If necessary, open the belt loop and wind extend the luggage compartment. up the seat belt by hand.

● Open the rear lid. Safety Folding the seats in the second row of seats for loading ● Push the head restraint down as far as it Fig. 162 Second row of seats: folding the rear will go ››› page 57. » seat A, rear seat as load space B. ● If necessary, open the belt loop and wind up the seat belt by hand. 153 Operation

● Remove objects from the footwell in front of ● Pull on the handle ››› Fig. 163 3 . The en- backrest in case of sudden braking, sudden and behind the rear seat ››› . tire seat folds backwards. manoeuvres or an accident. ● Remove objects from the space below the ● Press on the seat tray in the seat backrest ● No seat must be occupied if the seat back- rear seat. until it is held in position by its magnets. rest or seat is folded or not correctly engag- ● Remove the attachment elements and sup- ● Open the sliding door. ed. ports for the net from the rail system. ● Put the seat backrest into position and ● Pull lever ››› Fig. 163 1 back and fold the press firmly until it clicks into place. CAUTION seat backrest forwards. The rear seat folds ● Pull on the rear seats and the seat backrest ● Before folding the rear seat backrest, ad- forward ››› and the cushion also moves for- to ensure that they are correctly locked in just the front seats so that neither the head ward. place and that the seat belt protection is restraint or backrest hit them when folded. ● Fold the seat tray forward on top of the fol- guaranteed for rear seat passengers. ● Objects placed in the footrest area in front ded seat. of and behind the rear seats can be damaged when seats are folded down or put back into ● When the seat is folded down, no adults or WARNING position. Remove any objects in the way be- children should travel in it ››› . Folding and lifting the rear seats carelessly fore folding seats down or repositioning without paying attention could cause serious them. Putting the seats in the second row back in injury. ● Objects placed in the moulding on the back place ● Never fold or lift the seats while driving. of the third row of seats can be damaged ● Pull lever ››› Fig. 162 1 upwards and place ● Do no trap or damage seat belts when rais- when folding down the seats or putting them the seat backrests in vertical position. The ing the seat backrest. back into position. Remove any objects in the entire seat folds backwards. ● Keep your hands, fingers, feet and other way before folding seats down or repositioning them. ● Pull on the rear seats and the seat backrest body parts out of the hinges and the seat to ensure that they are correctly locked in locking mechanism when folding and unfold- ● The attachment elements and supports for the net partition placed on the rail system place and that the seat belt protection is ing. can be damaged when folding down seats guaranteed for rear seat passengers. ● Mats or other objects can be caught in the hinges of the seat backrests or rear seat. This from the third row or putting them back into position and these can also damage the seats Putting the seats in the third row back in could prevent the seat or seat backrest from locking securely in the vertical position. themselves. Before folding down or reposi- place tioning the seats, remove the attachment ele- ● All seat backrests must engage correctly for ● Open the rear lid. ments and supports for the net from the rail the seat belts on the rear seats to work prop- system. ● Pull on the handle ››› Fig. 163 2 to put the erly. When the seat backrest of an occupied seat tray back in position. seat is not correctly locked in place, the passenger can be thrust forward with the seat

154 Transport and practical equipment

Shelf* ● Release the shelf upwards by the side supports and guide it forward.

Closing the shelf ● Pull the unfolded shelf evenly on the guide backwards. data Technical ● Secure the shelf using the left and right side supports.

Installing the shelf behind the second row of Advice seats

Fig. 164 In the luggage compartment: rear ● Place the shelf in its position in the side shelf lining, left-hand side first. ● Release the shelf in the direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 164 B . ● Insert the shelf into the right-hand support, pressing down. Operation

Installing the shelf behind the third row of seats ● Remove the shelf from the support in the side lining ››› Fig. 165 A. To do this, press the

Fig. 165 Remove the shelf supports A then shelf upwards (arrow) and remove it. Emergencies put them away safely B. ● Open the compartment in the left-hand The rear shelf can be fitted behind the sec- side boot lining ››› page 163 and hook the ond or third row of seats ››› . shelf to the rear of the compartment lid ››› Fig. 165 B.

Opening the shelf ● Close the rear left-hand side lining com- Safety partment. ● Pull the shelf handle ››› Fig. 164 A backwards. ● Place the shelf in its position in the side lining, left-hand side first. » 155 Operation

● Lift the shelf off in direction of the arrow ● Do not leave hard, heavy or sharp objects ››› Fig. 164 B . (loose or in bags) on the rear shelf. ● Insert the shelf into the right-hand support, ● Never transport animals on the rear shelf. pressing down.

Removing the shelf Net partition* ● Release the shelf in the direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 164 B and lift it in the direction of the arrow C . ● Remove the shelf from the right-hand side support. ● In addition, when removing the shelf be- Fig. 167 In the luggage compartment: install hind the third row of seats: cover the side lin- the net partition behind the second row of ing supports with their covers. seats. ● Only with 5 places: support the released shelf by placing it on the front section of the The net partition can prevent objects in the boot floor ››› page 163. luggage compartment entering the vehicle interior / the driver area. WARNING First remove the net from its bag and unfold If the shelf is placed on one of the rear seats, it. this could cause serious injury in case of sudden braking or an accident. Fold out the net partition ● Whenever it the third row seats are occu- Fold out the cross support rods ››› Fig. 166 1 pied, the shelf should be put behind this row. for the net partition fully in the direction of the arrow until you hear a “click”. WARNING Fig. 166 Unfold the net partition 1 then fold Unsecured or incorrectly secured objects or Installing the net partition behind the sec- it again 2 and 3 animals on the rear shelf could cause serious ond row of seats injuries in case of a sudden manoeuvre or ● Hook in the net partition on the left-hand braking or even an accident. side roof support ››› Fig. 167. To do this, guide the rod from up to down.

156 Transport and practical equipment

● Hook in the net partition on the rear right- Folding in the net partition Fastening rings* hand side roof support by pressing on the ● Press on the release button ››› Fig. 166 2 rod. and bend the rod A in the direction of the ● Secure the net partition hooks into the arrow with the release button pressed. straps in the front of the boot then ››› Fig. 167 ● Press on the release button ››› Fig. 166 3 Technical data Technical tighten the belts. and bend the rod B in the direction of the arrow with the release button pressed. Installing the net partition behind the front ● seats Store the net partition securely in the vehicle. ● Hook in the net partition on the front left- Advice hand side roof support ››› Fig. 167. To do this, WARNING guide the rod from up to down. Loose objects in the vehicle interior can be vi- Fig. 168 In the luggage compartment: fasten- ● Hook in the net partition on the rear right- olently thrown in case of a sudden manoeu- ing rings hand side roof support by pressing on the vre or braking and especially in accidents rod. causing serious injury. To the front and rear of the luggage compart- ● Secure the hooks of the net partition to the ● Ensure that the rods are correctly locked in ment, there are fastening rings for securing attachment rings in the left and right hand place. objects ››› Fig. 168 (arrows). On some mod- Operation side footwells on the second row of seats ● Even when the net partition is correctly fit- els, the fastening rings are located right at then tighten the straps. ted, objects must be secured. the back, in the area of the lock carrier plate. ● When driving with the net partition, no pas- There are other fastening rings located to the Removing the net partition sengers should be behind it. left and right hand side of the second row ● Loosen the net partition straps. footrests.

● Release the net partition hooks from the Some models of fastening rings must be lif- Emergencies rings ››› Fig. 167. ted to use them. ● Unhook the net partition on the right-hand side roof support ››› Fig. 167 by pressing on WARNING the rod. Unsuitable or damaged ropes or straps may

● Unhook the net partition from the left-hand be released in case of sudden braking or an Safety side roof support. accident. As a result, objects may be fired through the vehicle interior causing serious injury or death. »

157 Operation

● Always use suitable ropes and straps in Rails and attachment system* ● Move the attachment element to the de- good condition. sired position. ● Secure the ropes and straps to the fasten- ● Always ensure that the attachment inserts ing rings. into the guide system ››› . ● Loose objects in the luggage compartment can suddenly slide and change the way the Removing the attachment elements vehicle handles. ● Remove the attachment element from the ● Secure all objects, little and large. guide and pull downwards. ● Never secure a load that is too heavy for the fastening rings. Securing a load ● Never secure a child seat to the fastening ● Pull the strap through the attachment ele- rings. Fig. 169 In the luggage compartment: system ment and secure the load ››› . including rails, adjustable attachment ele- Note ments 1 and adjustable tightening straps WARNING 2 . ● The maximum load of the fastening rings is In case of an accident or sudden braking, the approximately 3.5 kN (3.57 kp). attachment elements in the parts of the rails The rails and attachment system consists of close to the seats of the third row could in- ● You can find suitable transport straps and four rails, movable attachment elements, jure seat occupants. load securing systems at a specialised work- straps to be secured to the rails and a net ● Whenever the seats on the third row are to shop. SEAT recommends taking your car in for with supports to cover baggage ››› page 159. technical service. be occupied, remove the attachment ele- The rail and attachment system is designed ments from the rails or move them all the way to secure light objects. If the seats in the back. third row are to be occupied by passengers then attachment elements should never be placed in the section of the rails close to the WARNING seats ››› . Movable attachment elements that are not secured correctly can be released from the Installing the attachment elements guide in case of sudden braking or accident. As a result, objects may be fired through the ● Fit the attachment element with the ruts vehicle interior causing serious injury or facing upwards ››› Fig. 169 1 to the upper death. part of the guide and press downwards.

158 Transport and practical equipment

● Always ensure that the movable attach- Baggage net* ment elements are correctly inserted into the guides.

WARNING Technical data Technical Unsuitable or damaged ropes or straps may be released in case of sudden braking or an accident. As a result, objects may be fired through the vehicle interior causing serious injury or death. Fig. 171 Release the baggage net Advice ● Always use the attachment straps of the rail and attachment system. If the seats in the third row are to be occu- ● Secure the attachment straps firmly to the pied by passengers then attachment ele- attachment elements. ments should never be placed in the section ● Loose objects in the luggage compartment of the rails close to the seats ››› . can suddenly slide and change the way the vehicle handles. Installing the baggage net supports Operation ● Secure all objects, little and large. ● Fit the baggage net support into the guide ● Never secure a child seat to the attachment from the back and press downwards. elements. ● Move the baggage net support to the required position. CAUTION ● Always ensure that the net support inserts

● The attachment elements placed on the rail into the rail system ››› . Emergencies system can be damaged when folding down seats from the third row or putting them back Hooking the baggage net into the support into position and these can also damage the seats themselves. Before folding down or re- Fig. 170 Hook the baggage net A and use it Place the attachment rod on the baggage net positioning the seats, remove the attachment as a bag B. support ››› Fig. 170 1 and rotate 90° to the elements and supports for the net from the left 2 . The red mark on the attachment rod Safety rail system. should not be visible ››› . »

159 Operation

Using the net for bag type baggage Removing the baggage net supports down or repositioning the seats, remove the ● Fit the baggage net supports to each one of ● Remove the net attachment element from baggage net supports from the rail system. the upper rails. the rail and pull it out downwards. ● Fit a movable baggage net attachment element to each one of the lower guides WARNING Retaining hooks ››› page 158. In case of an accident or sudden braking, the ● Hook the baggage net into the supports. net attachment elements in the parts of the rails close to the seats of the third row could ● Hook the baggage net attachment strap un- injure seat occupants. derneath into one of the movable attachment ● Whenever the seats on the third row are to elements . ››› Fig. 170 B be occupied, remove the attachment ele- ● Join the baggage net supports to the upper ments from the rails or move them all the way rails as much as possible by pushing them. back. ● Press the sides of the baggage net together so that they are held by the Velcro. WARNING Baggage net supports that are not secured Using the baggage net to separate the lug- correctly can be released from the guide in Fig. 172 In the luggage compartment: retain- gage compartment case of the sudden braking or accident. As a ing hooks ● Fit the baggage net supports to each one of result, objects may be fired through the vehicle interior causing serious injury or death. On the right-hand side of the luggage com- the upper rails. partment, there are folding retaining hooks ● Always ensure that the baggage net sup- ● Fit the baggage net supports to each one of Fig. 172 that can be used to secure light ports are correctly inserted into the rails; the ››› the lower rails. red mark should not be visible. shopping bags. ● Hook the baggage net into the supports. ● Never secure a child seat to the baggage ● Press the retaining hooks down ››› Fig. 172 net supports. (arrow) and fold them. To release the baggage net ● Hook the bags in place. ● Rotate the attachment rod 90° to the right CAUTION ● ››› Fig. 171 1 until you can see the red mark After use, raise the hooks again. on the rod. Pull the attachment rod upwards ● The baggage net supports placed on the rail system can be damaged when folding 2 . WARNING down seats from the third row or putting ● Only with 5 places: after removing, place them back into position and these can also Never use these hooks to secure objects. In the baggage net safely in the front compart- damage the seats themselves. Before folding the event of sudden braking or an accident, ment on the floor of the boot ››› page 163. they could be pulled out. 160 Transport and practical equipment

CAUTION ● Carefully unhook the baggage net hooks When should the roof carrier system be re- from the fastening rings ››› Fig. 173 2 . moved? The hooks can support a maximum of 2.5 kg (about 5 lbs). ● When it is not being used. WARNING ● When the vehicle is being washed in a car The elastic baggage net stretches when it is wash. secured to the luggage compartment fasten- data Technical Luggage net* ing rings. The secured baggage net is taut. ● When the vehicle height exceeds the maxi- The hooks on the net can cause injury if the mum height (e.g. in a garage). net is incorrectly hooked or unhooked. ● Always ensure that the hooks do not sud- WARNING

denly release from the fastening rings when The risk of an accident is increased by trans- Advice hooking or un-hooking. porting heavy or bulky loads on the roof, ● Always keep your face and eyes protected which affects the car's handling by shifting at a safe distance to avoid injury should a the centre of gravity and increasing suscepti- hook slip while hooking or unhooking. bility to cross winds. ● Always engage the hooks in the order giv- ● Always secure loads correctly with suitable en. If a baggage net hook springs back this and undamaged attachment rope or straps.

can cause injury. ● Large, heavy, wide and flat loads negatively Operation Fig. 173 In the luggage compartment: net affect the vehicle aerodynamics, centre of used on secured baggage gravity and handling. ● Avoid brusque manoeuvres and sudden The baggage net can be used to secure light- Roof carrier* braking. er items. ● Adjust your speed and driving style to visi- Introduction bility, road, traffic and weather conditions.

Hooking the baggage net into the boot floor Emergencies ● Hook the baggage net into the fastening The vehicle roof has been designed to opti- CAUTION rings ››› Fig. 173 1 and 2 . mise aerodynamics. For this reason, conventional roof carrier systems cannot be secured ● Always remove the roof carrier system from Releasing the baggage net to the roof water drain channel. the roof before entering a car wash.

● The height of your vehicle is changed by Safety The secured baggage net is taut ››› . Given that the water drains have been incorporated into the roof for aerodynamic rea- the installation of the roof carrier and the ● Carefully unhook the baggage net hooks sons, only the SEAT approved basic supports load secured on it. Compare the vehicle height with the passage height, for example from the fastening rings ››› Fig. 173 1 . and roof carrier systems can be used. in underground car parks or for garage doors. » 161 Operation

● The roof antenna, the range of the panor- roof. All these system components are availa- ● Always fit the roof carrier system correctly amic sliding sunroof and the boot hatch ble from a technical service centre. for wheels, skis, surfboards, etc. should not be affected by the roof carrier sys- ● Never modify or repair the basic supports tem and the load being transported. Securing the base supports and roof carrier or roof carrier system. ● Take extra care not to let the hatch strike system the roof load when opening. Always secure the base supports and roof Note carrier system correctly. Read and take into account the instructions For the sake of the environment The roof carrier system must always be instal- included with the roof carrier system fitted The vehicle uses more fuel when the roof car- led exactly according to the instructions pro- and keep them in the vehicle. rier system is fitted. vided. The position openings are located on the inner side of the side roof rods ››› Fig. 174. Loading the roof carrier Fastening the base supports and the roof carrier system WARNING Loads can only be correctly secured when the roof carrier system is correctly fitted ››› . If the base supports and the roof carrier system are incorrectly fitted or used in an unsuitable manner, the entire system could break Maximum authorised roof load free causing accident and injury. The maximum authorised roof load is 100 kg ● Always take the manufacturer assembly in- (220 lbs). The roof load includes the roof car- structions into account. rier system and the load being transported ● Only use base supports and roof carrier ››› . systems that are not damaged and are cor- Always check the roof carrier system weight rectly fitted. and the weight of the load to be transported ● The base support should only be fitted to and, if necessary, weigh them. Never exceed the points indicated in the diagram the maximum authorised roof load. Fig. 174 Attachment points for the basic sup- ››› Fig. 174. port and the roof carrier system If you are using a roof carrier with a lower ● Secure the base supports and roof carrier weight rating, you cannot transport the maxi- system correctly. The mounts are the basis of a complete roof mum roof load. Do not exceed the maximum carrier system. Special fixtures must then be ● Check the screws and attachments before weight limit for the roof carrier given in the added in order to safely transport luggage, driving and after a short distance. During fitting instructions. bicycles, skis, surf boards, boats, etc. on the each long journey, check the attachments during every break. 162 Transport and practical equipment

Distributing a load Storage compartments ● Make sure the pedals can be used at all Uniformly distribute loads and secure them times, with no objects rolling underneath correctly ››› . Introduction them. ● The floor mat should always be secured to Check attachments Storage compartments must only be used to the floor. store light or small objects. data Technical After fitting the base supports and the roof ● Never place other mats or rugs on top of carrier system, always check the attachments In the front centre armrest compartment the the original mat supplied by the factory. after a short trip and at regular intervals. following factory-fitted connections are avail- ● Make sure that no objects can fall into the able: USB/AUX-IN. driver's footwell while the vehicle is in mo- WARNING tion. The factory-fitted CD changer is located in the Advice Exceeding the maximum authorised roof load left-hand storage compartment of the boot. can result in accidents and/or vehicle dam- CAUTION age. WARNING ● Objects on the shelf could chafe against ● Never surpass the maximum authorised the wires of the heating element in the heat- In the event of sudden braking movements or weight for the roof, the maximum authorised ed rear window and cause damage. turns, loose objects may be thrown around weight on the axles and the total maximum the vehicle interior. This could cause serious ● Do not keep heat-sensitive objects, food or

authorised weight of the vehicle. Operation injuries to passengers and cause the driver to medicines inside the vehicle. Heat and cold ● Never exceed the capacity of the roof carri- lose control of the vehicle. could damage them or render them useless. er system even if this is less than the maxi- ● Do not transport animals or place hard, ● Light-transparent objects placed inside the mum authorised roof load. heavy or sharp objects inside the vehicle in: vehicle, such as lenses, magnifying glasses ● Secure heavy items as far forward as possi- open storage compartments, dash panel, rear or transparent suction caps on the windows, ble and, in general, distribute the vehicle shelf, items of clothing or bags. may concentrate the sun's rays and cause load uniformly. damage to the vehicle. ● While driving, always keep object compartments closed. Emergencies WARNING Note Loose and incorrectly secured loads can fall WARNING The ventilating slits between the heated rear from the roof carrier system causing acci- window and the shelf must not be covered so Objects falling into the driver's footwell could dents and injury. that used air can escape from the vehicle. prevent use of the pedals. This could lead the Safety ● Always use suitable ropes and straps in driver to lose control of the vehicle, increas- good condition. ing the risk of a serious accident. ● Always secure loads correctly.

163 Operation

(Sun)glasses case in the roof console Storage compartment in the roof con- Compartment on the instrument pan- sole el*

Fig. 175 On the roof console: sunglasses storage compartment. Fig. 176 On the roof console: storage com- Fig. 177 Storage compartment on the dash partment panel To open, press and release the button ››› Fig. 175 (arrow). To open press the button and release it The storage compartment on the instrument To close, press the cover upwards until it ››› Fig. 176. panel may have a cover. clicks into place. To close, press the storage compartment up- To open, press the button on the cover To ensure the interior monitoring works cor- wards until it clicks into place. ››› Fig. 177 (arrow). rectly, the (sun)glasses case must be closed To ensure interior monitoring works properly, To close, press the cover down until it clicks when the vehicle is locked ››› page 118. the storage compartments must be closed into place. when the vehicle is locked ››› page 118.

164 Transport and practical equipment

Compartment on the centre console Compartment in the front central arm- Card compartment* rest Technical data Technical Advice

Fig. 178 Compartment in the front centre con- Fig. 180 Centre console, lower section: card sole. Fig. 179 Storage compartment in the front compartment central armrest. There is an open compartment on the centre To the bottom of the centre console there is a console ››› Fig. 178 in which there may be a To open, fully lift the central armrest in the di- compartment ››› Fig. 180 1 for coins, cards,

12 volt power socket ››› page 170. rection of the arrow ››› Fig. 179. car park tickets and similar items. Operation

To close, lower the central armrest. Note

WARNING To avoid theft or use by others, do not use the compartment to store credit or ATM cards or The centre armrest may limit the freedom of similar. movement of the driver's arm and cause a se-

rious accident. Emergencies ● Keep the centre armrest compartments closed while the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING The centre armrest is not designed for chil- Safety dren to sit on!

165 Operation

Glove compartment Vehicle wallet compartment Storage compartments in the rear The glove compartment is designed to store footwell* the vehicle documentation. The vehicle on-board documentation wallet should always be kept in the glove compartment. Insert it crosswise in the glove compartment.

Glove compartment cooling There is an air vent ››› Fig. 182 A on the rear panel so that cooled air from the air condi- Fig. 181 Glove compartment tioner (this must be connected) is fed into the glove compartment. Turn the air vent to open and close it.

Fig. 183 Storage compartments in the foot- WARNING well of the second row of seats. The risk of serious injuries in the event of an accident during a sudden braking manoeuvre Move the mat to one side (where applicable). or turn is increased if the glove compartment is left open. To open, pull on the rear centre part of the cover Fig. 183 (arrow). ● Keep the glove compartment closed while ››› the vehicle is in motion. To close, press the cover down.

Fig. 182 Glove compartment open CAUTION WARNING Make sure children are properly belted in and Opening and closing the glove compartment For structural reasons, some model versions will have gaps behind the glove compartment correctly secured to avoid severe or fatal inju- Unlock the glove compartment where neces- into which small objects may fall. This could ries while the vehicle is in motion. sary. The glove compartment is locked when lead to strange noises and damage to the ve- ● If you are using a child seat with a base or the key slot is vertical. hicle. You should therefore not keep very foot, always install this base or foot correctly small objects in the glove compartment. and safely. Pull the lever to open ››› Fig. 181. ● If the vehicle has a storage compartment in Press the cover upwards to close. the footwell in front of the last row of seats, 166 Transport and practical equipment

this compartment cannot be used as de- To close, push the drawer under the seat until WARNING signed; on the contrary, it must be filled us- it clicks into place. The folding table must not be folded down ing the specially designed accessory so that while the vehicle is in motion to avoid the the base or foot is correctly supported by the WARNING risk of injuries. closed compartment and the child seat is se- If the drawer is open it could obstruct use of cured properly. If this compartment is not the pedals. This could result in serious acci- data Technical suitably secured when using a child seat with dent. a base or foot then the compartment cover Portable waste bin* could rupture in an accident and the child will ● The drawers must remain closed while the be ejected and suffer serious injury. vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the drawer and any objects in it could fall into the driv- ● Please read and observe the child seat er's footwell and obstruct the pedals. Advice manufacturer's handling instructions.

Folding table* Drawers* Operation

Fig. 186 Left sliding door trim: portable waste bin.

The portable waste bin fits onto the bottle holder on the trim of the left-hand sliding

door. Emergencies

Fig. 185 Folding table on the front seat WARNING Fig. 184 Drawer under the front seat Do not use the portable waste bin as an ash- Fold out the table by pulling on it ››› Fig. 185 There may be a drawer below the front seats. tray to avoid the risk of fire. (arrow). Safety Opening and closing the drawer A drink holder is built into the folding table ››› page 168. To open, press the button on the drawer handle and pull the drawer out. To fold it back, push the folding table down as far as possible ››› Fig. 185. 167 Operation

Other storage compartments Side compartments in the luggage compart- ● Bag hook in the luggage compartment ment ››› page 152. There are other compartments ››› Fig. 187 1 WARNING and 2 in the side of the boot. To open the compartment 1 , turn the catch clockwise. To Clothing hung on the coat hooks could reopen the compartment 2 , lift the cover. strict the driver's view and lead to serious ac- Compartment 1 houses the factory fitted CD cidents. changer. The compartment lid 1 can safely ● Hang the clothes from the hooks so that store the tray support covers. driver's view is not restricted. ● The coat hook is suitable for light items of Compartments in the boot floor clothing. Never place heavy, hard or sharp More storage compartments can be found in objects in the bags. the boot floor. CAUTION Fig. 187 In the luggage compartment: Side Function Necessary operations Keep the CD changer compartment closed storage compartment Open the rear com- while the vehicle is in motion to reduce vibra-  Lift the rear of the boot floor partment ››› Fig. 188 tions that could damage the changer. using the handle. 4 :

 Move the hook at the rear Note Keeping the rear com- right of the boot and hook the partment open: The first aid kit is located in the rear left com- boot floor onto it ››› page 152. partment of the luggage compartment.  Push back the hook and Closing the compart- push the rear of the boot floor ment: 4 down. Drink holders Other storage compartments: Introduction Fig. 188 Other compartments in the boot ● in the centre console, front and rear. floor. ● in the door trims, front and rear. Bottle holders ● Coat hooks on the central door pillars and There is a bottle holder in the open compart- on the rear roof handles. ments in the driver and front passenger doors and in that of the sliding door.

168 Transport and practical equipment

WARNING Note Drink holders, rear* Improper use of the drink holders can cause The drink holders can be removed for clean- injury. ing. ● Never place hot drinks in the drink holders. During sudden braking or driving manoeu- Technical data Technical vres, the hot drink could be spilled and lead Drink holders in front centre console to scalding. ● Ensure that no bottles or other object are dropped in the driver footwell, as they could get under the pedals and obstruct their working. Advice ● Never place heavy containers, food or other heavy objects in the drink holder. In the Fig. 190 Centre console, rear section: folding event of an accident, these heavy objects out the drink holder could be “thrown around” the vehicle interior and cause serious injuries. Opening and closing the drink holder in the rear centre console Operation WARNING ● To open, move the drink holder downwards Fig. 189 Front centre console: drink holder in the direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 190. Closed bottles inside the vehicle could explode or crack due to the heat or the cold. ● To open, move the cover backwards ● To close, lift the drink holder. Fig. 189. ● Never leave a closed bottle in the vehicle if ››› The third row of seats has a drink holder in the inside temperature is too high or too low. ● To close, move the cover forwards. the side trim compartment on the rear left. Emergencies CAUTION Do not leave open cans in the drink holders when the vehicle is in motion. They could spill during braking, for example, and cause damage to the vehicle and the electrical system. Safety

169 Operation

Ashtray and cigarette lighter* WARNING WARNING Incorrect use of the ashtray may cause a fire Undue use of the cigarette lighter may cause Ashtray or burns and other serious injuries. a fire or burns and other serious injuries. ● Never put paper or other flammable objects ● The cigarette lighter must only be used to in the ashtray. light cigarettes or similar. ● Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. The cigarette lighter can be used Cigarette lighter when the ignition is switched on.

Note The cigarette lighter can also be used with the 12 volt power socket ››› page 170.

Fig. 191 Front centre console: ashtray closed

There are ashtrays located on the front of the Power sockets centre console ››› Fig. 191 and on the rear lining of the rear door. Introduction

Opening and closing the ashtray Fig. 192 Front centre console: lighter Electrical equipment can be connected to the power sockets in the vehicle. ● To open, lift the ashtray cover. Depending on the vehicle equipment, there All connected appliances should be in per- ● To close, push the ashtray cover down. may be a lighter to the front of the centre fect working order without any faults. console ››› Fig. 192 or in the compartment to the front of the centre console. Emptying the ashtray WARNING ● Remove the ashtray from the drink holder ● Push the button on the cigarette lighter in- Improper use of the power sockets or electri- or lining of the door by pulling it upwards. wards with the ignition on ››› Fig. 192. cal devices could lead to a fire and cause seri- ● After emptying the ashtray, insert it from ● Wait for the lighter to pop out slightly. ous injuries. above into the drink holder or door lining. ● Pull out the cigarette lighter and light the ● Never leave children unsupervised in the cigarette on the glowing coil ››› . vehicle. The power sockets and equipment connected to them can be used when the ig- ● Replace the cigarette lighter in its insert. nition is switched on. 170 Transport and practical equipment

● Should a connected electrical device over- ● Unshielded equipment can cause interfer- heat, switch it off and unplug it immediately. ence on the radio equipment and the vehicle's electrical system. CAUTION ● Interference can occur on the radio's AM waveband if electrical appliances are used ● To avoid damage to the vehicle's electrical near the rear window aerial. data Technical system, never connect equipment that gener- ates electrical current, such as solar panels or battery chargers, to the 12 volt power sockets in order to charge the vehicle's bat- Vehicle power sockets tery. Fig. 194 Rear centre console: 230 Volt Euro Advice ● Only use accessories with approved elec- power socket tromagnetic compatibility according to current regulations. Depending on your vehicle version, you may ● To avoid damage due to voltage variations, have a 12-volt power socket and/or a 230 switch off all devices connected to the 12 V volt power socket. power sockets before switching the ignition on or off and before starting the engine. Maximum power consumption Operation ● Never connect an appliance to the 12 volt power socket that consumes more than the Power sock- Maximum power consumption power indicated in watts. Exceeding the max- et imum power absorption could damage the ve- Fig. 193 Centre console, rear section: 12 volt hicle's electrical system. socket 12 Volts 120 Watts 230 Volts 150 Watts (300 Watt peak)

For the sake of the environment Emergencies Do not leave the engine running when the ve- The maximum capacity of each power socket hicle is at a standstill. must not be exceeded. The power consumption is indicated on the rating plate of each appliance. Note

Where two or more appliances are connected Safety ● Using devices with the engine stopped and at the same time, the total rating of all the the ignition switched on will drain the battery. connected devices must never exceed 190 Watts ››› . »

171 Operation

12 volt power socket current only flows when the childproof lock is ● Do not plug adapters or extension cords in- The 12 volt power socket will only work with unlocked. to the 230 Volt Euro power connector. Other- the ignition on. wise, the built-in child safety device will LED on the power socket ››› Fig. 194 switch off and the connector will become live. Using electrical appliances with the engine ● Steady green light: The childproof lock is un- Do not plug current conductors such as a stopped and the ignition switched on will knitting needle into the 230 Volt Euro power drain the battery. Therefore, electrical devi- locked. The power socket can now be used. connector. ces connected to the power socket can only be used when the engine is running. Flashing red light: There is some kind of fault (e.g. disconnection due to ex- CAUTION To prevent voltage variations from causing cess current or temperature). ● damage, switch off the electrical consumer Always follow the operating instructions for the appliances to be connected! connected to the 12 volt power socket before Heat protection switching the ignition on or off and before ● Never exceed the maximum power rating as starting the engine. The 230 Volt Euro power connector converter this could damage the vehicle's general elec- switches off automatically when a certain trical system. 12 volt power sockets can be found in the fol- temperature is exceeded. This disconnect ● 12 volt power socket: lowing locations in the vehicle: prevents overheating in the event of an in- – Only use accessories with approved elec- ● Compartment in the centre of the centre crease in power consumption of the connec- tromagnetic compatibility according to console. ted appliance and where the atmospheric current regulations. temperature is too high. The inverter will ● Compartment in the front centre console. – Never power the socket. switch on again automatically after it has ● 230 Volt Euro power socket: ● Storage compartment in the front central cooled down. Appliances that are switched armrest. on and connected to the power socket will – Do not plug in devices or connectors that are too heavy (e.g. a transformer) into the ● start up again. Therefore, switch off all elec- Rear centre console ››› Fig. 193. power socket. trical appliances connected to the power ● At the rear right of the luggage compart- socket when the current converter switches – Do not connect lamps which contain a ne- ment. off due to overheating. on tube. – Only plug appliances with a voltage that 230 Volt Euro power socket* WARNING matches the power socket voltage into The power socket only works when the en- the power socket. High voltage in the electrical installation! gine is running ››› . – Where devices have with a high start-up ● Liquids must not be spilt over the power current, surge protection prevents them Connecting an electrical appliance: plug the socket. from switching on. In this case, unplug device into the power socket as far as possible to unlock the built-in childproof lock. The 172 Air conditioning

the device and try plugging it back in af- Air conditioning switched off and air recirculation mode ter around 10 seconds. switched on, the windows can mist over very Air conditioning quickly, considerably limiting visibility. Note ● Switch air recirculation mode off when it is not required.

● Some appliances may not work properly in Introduction data Technical the 230 Volt Euro power connector due to a lack of power (Watts). Viewing Climatronic information WARNING ● The 230 Watt Euro power connector can be The factory-fitted radio or navigation system Stuffy or used air will increase fatigue and re- modified for 115 Watt appliances and vice screen briefly displays information relating to duce driver concentration possibly resulting versa. Consult a specialist shop for advice on Climatronic. in a serious accident. Advice accessories to adapt the connector. SEAT rec- ● Never leave the fresh air fan turned off or ommends taking your car in for technical The units of temperature measurement is dis- use the air recirculation for long periods of service. played on the factory-installed radio or navi- time; the air in the vehicle interior will not be gation system and, depending on the vehicle refreshed. equipment, can be set using the Configu- ration menu on the instrument panel. CAUTION Operation WARNING ● Switch the air conditioner off if you think it may be broken. This will avoid additional Reduced visibility through the windows in- damage. Have the air conditioner checked by creases the risk of serious accidents. a specialised workshop. ● Ensure that all windows are free of ice and ● Repairs to the air conditioner require spe- snow and that they are not fogged up pre- cialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT rec- venting a clear view of everything outside. ommends taking your car in for technical ● The maximum heat output required to de- service. Emergencies frost windows quickly is only available when ● Do not smoke when air recirculation is the engine has reached its normal running switched on in vehicles with an air condition- temperature. Only drive when you have good er. The smoke taken in could lie on the cool- visibility. ing system vaporiser and on the activated ● Always ensure that you use the air condi- charcoal cartridge of the dust and pollen fil- Safety tioner and heated rear window to maintain ter, leading to a permanently unpleasant good visibility. smell. » ● Never leave the air recirculation on for a long period of time. If the cooling system is 173 Operation

Note used to make the appropriate settings for the Air conditioning user instructions rear seats. ● When the cooling system is turned off, air The interior cooling system only works when coming from the outside will not be dried. To Note the engine is running and fan is switched on. avoid fogging up the windows, SEAT recommends leaving the cooler (compressor) on. To ● Not all Climatronic buttons are operational The air conditioner operates most effectively do this, press the A/C button. The button in REAR mode. with the windows and the electric sliding lamp should light up. ● The REAR button is locked in defrost mode. panoramic roof closed. However, if the vehi- ● If the humidity and temperature outside the cle has heated up after standing in the sun vehicle are high, condensation can drip off for some time, the air inside can be cooled the evaporator in the cooling system and Controls in the rear seats more quickly by opening the windows and form a pool underneath the vehicle, this is the sliding electric panoramic sunroof briefly. completely normal and there is no need to suspect a leak. Setting for conditions of optimal visibility ● Keep the air intake slots in front of the windscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to en- When the air conditioning is switched on, the sure heating and cooling are not impaired, temperature and the air humidity in the vehi- and to prevent the windows from misting cle interior drop. In this way, when the out- over. side air humidity is high, the windows do not mist over and comfort for the vehicle occupants is improved. Controls Electronic manual air conditioning Read the additional information carefully Fig. 195 Centre console: details of the con- ● Switch off the air recirculation ››› page 176. trols in the rear seats ›››  page 36 ● Set the fan to the required setting. To switch a function on or off, press the ap- ● Turn the temperature control to the centre Rotary con- propriate button. Press the button again to position. trol Description switch off the function. ››› Fig. 195 ● Open and direct all the air outlets in the The LED on each control lights up to indicate dash panel ››› page 176. A Temperature selector that the respective function of a control has ● Turn the air distribution control to the re- been switched on. B Air flow regulator quired position. Some Climatronic controls may also be on the air conditioner control panel located in the rear centre console. These controls are 174 Air conditioning

With Climatronic The cooling system does not switch on Special features ● Press the AUTO button. If the air conditioning system cannot be If the humidity and temperature outside the ● Set the temperature to +22°C (+72°F). switched on, this may be caused by the fol- vehicle are high, condensation can drip off lowing: the vaporiser in the cooling system and form ● Open and direct all the air outlets in the a pool underneath the vehicle. This is normal dash panel ››› page 176. ● The engine is not running. and does not indicate a leak! data Technical ● The fan is switched off. Climatronic: Switching the measuring units Note for temperature on the radio display or the ● The air conditioning fuse is blown. navigation system installed with the default ● The outside temperature is lower than ap- After starting the engine, any residual humidity in the air conditioner could mist over the settings proximately +3°C (+38°F). Advice windscreen. Switch on the defrost function as Switching the temperature indication from ● The air conditioner compressor has been soon as possible to clear the windscreen of Celsius to Fahrenheit on the radio display or temporarily switched off because the engine condensation. the navigation system is carried out in the coolant temperature is too high. menu on the instrument panel ● Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air ›››  page 30. conditioner checked by a specialised workshop. Operation Emergencies Safety

175 Operation

Air vents

Fig. 196 Air vents in the dash panel

Air vents CAUTION Air recirculation Never close the air vents ››› Fig. 196 A com- Never place food, medicines or other heat- pletely to ensure heating, cooling and venti- Air recirculation mode prevents the ambient sensitive objects close to the air vents. Being air from entering the interior. lation inside the vehicle. heat-sensitive, they may be damaged or made unsuitable for use by the air coming When the outside temperature is very high, ● Turn the thumbwheel in the required direc- from the air vents. selecting manual air recirculation mode for a tion to open and close the air vents. When short period refreshes the vehicle interior  the thumbwheel is in the position, the cor- more quickly. responding air vent is closed. Note For safety reasons, air recirculation mode is ● Change the air direction using the ventila- The air from the vents flows through the vehi- switched off when the  button is press- tion grille lever. cle interior and out through the outlets below the rear window. The slots must not be cov- ed or the air distributor turned to  ››› . There are other air vents that cannot be ad- ered with items of clothing or other objects. justed on the dash panel B , in the footwell Switching the recirculation mode on and off and in the rear area of the interior. manually on the air conditioning (Electronic manual air conditioning)  Switching on: press the button  until the lamp on the button lights up. 176 Air conditioning

Switching off: press the button  until the ● The cooling system is switched off and the CAUTION lamp on the button switches off. outside temperature is below +15°C (+59°F). The windscreen wiper is switched on. Do not smoke when air recirculation is switched on in vehicles with an air condition- Switching the recirculation mode on and off er. The smoke taken in could lie on the cool-  manually on the Climatronic Switching the automatic air recirculation ing system vaporiser and on the activated Switching on: press the button  until the mode on and off charcoal cartridge of the dust and pollen fil- data Technical lamp on the button lights up. Switching on: press the button  until the ter, leading to a permanently unpleasant right lamp on the button lights up. smell. Switching off: press the button  until the lamp on the button switches off. Switching off: press the button  until all Note

the lamps on the button are switched off. Advice Automatic air recirculation mode  Climatronic: air recirculation mode switches on to prevent exhaust gas from entering the Fresh air enters the vehicle interior in posi- Switching the automatic air recirculation vehicle interior when it is in reverse and tion . If the system detects a high con- mode off temporarily while the automatic windscreen wipers are ●  centration of hazardous substances in the Press the button once to temporarily working. ambient air, air recirculation mode is switch- switch to manual air recirculation mode in ed on automatically. When the level of impur- the event of unpleasant smells from outside. ities drops to within a normal range, recircu- The left indicator lamp turns on. Operation lation mode is switched off. ● After more than two seconds, press the  Auxiliary heater* (additional The system is unable to detect unpleasant button again to restart automatic air recircu- heater) smells. lation. The right indicator lamp turns on. Introduction With the following outside temperatures and WARNING conditions the air recirculation does not switch on automatically: Observe the safety warnings ››› in Intro- The auxiliary heater is powered by fuel from Emergencies duction on page 173. the vehicle's fuel tank and can be used while ● The cooling system is switched on (the AC ● If the cooling system is switched off and air the vehicle is in motion and at a standstill. button is lit up) and the outside temperature recirculation mode switched on, the windows Select the mode required (heat or fan) is below +3°C (+38°F). can mist over very quickly, considerably limit- ››› page 179 on the dash panel. ● ing visibility. The cooling system and the windscreen In winter, the auxiliary heater can be used in Safety wipers are switched off and the outside tem- ● Switch air recirculation mode off when it is heat mode before switching on the ignition perature is below +10°C (+50°F). not required. to remove any ice, mist or snow from the windscreen (thin layers only). »

177 Operation

WARNING Switching the auxiliary heater on and er. The exhaust gases are also extracted from the system. The auxiliary heater fumes contain carbon di- off oxide, an odourless and colourless toxic gas. Carbon monoxide can cause people to lose Switching the auxiliary heater on: consciousness. It can also cause death. Remote control Manually using the instant on/off ››› page ● Never switch on the auxiliary heater or  button. 174 leave it running in places that are enclosed or unventilated. Manually using the remote control. page ON ››› ● Never program the independent heating 178 system to be activated and operated in Automatically at the programmed ››› page closed, unventilated areas. and enabled on time. 179

WARNING Switching the auxiliary heater off: The components of the auxiliary heater exhaust system heat up a great deal. This could  Manually using the instant on/off ››› page cause a fire. button for the air conditioner. 174 Fig. 197 Auxiliary heater: remote control ● Always park your vehicle so that no part of Manually using the remote control. ››› page the exhaust system can come in contact with OFF 178 Fig. 197 Meaning flammable materials (such as dried grass). Automatically after the programmed ››› page ON Switch the auxiliary heater on. time. 179 CAUTION OFF Switch the auxiliary heater off: Automatically when the light comes ››› page Never place food, medicines or other heat- A Aerial. sensitive objects close to the air vents. Food, on  (fuel reserve). 261 medicines and other heat-sensitive objects Automatically when the battery pow- ››› page B Light. may be damaged or made unsuitable for use er drops to a very low level. 280 by the air coming from the air vents. The auxiliary heater may accidentally switch on if a button is pressed on the remote con- Special feature trol by mistake. This may also occur outside After switching the auxiliary heater off, it con- the range of the remote control or if the light tinues to run for a short period to completely flashes. burn any fuel remaining in the auxiliary heat-

178 Air conditioning

Remote control light Battery light An optimum range is obtained by keeping Meaning The remote control light provides users with Fig. 197 B the remote control vertical, with the aerial different information at the push of a button: ››› Fig. 197 A pointing upwards. When doing The remote control battery is so, do not cover the aerial with your fingers Flashes orange for flat. The on or off signal has or with the palm of your hand. Battery light around five seconds. not been received, respective- Meaning data Technical Fig. 197 B ly. There must be a minimum distance of 2 metres between the remote control and the vehi- The auxiliary heater has been a) Lights up green for Within its range, the remote control might not receive the sig- cle. switched on using the ON but- nal sent by the vehicle receiver. In this case, the remote control around two seconds. ton. will send an error message whether the auxiliary heater is on or off. Come closer to the vehicle and press the corresponding but- CAUTION

The auxiliary heater has been ton on the remote control once again. Advice Lights up red for ● switched off using the OFF but- The radio frequency remote control con- around two seconds. tains electronic components. Therefore, avoid ton. Replacing the remote control battery getting it wet and being knocked and protect Slowly flashes green B No ona) signal has been re- If the light ››› Fig. 197 on the remote con- it from direct sunlight. for around two sec- ceived. trol does not come on when the button is ● Use of inappropriate batteries may damage onds. pressed, the remote control battery should the remote control. For this reason, always re- The auxiliary heater is locked. soon be replaced. place the used battery with another of the Operation Quickly flashes green Possible causes: the fuel tank The battery is located beneath a cover on the same voltage, size and specifications. for around two sec- is almost empty, the battery onds. charge is very low or there is a back of the remote control. Turn the slot to fault. the left using a flat, blunt object (e.g. a coin). For the sake of the environment When changing the battery, use another bat- ● Please dispose of old batteries so that they Flashes red for No offa) signal has been re- tery of the same model and observe the po- do not harm the environment. around two seconds. ceived. larity when fitting it ››› . ● The remote control battery may contain

The remote control battery is Emergencies Lights up orange for perchlorate. Observe the legal requirements almost flat. However, the on or around two seconds, Range for their disposal. off signal has been received, then green or red. respectively. The receiver is in the interior of the vehicle. The remote control, when fitted with new bat- Lights up orange for The remote control battery is teries, has a range of several hundred me- around two seconds, almost flat. The on or off signal Programming the auxiliary heater tres. Obstacles between the remote control Safety then flashes green or has not been received, respec- red. tively. and the vehicle, bad weather conditions and The heater or ventilation inside the vehicle discharged batteries can considerably reduce can be programmed for a certain period. » the range of the remote control.

179 Operation

Before programming, check that the day is Menu op- Operating instructions Description correctly set in the Auxiliary heater - tions day of the week menu ››› . The auxiliary heater exhaust system located The operating time may vary between below the vehicle must be kept clear of snow, Enabling the Auxiliary heater menu on Duration 10 and 60 minutes and can be set to mud and other objects. The exhaust gases the instrument panel 5-minute intervals. must not be obstructed in any way. The ex- Set to heat or ventilate the vehicle in- haust gases generated by the auxiliary heater ● From the main menu, select the Auxili- Operating terior when the auxiliary heater is are removed via an exhaust pipe fitted under- ary heater submenu and press the OK mode switched on. neath the vehicle. button on the windscreen wiper lever. ● OR: press the  or  arrow buttons on the Day Set the current day of the week. On heating the vehicle interior, depending on the outside temperature the warm air is first multifunction steering wheel until the Aux- Factory The predefined factory values for the directed at the windscreen and then to the iliary heater menu is displayed. settings functions of this menu are restored. rest of the vehicle interior through the air Menu op- Back This returns to the main menu. vents. If the air vents are turned towards the Description tions windows, for example, the form of air distri- Checking programming bution may be affected. The auxiliary heater can be set to come on automatically if required. To do so, If the timer has been switched on after Depending on the outside temperature, the select a timer: switching the ignition off, the light on button temperature at which the auxiliary heater – The timer is displayed marked with a  will remain lit for around 10 seconds. warms the vehicle interior may be somewhat . Switching higher if the heating or air conditioner tem- – Only one timer can be selected. If a on WARNING perature control is set to maximum before timer has been selected, Prog. ON Switching switching the heating on. will be displayed on the screen. If no Never program the independent heating sys- off timer has been selected, the dash tem to be activated and operated in closed, Depending on the engine, vehicles with aux- panel display will show Prog. OFF. unventilated areas. The auxiliary heater iliary heater may be fitted with a second bat- – To modify the programmed timer, se- fumes contain carbon dioxide, an odourless tery in the luggage compartment that is re- lect another timer or select the Off and colourless toxic gas. Carbon monoxide sponsible for powering the auxiliary heater. option. can cause people to lose consciousness. It can also cause death. Three different timers (hh.mm) can lat- When will the auxiliary heater will not switch er be selected using the On option. If on? Timer 1 the auxiliary heater is to be switched Timer 2 on for just a certain day of the week, ● The auxiliary heater requires about as Timer 3 select the day of the week and the much power as the dipped beam headlights. time for the auxiliary heater to come on. 180 Driving

If the battery charge is low, the auxiliary heat- Driving lock and it will not be possible to turn the er will switch off automatically or will not steering wheel. even switch on. This avoids problems when starting the engine. Address ● The heater will switch on just once each Control and warning lamps time. The timer will also have to be switched Introduction data Technical back on every time it is required. The power steering is not hydraulic but elec-  It lights up red tromechanical. The advantage of this steer- Note Power steering faul- The steering system should be ing system is that it disposes of hydraulic ty. checked by a specialised work- ● Noise will be heard while the auxiliary tubes, hydraulic oil, the pump, filter and oth- shop as soon as possible. Advice heater is running. er components. The electromechanical sys- ● When the air humidity is high and the out- tem saves fuel. While a hydraulic system re-  It lights up yellow side temperature low, the heating system quires oil pressure to be maintained, electro- may evaporate condensation from the auxili- mechanical steering only requires energy Power steering op- The steering system should be ary heater. In this case, steam may be re- when the steering wheel is turned. eration reduced. checked by a specialised work- leased from underneath the vehicle. This is shop as soon as possible. completely normal and there is no need to With the power steering system, the assisted If, after restarting the engine and suspect a fault! steering function automatically adjusts ac- driving for a short distance, the Operation ● If the auxiliary heater runs several times cording to the vehicle speed, the steering tor- yellow warning lamp no longer comes on, it will not be necessa- over a prolonged period, the vehicle battery que and the wheel turning angle. The power steering only works when the engine is run- ry to take the vehicle to a speci- may run flat. To re-charge the battery, drive alised workshop. the vehicle for a long distance. As a general ning. rule, drive for as much time as the auxiliary The vehicle battery Drive for a short distance at heating was working. WARNING was disconnected 15-20 km/h (9-12 mph).

and has been recon- Emergencies If the power steering is not working then the nected. steering wheel is much more difficult to turn and the vehicle more difficult to control.  Flashes red ● The power steering only works when the engine is running. Fault in the steering  Do not drive on! ● Never allow the vehicle to move when the column electronic Seek professional advice. » Safety lock. engine is switched off. ● Never remove the key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. The steering may 181 Operation

 It flashes yellow If the driver door is opened before the igni- Counter steering assistance system tion is switched off, the steering column elec- The counter steering assistance system helps Steering column de- Gently turn the steering wheel to tronic lock is activated via the ignition key or the driver in critical situations. Additional viation. and fro. the sensor built into the door handle. steering power helps the driver when counter Steering wheel not Remove the key from the ignition steering. unlocked or locked. and then switch the ignition Steering column mechanical lock back on. Check the messages To prevent theft, we recommend you lock the WARNING displayed on the instrument panel at the same time. steering before leaving the vehicle. The counter steering assistance system com- Do not drive on, if the steering bined with ESC helps the driver to steer the column remains locked after the Please engage steer- Unlocking the steering vehicle in critical driving conditions. At all ignition has been switched on. ing lock times, it is the driver who steers the vehicle. Seek specialist assistance. The counter steering system does not steer Parking the vehicle Turn the steering wheel the vehicle. Several warning and control lamps light up ››› page 187. slightly to release the for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- steering lock. ed on, signalling that the function is being Remove the key from the Insert the key in the igni- verified. They will switch off after a few sec- ignition. tion lock. Stopping and starting the en- onds. Turn the steering wheel Hold the steering wheel in gine slightly until you hear the this position and switch WARNING steering lock. on the ignition. Introduction Observe the safety warnings ››› in Control and warning lamps on page 105. Electromechanical power steering Immobiliser display With the power steering system, the assisted When an invalid key is used or in the event of steering function automatically adjusts ac- a system fault,  or Immobiliser on is Information on the steering cording to the vehicle speed, the steering tor- displayed on the instrument panel. The en- que and the wheel turning angle. The power gine cannot be started. Steering column electronic lock steering only works when the engine is run- Vehicles with Keyless Access: the steering ning. Pushing or towing column locks when the driver's door is You should remember that you will need con- For technical reasons, the vehicle must not opened and the ignition is switched off. siderably more power than normal to steer be push- or tow-started. Jump starting is pref- Therefore, the vehicle should be at a stand- the vehicle if the power steering is not work- erable. still and, where applicable, the selector lever ing correctly or not at all. in position P. 182 Driving

WARNING WARNING Vehicle keys ››› Fig. 198

Turning off the engine while driving will make The components of the exhaust system reach No key in the ignition lock: The steering lock may stopping the vehicle difficult; this could even very high temperatures. This could cause a be activated. result in the loss of control causing an acci- fire and considerable damage. dent with serious consequences. ● Always park your vehicle so that no part of 1 Ignition off, all electrical devices disconnected. Key can be removed from the vehicle. data Technical ● The assisted braking and steering systems, the exhaust system can come in contact with the airbag system, seat belts and certain flammable materials (such as wood, leaves, 2 Ignition is switched on. Pre-heating of diesel en- safety equipment are only active while the dried grass, spilled fuel, etc.). gine. The steering lock can be unlocked. engine is running. ● Do not apply additional underseal or anti- 3 Switch on the engine. Release the key when the ● The engine should only be switched off corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes, cata-

engine has started. When it is released, the key Advice when the vehicle is at a standstill. lytic converter, heat shields or the diesel par- returns to position 2 . ticulate filter. WARNING Key not authorised for the vehicle While the engine is running or starting it Ignition lock If a key which is not authorised for this vehi- could help reduce the risk of serious injury. cle is inserted in the ignition lock, it can be ● Never start or leave the engine running in removed as follows: poorly ventilated or closed spaces. Exhaust Operation gas contains carbon monoxide, a toxic, col- ● Automatic gearbox: the key cannot be re- ourless and odourless gas. Carbon monoxide moved from the ignition lock. Press and re- can cause people to lose consciousness. It lease the selector lever locking button. Key can also cause death. can be removed from the vehicle. ● Never leave the vehicle unattended if the ● Manual gearbox: remove the key from the engine is running. The vehicle could move off ignition. suddenly or something unexpected could Emergencies happen resulting in damage and serious in- WARNING jury. Unsuitable or careless use of the vehicle key ● Never use start boosters. Cold start sprays Fig. 198 Vehicle key positions could result in serious injury. could explode or increase the engine speed unexpectedly. Read the additional information carefully ● Always take all the keys with you whenever Safety ›››  page 24 you leave the vehicle. If not, the engine could accidentally be started and electrical equipment such as the windows could accidentally »

183 Operation

be operated which may result in serious in- Starter button Opening the driver's door when exiting the jury. vehicle activates the electronic lock on the steering column if the ignition is disabled ● Never leave children or disabled people alone in the car. Passengers could be trapped ››› page 181. in the car in an emergency and not be able to get themselves to safety. For example, de- Switching the ignition on/off pending on the time of the year, tempera- ● Briefly push the start-up button ››› Fig. 199 tures inside a locked and closed vehicle can without touching the brake or clutch ped- be extremely high or extremely low resulting al ››› . in serious injuries and illness or even death, particularly for young children. Emergency starting function ● Never remove the key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. The steering may If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle, Fig. 199 In the centre console: start-up push an emergency start-up will be required. The lock and it will not be possible to turn the button for the Keyless Access lock and start- steering wheel. up system. The layout in right-hand drive ve- relevant message will appear in the dash hicles is symmetrical. panel display. This may happen when, for ex- Note ample, the vehicle key battery is very low or flat: ● If the key is left in the ignition lock with the engine off for long periods, the vehicle bat- ● Immediately after pushing the start-up but- tery will run flat. ton, keep the vehicle key next to the steering ● For automatic gearbox vehicles, the key can column ››› Fig. 200. only be removed from the ignition lock if the ● The ignition connects and the engine starts gear selector lever is in position P. In this automatically. case, press and release the selector lever locking button. Emergency disconnection If the engine does not stop after briefly press- Fig. 200 Emergency ignition in vehicles with ing the start-up button, an emergency dis- Keyless Access. connect will be required:

The start-up button may only be used if there ● Press the starter button twice within 1 sec- is a valid key in the vehicle. ond or press it once for more than 2 seconds ››› . ● The engine turns off automatically. 184 Driving

Engine restart feature Starting the engine Vehicles without Vehicles with

If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle Keyless Access Keyless Access after the engine stops, you will only have 5 Complete operations only in the sequence seconds to restart it. A warning will display given: If the engine does not If the engine does not start, stop and wait for on the dash panel screen. start, stop and wait for around 1 minute to try Vehicles without Vehicles with 6. data Technical After this interval, it will not be possible to around 1 minute to try again. If necessary, Keyless Access Keyless Access again. perform an emergency start the engine without a valid key inside start ››› page 184. Press and hold the brake pedal until step 5 is per- the vehicle. 1. formed. Disconnect the electronic parking brake when you 7. WARNING are about to start driving ››› page 187. In vehicles with a manual gearbox: press and Advice 1a. Any accidental movement of the vehicle could hold the clutch down until the engine starts. WARNING result in serious injury. Put the gearbox lever in neutral or the selector 2. ● When pressing the start-up button, do not lever in position P or N. Never leave the vehicle unattended if the en- press the brake or clutch pedal, this way the gine is running. The vehicle could move off engine will start immediately. Only in vehicles with suddenly, especially if it is in gear, resulting diesel engines: for pre- in an accident and serious injury. heating, turn the key in WARNING 3. the ignition lock to po- Operation sition ››› Fig. 198 2 . A WARNING If vehicle keys are used negligently or with- control lamp lights up out due care, this may cause accidents and on the dash panel . Cold start sprays could explode or cause a serious injury. sudden increase in the engine speed. Press the starter button ● Never leave any key inside the vehicle ● Never use start boosters. ››› Fig. 199; do not Turn the key in the igni- when exiting. Otherwise, a child or unauthor- press the accelerator. ised person could lock the vehicle, start the tion lock to position 4. There needs to be a CAUTION Emergencies ››› Fig. 198 3 ; do not engine or connect the ignition and, in this valid key inside the ve- press the accelerator. way, operate electronic equipment (e.g. the hicle for the engine to ● An attempt to start the engine while driving windows). start. or starting the engine immediately after turning it off can cause damage to the engine or Once the engine starts, Once the engine starts, starter motor. Note 5. release the key in the release the start-up ● Safety ignition lock. button. When the engine is cold, avoid high revs In diesel vehicles with the Keyless Access and heavy acceleration and do not make the system, there may be a delay in the engine engine work hard. » starting if it requires preheating.

185 Operation

● Do not push or tow start the engine. Un- Vehicles without Vehicles with ● If the key is removed from the ignition, the

burnt fuel could damage the catalytic con- Keyless Access Keyless Access steering may lock and it will not be possible verter. to steer the vehicle. 1. Bring the vehicle to a full stop ››› .

For the sake of the environment Press and hold the brake pedal until the step 4 is CAUTION 2. performed. Do not warm the engine at idle speed; start ● If the vehicle is stopped and the Start-Stop driving immediately if the visibility is OK. If the vehicle has an automatic gearbox, place the system* switches off the engine, the ignition 3. This helps the engine reach operating tem- selector lever in position P. remains switched on. Make sure that the igni- perature faster and reduces emissions. tion is switched off before leaving the vehi- 4. Connect the electronic parking brake ››› page 187. cle, otherwise the battery could discharge. Note Briefly press the start- ● If the engine has been driven at high speed up button ››› Fig. 199. If for a prolonged period of time, it may over- Turn the vehicle key in ● For example, if the key battery is very worn the engine fails to 5. the ignition lock to po- heat when turned off. To avoid engine dam- or flat, the engine cannot be started with the switch off, perform an sition ››› Fig. 198 1 . age, allow the engine to run for approximate- starter button. In this case, remove the igni- emergency disconnect ly two minutes in neutral before switching it tion button from the lock and insert the key. ››› page 184. off. ● Electrical devices with a high power con- If the vehicle is equipped with a manual gearbox, sumption are switched off temporarily when 6. put it into 1st or reverse. Note the engine starts. ● In vehicles with automatic gearbox, the key ● When the engine is started cold, there may WARNING be strong vibrations for a few moments for can only be removed when the selector lever technical reasons. This is quite normal, and Never switch off the engine while the vehicle is in position P. no cause for concern. is moving. You may lose control of the vehicle ● After stopping the engine, the engine com- and there is a risk of serious accident. ● At temperatures below +5°C (+41°F), partment fan may continue running for a few smoke may be given off below the vehicle ● The airbags and belt tensioners do not minutes, even when the ignition has been when the additional heater is connected. work when the ignition is switched off. switched off or the key removed. The radiator ● The brake servo does not work with the en- fan is automatically switched off. gine off. To stop, the brake pedal must be pressed with more force. Stopping the engine ● As the power steering does not work if the Electronic immobiliser Complete operations only in the sequence engine is not running, you will need more given: strength to steer than normally. The gear lock prevents the engine from being started with an unauthorised key and the vehicle being moved. 186 Driving

The vehicle key has a chip that automatically WARNING ● Never leave children or disabled people disables the immobilizer when the key is alone in the car. They could be trapped in the Driving with worn brake pads or a faulty placed in the ignition lock. car in an emergency and will not be able to brake system may lead to serious accident. The electronic immobiliser will be activated get themselves to safety. For example, de- ● If  lights, alone or accompanied by a pending on the time of the year, tempera- again automatically as soon as you pull the warning message on the instrument panel tures inside a locked and closed vehicle can data Technical key out of the ignition lock. For vehicles with display, please go immediately to a special- be extremely high or extremely low resulting the Keyless Access system, the key has to be ised workshop to check the brake pads and to in serious injuries and illness or even death, outside the vehicle ››› page 115. replace them if they are worn. particularly for young children. For this reason, the vehicle can only be used

with a genuine SEAT key with the correct WARNING CAUTION Advice code. Coded keys can be purchased from Careless parking can cause serious injury. ● Special care should be taken when parking your technical service centre ››› page 110. ● Never remove the key from the ignition if in areas with high kerbs or fixed barriers. Ob- If an unauthorised key is used, the message the vehicle is in motion. The steering lock jects protruding from the ground may dam- SAFE or Immobiliser active is displayed may engage and lock the steering wheel mak- age the bumper or other parts of the vehicle on the instrument panel. The vehicle cannot ing the vehicle impossible to control. during manoeuvres. To avoid damage, stop before the wheels touch the barrier or kerb. be started in this case ● Always park your vehicle so that no part of the exhaust system can come in contact with ● Special attention is required when driving Operation Note flammable materials (such as wood, leaves, through entrances, over ramps, kerbs or oth- dried grass, spilled fuel, etc.). er objects. The vehicle underbody, bumpers, The correct operation of the vehicle is only mudguards and running gear, and the engine ● Always apply the electronic parking brake guaranteed when original SEAT keys are and exhaust system could be damaged as when you leave your vehicle and when you used. you drive over these objects. park. ● Never leave children or disabled people alone in the vehicle. They could release the Emergencies Braking and parking electronic parking brake, activate the selec- Control and warning lamps tor lever or gear stick and start the vehicle Introduction moving. This could result in a serious acci-  It lights up red dent. Together with the The include the an- ● Always take all the keys with you whenever Safety assisted braking systems  you leave the vehicle. The engine could acci- control lamp on ti-lock braking system (ABS), the brake assist the button: Elec- ››› page 189 » dentally be started and electrical equipment system (BAS), the electronic differential lock tronic parking brake (EDL), the traction control system (ASR) and such as the windows could accidentally be on. the electronic stability control (ESC). operated resulting in serious injury. 187 Operation

 It lights up red  It lights up yellow  Flashes red

 Stop the vehicle! The battery has Electronic parking Fault in the brake ››› page 280 Seek professional assistance! been reconnected. brake faulty. The system ››› page 191. control lamp  may Contact a specialised workshop, light up at the same as it may not be possible to park  Do not drive on!  It lights up yellow Brake fluid level in- time or the control the vehicle in safety. Check brake fluid level lamp  may flash adequate. Switch on ASR ››› page 205. ASR ››› page 279. ASR manually deac- on the button. is automatically activated when tivated. Together with the Contact a specialised workshop. the ignition is switched on or off. ABS control lamp The vehicle can be braked with-  It flashes yellow : ABS fault. out ABS.  It lights up yellow Take your foot off the accelera- ESC or ASR regulat- tor. Adjust your driving style to Together with the ing.  It lights up red the road conditions. ESC control lamp : Brake pedal not Fault in the ABS. Contact a specialised workshop. Press brake pedal to the floor. pressed! The vehicle can be braked with- Several warning and control lamps light up Together with the out ABS. for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- warning lamp  or ed on, signalling that the function is being It lights up yellow   : ABS fault. verified. They will switch off after a few sec- Contact a specialised workshop onds. Front brake pads immediately. Inspect all the  It lights up yellow worn. brake pads and replace as nec- WARNING essary. Together with the warning lamp  Observe the safety warnings ››› in Control flashing: electronic Contact a specialised workshop. and warning lamps on page 105.  It lights up yellow parking brake faulty. Switching the ignition on and off ESC disconnected WARNING If necessary, drive for a short dis- by the system. tance.  It lights up green Driving with brakes in bad condition could result in a serious accident. Press the brake pedal to select a Fault in the ESC. Contact a specialised workshop. ● If the brake warning lamp  does not go gear range. Together with the Contact a specialised workshop. Brake pedal not out, or if it lights up when driving, the brake ABS control lamp The vehicle can be braked with- pressed. Press the brake pedal to discon- fluid level in the reservoir is too low or there : Fault in the ABS. out ABS. nect the electronic parking brake ››› page 189.

188 Driving is a fault in the brake system. Obtain profes- Electronic parking brake ● The control lamps  on the button and  sional assistance immediately ››› page 278, on the instrument panel go out. Checking the brake fluid level. ● If the brake warning lamp  lights up to- Automatic release of the electronic parking gether with the ABS warning lamp , the brake on starting the engine regulation function of the ABS could be mal- The electronic parking brake is automatically data Technical functioning. As a result, the rear wheels can released when the vehicle starts moving, if lock relatively easily when braking. If the rear the driver door is closed and the driver is wheels lock this could result in loss of vehicle wearing his/her seat belt. In addition, in ve- control! If possible, reduce your speed and hicles with a manual gearbox the clutch ped-

drive carefully to a specialised workshop Advice close by to check the brake system. During al should also be pressed to the floor before the following journey, avoid sudden braking starting the engine so that the system recog- and manoeuvres. Fig. 201 Detailed view of the centre console: nises that the parking brake should be re- electronic parking brake switch leased. ● If the ABS warning lamp  does not go out or if it lights while driving, the ABS is mal- Applying the electronic parking brake functioning. The vehicle can only be stopped Emergency braking function using normal braking without ABS. The pro- The parking brake can be applied whenever Only use the emergency braking function if Operation tection provided by the ABS is not available. the vehicle is at a standstill, even when the the vehicle cannot be stopped with the brake Visit a specialised workshop as soon as pos- ignition is switched off. Always apply the pedal ››› ! sible. parking brake when you leave your vehicle ● If  lights, alone or accompanied by a and when you park. ● Pull button  hard to stop the vehicle. The warning message on the instrument panel warning display will be accompanied by the display, please go immediately to a special- ● Pull button  until the control lamp  on corresponding audible warning. the button lights up. ised workshop to check the brake pads and to ● To stop the braking process, release the replace them if they are worn. Emergencies ● The parking brake is applied when the con- button or press the accelerator. trol lamp  lights up on the instrument panel ››› page 187. WARNING The incorrect use of the electronic parking Disengaging the electronic parking brake brake may result in serious accident. ● Safety Switch the ignition on. ● Never use the electronic parking brake to ● Press button  . At the same time, press brake the vehicle except in an emergency. the brake pedal hard or gently press the ac- The braking distance is considerably longer, » celerator pedal with the engine switched on. 189 Operation

because braking is only applied to the rear ● Press and hold the brake pedal until the ve- WARNING wheels. Always use the foot brake. hicle comes to a standstill. The components of the exhaust system reach ● Never accelerate from the engine compart- ● Connect the electronic parking brake very high temperatures. This could cause a ment with the engine running and a gear or a ››› page 189. fire and considerable damage. gear range engaged. The vehicle could move, ● For an automatic gearbox, move the selec- ● Always park your vehicle so that no part of even if the parking brake is applied. tor lever to position P. the exhaust system can come in contact with ● Switch off the engine and release the brake flammable materials (such as wood, Note pedal. leaves,dried grass, or spilled fuel). ● In vehicles with a manual gearbox: when ● Remove the key from the ignition. the clutch pedal is released and the accelera- CAUTION tor pressed at the same time, the electronic ● If necessary, turn the steering wheel slight- ● Special care should be taken when parking parking brake is automatically released. ly to lock the steering. in areas with high kerbs or fixed barriers. Ob- ● If the vehicle battery is flat, it will not be ● With a manual gearbox, engage 1st gear on jects protruding from the ground may dam- possible to disconnect the electronic parking flat ground and slopes, or even reverse gear age the bumper or other parts of the vehicle brake. Use the jump-start ›››  page 51. on hills, and release the clutch pedal. during manoeuvres. To avoid damage, stop ● When the electronic parking brake is ap- ● Ensure that all passengers leave the vehi- before the wheels touch the barrier or kerb. plied or released, noises may be heard. cle, especially children. ● Special attention is required when driving ● If the electronic parking brake has not been ● When leaving the vehicle, take all keys with through entrances, over ramps, kerbs or oth- used for a long while, the system sometimes you. er objects. The vehicle underbody, bumpers, performs automatic and audible checks while mudguards and running gear, and the engine the vehicle is at a standstill. ● Lock the vehicle. and exhaust system could be damaged as you drive over these objects. Additional information for steep ascents and descents Parking Before switching off the engine, rotate the Information on the brakes When parking your vehicle, all legal require- steering wheel so that if the vehicle should ments should be observed. move, it will be held by the kerb. For the first 200 to 300 km (100 to 200 miles), new brake pads have not yet reached ● On slopes, turn the front wheels so that To park the vehicle their maximum braking capacity, and need to they are against the edge of the kerb. be “run in” first ››› . The slightly reduced Complete operations only in the sequence ● Uphill, turn the wheels towards the centre braking effect can be compensated for by in- given. of the road. creasing pressure on the brake pedal. While ● Park the vehicle on a suitable surface ››› . running in, the full braking distance or 190 Driving emergency braking distance is larger then the brake pads. If the brakes are not used fre- WARNING when the brake pads have been run in. While quently, or if rust has formed on the discs, running in, avoid full power braking or situa- SEAT recommends cleaning the pads and New brake pads do not brake to full efficien- tions requiring braking performance. For ex- discs by braking firmly a few times at a mod- cy. ample, in heavy traffic. erately high speed. Only do this without en- ● For the first 320 km (200 miles), new brake pads have not yet reached their maximum dangering vehicles behind you or any other data Technical The rate of wear of the brake pads depends road users ››› . braking capacity, and need to be “run in” to a great extent on the conditions in which first. For this, to compensate for reduced the vehicle is used and the way the vehicle is braking efficiency the brake pedal will have driven. If the vehicle is used frequently in city Faults in the brake system to be pressed with more force. traffic or for short trips or driven sport style, During braking, if you notice that the vehicle ● To avoid losing control of the vehicle and visit a specialised workshop regularly, more does not react as usual (that the braking dis- causing serious accidents, always take great Advice frequently than advised in the Maintenance tance has increased suddenly) it may be pos- care when driving with new brake pads. Programme, to have the brake pads checked. sible that there is a fault in the braking sys- ● When running in new brake pads, always tem. The  warning lamp lights up and a If you drive with wet brakes, for example, af- respect the safety distances between you and text message displayed. Take the vehicle to a ter crossing areas of water, in heavy rainfall other vehicles and do not cause situations re- specialised workshop immediately and have or even after washing the car, the effect of quiring extreme braking performance. the fault repaired. Drive at a moderate speed

the brakes is lessened as the brake discs are Operation and be prepared to use more pressure on the wet or even frozen (in winter). At higher WARNING brake pedal, and allow for longer stopping speed, “dry” the brakes as quickly as possi- distances. When brakes overheat, braking is less effi- ble by braking gently several times. Only do cient and braking distances increase. this without endangering vehicles behind Brake servo ● When driving on slopes, brakes can be you or any other road users . ››› overloaded and overheat quickly. The brake servo only operates when the en- A layer of salt on the discs and brake pads gine is running and the pressure applied by ● Reduce speed or change down a gear when will reduce the effectiveness of the brakes Emergencies the driver on the brake pedal increases. faced with steep and long slopes. This allows and increase braking distance. If you drive for you to use the engine braking effect and to a prolonged period on salted roads without If the brake servo does not operate or the ve- reduce the strain on the brake system. braking then brake carefully several times to hicle must be towed, then the brake pedal ● Non-standard or damaged front spoilers eliminate the layer of salt on the brakes ››› . will have to be pressed with more force given could restrict the airflow to the brakes and

that the braking distance will be increased cause them to overheat. » Safety If the vehicle remains parked for considera- when the brake servo does not operate ››› . ble lengths of time, is used little, or if the brakes are not used, there may be corrosion on the brake discs and a build up of dirt on

191 Operation

WARNING reduce the strain on the brake system. Other- WARNING wise, the brakes may overheat and fail. Only Wet, frozen or salt-covered brakes take lon- Rapid acceleration can cause loss of traction use the brakes to reduce speed or to stop. ger to engage and this increases braking dis- and skidding, especially on slippery ground. tances. This could cause loss of control of the vehicle ● Test the brakes carefully. Note resulting in an accident and considerable damage. ● Dry the brakes, free them of ice and salt by When checking the front brake pads, take the braking gently several times, when weather, time to also check the rear brake pads. The ● Only use the kick-down function or rapid road and traffic conditions permit. thickness of the brake pads should be acceleration if visibility, weather, road and checked visually and regularly, by looking traffic conditions so permit. through the openings in the wheel rims or WARNING from underneath the vehicle. If necessary, re- WARNING Driving without the brake servo may signifi- move the wheels to check them thoroughly. cantly increase the braking distance and re- SEAT recommends taking your car in for tech- Do not allow the brakes to “rub” for a pro- sult in a severe accident. nical service. longed period of time, or brake frequently or for long periods of time. Continuous braking ● Never allow the vehicle to move forwards heats up the brakes. This could significantly when the engine is switched off. reduce braking power, increase braking dis- ● If the brake servo does not operate or the Gearbox tance or even result in the total failure of the vehicle must be towed, then the brake pedal brake system. will have to be pressed with more force given that the braking distance will be increased Introduction when the brake servo does not operate. When reverse gear is engaged and the igni- Control and warning lamps tion is switched on the following takes place: CAUTION ● Reverse lights light up.  It lights up red ● Never make the brakes “slip” by pressing ● When reversing, the air conditioner auto- Brake pedal not the pedal gently, if it is not really necessary Press brake pedal to the floor. to brake. Continuously pressing on the brake matically changes to air recirculation mode. pressed! pedal will heat the brakes. This could signifi- ● The rear window heater switches on when cantly reduce braking power, increase brak- the windscreen wiper is activated.  It lights up green ing distance or even result in the total failure ● of the brake system. Also, the parking sensor system, the opti- To select a range of gears, press cal parking sensor and the camera for the re- Brake pedal not the brake pedal. ● Reduce speed or change down a gear when verse assist system are connected. pressed. Please also see "Electronic park- faced with steep and long slopes. This allows ing brake" ››› page 187. you to use the engine braking effect and to

192 Driving

 Flashes green and the clutch released. This is also the case Automatic gearbox* with the electronic parking brake on. The selector lever ● locking button has Never engage the reverse gear when a vehi- Engage the selector lever lock not engaged. The cle is moving forward. ››› page 194. vehicle does not Technical data Technical start to move. CAUTION Several warning and control lamps light up To prevent damage and avoid premature for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- wear, please observe the following: ed on, signalling that the function is being ● While driving, do not leave your hand rest- verified. They will switch off after a few sec- ing on the gear stick. The pressure applied by Advice onds. your hand is transmitted to the gearbox selector forks. Fig. 202 Automatic gearbox selector lever WARNING ● Always ensure that the vehicle is complete- with locking button (arrow) ly stopped before engaging the reverse gear. Observe the safety warnings ››› in Control and warning lamps on page 105. ● When changing gear, always make sure the Read the additional information carefully clutch pedal is pushed right to the floor. ›››  page 34 Operation ● Never hold the vehicle “on the clutch” on The selector lever has a lock. When changing Manual gear change hills with the engine on. the selector lever from position P to a range of gears, press the brake pedal and press the Read the additional information carefully lock on the selector lever, located on the ›››  page 34 front part of the knob, in the direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 202. To move the gear selector In some countries, it is necessary to press the lever from the position N to D or to R, first clutch pedal to the floor to start the engine. Emergencies press and hold the brake pedal. Selecting reverse gear When the ignition is on, the current position of the selector lever is shown on the instru- Engage reverse gear only when the vehicle is ment panel. stopped. Safety  - Parking lock WARNING The driven wheels are mechanically locked. When the engine is running, the vehicle will » start to move as soon as a gear is engaged

193 Operation

Only change gears when the vehicle is at a Selector lever locking WARNING standstill. To change the position of the se- The gear selector lever lock prevents, in P or Placing the selector lever in an incorrect posi- lector lever, press the brake pedal and switch N, a gear selection from being inadvertently on the ignition. tion may cause loss of control of the vehicle engaged and the vehicle moving off acciden- and a serious accident. tally.  - Reverse gear ● Do not press the accelerator when engag- To release the gear selector lever lock, press ing a range of gears. Reverse gear is engaged. and hold the brake pedal with the ignition ● With the engine running and a range of Only put in reverse when the vehicle is at a on. Press simultaneously on the selector lev- gears selected, the vehicle will move off standstill. If not it could result in serious er lock. when the brake pedal is released. damage. The selector lever lock is not engaged if it is ● Never select reverse gear or the parking moved quickly through position N (e.g. when lock while driving.  - Neutral shifting from R to D). This makes it possible, The gearbox is in neutral. No movement is for instance, to “rock the vehicle backwards WARNING transmitted to the wheels and the engine and forwards” if it is stuck in snow or mud. Unintentional movements of the vehicle does not act as a brake. The selector lever lock engages automatically could cause serious injury. if the brake pedal is not pressed and the lev- ● As a driver, you should never leave your ve-  er is in position for more than about one - Standard forwards driving position (nor- N hicle if the engine is running and a gear range mal programme) second at a speed of less than 5 km/h is engaged. If you have to leave your vehicle (3 mph). The gears are changed (up and down) auto- while the engine is running, you must apply matically. The gear shifts are determined by In vehicles with a DSG® automatic gearbox, the electronic parking brake and engage the engine load, your individual driving style on rare occasions the selector lever lock may parking lock P with the selector lever. and the speed of the vehicle. not engage. In this case, the transmission is ● While the engine is running and with the D, locked to prevent the vehicle from moving ac- S or R range of gears selected, keep the brake  - Standard forwards driving position cidentally. The green control light  flashes pressed to keep the vehicle at a standstill. (sports programme) and an information text is displayed. Proceed Transmission is not totally interrupted either as follows to engage the selector lever lock: when the vehicle is idling or when the vehicle The shift up to a higher gear is automatically “continues moving forwards”. delayed and the shift down is faster with re- ● Press the brake pedal and then release. ● Never engage the R or P gear ranges when spect to the D range of gears, to take full ad- the vehicle is moving. vantage of the engine power. The gear shifts ● Never leave the vehicle with the gear selec- are determined by the engine load, your indi- tor in N. The vehicle may move downhill re- vidual driving style and the speed of the ve- gardless of whether the engine is switched hicle. on or not. 194 Driving

CAUTION ● Pull the right-hand side paddle + ››› Fig. 204 towards the steering wheel to If, when the vehicle is at a standstill, the step up a gear. electronic parking brake is not applied and the brake pedal is released while in position ● Pull the left-hand side paddle – ››› Fig. 204 P, the vehicle may move a few centimetres towards the steering wheel step down a gear. forwards or backwards. data Technical If the paddles are not used for a period of time, the vehicle leaves Tiptronic mode. Note If, while driving, the selector lever is acciden- CAUTION

tally placed in position N, lift your foot off the Advice Fig. 204 Steering wheel with two paddle ● When accelerating, the gearbox automati- accelerator. Wait until the engine is running shifts for Tiptronic cally shifts up into the next gear shortly be- at idle speed before selecting a new gear fore the maximum engine speed is reached. range. The Tiptronic system allows you to manually ● When reducing speed manually, the gear- change gears in vehicles with an automatic box only shifts gear when the engine can no gearbox. When you change to the Tiptronic longer exceed the maximum engine speed. Gear change with Tiptronic* programme, the vehicle remains in the cur-

rently selected gear. This is possible as long Operation as the system is not changing gear automati- Driving with automatic gearbox cally due to a traffic situation. The gearbox changes gear ratios automatical- Using Tiptronic with the selector lever ly as the vehicle moves. ● Press the selector lever from position D to the right into the Tiptronic selector gate ››› Driving down hills Emergencies in Automatic gearbox* on page 194. The steeper the gradient, the lower the gear ● Press the lever forwards + or backwards you will need. The lowest gears increase the – to move up or down a gear ››› Fig. 203. engine braking work. Never go down hills with the selector lever in neutral N. Fig. 203 Selector lever in Tiptronic position Using the Tiptronic with the steering wheel (left-hand drive vehicles). The lay-out in right- ● You should reduce speed accordingly. Safety hand drive vehicles is symmetrically op- paddle shifts ● posed. ● In D or S, move the steering wheel paddle Press the selector lever from position D to shifts ››› Fig. 204. the right into the Tiptronic selector gate ››› page 195. » 195 Operation

● Gently pull the selector lever back to Kick-down WARNING change down a gear. The kick-down system provides maximum ac- Rapid acceleration can cause loss of traction ● OR: reduce using the steering wheel pad- celeration when the gear selector lever is in and skidding, especially on slippery ground. dles ››› Fig. 204 ››› page 195. the positions D, S or in the Tiptronic position. This could cause loss of control of the vehicle When the accelerator pedal is pressed right resulting in an accident and considerable Back-up mode damage. down, the automatic gearbox will shift down If all the selector lever positions on the in- to a lower gear, depending on road speed ● Only use kick-down and rapid acceleration strument panel display are shown with a and engine speed. This takes advantage of when weather conditions, surface conditions light-coloured background, this means there the maximum acceleration of the vehicle and traffic conditions permit; accelerate and drive in a manner that does not endanger is a fault in the system. The automatic gear- ››› . box will operate in back-up mode. When the other road users. c backup programme is activated, it is possible When the ac elerator is pressed to the floor, ● Please remember that the driven wheels to drive the vehicle, however, at low speeds the automatic gearbox shifts to the next gear can slip and the vehicle can skid if the ASR is and within a selected range of gears. only after the engine reaches the specified turned off, especially on slippery ground. maximum engine speed. ● Turn on the ASR after accelerating! For the DSG® dual clutch gearbox, in some cases, this may mean that the reverse gear Launch-Control Programme does not engage. The gearbox should be CAUTION The Launch-Control programme enables max- checked by a specialised workshop as soon ● imum acceleration while at a standstill. If you stop on a hill with a gear range en- as possible. gaged, do not try to prevent the vehicle from ● Switch off the ASR ››› page 187. rolling back by pressing on the accelerator. Protection against overloading the DSG® 6- This could cause overheating and damage the ● Press and hold the brake pedal with your gear automatic gearbox automatic gearbox. left foot. When the clutch is overloaded, the vehicle ● Never allow the vehicle to move with the ● Place the selector lever in position S or Tip- begins to jerk and the selector lever position gear selector lever in N, especially with the tronic. engine turned off. The automatic gearbox will indicator begins to flash. To prevent damage not be lubricated and could be damaged. to the clutch, this interrupts the power trans- ● Press the accelerator with the right foot un- mission between the engine and the gear- til the vehicle reaches an engine speed of ap- box. There is no more traction and it is not proximately 3200 rpm. possible to accelerate. If the clutch is opened ● Lift the left foot off the brake ››› . The ve- Recommended gear display automatically due to overloading, press the hicle starts with maximum acceleration. In some vehicles, the recommended gear for brake pedal. Wait a few seconds before start- ● Turn on the ASR after accelerating! ing to move again. reducing fuel consumption is displayed on the instrument panel: 196 Driving

Display Meaning Note ● Do not tow a trailer.

 Optimum gear. The recommended gear display is switched Between 1000 and 1500 kilometres (600 to off when the clutch pedal is pressed. 1000 miles), gradually increase power until  Recommendation to change up a gear. reaching the maximum speed and high engine speeds. Recommendation to change down a data Technical  gear. Run-in and economical driving Running in new tyres and brake pads Information for “cleaning” the diesel partic- Running in ● Replacement of wheel rims and new tyres ulate filter ››› page 284 Advice The exhaust gas system control recognises Please observe the instructions for running-in ● Notes on the brakes ››› page 190 when the diesel particulate filter is blocked, new components. and helps to clean it by recommending a spe- For the sake of the environment cific gear for driving. It may therefore be nec- Running-in the engine If the engine is run in gently, the life of the essary to drive with the engine at an excep- The engine needs to be run-in over the first engine will be increased and the engine oil tionally high speed ››› page 200. 1500 km (1000 miles). During its first few consumption reduced. hours of running, the internal friction in the Operation WARNING engine is greater than later on when all the The recommended gear display is intended as moving parts have bedded down. Environmental compatibility a guideline only; it should never replace the How the vehicle is driven for the first Environmental protection is a top priority in driver's attention to driving carefully. 1500 km (1000 miles) influences the future the design, choice of materials and manufac- ● Responsibility for selecting the correct gear engine performance. Throughout the life of ture of your new SEAT. for each situation continues to lie with the the vehicle, it should be driven at a moderate

driver, for example when overtaking, climb- speed – especially when the engine is cold – Emergencies ing a hill or towing a trailer. this will reduce engine wear and increase its Constructive measures to encourage recy- useful life. Never drive at extremely low en- cling For the sake of the environment gine speeds. Always engage a lower gear ● Joints and connections designed for easy Selecting the most appropriate gear for the when the engine works “irregularly”. For the dismantling

situation will help you to save fuel. first 1000 km or 600 miles, please note: ● Modular construction to facilitate disman- Safety tling ● Do not use full throttle. ● Increased use of single-grade materials. ● Do not force the engine above two thirds of » its maximum speed. 197 Operation

● Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in ● Use of systems for the recovery of residual Do not wait until the last moment before accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and heat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels, changing gear. Only use first gear when you ISO 1629. etc.). move off and change to second gear quickly. ● The use of water-soluble paints. Avoid the kick-down function in vehicles with Choice of materials automatic gearbox. ● Use of recycled materials. Vehicles with a gear display help to achieve ● Use of compatible plastics in the same part Economical and environmentally an economical driving style as the display in- if its components are not easily separated. friendly driving dicates the best moment to change gear. ● Use of recycled materials and/or materials Fuel consumption, environmental impact and Let the vehicle roll originating from renewable sources. engine, brake and tyre wear depend largely If you take your foot off the accelerator, the ● Reduction of volatile components, includ- on three factors: fuel supply is stopped and consumption is ing odour, in plastic materials. reduced. ● Use of CFC-free coolants. ● Personal driving style. ● Conditions of use (weather, road surface). Allow the vehicle to roll without accelerating, Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions for example when approaching a red traffic ● Technical requirements. dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive light. However, if the vehicle is rolling too 2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury, hexa- Savings of up to 25% in fuel consumption slowly or the distance is too long, the clutch valent chromium. are possible with an appropriate driving style pedal should be pressed to declutch. The en- and the adoption of certain simple tips. gine will then operate at idle speed. Manufacturing methods If the vehicle is going to be at a standstill for ● Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the Changing gear early a period of time, switch off the engine; for ex- protective wax for cavities. General instructions: The highest gear is al- ample, while waiting at a level crossing. In ● Use of plastic film as protection during ve- ways the most economical. As a guideline, vehicles which have the Start-Stop function hicle transport. for the majority of vehicles: at a speed of on, the engine switches off automatically when the vehicle is not moving. ● Use of solvent-free adhesives. 30 km/h (19 mph), drive in third gear, at 40 km/h (25 mph) in fourth gear and at ● Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys- 50 km/h (31 mph) in fifth gear. Think ahead and “flow” with the traffic tems. In addition, “skipping” gears when shifting Frequent acceleration and braking considera- ● Recycling and energy recovery from resi- up helps to save fuel, weather and traffic bly increase fuel consumption. If you think dues (RDF). conditions permitting. ahead as you drive and keep a safe distance ● Improvement in the quality of waste water. from the vehicle in front, it is possible to slow down by simply lifting your foot off the 198 Driving accelerator. This eliminates the need for con- drive a short distance with all the windows The engine takes a long time to warm up stant braking and acceleration. open. Only then should you close all the win- when it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu- dows and switch on the air conditioning. tant emissions are also especially high dur- Calm and steady driving Keep windows closed when travelling at high ing this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore speeds. Driving with the windows open in- best to drive off immediately after starting Constancy is more important than speed: The

creases fuel consumption. the engine. Avoid running the engine at high data Technical more you drive at a constant speed, the lower speed. the fuel consumption. ● Switch off the seat heating when the seats have warmed up. When driving on the motorway, it is more effi- Adjusting type pressures. cient to drive at a constant and more moder- ● Switch off the heated rear window and the windscreen heating when the windows have Having the correct pressure in your tyres

ate speed than to be continuously accelerat- Advice helps to reduce rolling resistance and, as a ing and braking. As a general rule, you will demisted and are free of ice. result reduces fuel consumption. Increasing reach your destination just as quickly when ● Do not leave the auxiliary heater switched the tyre pressure slightly (+0.2 bar you drive at a constant speed. on when the vehicle is moving ››› page 177. [2.9 psi/20 kPa]) can help to save fuel. The cruise control function helps you to ach- If you are prepared to accept a slight reduc- ieve a constant style of driving. Avoid short journeys tion in comfort, the tyres may be filled to the Fuel consumption is much higher when the pressures recommended for a fully-loaded Moderate use of additional devices engine is cold, immediately after it has been Operation vehicle. This is also valid when driving alone started. It takes a few kilometres of driving It is important to travel in comfort, but con- without luggage. for the engine to warm up and to normalise venience systems should be used ecological- consumption. When you buy new tyres, make sure they are ly. optimised for minimum rolling resistance. The engine and catalytic converter need to Some equipment, when connected, increase reach their proper working temperature in or- fuel consumption considerably, for example: der to minimise fuel consumption and emis- Avoid carrying unnecessary loads Emergencies ● Air conditioning cooling system: If the air sions. The ambient temperature has a deci- The lighter the vehicle, the more economical conditioning system is required to cool to sive influence. and ecological the driving style. For example, an additional weight of 100 kg will increase significantly lower temperatures than the true Therefore, unnecessary short journeys fuel consumption up to 0.3 l/100 km. outside temperature, it will require a large should be avoided. Try to combine trips. amount of energy from the engine. Therefore,

Remove any unnecessary objects or loads Safety The vehicle uses more fuel in winter than in we recommend that the selected temperature from the vehicle. » for the vehicle is not too different to the out- summer, even when other conditions are the side temperature. It is a good idea to air the same. vehicle before starting your journey and to 199 Operation

Remove optional equipment and unnecessa- Engine management and ex-  Flashes ry accessories haust gas purification system If the lamp flashes while you are The more aerodynamic the vehicle, the lower Fault in the diesel driving, have the engine checked engine manage- the fuel consumption. Optional equipment by a specialised workshop as Introduction ment. and accessories (such as roof racks or bike soon as possible. carriers) reduce the aerodynamic benefits of WARNING the vehicle.  It lights up Therefore, we recommend you remove all op- The components of the exhaust system reach very high temperatures. This could cause a Reduce speed and drive carefully tional and unnecessary equipment and racks, fire. Fault in the emis- to the nearest specialised work- especially if you intend to drive at high sion control system. shop to have the engine ● Always park your vehicle so that no part of speeds. checked. the exhaust system can come in contact with flammable materials (such as dried grass). Other factors which increase fuel consump-  Flashes tion (examples): ● Do not apply additional underseal or anti- corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes, cata- Combustion fault Reduce speed and drive carefully ● Fault in engine management. lytic converter, heat shields or the diesel par- which could dam- to the nearest specialised work- ● Driving on hills. ticulate filter. age the catalytic shop to have the engine converter. checked. ● Trailer towing.

WARNING Control lamps  It lights up Always adapt your speed and the distance to Diesel particulate ››› page 201 the vehicles ahead in line with visibility,  It lights up filter blocked weather conditions, the condition of the road fault in the petrol Take the vehicle to a specialised and the traffic situation. Several warning and control lamps light up engine manage- workshop as soon as possible ment. and have the engine checked. for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few sec-  It lights up onds. The engine glow plug system has Diesel engine glow been activated. The engine can WARNING plug system. be started straight away when Observe traffic regulations when cleaning the the lamp switches off. diesel particulate filter while driving.

200 Driving

● Only carry on driving if visibility, weather, If you should notice misfiring, uneven run- ● Do not top up with too much engine oil road and traffic conditions so permit. ning or loss of power when the car is moving, ››› page 271. reduce speed immediately. Have the car in- ● Never endanger your safety or that of other ● Do not tow-start the vehicle; use the starter road users. spected by a specialised workshop. If this cables ›››  page 51. happens, unburnt fuel can enter the exhaust

system and escape into the atmosphere. The In order to reduce blocking of the diesel par- data Technical CAUTION catalytic converter can also be damaged by ticulate filter, some vehicles with an automat- Always pay attention to any lit control lamps overheating. ic gearbox may increase the engine speed and to the corresponding descriptions and in- slightly to start cleaning the filter automati- structions to avoid damage to the vehicle. For the sake of the environment cally. The control lamp will not light up in this

 Advice Even when the emission control system is case . Note working perfectly, there may be a smell of sulphur under certain conditions. This de- Control lamp  While the control lamps , ,  or  re- pends on the sulphur content of the fuel be- main lit, there may be engine problems, fuel If the control lamp  lights up you should ing used. consumption may increase and the engine help the filter clean itself by driving in the ap- may lose power. propriate manner. To do this, drive about 15 minutes in fourth Diesel particulate filter Operation or fifth gear (automatic gearbox: S gear Catalytic converter The diesel particulate filter removes soot par- range) at a minimum speed of 60 km/h ticulates from the exhaust gas, retains and (37 mph), with the engine running at approxi- The catalytic converter permits the subse- mately 2,000 rpm. In this way, the soot build quent treatment of the exhaust gases thus burns them. To assist the combustion process, SEAT recommends you avoid frequent up in the filter is burned. When cleaning is reducing contaminating gas emissions. To successful, the control lamp turns off. ensure a longer working life for the exhaust short trips.  Emergencies system and catalytic converter in a petrol en- If the lamp does not turn off, or the three ● Always use diesel with a low sulphur con-  gine: lamps turn on (particulate filter , fault in tent ››› page 264. the emission control system  and glow ● Always use unleaded petrol. ● Never use petrol or fuel oil. plugs ), drive the vehicle to a specialised ● Never run the fuel tank completely dry. ● Never use biodiesel. However, a blend pre- workshop and have the fault repaired at the

earliest opportunity. » Safety ● Do not top up with too much engine oil pared by the diesel manufacturer containing ››› page 271. biodiesel within the limits established by the EN 590 standard may be used ››› page 264. ● Do not tow-start the vehicle; use the starter ● cables ›››  page 51. Never run the fuel tank completely dry. 201 Operation

WARNING ● Are there any SEAT dealers in the destina- ● Do not drive faster than a pedestrian. tion country? ● ● Always drive according to the road weather Do not stop in the water, use reverse gear conditions, the terrain and traffic. Driving rec- ● For petrol vehicles: Is unleaded petrol avail- or switch off the engine. ommendations should never lead to illegal able at the right octane rating? ● Oncoming traffic will cause waves which manoeuvres in surrounding traffic. ● For diesel engines: Is diesel fuel available raise the level of the water, making it difficult with a low sulphur content? to cross the water. For the sake of the environment ● Are a suitable engine oil (››› page 271) and The Start/Stop system must be deactivated Even when the emission control system is other engine fluids complying with SEAT when driving through flooded areas working perfectly, there may be a smell of specifications available in the destination country? sulphur under certain conditions. This de- WARNING pends on the sulphur content of the fuel be- ● Will the navigation system fitted at the fac- When driving through water, mud, melted ing used. tory operate correctly in the destination coun- snow, etc., please remember that due to try with the available navigation data? damp or frozen brake discs and shoes in win- ● Are special tyres required in the destination ter, the braking effect may be delayed, there- Driving tips country? fore the required braking distance is greater. ● “Dry the brakes and remove ice” by braking Driving abroad CAUTION carefully. Ensure that you are not endanger- SEAT does not accept liability for any damage ing other road-users or breaking traffic regu- In some countries, certain safety regulations to the vehicle due to the use of a lower quali- lations in the process. and requirements are in force relating to ex- ty fuel, an inadequate service or the non- ● After driving through water, avoid sudden haust gas emissions, which differ from the availability of genuine spare parts. sharp manoeuvres. technical characteristics of the vehicle. Be- fore travelling abroad, SEAT recommends you CAUTION consult a technical service about the legal re- Driving along flooded roadways ● Driving through flooded areas may severely quirements and the following points: damage vehicle components such as the en- To prevent damage to the vehicle when driv- ● Does the vehicle need technical modifica- gine, transmission, drive train or electrical ing through water, for example, along a floo- tions for driving abroad, for example, adjust- system. ded road, please observe the following: ment of the headlamps? ● Never drive through salt water as salt causes corrosion. Always rinse any parts of the ● ● Check the depth of the water before enter- Does the vehicle have all the tools, diag- vehicle which have been in contact with salt ing the flooded zone. The water should never nostics equipment and spare parts required water. for inspections and repairs? come above the lower edge of the bodywork ››› . 202 Driver assistance systems Driver assistance systems the driver to control the vehicle as the loss of Anti-lock system (ABS) adherence with the road surface will prevent- ABS can prevent the wheels from locking during braking and steering. If the vehicle is Braking and stability systems ing braking until just before the vehicle stops driven through series of bends at high thus helping the driver to steer the vehicle speed, the ESC will not always be as effec- and maintain control. This means that, even Brake assist systems tive: the vehicle reaction to aggressive driv- during full braking, the risk of skidding is re- data Technical ing is not the same as at reduced speeds. duced: The brake assist systems ESC, ABS, BAS, ASR When driving with a trailer, ESC does not pro- and EDL only operate when the ignition is vide the same amount of vehicle control as ● Press and hold the brake pedal fully. Do not switched on. They contribute significantly to without a trailer. remove your foot from the brake pedal or re-

increasing active safety. Advice Adjust your speed and driving style to road, duce braking force! traffic and weather conditions. ESC cannot ● Do not “pump” the brake pedal, or reduce Electronic Stability Control (ESC) push the limits of the laws of physics; im- braking force! ESC reduces the risk of skidding and increa- prove the transmission available or maintain ● Maintain vehicle direction when braking ses the vehicle stability by braking individual the vehicle on the road if a lack of driver at- fully. wheels under specific driving conditions. ESC tention creates an inevitable situation. Other- ● When the brake pedal is released or when detects critical handling situations, such as wise, ESC assists in maintaining vehicle con-

the brake force is reduced, ABS is turned off. Operation understeer, oversteer and wheelspin on the trol in extreme situations and uses the move- driven wheels. The system stabilises the ve- ments of the steering made by the driver to ABS control can be observed by vibration of hicle by braking individual wheels or by re- maintain the vehicle moving in the desired the brake pedal and noise. You should never ducing the engine torque. direction. If the vehicle is driven at such a expect the ABS to reduce the braking dis- The ESC has limits. It is important to realise speed that it will leave the road before ESC tance under any circumstances. This distance that the ESC is also subject to the laws of can intervene then the system cannot pro- will increase when driving on gravel, recent physics. ESC will not be able to deal with all vide assistance. snow or on icy and slippery ground. Emergencies situations with which drivers may be faced. The ABS, BAS, ASR and EDL systems are in- When driving on loose ground, the all-terrain For example, if the road surface changes sud- corporated into the ESC. The ESC is always configuration of the ABS is automatically denly then ESC will not be useful in all cases. on. The ESC should only be turned off using turned on. When ABS is activated, the front If the vehicle suddenly enters a section cov- the ASR button ››› Fig. 205 when traction is wheels may lock briefly. This shortens the ered by water, mud or snow then ESC will not insufficient. Always remember to turn on the braking distance in off-road situations as the Safety provide assistance in the same way as on dry ASR once more when the vehicle has traction wheels are prevented from digging into loose ground. If the vehicle loses its grip on the again. surfaces. All-terrain ABS only intervenes ground and moves on a film of water (“aqua- when driving in a straight line. When the » planing”), the ESC will not be able to assist

203 Operation

front wheels are turned, the normal ABS is and directs the power to the other drive WARNING activated. wheels. To prevent the disc brake of the braked wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts Driving at high speed on icy, slippery wet ground can result in loss of vehicle control Brake assist system (BAS) out automatically if subjected to excessive and serious injury to the driver and passen- loads. The EDL will switch on again automati- The brake assist system may reduce the re- gers. cally when the brake has cooled down. quired braking distance. The brake assist ● Adjust your speed and driving style to visi- system boosts the braking force if you press bility, road, traffic and weather conditions. Electronic drive torque management (XDS) the brake pedal quickly in an emergency. As Even though the brake assist systems, ABS, a result, the braking pressure increases rap- When taking a curve, the driveshaft differen- BAS, EDL, ASR and ESC, provide more securi- idly, the braking force is multiplied and the tial mechanism allows the outer wheel to turn ty, do not take unnecessary risks while driv- braking distance is reduced. This enables the at a higher speed than the inner wheel. In ing. ABS to be activated more quickly and effec- this way, the wheel that is turning faster (out- ● Brake assist systems can not overcome the tively. er wheel) receives less drive torque than the laws of physics. Even with ESC and other sys- inner wheel. This may mean that in certain tems, slippery and wet roads will always be ¡Do not lift your foot off the brake pedal! situations the torque delivered to the inner dangerous. When the brake pedal is released or when wheel is too high, causing the wheels to the brake force is reduced, braking assist au- ● Driving to quickly on wet ground can result spin. On the other hand, the outer wheel is in the wheels losing contact with the ground tomatically turns off the brake servo. receiving a lower drive torque than it could in an effect known as “aquaplaning”. Without transmit. This causes an overall loss of lateral adherence, it is impossible to brake, steer or Traction control when accelerating (ASR) grip on the front axle, resulting in understeer control the vehicle. In the event of wheelspin, the traction control or “lengthening” of the trajectory. ● Brake assist systems cannot avoid acci- system reduces the engine torque to match dents if, for example, the driver does not re- The XDS system can detect and correct this the amount of grip available. The ASR makes spect safety distances or drives to quickly in effect via the sensors and signals of the ESC. some situations easier, for example, when difficult conditions. starting, accelerating or going uphill, even in Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the inside ● Even though brake assist systems are ex- unfavourable road conditions. wheel and counter the excess driving torque tremely effective and help control the vehicle of that wheel. This means that the driver's in difficult situations, remember that the ve- The ASR can be switched on or off manually desired trajectory is much more precise. hicle stability depends on tyre grip. ››› page 205. The XDS system works in combination with ● When accelerating on a slippery surface, for example on ice or snow, press the acceler- Electronic differential lock system (EDS) the ESC and is always active, even when ASR ator carefully. The wheels can still slip even traction control is disconnected. EDL is available when driving in straight lines with brake assist systems resulting in loss of under normal conditions. When the EDL de- vehicle control. tects wheelspin, it brakes the spinning wheel 204 Driver assistance systems

WARNING Switching ASR on and off Start assist systems The effectiveness of the ESC can be considerably reduced if other components and sys- Introduction tems affecting driving dynamics are not maintained or are not functioning correctly. This WARNING includes, among others, brakes, tyres and data Technical other systems already mentioned. The intelligent technology in the start assist systems cannot change the laws of physics. ● Remember that changing and fitting other The improved comfort provided by start as- components to the vehicle can affect opera- sist systems should not prompt you to take tion of the ABS, BAS, ASL EDL and ESC. risks. ● Advice Changes to the vehicle suspension or using ● Unintentional movements of the vehicle unapproved wheel/tyre combinations can af- could cause serious injury. fect operation of the ABS, BAS, ASL EDL and Fig. 205 Detailed view of the centre console: ESC, as well as their effectiveness. button used to switch ASR on and off (vehi- ● The start assist systems are not a replacement for driver awareness. ● Likewise, the effectiveness of ESC depends cles with ESC) on the use of suitable tyres ››› page 284. ● Always try to adapt the speed of the vehi- The electronic stability control ESC consists cle and your style of driving to the condition

of ABS, EDL and ASR and only works when of the ground or the road and to weather and Operation Note the engine is running. traffic conditions. ● To ensure that the ESC and ASR work prop- The ASR can be switched off while the engine ● The start assist system cannot keep the ve- erly, all four wheels must be fitted with iden- hicle stationary in all conditions on a gradi- is running by pressing the  OFF ››› Fig. 205 tical tyres. Any differences in the rolling radi- ent or cause it to brake on steep downhill button. The ASR (and similar) is only switch- us of the tyres can cause the system to re- gradients, e.g. if the road is slippery or icy. duce engine power when this is not desired. ed off when the required traction is not obtained: ● If a malfunction should occur in the ABS, Emergencies the ESC, EDL and ASR will also be out of ac- ● When driving through deep snow or on tion. loose ground (gravel, etc.). ● Noises may be heard while any of the ● When “freeing” a trapped vehicle. above systems are operating.

Turn the ASR back on by pressing the but- Safety ton  OFF ››› Fig. 205.

205 Operation

Auto Hold function* If the driver presses the brake pedal briefly or Permanent Auto Hold connection the accelerator to start off, the Auto Hold The Auto Hold function must be switched on function releases the brake once more. The every time the engine is started. However, to vehicle moves according to the gradient. switch the Auto Hold function on permanent- If any of the conditions necessary for the Au- ly, the mark must be switched on in the Set- to Hold function change while the vehicle tings menu, “Autohold” submenu stopped, the system is turned off as is the in- ›››  page 26. dicator on the button ››› Fig. 206. The electronic parking brake engages where necessa- Auto Hold works automatically under the fol- ry to park the vehicle safely ››› . lowing conditions: All points must be fulfilled simultaneously Conditions for keeping the vehicle at a : Fig. 206 Detailed view of the centre console: standstill with Auto Hold: ››› Auto Hold button ● The driver door must be closed. Manual gearbox Automatic gearbox

The control lamp on the button switches on ● The driver seat belt must be buckled. 1. If the vehicle is kept at a standstill using the brake when the Auto Hold function is on. ● The engine must be running. pedal on a flat or a slope. When the Auto Hold function is on, this helps ● The ASR system is switched on 2. The engine must be “running smoothly”. the driver if they must regularly stop the vehi- ››› page 187. cle or if they must stop with the engine run- 3. On a slope, the 1st gear A gear for driving is se- is engaged uphill or the lected from R, D or S. ning for prolonged periods, for example, on Automatically engaging and disengaging the reverse gear is engaged hills, before a traffic light or in traffic jams Auto Hold function for a downhill. The with continuous stopping and starting. If the Auto Hold function was engaged with clutch must be held down. The Auto Hold function automatically pre- the AUTO HOLD button before disengaging the vents the vehicle from rolling away acciden- ignition, the function will automatically re- Upon accelerating and Upon accelerating, the tally when at a standstill, without the driver main engaged after the ignition is re-engag- pressing in the clutch brake releases gradual- having to keep his/her foot on the brake ped- ed. simultaneously, the ly. al. brake releases gradual- If the Auto Hold function was not engaged, it ly. When the system that detects that the vehi- will automatically remain disengaged after cle has stopped, the Auto Hold keeps the ve- the ignition is engaged. hicle at a standstill. The brake pedal can be released.

206 Driver assistance systems

Auto Hold turns off automatically under the CAUTION Vehicles with a manual gearbox following conditions: Before entering an automatic car wash, al- ● When the vehicle is at a standstill, leave it Manual gearbox Automatic gearbox ways switch the Auto Hold function off, as it in neutral and take your foot off the clutch. could be damaged when the electronic park- The engine switches off. 1. If one of the conditions mentioned in table on ing brake automatically engages. ● Simply depress the clutch pedal to move page 206 changes. data Technical off again. 2. If the engine is “not running regularly” or if there is a malfunction. Start-Stop Function* Vehicles with an automatic gearbox 3. When changing to idle If the selector lever is ● When the vehicle is at a standstill, depress

speed. placed in neutral (N). the brake or keep it pressed down. The en- Advice gine switches off. 4. If the engine is turned If the engine is switch- off or stalls. ed off. ● The engine will start again as soon as you release the brake pedal. 5. If the driver accelerates If the vehicle is acceler- while pressing the ated. ● With the selector lever set to position P, the clutch in. engine will not start until a range of gears is selected or the accelerator pedal is de-

6. When one of the wheels Operation has minimal contact pressed. with the ground (e.g. on uneven ground). Fig. 207 Detailed view of the centre console: Important conditions for the engine to auto- Start-Stop function button matically switch off WARNING ● The driver seat belt must be buckled. With the Start-Stop system enabled, the en- The Auto Hold technology is limited by the ● The driver door must be closed.

laws of physics. The improved comfort provi- gine is automatically stopped when the vehi- Emergencies ● The bonnet must be closed. ded by Auto Hold should never prompt you to cle is at a standstill. The engine restarts auto- take risks. matically when required. ● The factory-fitted towing bracket must not ● Never leave the vehicle running and with The function is enabled automatically when- be electrically connected to a trailer. the Auto Hold function switched on. ever the ignition is switched on. The instru- ● A minimum engine temperature has been

● Auto Hold cannot always stop the vehicle ment panel displays information on the cur- reached. Safety uphill and downhill (e.g. if the ground is slip- rent status. ● The steering wheel must not be turned pery or frozen). more than 270 degrees. ● The vehicle has moved since the last stop. »

207 Operation

● In vehicles with Climatronic: the tempera- Conditions requiring the key to restart the Note ture inside the vehicle is within the pre-set engine temperature range. ● In some cases, you may have to restart the The engine must be started manually under vehicle using the key. Observe the corre- ● The temperature set is neither very high nor the following conditions: sponding message on the instrument panel very low. display. ● If the driver unbuckles his/her seat belt. ● The air conditioning defrost function is not ● If the steering wheel is turned more than switched on. ● If the driver door is opened. 270°, Stop will not function; however, the an- ● In vehicles with Climatronic: the blower has ● If the bonnet is opened. gle of steering wheel turn does not affect starting the vehicle. not been manually set to a high speed. ● In vehicles with a manual gearbox: if a gear ● The power level of the vehicle's battery is has been selected. sufficient. Switching Start-Stop mode on and off man- ● The vehicle's battery temperature is neither Parking distance warning sys- ually too high nor too low. tem* ●  ● The vehicle is not on a steep gradient or Press the button on the centre console slope. ››› Fig. 207. Introduction ● ● The front wheels are not overly turned. The button will light up when the Start-Stop function is switched off. The parking distance warning system assists ● The heated windscreen is not switched on. the driver when parking. When the vehicle ● Reverse gear is not engaged. The engine will start immediately if the vehi- approaches an obstacle, forwards or back- cle is in Stop mode when it is switched off ● The park assist system is not switched on. wards, an intermittent audible warning will manually. be heard, higher or lower depending on the distance. The shorter the distance, the short- Conditions for automatically restarting the WARNING engine er the intervals between tones. If the vehicle The brake servo and the power steering do is too close to the obstacle, the audible warn- The engine may automatically restart under not work when the engine is switched off. ing becomes constant. the following conditions: ● Never allow the vehicle to move when the If you continue to approach an obstacle when ● If the vehicle interior is too hot or too cold. engine is switched off. the sound is continuous, this means the sys- ● If the vehicle moves. tem can no longer measure the distance. CAUTION ● If the vehicle's battery voltage drops. The sensor system on the bumpers transmit Using the Start-Stop function for a long peri- and receive ultrasound. Using the ultrasound od at very high outside temperatures could signal (transmission, reflection from the ob- damage the vehicle's battery. stacle and reception), this system 208 Driver assistance systems continuously calculates the distance be- longer show it. Therefore, it will not warn you Parking distance warning system* tween the bumper and the obstacle. of these objects. Ignoring the warnings of the parking sensor system could cause consider- WARNING able damage to the vehicle. The parking distance warning system and the ● The bumper sensors may become damaged optical parking system cannot replace driver or misaligned, for example, when parking. data Technical awareness. ● To ensure that the system works properly, ● The sensors have blind spots in which ob- the bumper sensors must be kept clean, free stacles and people are not registered. of ice and snow and uncovered. ● Always observe the area around the vehi- ● When cleaning the sensors with high-pres- cle, as the sensors do not always detect sure or steam cleaning equipment, spray the Advice small children, animals or objects. sensors briefly at a distance of no less than ● The surface of certain objects and some 10 cm (4 inches). Fig. 208 Detailed view of the centre console: clothing do not reflect the ultrasound signals button for switching the parking distance warning system on and off from the parking distance system. The sys- Note tem cannot detect or incorrectly detects these objects and people wearing these Acoustic sources may lead to erroneous warn-

types of clothes. ings on the parking sensor system, e.g. Operation rough tarmac, cobbles or the noise of other ● External sound sources can affect the park- vehicles. ing distance aid signals. In this case, under certain circumstances, people and objects will not be detected.

CAUTION Emergencies ● The sensors may not always be able to detect objects such as trailer draw bars, thin rails, fences, posts, trees and open boots, Fig. 209 Parking sensor system sensors on etc. This could result in damage to your car. the front bumper ● Although the parking distance warning sys- The parking distance warning system assists Safety tem detects and warns of the presence of an the driver when parking. If the vehicle is ap- obstacle, the obstacle could disappear from proaching an obstacle, an intermittent audi- the angle of measurement of the sensors if it is too high or low and the system would no ble warning is emitted. The shorter the distance, the shorter the intervals between » 209 Operation

tones. If the vehicle is too close to the obsta- ● Your technical service centre can adjust the cle, the audible warning becomes constant. volume of the warning signals.

Switching the parking distance warning sys- Note tem on and off If the parking distance warning system is ● Press the  button ››› Fig. 208 when the faulty, a constant audible warning will be ignition is switched on. emitted the first time it is switched on and the button will flash. Switch the parking dis- ● Automatic on: select reverse gear. tance warning system off using the button ● Automatic off: drive faster than 15 km/h and take the vehicle to a specialised workshop to have the system checked as soon as (9 mph). Fig. 211 On-screen OPS display: A has de- possible. tected an obstacle in the segment; B restric- The button lights up when the function is ted area in front of the vehicle. switched on. Optical parking system* (OPS) The optical parking system is an accessory to Things to note on the parking distance warn- the Parking distance warning system ing system ››› page 209 and the park assist system ● The parking distance warning system ››› page 211. sometimes registers water on the sensors as The zone recorded by the sensors in front of an obstacle. and behind the vehicle is displayed on the ● If the distance does not change, the warn- factory-fitted radio or navigation system ing signal will sound less loudly after a few screen. Any obstacles are displayed in rela- seconds. If the continuous signal sounds, the tion to the vehicle ››› . volume will remain constant. ● When the vehicle moves away from the ob- Function Necessary operations stacle, the beeping sound automatically Switch on the parking distance switches off. On approaching the obstacle Fig. 210 On-screen OPS display: A has detected an obstacle in the collision zone; B Switching the warning system ››› page 209 or the again, the beeping sound will automatically display on: park assist system ››› page 211. The has detected an obstacle in the segment; C switch back on. OPS switches on automatically. zone recorded behind the vehicle. ● If the electronic parking brake is engaged or the selector lever is set to P, no audible warning will be emitted.

210 Driver assistance systems

Function Necessary operations Displayed in WARNING colour on the Distance from the Audible Do not be distracted from the traffic when Press a zone selection button on the screen: colour Switching the factory-fitted radio or navigation vehicle to the ob- warn- looking at the screen. of the segment display off man- system stacle ing ually: OR: briefly press the function button if an obstacle  or RVC on the screen. is recognised data Technical Park Assist system* (Park As- Drive forwards at more than about Front: approx. 31 - 10-15 km/h (6-9 mph). 120 cm Beeping Switching the Yellow sist) Select the reverse gear on vehicles Behind: approx. 31 - sound display off man- with rear assist ››› page 215. The 160 cm

ually: Advice display changes to the image of the Introduction camera. Approximately 0 – Perma- 30 cm in front or be- nent Red  ››› table on page 2 hinda) sound Zones explored The Park Assist system helps the driver to a) The permanent sound starts at a somewhat greater distance find a suitable place to park, to insert the ve- The zone in which obstacles are recognised on vehicles with a factory-fitted towing bracket. runs to a distance of around 120 cm from the hicle into parallel and perpendicular parking front of the vehicle and up to 60 cm to the places and to leave parallel parking places. With towing bracket Operation side ››› Fig. 211 B . Behind the vehicle, the The Park Assist system is limited to the sys- zone analysed reaches a distance of up to A specific image is displayed on the screen of vehicles with a factory-fitted towing bracket tem abilities and requires that the driver is 160 cm and around 60 cm to the sides especially attentive ››› . ››› Fig. 210 C . and an electrically connected trailer. In this case, the distances behind the vehicle are The parking sensor system is a component of Screen display not indicated. the Park Assist system that helps to park the vehicle. The image displayed represents the super- Switching the parking sensor system sound Emergencies For vehicles with the optical parking system vised zones in several segments. As the vehi- on and off cle moves closer to an obstacle, the segment (OPS), the radio navigation systems screen moves closer to the vehicle displayed If the  button on the radio or navigation displays the detected zones in front of and ››› Fig. 210 B and ››› Fig. 211 A . When the system screen may mute the sound of OPS behind the vehicle, indicating - within the warnings. To switch the warnings back on, limits of the system - the position of obsta-

penultimate segment is displayed, this Safety means that the vehicle has reached the colli- press the button again briefly. cles in relation to the vehicle. sion zone. Stop the vehicle! When the OPS is switched off and back on The park assist system cannot be switched again, muting is cancelled. Error messages on if the factory-fitted towing bracket is elec- cannot be switched off. trically connected to a trailer. » 211 Operation

WARNING ● Although the parking distance warning sys- Parking using the park assist system tem detects and warns of the presence of an Despite the assistance provided by the park obstacle, the obstacle could disappear from assist system, do not run any risks when the angle of measurement of the sensors if it parking. The system is not a replacement for is too high or low and the system would no driver awareness. longer show it. Therefore, it will not warn you ● Unintentional movements of the vehicle of these objects. Ignoring the warnings of the could cause serious injury. parking sensor system could cause consider- ● Adjust your speed and driving style to visi- able damage to the vehicle. This is also valid bility, road, traffic and weather conditions. when using the park assist (e.g. to park behind a truck or motorcycle). Therefore, always ● The surface of certain objects and items of keep a close watch on the area in front of and clothing and external sound sources may behind the vehicle while parking, and inter- have a negative affect on the park assist sig- vene promptly if necessary. nals or on the system sensors or may not re- Fig. 212 Detailed view of the centre console: flect its signals. ● To ensure that the system works properly, button to switch the park assist system on the bumper sensors must be kept clean, free manually ● The sensors have blind spots in which ob- of ice and snow and uncovered. stacles and people are not registered. ● The bumper sensors may become damaged ● Always observe the area around the vehi- or misaligned, for example, when parking. cle, as the sensors do not always detect small children, animals or objects. ● When cleaning the sensors with high-pressure or steam cleaning equipment, spray the sensors briefly at a distance of no less than CAUTION 10 cm. ● The park assist system aims exclusively at other parked vehicles, without taking curbs Note or other circumstances into account. Make sure you do not damage the tyres and wheel Contact a specialised workshop with any sys- rims when parking. Where necessary, stop tem faults. SEAT recommends taking your car manoeuvring to avoid damaging the vehicle. in for technical service. ● The sensors may not always be able to detect objects such as trailer draw bars, thin rails, fences, posts and trees, etc. This could result in damage to your car.

212 Driver assistance systems

● Perpendicular parking: press the button  ● Observe the surrounding area and accelerat speeds up to 50 km/h (31 mph) twice. ate carefully at a maximum of 7 km/h When the function is enabled, the button (4 mph). ››› Fig. 212 will light up. ● The park assist system is only responsible ● If necessary, press the  button once for moving the steering wheel during the ma- more to change parking mode. noeuvre. The driver applies the accelerator, data Technical ● Apply the turn signal for the side on which the clutch, the gears and the brake. a gap is to be detected for parking. The in- ● Follow the instructions given by the park strument panel displays the side correspond- assist system until the manoeuvre is comple- ing to the road. ted. Advice ● The park assist system steers the vehicle Parking forwards and backwards until it is in a ● Parking parallel to the road: drive next to straight position in the parking space. the gap at a speed of no more than 40 km/h ● The manoeuvre is complete when the corre- (25 mph) and at a distance of between 0.5 m sponding indication is given on the instru- and 2 m. ment panel display.

● Parking perpendicular to the road: drive Operation next to the gap at a speed of no more than Stopping the parking manoeuvre 20 km/h (12 mph) and at a distance of be- The park assist system stops the manoeuvre tween 0.5 m and 2 m. in advance in the event of one of the follow- ● The best parking results will be achieved if ing: Fig. 213 Gap detected: engage the reverse you position the vehicle as parallel as possi- gear to park (parallel or nose/tail to the kerb) ble to the line of parked cars or the kerb. ● Press button  . ● Driving faster than 7 km/h (4 mph). Emergencies Preparing to park ● When a suitable parking place is displayed on the instrument panel, stop and select re- ● The driver moves the steering wheel. ● The Traction control system ASR must be verse gear. turned on ››› page 187. ● The parking manoeuvre has not been com- ● Follow the instructions given on the instru- pleted after 6 minutes since the park assist ● Parallel parking: press the button  at ment panel display

system was activated. Safety speeds up to 50 km/h (31 mph) once. When the function is enabled, the button ● Then, release the steering wheel when the ● A sliding door is opened. To restart the ma- ››› Fig. 212 will light up. warning signal sounds ››› : The system noeuvre, close the sliding door and press the will move the steering wheel! Ob- button  again. » serve the surrounding area. 213 Operation

● There is a system malfunction (system tem- space at about 20 km an hour (12 mph) then ● Follow the instructions given by the park porarily unavailable). press the button  . assist system. ● The ASR system is switched off or the ASR ● The progress bar on the screen of the in- ● When the next indication appears, release or ESC is working. strument panel shows a display of the rela- the steering wheel ››› in Parking using the tive distance to be covered. park assist system on page 214: The sys- WARNING ● When the Park Assist system is turning the tem will move the steering wheel! The steering wheel turns quickly by itself steering wheel of the stopped vehicle the Observe the surrounding area. when parking using the park assist system. symbol  is also displayed. Press on the ● Observe the surrounding area and acceler- Placing your hand between the steering brake pedal so that the steering can turn with ate carefully at a maximum of 7 km/h wheel spokes could lead to injuries. the vehicle at a standstill and thus reduce the (4 mph). number of manoeuvres. ● The park assist system is only responsible ● A “suitable” parking space length is at Note for moving the steering wheel during the ma- least 1.1 m greater than the length of the ve- ● The park assist system has its limitations. hicle. noeuvre. The driver applies the accelerator, the clutch, the gears and the brake. For example, it is not possible to park on ● If the results of the park assist system are tight bends using the park assist system. not as good after changing the wheels, the ● When it is possible to leave the parking ● Even if the park assist system recognises system must memorise the perimeter of the space, the Park Assist system will stop. Take that there is not enough space for parking new wheels. This process is performed auto- control of the steering and when traffic condi- the vehicle, the instrument panel display will matically while the vehicle is in motion. To tions permit, leave the parking space. still show this place. In this case, the parking help this process, turn slowly (at less than manoeuvre should not be requested. 20 km/h [12 mph]), e.g. in an empty car park. Automatic stoppage of the manoeuvre ● Changing gears between forward and re- The park assist system stops the manoeuvre verse gears before indicated (that is, before in the event of one of the following: the signal from the parking sensor system) Leaving a parking space using the the parking results may not be ideal. Park Assist system ● Driving faster than 7 km/h (4 mph). ● For parallel parking (parallel to the road), a ● The driver moves the steering wheel. sound will tell the driver when they must Driving off change from forward gears to reverse; the ● A sliding door is opened. To restart the ma- signal from the parking sensor system does ● Switch on the engine. noeuvre, close the sliding door and press the not indicate changes of direction. ● Press button  . When the function is ena- button  again. ● The park assist can also be activated after- bled, the button ››› Fig. 212 will light up. ● There is a system malfunction (system tem- wards, if you pass close to a parallel parking ● Apply the turn signal for the side on which porarily unavailable). space at a maximum of 40 km an hour you want to leave the parking space. ● The ASR system is switched off or the ASR (25 mph) or close to be perpendicular parking ● Select reverse gear. or ESC is working. 214 Driver assistance systems

WARNING Following the intervention of the brakes, the ● Mode 2: reverse parking parallel to the Park Assist will stop. curb. The steering wheel turns quickly automatically when leaving a parking space using the WARNING The mode can be changed by pressing the park assist system. Placing your hand be- button on the radio or navigation system tween the steering wheel spokes could lead Despite the assistance provided by the park screen. Only the mode to which the points Technical data Technical to injuries. assist system, do not run any risks when can be changed will be displayed. parking. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness. WARNING ● Always be ready to brake. Park Assist brake operation Use of the camera to calculate the distance ● Automatic brake intervention will end after

from obstacles (people, vehicles, etc.) is inac- Advice 1.5 seconds approximately. Following auto- The Park Assist system helps the driver by curate and may cause accidents and severe matic intervention of the brakes, stop the ve- braking automatically. Automatic braking injuries. does not relieve the driver of responsibility hicle yourself. ● The camera lens expands and distorts the for controlling the accelerator, brake and field of vision and displays the objects on the clutch ››› . screen in a different, vague manner. ● Some objects may not be displayed or may Braking to avoid damage at excess speed Rear assist* (Rear View Cam-

not be very clear (e.g. very thin posts or fen- Operation It is possible that the system operates the era) ces), due to the resolution of the monitor or if brakes to reduce excess speed. The parking the light is dim. manoeuvre can then continue. The brakes Introduction ● The camera has blind spots in which obsta- will intervene during each parking process. cles and people are not detected. The camera fitted to the rear lid helps drivers during parking or reversing manoeuvres. The ● Keep the camera lens clean and clear of Braking to minimise damage camera image and certain orientation points snow and ice. Do not cover it. When approaching an obstacle, the vehicle generated by the system are indicated on the Emergencies may brake automatically. In certain circum- factory-fitted radio or navigation system WARNING stances (e.g. storm, detection of ultrasounds, screen. The intelligent technology in the rear assist vehicle status, load, inclination), the Park As- system cannot change the limits imposed by sist system may stop the vehicle completely Two types of location point (modes) can be selected: the laws of physics and by the system itself. before an object. Careless or uncontrolled use of the rear assist Safety system may result in severe injuries and acci- ● Press the foot brake ››› ! ● Mode 1: reverse parking perpendicular to the road (e.g. in a car park). dents. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness. »

215 Operation

● Adjust your speed and driving style to visi- Instructions for use 3 Display help. The help list explains the bility, road, traffic and weather conditions. surfaces and lines on the camera image. Press  to exit help. ● Always keep a close eye on the area around the vehicle and always look towards where 4 Mute the sound. you are parking. The display shows the path 5 Adjust the display: brightness, contrast, of the rear end of the vehicle using the cur- colour. rent steering angle. The front of the vehicle turns more in comparison with the rear. 6 Switching on the orientation points for rear parking perpendicular to the road ● Do not be distracted from the traffic when looking at the screen. (mode 1). ● Always observe the area around the vehi- 7 Displaying the optical parking system. cle, as the cameras do not always detect chil- Operations in vehicles with no optical parking dren, animals or objects. Fig. 214 On the rear lid: location of the rear system (OPS) ● The system might not show all areas clear- assist camera ly. Switching the dis- Select reverse gear with the igni- play on automati- tion switched on or the engine run- ● Only use the rear assist system when the cally: ning. Mode 1 will be displayed. boot hatch is completely closed. Press a button to select the area on the radio or the navigation system CAUTION ››› Booklet Radio or ››› Booklet Navi- ● gation system. The camera only displays 2D images on the Switching the dis- OR: press the  button on the screen. Due to the lack of depth, it might be play off manually: difficult or impossible to recognise protrud- screen. ing objects or cracks in the road. OR: after switching off the ignition, the rear assist image remains on ● The cameras may not always be able to de- the screen for a short period. tect objects such as thin rails, fences, posts Fig. 215 Rear assist display: mode 2 connec- Switching off the The image will switch off after and trees, etc. This could result in damage to ted your car. display by disen- around 10 seconds. gaging reverse Function buttons on the screen: gear:

1  display the menu;  hide the menu. Switching off the Drive forwards at more than ap- display by driving prox. 15 km/h (9 mph). 2  Turning off the reversing camera im- forwards: ages

216 Driver assistance systems

Operations in vehicles with the optical parking 1) Do not use the rear assist system in the fol- agent and clean the lens with a dry cloth system (OPS) lowing cases: ››› . Switching the dis- Select reverse gear with the igni- ● Remove snow using a small brush. – If the vehicle has been overloaded at the rear. play on automati- tion switched on or the engine run- ● Use de-icing spray to remove any ice ››› . cally: ning. Mode 1 will be displayed. – If the driver is not familiar with the system. Technical data Technical Press a button to select the area on – If the rear lid is open. CAUTION the radio or the navigation system ● Never use abrasive cleaners to clean the ››› Booklet Radio or ››› Booklet Navi- – If the position and installation angle of the camera camera lens. gation system. have been changed, e.g. in a rear-end collision. Have a  specialised workshop check the system. ● Never remove snow or ice from the camera Switching the dis- OR: press the button on the play off manually: screen. lens using warm or hot water. This could Advice OR: after switching off the ignition, 2) Optical illusions of the camera (examples) damage the lens. the rear assist image remains on the screen for a short period. The rear assist camera produces two-dimensional images. Any cracks in or objects protruding from the Note Press button  . ground or from other vehicles are more difficult to spot ● SEAT recommends that you practise park- Switching off the The OPS display will immediately or cannot be seen due to a lack of depth in the image ing with the rear assist system in a quiet lo- display by disen- be shown. displayed. cation or in a car park to become familiar with gaging reverse Objects or other vehicles may seem to be closer or fur- the system, including the orientation lines Operation gear: ther away than what they really are: and their function.

Switching off the Drive forwards at more than ap- – On changing from a flat surface to a slope or gradient. ● The orientation lines will not be displayed display by driving prox. 10 km/h (6 mph). on the screen if the rear lid is open or the fac- forwards: – On changing from a slope or gradient to a flat surface. tory-fitted towing bracket is electrically con- – If the vehicle has been overloaded at the rear. nected to a trailer. Things to note – On approaching protruding objects. These objects Emergencies 1) Do not use the rear assist system in the fol- may be outside the angle of vision of the camera when reversing. lowing cases:

– If there is a fault in the dynamic chassis control (DCC). Cleaning the camera lens

– If the image displayed is not very clear or reliable (low Keep the camera lens clean and clear of snow Safety visibility or dirty lens). and ice: – If the space behind the vehicle cannot be clearly or ● Moisten the lens using a commercially completely recognised. available, alcohol-based glass cleaning 217 Operation

Parking perpendicular to the road Parking lengths of the orientation lines use a vehicle (mode 1) ● Stop the vehicle in front of a space and se- located on a horizontal surface as reference. lect reverse gear. 1 Safety distance: road area located up to ● Reverse slowly and turn the steering wheel around 40 cm behind the vehicle. so that the yellow orientation lines guide you 2 Vehicle side limit. towards the space ››› Fig. 216 3 . 3 Turning point when parking. When the ● Align the vehicle straight in the parking yellow line touches the curb or another place using the help of the green orientation limit of the parking space, the point for lines. changing direction (magnifying glass) will have been reached. 4 Free space required to parallel park the Parking parallel to the road (mode 2) vehicle. The surface displayed must com- Fig. 216 Display: orientation lines for the pletely fit in the space. parking space behind the vehicle 5 Possible vehicle parked next to the curb. Summary of the orientation points Parking Meaning of orientation lines displayed on the ● screen ››› Fig. 216. All of the lengths of the Stop the vehicle 1 m away parallel to the orientation lines use a vehicle located on a parking space and select reverse gear. horizontal surface as reference. ● Switch on mode 2 on the navigation system screen for parallel parking. 1 Red: safety distance, i.e. road area loca- ● Slowly reverse and turn the steering wheel ted up to 40 cm behind the vehicle. so that the surface displayed yellow on the Fig. 217 Display: orientation lines and surfa- 2 Green: prolongation of the rear of the ve- screen stops in front of any obstacles 5 ces for the space behind the vehicle hicle (somewhat enlarged). The area dis- (e.g. another vehicle). played green ends around 2 metres be- ● Turn the steering wheel fully towards the hind the vehicle, on the road. After applying the turn signal, the lines and surfaces not required are deleted. space and reverse slowly. 3 Yellow: prolongation of the rear of the ve- ● When the yellow line 3 touches the side hicle as the steering wheel turns. The Summary of the orientation points limit of the space, e.g. the border or curb area displayed yellow ends around 3 me- (magnifying glass), turn the steering wheel tres behind the vehicle, on the road. Meaning of orientation lines and surfaces displayed on the screen ››› Fig. 217. All of the fully in the opposite direction.

218 Driver assistance systems

● Continue reversing until the vehicle is in- ed on, signalling that the function is being The CCS only slows down by reducing the ac- side the space, parallel to the road. Correct verified. They will switch off after a few sec- celerator but not by braking ››› . the position if necessary. onds. Travelling down hills with the CCS Indication on display When travelling down hills the CCS cannot Cruise control* (Cruise control There are different versions of the cruise con- maintain a constant speed. Slow the vehicle data Technical trol system. In vehicles with the multifunction down using the brake pedal and reduce system - CCS) display (MFD), the set speed is displayed on gears if required. the instrument panel screen. Warning and control lamp Automatic off

Status Fig. 218: Advice The cruise control system (CCS) is switched A CCS temporarily switched off. The set off automatically or temporarily: speed is displayed in small figures. ● B System error. Contact a specialised work- If the system detects a fault that could af- shop. fect the working order of the CCS. ● C CCS switched on. The speed memory is If you increase the stored speed by using the accelerator for a certain time. empty. Operation ● D The CCS is switched on. The set speed is if the brake or clutch pedal is depressed. displayed in large figures. ● If you change gears. ● If the airbag is triggered. WARNING Observe the safety warnings ››› in Control WARNING and warning lamps on page 105. Use of the cruise control could cause acci- Emergencies Fig. 218 Instrument panel display: CCS status dents and severe injuries if it is not possible indications to drive at a constant speed maintaining the Cruise control system operation safety distance.  It lights up ● Do not use the cruise control in heavy traf- Read the additional information carefully fic, if the distance from the vehicle in front is Safety This cruise control system maintains the set speed of ›››  page 32 insufficient, on steep roads, with several the vehicle. bends or in slippery circumstances (snow, The cruise control system (CCS) is able to ice, rain or loose gravel), or on flooded roads. » Several warning and control lamps light up maintain the set speed when driving for- for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- wards from approx. 20 km/h (12 mph). 219 Operation

● Never use the CCS when driving off-road or ● Always adapt your speed and the distance Control lamps on unpaved roads. to the vehicles ahead in line with visibility, ● Always adapt your speed and the distance weather conditions, the condition of the road  Blinks or lights up yellow: to the vehicles ahead in line with visibility, and the traffic situation. The system cannot clearly detect the weather conditions, the condition of the road ● Always keep your hands on the steering Lane assist sys- lane. See page 221, The lane assist and the traffic situation. wheel so you can turn it at any time. tem connected system is inactive (control lamp lit but inactive. ● To avoid unexpected operation of the cruise ● The lane assist system does not detect all in yellow). control system, turn it off every time you fin- road markings. In some circumstances, the ish using it. poor state of the road, structures located on  Blinks or lights up green: ● It is dangerous to use a set speed which is it or certain objects may be mistakenly recog- too high for the prevailing road, traffic or nised as road markings by the lane assist Lane assist system connected and active. weather conditions. system. In such situations, switch the lane assist system off immediately. ● When travelling down hills, the CCS cannot Several warning and control lamps light up maintain a constant speed. The vehicle tends ● Pay attention to the instructions on the infor a few seconds when the ignition is switch- to accelerate under its own weight. Select a strument panel display and act accordingly to ed on, signalling that the function is being lower gear or use the foot brake to slow the its requests. verified. They will switch off after a few sec- vehicle. ● Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur- onds. roundings. WARNING Note Observe the safety warnings ››› in Control Lane Assist system* and warning lamps on page 105. The lane assist system has been exclusively Introduction developed for driving on asphalted roads.

WARNING Note The intelligent technology in the lane assist If the lane assist system does not work as de- system cannot change the limits imposed by scribed in this chapter, do not use it and con- the laws of physics and by the system itself. tact a specialised workshop. Careless or uncontrolled use of the Lane As- sist system may cause accidents and injury. Note The system is not a replacement for driver awareness. If you observe any system malfunction, have the system checked by a specialised workshop. 220 Driver assistance systems

Operation mode ● If the limits inherent to the system are ● When there is no dividing line. reached. ● When the distance to the next dividing line ● If the maximum rotational torque during is excessive. the corrective intervention is not enough to ● When there are more than two lane mark- keep the vehicle inside the lane. ings per lane. Technical data Technical ● If during the corrective intervention by the ● When the ASR is switched off. system the lane is no longer detected. ● When the system does not detect any active rotation of the steering wheel by the driv- Switching the lane assist system on or off er during a prolonged period.

● Select the corresponding menu option us- Advice ● Temporarily, in the event of very dynamic ing the button for the driver assist systems driving. ›››  page 26. Fig. 219 In the windscreen: field of vision of ● When the turn signal is connected. the lane assist system camera. ● OR: activate or deactivate the system in the menu Settings, sub-menu Assist sys- Note Using the camera located in the sun visor, tems, menu Lane Assist ›››  page 26. the lane assist system detects the possible The “confirmation sign” indicates that the ● Before starting travel, verify that the cam- lines dividing it. When the vehicle involuntar- driver assist system is switched on. era's field of vision is not covered ››› Fig. 219. Operation ily approaches a dividing line it has detected, ● Keep the camera window clean. the system will notify the driver with a correc- Automatic deactivation: the lane assist sys- tive intervention. It is possible to over-regu- tem can be deactivated automatically if there late the corrective intervention at any time. is a system malfunction. Control lamp switches off. Disconnect the lane assist system in If the turn signal is connected, there will be the following situations no warning as the lane assist system under- The lane assist system is inactive (control Emergencies stands that you wish to change lanes volun- lamp lit in yellow) Due to the limits of the Lane Assist system, tarily. switch it off in the following situations: ● When driving speed drops to approx. Steering wheel vibration 65 km/h (40 mph). ● When more attention is required of the driver The following situations cause the steering ● When the Lane Assist system does not de- ● Safety wheel to vibrate and require the driver to take tect the dividing lines of the road. For exam- For very sporty driving active control of the steering: ple, in the event of road works, and snow, ● In very unfavourable weather conditions dirt, moisture or reflections. ● In very unfavourable road conditions ● When the radius of a curve is too small. ● In areas of road works 221 Operation

Blind spot detector (BSD) with ● Keep your hands on the wheel at all times, ● The rear bumper should only be painted and be ready to intervene in the steering at with paint authorised by SEAT. The blind spot rear cross traffic alert (RTA) any time. detector's functions may be limited or work ● Pay attention to the control lamps that may incorrectly if other paints are used. Introduction come on in the external rear view mirrors and ● The external rear view mirror control lamps on the instrument panel, and follow any in- may have their functionality limited in the  ››› table on page 2 structions they may give. event of solar radiation. The blind spot detector (BSD) helps detect ● The blind spot assistant may react in the the traffic situation to the sides and behind face of any special constructions that may be Note the vehicle. present on the sides of the vehicle: e.g., high or irregular protective fences. This may cause If the blind spot detector with rear cross traf- The integrated rear cross traffic alert (RTA) erroneous warnings. fic alert does not work as described in this chapter, do not use it and have it checked by helps the driver when backing out of a per- ● Never use the blind spot detector with rear a specialised workshop. pendicular parking spot and in manoeuvring. cross traffic alert on unpaved roads. The blind The blind spot detector has been developed spot detector with rear cross traffic alert has been designed for use on paved roads. for driving on paved roads. ● Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur- Control lamps roundings. WARNING Control lamp in external rear view mirrors: ● Never use the blind spot detector with rear The smart technology incorporated into the cross traffic alert if the radar sensors are blind spot detector (BSD) with rear cross traf-  Lights up dirty, covered or damaged. The system may fic alert (RTA) included cannot overcome the work incorrectly in these cases. Lights up once briefly: the blind spot detector is activa- limits imposed by the laws of physics; it only ted and ready to operate. works within the limits of the system. Acci- dents and severe injury may occur if the blind CAUTION Lights up: blind spot detector has detected a vehicle in spot detection system or the rear cross traffic the blind spot. ● The radar sensors on the rear bumper may alert are used negligently or involuntarily. be damaged or shifted in the event of a colli- The system is not a replacement for driver sion, for example, when entering or exiting a  Flashes awareness. parking space. This may result in the system The blind spot detector has detected a vehicle in the ● Adapt your speed and safe distance to the disconnecting itself, or at least having its blind spot and the turn signal has been turned on in the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visi- functionality diminished. bility, weather, road and traffic conditions. direction of the detected vehicle ››› . ● In order to ensure that the radar sensors work properly, keep the rear bumper free of For vehicles that are also equipped with Lane Assist snow and ice and do not cover it. ››› page 220, a warning to switch lanes will also appear even though the turn signal has not been engaged. 222 Driver assistance systems

If there are no indications from the control Blind spot detector (BSD) lamp in the external rear view mirror, this means that the blind spot detector has not detected any other vehicles in the area ››› in Introduction on page 222. If the dipped beam is on, then the control data Technical lamps in the external rear view mirrors will be dimmed (night mode).

WARNING Fig. 221 Rear view of the vehicle: radar sen- Advice If the warning lamps and the corresponding sor zones. messages are ignored when they light up, the vehicle may stall in traffic and cause accidents and severe injuries. The Blind spot detector uses radar sensors to monitor the areas to the side and behind the ● Never ignore the warning lamps or messag- vehicle. The system does this by measuring es. the vehicle's distance from other vehicles ● Carry out the necessary operations. and its speed differential. The blind spot de- Operation tector will not work at speeds of less than ap- CAUTION prox. 15 km/h (9 mph). The system uses optical signals in the external rear view mirrors to Failure to heed the control lamps and corresponding text messages when they light up notify the driver. may result in damage to the vehicle. Fig. 220 In the exterior mirrors: indication of the blind spot detector. Indication in the external rear view mirrors The control lamp (expanded view) provides Emergencies an indication in the corresponding external mirror ››› Fig. 220 regarding the traffic situation behind the vehicle, if it is deemed to be critical. The control lamp of the left-hand external mirror A indicates the traffic situation Safety to the left of the vehicle, and the control lamp of the right-hand external mirror B, indicates the traffic situation to the right of the vehicle. »

223 Operation

In the case of tinted windows or windows the outside ››› Fig. 221. The sensors have a vehicles driving in the lane next to you (if with tinted film, the indications of the exter- range of approx. 20 metres behind the vehi- there are any), and can also detect stationary nal mirrors may not be seen clearly or correct- cle, including the blind spots to the left and objects such as dividers, and thus give an in- ly. right of the vehicle. The range to the sides of correct indication. the vehicle is roughly larger than the width of Keep the external mirrors clean and free of a lane. snow and ice, and do not cover them with adhesives or other similar materials. The lane width is not detected individually, but is rather pre-configured in the system. Radar sensors Thus if you are driving in wide lanes or in between two lanes, the indications may be in- The radar sensor are located on the left and correct. Furthermore, the system can detect right of the bumper, and are not visible from

224 Driver assistance systems

Driving situations Technical data Technical

Fig. 222 Schematic diagram:  Passing situation with traffic behind the vehicle.  Indi-

cation from the blind spot detector in the left- Advice hand external mirror. Operation

Fig. 223 Schematic diagram:  Situation of passing and then moving into the right-hand lane.  Indication from the blind spot detector in the right-hand external mirror.

In the following situations, an indication will erably higher speed, no indication will be Physical limitations inherent to the system Emergencies be displayed in the external mirror ››› Fig. 222 displayed. In some situations the blind spot detector B (arrow) or ››› Fig. 223 B (arrow): The faster the vehicle approaches, the sooner may not interpret the traffic situation correct- ● When being passed by another vehicle an indication will be displayed in the external ly. E.g. in the following situations: ››› Fig. 222 A. mirror, because the blind spot detector takes ● on tight bends

into account the speed differential with other Safety ● When passing another vehicle ››› Fig. 223 A ● in the case of lanes with different widths with a speed differential of approx. 10 km/h vehicles. Thus even though the distance from (6 mph). If the vehicle is passing at a consid- the other vehicle is identical, the indication ● at the top of slopes will appear sooner in some cases and later in ● in adverse weather conditions » others. 225 Operation

● in the case of special constructions to the ● In vehicles without ParkPilot a “gong” will WARNING side of the vehicle, e.g., high or irregular di- sound and a message will be displayed on viders the instrument panel. The smart technology incorporated into the rear cross traffic alert cannot overcome the ● If the vehicle is equipped ParkPilot, the limits imposed by the laws of physics; it only ParkPilot acoustic alarm will sound continu- works within the limits of the system. Do not Rear cross traffic alert (RTA) ously. let the extra convenience afforded by the rear cross traffic alert tempt you into taking any Automatic braking to reduce damages risks. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness. If the rear cross traffic alert detects that someone else on the road is approaching the ● The system should never be used in limited rear of the vehicle and the driver does not visibility conditions or complicated traffic, e.g., in high-traffic areas or when crossing step on the brake, the system will engage the multiple lanes. brakes automatically. ● Be sure to always be aware of the vehicle's The parking system helps the driver by auto- surroundings, since the system is not guaran- matically engaging the brakes to reduce any teed to detect things such as bicycles or pe- damage. The system will brake automatically destrians in all situations. if the vehicle is reversing at a speed of ap- ● The rear cross traffic alert itself will not proximately 1-12 km (1-7 mph). Once it has brake the vehicle to a complete stop. Fig. 224 Schematic representation of the rear detected that the vehicle has stopped, the cross traffic alert: monitored zone around the system will keep the vehicle stopped for ap- vehicle being parked. prox. 2 seconds. Using the blind spot detector (BSD) The rear cross traffic alert uses the radar sen- After automatically braking to reduce dam- with rear cross traffic alert (RTA) sors on the rear bumper ››› Fig. 221 to moni- age, the system will not be able to automati- tor the traffic crossing behind the vehicle as cally brake again for approximately 10 sec- Activating and deactivating the blind spot it backs out of a perpendicular parking space onds. detector (BSD) with rear cross traffic alert (RTA) or as it is being manoeuvred, for example in You can interrupt the automatic braking by very low visibility conditions. stepping forcefully on the accelerator pedal The blind spot detector with rear cross traffic If the system detects that someone else on or the brake pedal in order to regain control alert can be activated or deactivated in the the road is approaching the rear of the vehi- of the vehicle. “Assistants” menu of the SEAT information system, or depending on the vehicle's equip- cle ››› Fig. 224, an acoustic alarm will sound. ment, by using the driver assistance key located on the headlight lever. 226 Driver assistance systems

Open the Assistants menu. Trailer mode and in the visual presentation of the navigation system map. ●  BSD The Blind spot detector and the rear cross traffic alert will be automatically deactivated ●  Parking Assist. and it will be impossible to activate them if Applicable countries: If the verification box on the control panel is the tow hitch is electrically connected to a Sign Assist is accepted in the following coun- Technical data Technical checked , the functionality will be automat- trailer or other similar object. tries: ically activated at ignition. As soon as the driver starts to drive with a Andorra, Belgium, Denmark, Germany, Fin- When the blind spot detector is ready to op- trailer connected electrically to the vehicle, a land, France, Ireland, Italy, Liechtenstein, erate, the indications in the external mirrors message will appear on the instrument panel Luxembourg, Monaco, Netherlands, Norway, display indicating that the blind spot detec- will turn on briefly as confirmation. Austria, Poland, Portugal, San Marino, Swe- Advice tor and the rear cross traffic alert are deacti- den, Switzerland, Spain, Czech Republic, Uni- The control lamp of the instrument panel in- vated. Once the trailer has been unhitched ted Kingdom, Vatican City. dicates the system's status. from the vehicle, if you want to use the blind When the vehicle is restarted, the last adjust- spot detector and the rear cross traffic alert, WARNING you will have to reactivate them in the corre- ment in the system will remain active. The traffic signs and instructions shown by sponding menu. Sign Assist may differ from the current traffic If the blind spot detector was automatically

situation. Operation deactivated, it will only be possible to restart If the towing hitch is not factory equipped, the system after turning the vehicle off and then the blind spot detector and the rear ● The signs and highway code rules always restarting it. cross traffic alert will have to be deactivated take precedence over the instructions and manually when driving with a trailer. display of Sign Assist. Automatic deactivation of the blind spot de- ● Adjust your speed and driving style to visi- tector (BSD) bility, road, traffic and weather conditions. ● The system cannot always detect or cor-

The radar sensors of the blind spot detector Traffic signal detection Emergencies rectly show all the traffic signs. with rear cross traffic alert will be automati- (Sign Assist)* cally deactivated when, among other reasons, one of the sensors is detected to be WARNING Introduction permanently covered. This may be the case if, The traffic sign detection is not a replacement for example, there is a layer of snow or ice in for driver awareness. Sign Assist can help the driver with informa- Safety front of one of the sensors. tion on speed limits or if overtaking is pro- ● Adverse conditions of visibility, darkness, The relevant text message will appear in the hibited at that moment. The traffic signs and snow, rain and fog can cause the system not dash panel display additional information detected by the sys- to show the traffic signs or to show them er- tem is represented in the dash panel display roneously. » 227 Operation

1) CAUTION Indication on display Display text of Sign Assist on the instrument panel ● If old mapping data is used in the navigation system, this may cause the traffic signs Error: Sign As- System fault. to be shown incorrectly. sist Have the system checked by a specialised workshop. ● In the route points mode (navigation by route points) of the navigation system, Sign Sign Assist: The windscreen is dirty in the Assist is only partly available. Clean the wind- area of the camera. screen! Clean the windscreen.

Sign Assist: only No data is being transmitted partly available from the navigator. at the moment. Connect the navigator and insert the navigation data medium. ALTERNATIVELY: Sign Assist is not supported in the country in which you are driving at this time.

WARNING If the warning lamps and messages are ignored, the vehicle may stall in traffic, or may cause accidents and severe injuries. ● Never ignore the warning lamps or text messages. Fig. 225 Instrument panel display: Examples ● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. of speed limits or overtaking prohibitions detected together with the corresponding additional signs

1) Depending on the version, the display may be in colour or black and white. 228 Driver assistance systems

CAUTION wet”. If the vehicle's rain sensor detects rain Tiredness detection (recom- during travel, the traffic sign valid at this mo- Failure to heed the control lamps and text ment will move to the first position along the mendation to take a break) messages when they appear may result in ve- additional sign “if the road is wet”. hicle faults. Introduction The permanent display on the instrument panel screen is shown as you pass the real data Technical WARNING Operation mode traffic signs. The signs for entering and leaving towns activate the display of the usual Do not let the extra convenience afforded by Sign Assist does not work in all countries. speed limits for that country on roads in the tiredness detection function tempt you into taking any risks when driving. When This must be taken into account when travel- populated areas and national highways, even making long trips, conveniently long breaks Advice ling abroad. if the speed is not limited by an actual traffic sign. must be taken. ● The driver is responsible for determining Display of traffic signs The end of a prohibition or limitation is not their capacity to drive. displayed. If you exceed the speed limits Speed limits or overtaking prohibitions to- ● Never drive when tired. gether with the corresponding additional shown, a warning will not appear. The system ● signs are shown on the instrument panel dis- does not detect areas with little traffic. The The system does not always detect the tiredness of the driver. Please read the infor- play Fig. 225. Depending on the naviga- current legal provisions apply. Operation ››› mation provided in the section ››› page 230, tion system installed in the vehicle, traffic Limited operation. signs will be shown as above and also in the Connection and disconnection ● In some situations the system may incor- navigation system's map display. ● Connect or disconnect the assist system in rectly interpret an intended manoeuvre as a When Sign Assist is connected, the vehicle the Settings menu in the SEAT information sign of tiredness of the driver. system ›››  page 26. records the traffic signs with a camera in the ● In the event of the an episode called “mi- base of the interior rear vision mirror. After ● OR: press the button for the driver assist crosleep” at the wheel, a strong warning is Emergencies checking and evaluating the information systems on the main beam lever. not in place! from the camera, the navigation system and ● Observe the indications on the display of the current vehicle data, up to three valid Trailer the instrument panel and act in accordance traffic signs are displayed in conjunction with Connect or disconnect the secondary display with them. » the corresponding additional signs. The traf- for speed limits and overtaking bans that ap- fic sign that is currently valid for the driver is Safety ply to trailers (trailer mode) in the Settings shown first, in the left side of the screen. A menu in the SEAT information system traffic sign of only limited validity, ›››  page 26. e.g. 90 km/h (56 mph) is shown second, together with the additional sign “if the road is 229 Operation

Note shown ››› Fig. 226. The on-screen message ● in the event of adverse weather conditions, on the dash panel is displayed for 5 seconds ● when a sporty driving style is employed, ● The tiredness detection function has only and, where required, repeated again. The ● been designed for driving on motorways and system stores the last message displayed. in the event of a major distraction for the wide roads. driver, ● If there is a fault in the system, refer to a The message that appears on the instrument Specialised workshop to have the system in- panel display can be switched off by pressing The tiredness detection function switches off spected. the OK button on the multifunction steering when the ignition is switched off or when the wheel or on the window wiper lever driver unbuckles their seat belt and opens ›››  page 28. Using the multifunction dis- the door. If driving for a long time under 65 play  the message on the in- km/h (40 mph), the system ceases to assess Function and operation ››› page 28 strument panel display can be shown. tiredness automatically. If driving speed is then increased, the behaviour at the wheel Conditions of operation will again be evaluated. Behaviour at the wheel is only evaluated at speeds of above 65 km/h (40 mph). Dynamic Chassis control (DCC)* Switching on and off The system can be switched on or off in the Operation and control Assistants menu. If an assistance system is switched on, this is indicated with a “mark”. Fig. 226 On the instrument panel display: tiredness detection symbol Limited operation

The tiredness detection function registers the The tiredness detection function is subject to behaviour of the driver at the wheel at the certain limitations. Therefore it is possible beginning of a journey and, using this, evalu- that in some driving situations behaviour at ates the tiredness. This is continually com- the wheel cannot be correctly interpreted. pared with the current behaviour at the E.g. in the following situations: wheel. If the system detects that the driver is ● at speeds lower than 65 km/h (40 mph), Fig. 227 In the centre console: button for set- tired, an audible warning using a “gong” is ting the dynamic chassis control. given and a symbol and complementary mes- ● in sections with corners, sage on the instrument panel display are ● on roads in poor condition, 230 Driver assistance systems

DCC continuously adapts the suspension to WARNING driving. Loss of tyre pressure will be indica- the condition of the road and current driving ted by the indicator  as well as an audible conditions, according to the pre-set pro- Adjusting the suspension can change driving warning and sometimes a text message on gramme. properties. Dynamic chassis control must the dash panel display. When you open the never lead to any kinds of risk. driver door, you will find a label indicating Steering is also adapted in the “Sport” pro- ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all the tyre pressure recommended by the manu- data Technical gramme. times to suit visibility, weather, road and traf- facturer for the maximum vehicle load for fic conditions. each tyre approved for the vehicle in ques- Programme Driving recommendations tion. By pressing the adjustment button on Adjust it to the most comfortable set- Note the tyre monitoring indicator, you may

ting, for example, driving on surfaces change the reference pressure for the tyres Advice “COMFORT” C If the dynamic chassis control does not oper- in poor condition, or making long ate as described in this chapter, go to an au- so that the tyre pressure coincides with ac- trips. thorised workshop and request it be checked. tual pressure ››› page 233. Balanced setting, suitable, for exam- “NORMAL” Suitable use of the adjustment button ple, for day-to-day use. Note ››› page 233. “SPORT” S Sport setting for sporty style driving In case of a fault in the dynamic chassis control, the buttons C and S will so indicate. A WARNING Operation Select a program fault could the affect driving comfort. Have Unsuitable handling of the wheels and tyres the system checked by a specialised work- may lead to sudden tyre pressure losses, to ● Switch the ignition on. shop. tread separation or even to a blow-out. ●  Press the C S button repeatedly until the ● Check tyre pressures regularly and ensure desired programme is displayed. they are maintained at the pressures indicated. If the tyre pressure is too low, the tyres The “NORMAL” programme is active when Tyre monitoring systems could overheat, resulting in tread detachment neither the C nor S buttons are lit up. or even burst tyres. Emergencies Introduction ● Tyre pressure should be that indicated on WARNING the label when the tyres are cold at all times Switching the dynamic chassis control sys- The tyre monitor indicator monitors the tyre ››› page 288. pressure of each wheel during driving using tem on while the vehicle is in motion could ● Regularly check the cold inflation pressure divert your attention from the traffic and the ABS sensors. The ABS sensors monitor of the tyres. If necessary, change the tyre Safety cause accidents. the tyre tread perimeter and vibrations of pressure of the vehicle tyres while they are each tyre. The tyre monitor indicator warns cold. » the driver if it detects a considerable drop in tyre pressure of one or several tyres while 231 Operation

● Regularly check your tyres for damage and tears and impacts/dents. Remove objects Control lamp wear. from the tyres only when the tyres have not ● Never exceed the maximum permitted been pierced by these.  Blinks or lights up speed or loads specified for the type of tyre ● The tyre monitoring system is set to the  fitted on your vehicle. tyre pressure recommended by the manufac- The tyre pres- Stop the vehicle! Reduce your sure of a wheel speed immediately! Stop the vehicle turer and indicated on the label Fig. 251. ››› has dropped safely as soon as possible. Avoid WARNING considerably in sudden manoeuvres and braking! relation to the Check all tyres and pressures. Re- Incorrect use of the tyre monitoring indicator Elements of the tyre monitoring indi- pressure set by place any damaged tyres. button could result in the indicator giving er- the driver roneous messages or prevented from indicat- cator ››› page 233. ing the danger caused by a defective tyre ››› page 233. Consult a specialised workshop if Tyre monitoring indicator with button. the tyre pressure is correct and the System malfunc- lamp remains lit after switching the See ››› page 233. tion. CAUTION ignition off and back on again. Have  Control lamp  on the instrument panel. the system checked there. ● The tyre valves may be damaged if the cap   SET is not in place. Check that the caps are identi- button on the centre console. Several warning and control lamps light up cal to the standard caps and have been cor-  Monitoring the tread of all tyres using ABS sensors for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- rectly tightened. Do not use metal caps (indirect measurement). ››› page 233. ed on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few sec- ●  Adjustable medium and full-load tyre pressures. Do not damage the valves when changing onds. the tyres ››› page 233.  Button to update the system when the tyre pressure is changed. WARNING For the sake of the environment Observe the safety warnings ››› in Control Under-inflated tyres lead to increased fuel and warning lamps on page 105. consumption and tyre wear. WARNING Note When the tyres are inflated at different pres- ● Do not only rely on the tyre monitoring sys- sures or at a pressure that is too low then a tem. Regularly check your tyres to ensure tyre may be damaged resulting in a loss of that the tyre pressure is correct and that the control of the vehicle and a serious or fatal tyres are not damaged due to puncture, cuts, accident.

232 Driver assistance systems

● If the warning lamp  lights up, stop im- ● If a tyre has not been “punctured” and does ● The vehicle is unbalanced because of a mediately and check the tyres. not have to be changed immediately, drive to load ● If the tyres are inflated at different pres- the nearest specialised workshop at a moder- ● If the wheels on an axle are subject to a sures or if a tyre pressure is too low, this will ate speed and have the tyre checked and in- heavier load (e.g. when towing a trailer). flated to the correct pressure. increase tyre wear, negatively affecting vehi- ● The vehicle is fitted with snow chains cle stability and increasing braking distan- data Technical ces. ● The wheel on one axle is changed ● If tyres are inflated at different pressures or Tyre monitoring indicator There may be a delay in the reaction of the a tyre pressure is too low, a tyre may be dam- tyre monitoring indicator  or it may not in- aged and burst resulting in a loss of control dicate anything under certain circumstances of the vehicle. Advice (e.g. sports driving, snow-covered or un- ● The driver is responsible for ensuring that paved roads). all of the vehicle tyres are correctly inflated to the right pressure. The recommended tyre Adaptation of the tyre monitoring indicator pressure is indicated on the label ››› Fig. 251. ● The tyre monitoring system can only oper- On adjusting tyre pressure or changing one ate correctly if all of the tyres are inflated to or more wheels, the ››› Fig. 228 button on the the correct pressure when cold. tyre monitoring indicator must be kept press- Operation ed down, with the ignition on, until an audi- ● Driving with tyres at the wrong pressure can damage them and result in an accident. ble warning is heard. Do the same, for exam- Fig. 228 Detailed view of the centre console: ple, when the front and rear wheels are swap- Ensure that the tyre pressures of all the tyres button for the tyre pressure monitoring indi- ped ››› Fig. 250. correspond to the vehicle load. cator ● Before starting a journey, always inflate If the wheels are subjected to an excessive tyres to the correct pressure. The tyre monitor indicator compares wheel load (towing a trailer, heavy load), the tyre ● If tyre pressure is too low then the tyre is revolutions and, with this information, the pressure must be increased to the maximum Emergencies subject to greater forces and it may be heated tread of each wheel using the ABS sensors. If recommended pressure ››› page 284. Press to such an extent that the tread can rupture the tread of a wheel is changed, the tyre the tyre monitoring indicator button to con- and the tyre will burst. monitoring indicator will indicate as such on firm the new pressure value. ● With an overloaded vehicle at high speed, the instrument panel. The wheel tread the tyres can overheat and burst resulting in changes when: Note Safety a loss of vehicle control. ● Tyre pressure is insufficient An incorrect warning may be given when ● Tyre pressures which are too high or too snow chains are in use because the chains in- low reduce the useful life of the tyre, affect- ● Tyre structure is damaged crease the tread of the wheel. ing vehicle performance. 233 Operation

Towing bracket device deactivated when a trailer is connected. For ● Always secure loads correctly with suitable tow hitches not installed by SEAT, the Start- and undamaged attachment rope or straps. Stop function must be deactivated manually Driving with a trailer ● Adjust your speed and driving style to visi- using a button located on the dash panel be- bility, road, traffic and weather conditions. fore driving with a trailer and it must remain ● Introduction off for the entire journey ››› . Trailers with a high centre of gravity can overturn more easily than those with a low centre of gravity. Always be aware of the legal requirements for WARNING each country to drive with a trailer and to use ● Avoid brusque manoeuvres and sudden Never transport people in a trailer: this will a tow hitch. braking. endanger in their life and is against the law. ● Always take the following precautions seri- Your car is intended mainly for transporting ously. passengers however, it can also be used to WARNING ● tow a trailer provided that it is fitted with the Reduce your speed immediately if you observe the trailer rocking from side to side. necessary equipment. The additional load The incorrect use of the tow hitch can cause has an effect on the useful life, fuel con- accidents and injury. ● Never drive at more than 80 km/h (50 mph) sumption and the vehicle performance and, ● Only use a tow hitch in perfect condition when towing a trailer (or 100 km/h [62 mph] in some cases, reduce the service intervals. and correctly installed. in exceptional circumstances). This also applies in countries where higher speeds are ● Never change or repair a tow hitch. Driving with a trailer requires more force from permitted. Always take the speed limits for the vehicle and, thus, more concentration ● To reduce the risk of injury in case of a re- vehicles with and without trailers in each from the driver. versing collision, injury to pedestrians and country into account. cyclists when parking, always keep the ball ● Never try to stop the “snaking” by increas- For wintertime temperatures, fit winter tyres joint in when a trailer is not being used. ing speed. to the vehicle and the trailer. ● Never fit a trailer tow hitch “that distributes the load” or “balances the load”. Your Drawbar load vehicle has not been designed for this type of WARNING The maximum permitted Drawbar load exer- tow hitch. The tow hitch may fail and the When driving with a trailer and using a tow trailer will separate from the vehicle. ted by the trailer drawbar on the ball joint of hitch that was not installed by SEAT, the the tow hitch must not exceed 100 kg (ap- Start-Stop function must be manually deacti- proximately 220 lbs). WARNING vated. Otherwise, this could cause a braking anomaly that could result in an accident with Driving with a trailer and transporting heavy serious consequences. Vehicles with the Start-Stop function or large objects can affect vehicle handling ● Always manually deactivate the Start-Stop and even cause an accident. With a SEAT factory fitted or retrofitted tow function when a trailer is being used on a tow hitch, the Start-Stop function is automatically hitch that has not been installed by SEAT. 234 Towing bracket device

Note Bumper mounted tow hitch trailer, ask a specialised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a technical service. ● Always turn off the anti-theft alarm system Never fit a tow hitch or its attachments to the before connecting or disconnecting a trailer bumper. A tow hitch should never interfere Wing mirrors ››› page 117. Otherwise, the tilt sensor may with the bumper performance. Do not modify erroneously activate the alarm. the exhaust system and brake system. Regu- When the field of vision behind the trailer Technical data Technical ● Never use a trailer with a new engine (for larly check the tow hitch to ensure it is firmly cannot be seen using the standard wing mir- the first 1,000 km or 600 miles) ››› page 244. fitted. rors of the towing vehicle, additional wing ● At SEAT, we recommend folding in the tow mirrors are required according to the legal re- hitch ball when a trailer is not being used. In Engine cooling system quirements of each country. The wing mirrors case of a rear collision, the damage caused to Driving with a trailer increases the load on must be fitted before driving and must pro- Advice the vehicle with the extended tow hitch ball the engine and cooling system. The cooling vide a sufficient field of vision behind. could be more extensive. system should always have sufficient coolant ● In some models, a tow hitch is necessary and to be able to cope with the vehicle and Trailer electricity consumption for towing vehicles. For this reason, you trailer. Never exceed the specifications: should store the tow hitch in the vehicle at all times. Electric trailer brake Devices Maximum power

If the trailer has its own braking system, Side lights and rear lights 50 Watts Operation please note the relevant legal requirements. Technical requirements The trailer braking system should never be Turn signal (each side) 54 Watts connected to the vehicle braking system. If the car is supplied with a factory-fitted tow- Brake lights (total) 84 Watts ing bracket it will already have the necessary Trailer cable Reversing lights (total) 42 Watts technical modifications and meet the statuto- ry requirements for towing a trailer. Always use a cable between the vehicle and Rear fog light 42 Watts the trailer ››› page 237. Emergencies Only use an approved tow hitch for the gross trailer weight rating. The tow hitch must be WARNING Trailer rear lights suitable for both the vehicle and trailer and If the tow hitch is badly fitted or unsuitable, must be securely fitted to the vehicle chassis. The rear lights of a trailer must fulfil the cor- the trailer may separate from the vehicle responding standards ››› page 237. causing an accident with serious consequen-

Only use a tow hitch with a removable ball Safety ces. » joint. Always check and take into account the Never connect the trailer's rear lights directly tow hitch manufacturer's instructions. Never to the vehicle electric system. In case of any fit a trailer tow hitch “that distributes the doubt about the electrical connection of the load” or “balances the load”. 235 Operation

CAUTION Electric tow hitch ball* ● Move the ball joint until it inserts and the button control lamp lights. ● If the rear lights of the trailer are not correctly connected, the vehicle electronics may ● Close the rear lid. be damaged. ● Before hitching the trailer, remove the dust ● If the trailer absorbs excessive electric cur- guard from the ball. rent, the vehicle electronics may be dam- ● The indicator only lights when the boot aged. hatch is open and when a trailer is not hitch- ● Never connect the trailer's electric system ed. to the electrical connections of the rear lights or any other power sources. Only use suitable Restoring the tow ball to its originally posi- connections for providing electric current to tion the trailer. Fig. 229 Right-hand side of the luggage com- ● Stop the vehicle and apply the electric partment: button to electrically release the parking brake. Note tow hitch ball ● Switch the ignition off. ● Towing a trailer places additional demands on the vehicle. At SEAT, we recommend addi- The rotation radius of the tow hitch ball ● Remove the trailer and disconnect the ca- tional services between the normal inspec- should be free of people, animals and ob- ble between the vehicle and trailer. If neces- tion intervals if the vehicle is used frequently jects ››› . sary, remove the power socket adapter. for towing a trailer. ● The towing bracket is located in the bumper. Place the dust guard over the ball. ● In some countries, an additional fire extin- The electric tow ball is fixed and cannot be ● Open the rear lid. guisher is required if the trailer weight is removed. more than 2500 kg ● Press the knob briefly ››› Fig. 229. The tow ball is electronically released; the indicator Releasing and unfolding the tow ball blinks. ● Stop the vehicle and apply the electric ● Push the tow ball into the bumper until it parking brake. locks in position and the button indicator ● Switch the ignition off. lights. ● Open the rear lid. ● Close the rear lid. ● Press the knob briefly ››› Fig. 229. The tow ball is released electronically and folds out automatically; the button indicator will blink.

236 Towing bracket device

The control lamp CAUTION ● Never exceed the load and distances between supports indicated. ● When the control lamp flashes, the tow ball ● If anything is attached to the tow hitch ball, is not in its final position, has not engaged or do not, under any circumstances press the ● Never fit the bicycle carrier to the tow hitch is damaged ››› . button. ball neck, underneath the tow hitch given that the bicycle carrier may be incorrectly fit- ● When the control lamp remains lit and the ● Never direct a high-pressure or steam ted due to the shape of the tow hitch and the data Technical rear lid is open, the tow ball has inserted cor- cleaning system directly at the tow hitch ball model of bicycle carrier. rectly into the folded or deployed position. or trailer power socket. This could cause damage to seals or remove lubricating ● Always read and take the manufacturer as- ● When the rear lid is closed, the indicator is grease. sembly instructions into account. turned off. Advice WARNING Note CAUTION The incorrect use of the tow hitch can cause In extremely low temperatures, it is possible Exceeding the maximum load and distance accidents and injury. that the tow hitch is not released. In this between supports indicated can cause con- case, place the vehicle in a warmer location siderable damage to the vehicle. ● Ensure that no person, animal or object (e.g. a garage). gets in the way of the tow ball. ● Never exceed the specifications. ● Never push the button when there is a tow hitched or when any kind of carrier or acces- Operation sory is fitted to the tow hitch ball. Fitting a bicycle carrier on the mobile Hitching and connecting the trailer ● While the ball is moving, do not interfere tow hitch ball with any tool. The maximum load permitted for a bicycle ● Do not drive with a trailer if the control carrier on the tow hitch ball is 75 kg, with a lamp does not light. maximum distance of 30 cm from the sup-

● If there is a fault in the electric system or port. The distance between supports is the Emergencies the trailer tow hitch, visit a specialised work- distance between the bicycle carrier centre of shop to have it checked. gravity (with the bicycles) and the centre of ● If the diameter of the tow hitch is less than point of the tow hitch ball. 49 mm, never use this for a trailer.

WARNING Safety Fig. 230 Schematic diagram: assignment of The incorrect use of the tow hitch with a bicy- the pins of the trailer's electrical socket. » cle carrier installed can cause accidents and injury.

237 Operation

Key of the Schematic diagram ››› Fig. 230: ment on the trailer will receive voltage ● When the trailer is connected to the vehicle through this connection (pins 9 and 10). Pin using the socket. Pin Meaning 9 has a permanent live. This powers, for ex- ● When the vehicle and trailer electrical sys- ample, the trailer's interior lighting. Electrical 1 Left turn signal tems work correctly and are not damaged. devices such as a fridge in a caravan only re- ● When the vehicle is locked using the vehi- 2 Rear fog light ceive electrical power if the engine is running (through pin 10). cle key and the anti-theft alarm is turned on. 3 Earth, pins 1 to 8 The earth wires, pin 3 and pin 13, should not When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is trig- 4 Right turn signal be connected to each other to avoid over- gered when the electrical connection between the vehicle and the trailer is removed. 5 Rear light, right loading the electrical system. Always turn off the anti-theft alarm system 6 Brake lights If the trailer has a 7-contact connector, you will need to use an adapter cable. In this case before connecting or disconnecting a trailer. 7 Rear light, left the function corresponding to pin 10 will not Otherwise, the tilt sensor may erroneously be available. activate the alarm. 8 Reverse lights

9 Permanent live Trailer cable Trailer with rear LED lights 10 Live charge cable Always secure the trailer cable to the towing For technical reasons, trailers fitted with rear vehicle correctly. Leave a little bit of slack in LED lights cannot be connected to the anti- 11 Unassigned the cable for turning. However, ensure that theft alarm system. 12 Unassigned the cable does not rub off the ground while When the vehicle is locked, the alarm does driving. not trigger if the electrical connection with 13 Earth, pins 9 to 13 the trailer is cut if it has rear light with light- Trailer rear lights emitting diodes. Electrical socket for trailer Check the trailer rear lights to ensure they The vehicle is fitted with a 13-pole power work correctly and remain legal. Ensure that WARNING socket for the electrical connection between the trailer does not use more than the maxi- Erroneous or unsuitable connection of elec- the trailer and the vehicle. With the engine mum power ››› page 235. tric cables may supply energy to the trailer running, electrical devices on the trailer re- causing an anomaly in the vehicle electronics ceive power from the electrical connection Trailer connected to the anti-theft alarm: that could result in an accident with serious (pin 9 and pin 10 on the trailer power plug). consequences. ● When a vehicle comes from the factory fit- If the system detects that a trailer has been ted with an anti-theft alarm and tow hitch. ● All work on the electrical system must be connected electrically, the electrical equip- carried out only by a specialised workshop. 238 Towing bracket device

● Never connect the trailer's electric system Loading the trailer authorised and do not overload the front or to the electrical connections of the rear lights the rear of the trailer: or any other power sources. Trailer weight / drawbar load ● Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy The trailer weight is the load that the vehicle objects are as near to the axle as possible or CAUTION can pull ››› . The drawbar load is the vertical above it. weight of the tow hitch on the tow hitch ball data Technical Do not leave the trailer connected to the vehi- ››› page 242. ● Correctly secure the trailer load. cle when parked; places on its support wheel or its supports. For example, when changing The figures for trailer weights and drawbar Tyre pressure the load or a puncture, the vehicle will be load weights given on the data plate of the pushed up or down. The force acting on the tow hitch are for values of this model only. Inflate the trailer tyres according to the man- Advice tow hitch and the trailer could damage the The correct figures for your specific vehicle, ufacturer's instructions. vehicle or the trailer. which may be lower than these figures for the Inflate the towing vehicles tyres to the maxi- tow hitch, are given in the vehicle documen- mum ››› page 284. Note tation. The instructions in the official vehicle ● In the event of a fault in the vehicle or trail- documents take precedence. WARNING er electrical system or in the event of prob- For the sake of road safety, SEAT recom- Exceeding the maximum authorised axle lems with the anti-theft alarm system, have mends using the maximum allowed drawbar load, drawbar load or the gross combination Operation the system checked by a specialised work- load. The handling of the combined vehicle weight of the towing vehicle and trailer could shop. and trailer will be poor if the drawbar load is cause a serious accident with severe conse- ● If the trailer accessories use energy from too low. quences. the power socket when the engine is stop- ● Never exceed the specifications. ped, the battery will be discharged. The drawbar load increases the weight on the rear axle, reducing the vehicle carrying ca- ● With the actual load on the front and rear ● For technical reasons, trailers fitted with pacity. axles, the maximum axle load should never rear LED lights cannot be connected to the be exceeded. The weight on the front and rear Emergencies anti-theft alarm system. should never exceed the gross vehicle Gross combination weight ● If the vehicle battery is running low, the weight. electrical connection with the trailer is auto- This figure refers to the combined weight of matically cut. the loaded vehicle and loaded trailer. WARNING

● With the engine running, the electrical Safety If the load moves, the stability and safety of equipment on the trailer will be supplied with Loading the trailer the vehicle and trailer combination will be se- power. The combined vehicle and trailer must be riously affected and this could result in a seri- balanced. Use the maximum drawbar load ous accident. »

239 Operation

● Always correctly load the trailer. cause of the increased combined mass of the ● Release the button  only when the en- vehicle and trailer. gine provides sufficient power to move the ● Always secure loads correctly with suitable vehicle and trailer combination. and undamaged attachment rope or straps. ● If the towing vehicle is empty and the trailer loaded then the load distribution is incorrect. If you must travel in these conditions, WARNING drive carefully and reduce your speed accord- Driving with a trailer Jerking the trailer in an unsuitable manner ingly. could cause loss of vehicle control with the subsequent serious consequences. Adjusting the headlights Hill starts with a trailer ● Driving with a trailer and transporting When towing a trailer, the front of the vehicle Depending on the hill and the gross com- heavy or a large objects will change the vehi- may rise and so the dipped beam headlights cle handling and braking distances. may blind other drivers. Use the headlight bined weight, it is possible that the com- ● Anticipate traffic and be extremely cau- range control to lower the cone of light. If you bined vehicle and trailer move backwards tious. Brake early. do not have headlight range control, have slightly when starting. ● Adjust your speed and driving style to visi- the headlights adjusted by a specialised For a hill start with a trailer, proceed as fol- bility, road, traffic and weather conditions. workshop. Vehicles with high-intensity dis- lows: Reduce your speed, especially on steep hills. charge lamps adapt automatically and do not require adjustment. ● Press and hold the brake pedal. ● Accelerate gently and carefully. Avoid brusque manoeuvres and sudden braking. ● Press the button  once to turn off the Things to note when towing a trailer or cara- electric parking brake ››› page 187. ● Always take the following precautions seri- van ously. Reduce your speed immediately if you ● Press and hold the button  to hold the observe the trailer rocking from side to side. ● If the trailer has an overrun brake, apply vehicle and trailer combination using the ● Never try to stop the “snaking” by increas- the brakes gently at first and then, firmly. parking brake. ing speed. This will prevent the jerking that can be ● With a manual gearbox: press the clutch caused by the trailer wheels locking. ● Always take the speed limits for vehicles pedal to the floor. with and without trailers into account. ● As of the combined vehicle and trailer ● Engage first gear or the gear range D mass, braking distances will be greater. ››› page 192, Gearbox. ● Select a low gear before driving down a ● Release the brake pedal. steep hill to use the engine braking effect to ● slow down the vehicle. Otherwise, the brak- Move off slowly. To do this, gently release ing system could overheat and fail. the clutch pedal (for manual gearbox). ● The vehicle centre of gravity and handling change because of the trailer load and be- 240 Towing bracket device

Stabilising the vehicle and trailer ● Adjust your speed and driving style to visi- Retrofitting a tow hitch combination bility, road, traffic and weather conditions. ● If the road surface is slippery, take care Stabilisation of the vehicle and trailer combi- when accelerating. nation is an extension of the electronic sta- ● When a system is operating, lift your foot Technical data Technical bility control (ESC) and helps, with the assis- off the accelerator. tance of the trajectory control, to reduce trailer “snaking”. WARNING Stabilisation of the vehicle and trailer combination is active when the ESC  indicator on It is possible that the combination stabilisa- the dash panel remains lit for about two section system does not correctly recognised all Advice driving situations. onds more than the ABS indicator. ● It is possible that the stabilisation system Requirements for stabilising the vehi- does not detect snaking of a light trailer and thus does not intervene. cle/trailer combination ● When driving on slippery ground, the trail- ● An original tow hitch is fitted by the manu- er could jack-knife despite the stabilisation facturer or a compatible model is retrofitted. system. Operation ● The ESC is switched on. The warning lamp ● Trailers with a high centre of gravity may on the dash panel  is not lit. even tip over before they start to rock side- ● The trailer is connected to the vehicle using ways. the power socket. ● If a trailer is not used and the trailer power ● It travels faster than 60 km/h (37 mph). socket is connected (e.g. installation of a bicycle carrier with lights), repeated automatic

● The maximum drawbar load is used. braking may occur in extreme driving condi- Emergencies ● The trailer must have a fixed drawbar. tions. ● Trailers with brakes must be equipped with Fig. 231 Measurements and attachments to a mechanical inertia brake. retrofit a tow hitch

WARNING SEAT recommends visiting a specialised Safety workshop to retrofit a tow hitch. For example, » Do not let the extra safety afforded by the stabilisation system tempt you into taking any risks when driving. 241 Operation

it may be necessary to adjust the cooling sys- ● Visit a specialised workshop if you wish to CAUTION tem or to include thermal plates. SEAT recom- retrofit a tow hitch to the vehicle. mends taking your car in for technical serv- Exceeding the maximum trailer weight indica- ice. ted could cause damage to the vehicle. WARNING ● Never exceed the indicated trailer weight. In any case, the separation distances must If the tow hitch is badly fitted or unsuitable, be observed when fitting a tow hitch. The dis- the trailer may separate from the vehicle tance between the centre of the tow hitch ball while driving. This could result in a serious Gross combined vehicle weight rating and the road surface ››› Fig. 231 D must nev- accident. er be lower than that indicated. This also ap- The instructions in the official vehicle docu- plies when the vehicle is fully laden, includ- ments take precedence. All the technical data ing maximum drawbar load. Note Use only tow hitches approved by SEAT for provided in this documentation is applicable Separation distances Fig. 231: ››› the vehicle. to the basic model. The vehicle data label in the Maintenance Programme or the vehicle A Attachment points. documentation shows which engine is instal- B 1,040 mm (41 inches) led in your vehicle. Maximum permitted trailer weights C 74 mm (3 inches) The figures may be different depending D 364 mm (14 inches) The instructions in the official vehicle docu- whether additional equipment is fitted, for E 247 mm (10 inches) ments take precedence. All the technical data different models and for special vehicles. provided in this documentation is applicable F 596 mm (23 inches) The maximum combined weights listed are to the basic model. The vehicle data label in only applicable for altitudes up to 1000 m G 1,097 mm (43 inches) the Maintenance Programme or the vehicle above sea level. The weight of the car and H 1,102 mm (43 inches) documentation shows which engine is instal- trailer must be reduced by about 10% for ev- led in your vehicle. ery further 1000 m (or part thereof). WARNING The figures may be different depending Erroneous or unsuitable connection of elec- whether additional equipment is fitted, for WARNING tric cables may cause anomalies in the vehi- different models and for special vehicles. Exceeding the maximum weight indicated cle electronics that could result in an acci- could cause a serious accident. dent with serious consequences. WARNING ● Never exceed the gross combined weight ● Never connect the trailer's electric system Exceeding the maximum trailer weight indica- rating. to the electrical connections of the rear lights ted could cause a serious accident. or any other unsuitable power sources. Only use suitable connectors to connect a trailer. ● Never exceed the indicated trailer weight.

242 Towing bracket device

CAUTION Exceeding the maximum gross combined weight rating indicated could cause damage to the vehicle. ● Never exceed the gross combined weight Technical data Technical rating. Advice Operation Emergencies Safety

243 Advice

Advice ● Only use wheels and tyre combinations en must be approved by SEAT for use in your which have been approved by SEAT for your vehicle and bear the e mark (the European vehicle type. Union's authorisation symbol). This includes Care and maintenance cruise control systems or electronically controlled suspension. Accessories, replacement of Accessories and spare parts If any additional electrical devices are fitted which do not serve to control the vehicle it- parts and modifications SEAT recommends you consult an Official self, these must bear the  mark (European Service before purchasing accessories and Union manufacturer conformity declaration). Introduction spare parts or consumables. For example, This includes refrigerator boxes, laptops or when fitting accessories at a later date, or ventilator fans. WARNING when replacing a component. A technical The use of spare parts and accessories, or in- service centre will advise you as to the legal WARNING requirements and manufacturer's recommen- correctly performed modifications or repairs Unprofessional repairs or modifications to may result in damage to the vehicle, acci- dations regarding accessories, spare parts the vehicle may affect the performance of the dents and serious injury. and other components. airbags, and may cause operating faults or fa- ● SEAT strongly recommends you to only use SEAT recommend you use only approved tal accidents. SEAT approved accessories and SEAT® origi- SEAT accessories and genuine SEAT spare ● Never mount, fasten or fit objects such as nal spare parts. These parts and accessories parts®. These parts and accessories have drink holders or telephone cradles over the have been specially tested by SEAT for suita- been specially tested by SEAT for suitability, covers of the airbag modules or within their bility, reliability and safety. reliability and safety. In addition the techni- radius of action. ● Have any repairs or modifications carried cal service centre will guarantee that the as- ● Objects placed over the airbag covers, or out at a specialised workshop. These work- sembly is carried out professionally. within their radius of action, could lead to se- shops have the necessary tools, diagnostics rious injury or loss of life if the airbags are equipment, repair information and qualified Although we continually monitor the market, triggered. personnel. SEAT cannot guarantee that products not ap- ● Only mount parts with the same specifica- proved by SEAT are reliable, safe and suita- tions as the parts fitted at factory. ble for the vehicle. Therefore, SEAT cannot accept liability, even in those cases authorised Service fluids and components ● Never mount, fasten or fit objects such as by an officially recognised technical inspec- drink holders or telephone cradles over the All vehicle fluids and consumables, such as tion office or other official body. covers of the airbag modules or within their notched belts, tyres, coolant fluids, engine radius of action. Any retro-fitted equipment which has a direct oils, spark plugs and batteries are continual- effect on the vehicle and/or the way it is driv- ly being developed. Therefore all fluids and

244 Care and maintenance consumables should be changed at a speci- effect of the coolant. If the engine is running ly; neither is the SEAT warranty valid in these alised workshop. Technical services are per- under great strain in high outside tempera- cases. manently informed of any modifications. tures, it could overheat. SEAT recommends you have any technical modifications or repairs performed at a tech- WARNING For the sake of the environment nical service centre and that you use genuine The incorrect use or handling of fluids or con- ® data Technical Leaking fluids could pollute the environment. SEAT spare parts . sumables may result in accident, serious in- Collect any spilt fluids in suitable containers jury, burns or intoxication. and dispose of them in accordance with legis- Vehicles with special accessories and equip- ● Therefore, fluids must always be stored lation and with respect for the environment. ment closed in their original container.

The manufacturers of additional equipment Advice ● Never store fluids in empty food containers guarantee that the equipment complies with or bottles as other people may accidentally applicable laws and regulations with respect drink the fluid. Technical repairs and replacements to the environment, in particular Directives ● Keep all fluids and consumables out of When performing repairs and technical mod- 2000/53/CE and 2003/11/CE. The first direc- reach of children. ifications, SEAT's directives must be ob- tive governs the disposal of end-of-life vehi- ● Read and observe the information and served! ››› cles while the second refers to the restric- warnings given on the fluid containers. tions on the marketing and use of certain Unauthorised modifications to the electronic Operation ● dangerous substances and preparations. Only work in the open air or in well-ventila- components or software in the vehicle may ted zones, when using products which give cause malfunctions. Due to the way the elec- The vehicle owner should keep the documen- off harmful vapours. tronic components are linked together in net- tation for the additional equipment safely ● Never use fuel, turpentine, engine oil, ace- works, other indirect systems may be affec- and hand it over to the scrap yard at the end tone or any other volatile liquid in the main- ted by the faults. This may significantly affect of the vehicle's service life. This ensures that tenance of the vehicle. These are toxic and the vehicle's performance, increase compo- any additional equipment mounted in end-of- highly flammable. They could lead to fire or nent wear and could mean that the vehicle life vehicles is correctly disposed of with re- Emergencies explosions! registration documents are no longer valid. spect for the environment. Your technical service centre cannot be held CAUTION WARNING liable for any damage caused by technical ● Only use appropriate fluids. Do not confuse modifications or repairs performed incorrect- Repairs or modifications which are not per- fluids as this can cause serious malfunctions ly. formed correctly may result in damage or er- Safety or engine damage. rors in the vehicle operation, affecting the ef- ● Accessories and other components moun- The technical service centre does not accept fectiveness of the driver assist systems. This ted in front of the air inlet reduce the cooling liability for damage resulting from technical could result in serious accident. » modifications or repairs performed incorrect- 245 Advice

● All repairs and modifications to the vehicle and tyre combinations not approved by SEAT WARNING should only be performed by a specialised are used, or if the vehicle height is lowered, Modifications to the vehicle suspension, in- workshop. the suspension is stiffened or the suspension springs, telescopic arms, dampers, etc., are cluding the use of unauthorised wheel and tyre combinations, may affect the perform- modified, the results received by the airbag ance of the airbags and increase the risk of sensors and sent to the control unit may not Repairs and malfunctions in the air- serious or fatal injury in the event of acci- be accurate. For example, some modifica- dent. bag system tions to the suspension could increase the ● Never fit suspension components which are force measured by the sensors and result in When performing repairs and technical mod- not identical to the original parts in the vehi- the triggering of the airbag systems in colli- ifications, SEAT's directives must be ob- cle. sions. Under normal conditions, the meas- served! ● ››› ured values would be lower and the airbag Never use wheel and tyre combinations not approved by SEAT. Modifications and repairs to the front bump- would not have been triggered. Other modifi- er, doors, front seats, and repairs to the roof cations may reduce the forces measured by or chassis should only be carried out in a the sensors and prevent the airbags from be- specialised workshop. These components ing triggered when they should. Retrofitting of mobile phones may contain parts or sensors belonging to the airbag system. WARNING An exterior aerial is required for the use of two-way radios in the vehicle. If work is carried out on the airbag system or Repairs or modifications which are not per- parts have to be removed and fitted on the formed correctly may result in damage or er- The retro-fitting of electrical or electronic ap- system when performing other repair work, rors in the vehicle operation, affecting the ef- pliances in the vehicle is subject to their ap- parts of the airbag system may be damaged. fectiveness of the airbag systems. This could proval for use in your vehicle. Under certain The consequence may be that, in the event of result in serious or fatal accidents. circumstances, this could mean that your ve- an accident, the airbag inflates incorrectly or ● All repairs and modifications to the vehicle hicle registration documents are no longer does not inflate at all. should only be performed by a specialised valid. workshop. So that the effectiveness of the airbag is not SEAT has approved your vehicle for use with ● Airbag modules must never be repaired: if two-way radios providing the following condi- reduced and that removed parts do not cause damaged, they must be replaced. any injuries or environmental pollution, regu- tions are observed: ● lations must be observed. These require- Never fit recycled or reused airbag components in your vehicle. ● The exterior aerial must be mounted pro- ments are known to specialised workshops. fessionally. Modifications to the vehicle suspension may ● The maximum transmitting power is 10 affect the operation of the airbag system in watts. the event of collision. For example, if wheel 246 Care and maintenance

The optimal reach of the equipment is only Information stored by the control ances connected in the vehicle, it is possible achieved with an external aerial. units to send the vehicle position. If the control unit records an accident with airbag activa- Check first with a specialised workshop that tion, the system may automatically send a understands the technical possibilities of in- Your vehicle is fitted at the factory with a ser- signal. This will depend on the network oper- stallation if you wish to use a two-way radio ies of electronic control units responsible for ator. Normally, transmission is only possible data Technical with a transmitting power of over 10 watts. the engine and gearbox management. In ad- in areas with good coverage. SEAT recommends taking your car in for tech- dition, the control units supervise the per- nical service. formance of the exhaust gas system and the airbag systems. Event Data Recorder All legal requirements, together with the in- Therefore, while the vehicle is being driven, The vehicle is not fitted with an event data re- structions for the use of two-way radios must Advice corder. be observed. these electronic control units are continuously analysing the vehicle data. In the event of An event data recorder temporarily stores the WARNING faults or deviations from the theoretical val- vehicle information. Therefore, in the event of ues, only this data is stored. Normally, the an accident, it is possible to obtain detailed If the two-way radio is not securely fastened warning lamps on the instrument panel light information about how the accident occur- in position, it could be sent flying around the up in the event of faults. vehicle in the event of sharp braking, sudden red. For example, in vehicles with airbag systems, data relating to speed of impact, seat manoeuvres or accident, causing injury. This data can only be read and analysed us- Operation belt status, seat positions and airbag activa- ● While driving, two-way radios must be se- ing special equipment. curely fastened in position, outside the radi- tion times may be stored. The volume of data The storing of the data allows specialised depends on the manufacturer. us of action of the airbags, or safely stowed workshops to detect and repair faults. Stored away. data may include: Event data recorders can only be mounted with authorisation from the vehicle owner WARNING ● Data relating to the engine or the gearbox and, in some countries, they are governed by local legislation. Emergencies When using a two-way radio without a con- ● Speed nection to an exterior aerial, the maximum ● Direction of travel permitted levels of electromagnetic radiation Reprogramming control units ● Braking force may be exceeded. This is also the case if the On the whole, all the data required for the aerial has not been correctly installed. ● Detection of seat belt component management is stored in the con- ● Safety You should only use a two-way radio inside The vehicle control units never record conver- trol units. The programming of certain con- the vehicle if it has first been correctly con- sations held by passengers in the vehicle. venience functions, such as the turn signals, nected to an exterior aerial. individual door opening and instructions on In vehicles equipped with an emergency call the display can be modified using special » function via the mobile phone or other appli- 247 Advice

equipment at the workshop. If this is the and authorities have established limits and If the mobile phone is connected to an aerial case, the information and descriptions given directives in order to ensure electromagnetic incorporated into the vehicle or an exterior in the Instruction Manual will not match the radiation from mobile phones remains within aerial connected to the vehicle, it will help re- original functions. Therefore, SEAT recom- certain limits that do not endanger health. duce the electromagnetic radiation transmit- mends that any modifications be recorded in Nevertheless, there is no conclusive scientif- ted and the risk to human health. It will also the section “Other workshop notes” in the ic evidence that wireless telephones are to- improve the quality of the connection. Maintenance Programme. tally safe. If the phone is used inside the vehicle with- The technical service centre must have a re- Therefore, some experts recommend that use out the hands-free system, it will not be se- cord of any modification to the programming. of mobile phone be kept to a minimum until curely fastened and will not be connected to the results of current research are published. the exterior aerial of the vehicle telephone. Nor will the telephone charge if it is not on Reading the vehicle fault memory When a mobile phone not connected to an the support. In addition, some calls may There is a diagnostics connector in the vehi- exterior aerial is used inside the vehicle, the break off and the quality of the connection cle interior for reading the vehicle fault mem- electromagnetic radiation may be greater will be affected. ory. The fault memory documents errors and than if the mobile phone were connected to a deviations from the theoretical values of the built-in aerial or to another exterior aerial. Mobile phones should only be used inside electronic control units. the vehicle if they are connected to a hands- If the vehicle is fitted with a suitable hands- free system with an exterior aerial. The diagnostics connector is in the driver free device, it will comply with the legislation side footwell area, next to the lever for open- in many countries which only permits the use WARNING ing the bonnet, below a cover. of mobile phones inside vehicles using a hands-free device. If the mobile phone is not securely fastened The fault memory should only be read and re- in position, it could be sent flying around the set by a specialised workshop. The hands-free system mounted at the facto- vehicle in the event of sharp braking, sudden ry has been designed for use with conven- manoeuvres or accident, causing injury. tional mobile phones and phones with Blue- ● While driving, mobile phones must be se- Using a mobile telephone in a vehicle tooth technology. Mobile phones should be curely fastened in position, outside the radi- without connection to an exterior aer- placed on a suitable phone cradle. In addi- us of action of the airbags, or safely stowed ial tion, the cradle should always be correctly fit- away. ted into the base plate. This ensures that the mobile phone is securely attached to the Mobile telephones transmit and receive radio WARNING waves, both when in use and when on stand- dash panel, it is always within reach of the by. Scientific studies state that radio waves driver and is connected to the vehicle exterior When using a mobile phone without a connection to an exterior aerial, the maximum exceeding certain values may be harmful to aerial. permitted levels of electromagnetic radiation the human body. International committees 248 Care and maintenance may be exceeded. This is also the case if the WARNING aerial has not been correctly installed. The improper use of the lifting platform or ● A minimum of 20 centimetres should be the jack when raising the vehicle may result kept between mobile phone aerials and artifi- in accidents or serious injury. cial pacemakers, as mobile telephones may ● Before raising the vehicle, please observe affect the working of pacemakers. data Technical the manufacturer's instructions for the plat- ● Do not keep mobile phones in breast pock- form or jack, and the legal requirements, ets directly above pacemakers. where applicable. ● Switch off the mobile phone immediately if ● There should not be anyone inside the ve- you suspect there may be interference. hicle when it is being raised or once it is in Fig. 233 Rear jacking points for raising vehi- the air. Advice cle with lifting platform or jack ● Only use the jacking points indicated in the figures ››› Fig. 232 and ››› Fig. 233 when rais- Support points for raising the vehicle Always use the jacking points indicated in ing the vehicle. If the vehicle is not lifted at the figures ››› Fig. 232 and ››› Fig. 233 when the indicated points, it may fall from the plat- raising the vehicle. If the vehicle is not lifted form while the engine or gearbox is being at these points, it could be seriously dam- dismounted, for example.

aged or lead to serious injury . Operation ››› ››› ● The jacking points should be centrally The vehicle should not be lifted using lifting aligned and firmly positioned on the platform platforms with lift pads containing fluid. support plates. ● Never start the engine when the vehicle is When raising a vehicle using a platform or raised! The vehicle may fall from the platform jack, a series of precautionary measures are due to the engine vibrations. required. Do not raise the vehicle with a lift- ● If it is necessary to work underneath the ve- ing platform or jack unless you have received Emergencies hicle while it is raised, you should check that Fig. 232 Front jacking points for raising vehi- training in how to do so and know how to do the supporting stands have an adequate load cle with lifting platform or jack so safely. capacity. Notes on raising the vehicle with a jack ● Never climb onto the lifting platform. . ›››  page 47 ● Always make sure that the weight of the ve- Safety hicle does not exceed the lifting platform load capacity. »

249 Advice

CAUTION ● Car care products must always be stored in CAUTION the original container which should be kept ● Never raise the vehicle at the engine oil Cleaning products which contain solvents will closed. sump, the gearbox or the rear or front axles. damage the material. ● Observe information provided by the manu- ● Always use an intermediate rubber support facturer. to prevent damage to the vehicle underbody. For the sake of the environment Check that the arms of the lifting platform are ● To prevent confusion, never store car care able to move with obstruction. products in empty food cans, bottles or other ● Only wash the vehicle in areas allocated for this purpose, to prevent dirty water which ● containers. The arms should not come into contact with may be contaminated by oil, grease or fuel, ● Keep all care products out of reach of chil- the side running boards or other parts of the from entering the drains. In some places, dren. vehicle. washing it outside the planned areas is even ● Harmful vapours may be produced when us- banned. ing car care products. Therefore, care prod- ● Where possible, always use products which ucts should only be used in well-ventilated respect the environment. Caring for and cleaning the ve- spaces or in the open air. ● The remains of car care products should not ● Never use fuel, turpentine, engine oil, ace- hicle exterior be disposed of with ordinary household tone or any other volatile liquid to wash, waste. Observe information provided by the clean or care for the vehicle. These are toxic Introduction manufacturer. and highly flammable. Regular maintenance and washing help to of the vehicle. This may WARNING maintain the value Washing the vehicle also be one of the requirements for acknowl- Inappropriate care and cleaning of vehicle edging warranty claims in the event of body- components may effect the vehicle safety The longer substances such as insects, bird work corrosion or paint defects. equipment, increasing the risk of severe in- droppings, resinous tree sap, road dirt, in- Products suitable for the care of your vehicle jury. dustrial deposits, tar, soot or road salt and are available at any technical service. ● Vehicle components should only be other aggressive materials remain on the ve- cleaned and maintained in accordance with hicle, the more damage they do to the paint- WARNING the manufacturer's instructions. work. High temperatures (for instance due to ● Only use approved or recommended care strong sunlight) further intensify the corro- Car-care products may be toxic and hazard- products. ous. If car care products are not suitable or sive effect. The vehicle undercarriage should are used inappropriately, this could result in also be thoroughly washed at regular inter- accident, serious injury, burns or intoxica- vals. tion.

250 Care and maintenance

Automatic car washes Rinse the sponge or glove thoroughly and of- ● Never wipe the headlights with a dry cloth Always observe the instructions provided at ten. or sponge, always moisten first. It is best to the automatic car wash. The standard pre- Wheels, sills and similar should be cleaned use soapy water. cautionary measures prior to entering the car last. Use a second sponge for this. ● Washing the vehicle in low temperatures: wash should be taken to avoid damage to When washing the vehicle with a hose, do the vehicle (close all windows, fold in exterior WARNING not direct water into the lock cylinders or the data Technical mirrors). If the vehicle is fitted with additional gaps around the doors or roof. Locks and Sharp components on the vehicle may cause components (spoiler, roof-rack, aerial, etc.), seals could freeze! injury. check with the car wash supervisor whether ● Protect arms and hands from sharp edges these can enter the car wash ››› . CAUTION

when cleaning the vehicle undercarriage or Advice The vehicle paintwork is so durable that the the interior of the wheel hubs. To avoid any risk of damage to the vehicle, vehicle can normally be washed without please check the following points before using an automatic car wash: problems in an automatic car wash tunnel. WARNING However, wear and damage to the paintwork ● Compare the distance between the vehicle will depend on the type of car wash used. After the vehicle has been washed, the brak- wheels and the distance between the guide- SEAT recommends the use of car washes ing effect will be reduced (and the braking rails of the car wash to prevent damage to the without brushes. distance increased) due to moisture (and ice wheels and tyres! in winter) on the brakes. Operation ● To remove traces of wax on windows and to Switch off the rain sensor and the Au- ● “Dry the brakes and remove ice” by braking to Hold function before entering a car wash. prevent wiper blades from scratching, please carefully. Ensure that you are not endanger- ● Compare the height and width of your vehi- observe the following ››› page 252, Cleaning ing other road-users or breaking traffic regu- cle with the available height and width when windows and exterior mirrors. lations in the process. entering and driving through the car wash. ● Fold in exterior mirrors Electrically retracta- Washing the car by hand CAUTION

ble exterior mirrors must not be folded in or Emergencies When washing the car by hand, use plenty of ● The temperature of the water must not ex- out by hand. Always use the electrical power water to soften the dirt first, and rinse off as ceed +60°C (+140°F). control. well as possible. ● To avoid damage to the paintwork, do not ● To avoid damaging the bonnet paintwork, Then clean the vehicle with a soft sponge, wash the vehicle in full sun. rest the wipers on the windscreen after dry- or using only slight pressure. ing them. Do not let them fall! glove brush ● Do not use rough sponges or similar which Safety Start at the roof and work downwards. Spe- could damage the surface to clean away the ● Lock the rear lid to prevent it from opening cial car shampoo should only be used for traces of insects. unexpectedly while inside the car wash. very persistent dirt.

251 Advice

Washing the vehicle with a high pres- WARNING Stickers attached by the factory sure cleaner After the vehicle has been washed, the brak- Follow these directions to avoid damaging ing effect will be reduced (and the braking the stickers: When cleaning the vehicle with a high-pres- distance increased) due to moisture (and ice sure cleaner, always follow the operating in- in winter) on the brakes. ● Do not use high pressure cleaners. structions for the equipment. Pay special at- ● “Dry the brakes and remove ice” by braking tention to the required pressure of the jet ● To remove ice or snow from the stickers do carefully. Ensure that you are not endanger- not use window scrapers or ice scrapers. and the distance between the jet and the ve- ing other road-users or breaking traffic regu- hicle ››› . lations in the process. ● Do not polish the stickers. Keep a suitable distance from soft materials, ● Do not use dirty cloths or sponges. such as rubber hoses or insulating material, CAUTION ● Preferably wash using a soft sponge and and from the parking distance warning sys- ● soft neutral soap. tem sensors. The parking distance sensors The water temperature should not exceed +60°C (+140°F). are fitted in the rear bumpers and, where applicable, in the front bumpers ››› . ● To avoid damage to the paintwork, do not wash the vehicle in full sun. Cleaning windows and exterior mir- Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water out ● The sensors on the bumpers should be kept rors in a direct stream or one that has a rotating clean and free of ice at all times to ensure the jet for forcing off dirt ››› . parking distance warning system and the Cleaning windows and exterior mirrors park assist system operate correctly. When Spray windows and exterior windows with a WARNING cleaning with pressure hoses and steam standard window cleaner containing alcohol. The incorrect use of high pressure cleaning cleaners, the sensors should be sprayed only equipment could result in permanent dam- briefly. A distance of 10 cm between the sen- Dry the windows with a clean chamois leath- age, visible or invisible, to the tyres or other sors and the steam / hose nozzle must be ob- er or a lint-free cloth. The chamois leathers materials. This could result in a serious acci- served. used on painted surfaces are not suitable for dent. ● Do not use a high pressure cleaner to re- cleaning windows because they are soiled ● Ensure there is a suitable distance between move ice or snow from windows with wax deposits which could smear the the nozzle and the tyres. ● Washing the vehicle in low temperatures: windows. ● Never wash tyres with a concentrated jet or When washing the vehicle with a hose, do Use window cleaner or a silicone remover to so-called “dirt blasters”. Even at large spray- not direct water into the lock cylinders or the clean rubber, oil, grease and silicone depos- ing distances and short cleaning times, you gaps around the doors or roof. Locks and its off ››› . may damage the tyres. seals could freeze!

252 Care and maintenance

Removing wax residue ● Window cloths G 052 522 A1 for all win- ● The heating element for the rear window is Automatic car washes and certain car care dows and exterior mirrors. located on the inner side of the window. Do products may leave wax deposits on the win- not stick adhesive labels over the heating el- dows. These deposits can only be removed Removing snow ements and never clean the inside of the rear with a special product or cleaning cloths. Use a small brush to remove snow from the window with corrosive or acid products or

other similar chemical cleaning products. data Technical Wax deposits on the windscreen could cause windows and exterior mirrors. the wiper blades to judder. SEAT recom- ● Aerials on the inside of windows may be mends you wipe the wax deposits off the Removing ice damaged if knocked or if cleaned with corro- windscreen with a soft cloth each time after sive or acid cleaning products. Do not stick If possible, use a de-icing spray to remove you have washed the vehicle. adhesive labels over the heating elements

ice. If you use an ice scraper, push it in one and never clean the inside of the rear window Advice A window cleaning detergent which helps to direction only without swinging it. If you pull with corrosive or acid products or other simi- dissolve the wax may be added to the wind- the scraper backwards, the dirt may scratch lar chemical cleaning products. screen washer fluid to prevent the wiper the window. blades from scratching the windscreen. Please ensure you add the cleaning product WARNING Caring for and polishing the vehicle in the correct proportions. Products for re- Dirty or misted windows reduce visibility in paintwork moving grease do not eliminate the wax de- all directions and increase the risk of acci- Operation posits ››› . dent and serious injury. Waxing Special cleaning products or window cloths ● Do not drive unless you have good visibility Regular waxing protects the paintwork. It is are available at any technical service. To re- through all windows! time to apply a good coat of wax when water move wax deposits, SEAT recommends the ● Remove ice and snow from the windows no longer forms droplets and rolls off the following products: and demist inside and out. clean paintwork.

● For the hottest time of the year: the Even if a wax solution is used regularly in the Emergencies G 052 184 A1 window cleaner for summer CAUTION automatic car wash, SEAT recommends pro- use. Proportion 1:100 (1 part detergent, ● Never mix our cleaning products with other tecting the paint with a hard wax coating at 100 parts water) in the windscreen washer products not recommended by SEAT in the least twice a year. reservoir. windscreen washer reservoir. This could lead to flocculation and may block the windscreen Polishing

● All year round: the window cleaner Safety washer jets. G 052 164 A2; proportion 1:2 in windscreen Polishing is only necessary if the paint has washer bottle (1 part concentrate, 2 parts wa- ● Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice lost its shine, and the gloss cannot be ter) in winter, down to -18°C (-0.4°F), or 1:4, or snow from the windows and exterior mir- brought back by applying wax. » during the rest of the year. rors. The glass could crack! 253 Advice

If the polish does not contain wax, a wax Caring for and cleaning anodized sur- Any damage to the paint on steel wheels product should be applied after polishing. faces should be touched up before the metal starts to rust. CAUTION It is not easy to detect the difference between ● To prevent damage, car polish or hard wax aluminium and an anodized surface, for ex- Caring for and cleaning alloy wheels should not be used on components painted in ample, a radiator grille. However, anodized Remove road salt and brake dust by washing matt paint, plastic components and the glass surfaces must not be treated in the same way the wheels approximately once a fortnight. headlamp and tail light covers. as aluminium surfaces. Never use rough Use an acid free detergent to clean the wheel ● Do not polish the paintwork if it is dirty, ap- sponges or cloths to wipe away insect re- rims. SEAT recommends treating the wheels ply polish in dusty or sandy zones. mains. thoroughly with a wax compound about once ● Use a clean, damp, lint-free cloth to clean every three months. anodized surfaces. It is important to remove road salt and brake Cleaning chrome parts ● If there is a lot of dirt, use a special clean- dust by washing the wheels at regular inter- ing product which does not contain . vals, otherwise the finish will be impaired. Clean chrome parts with a damp cloth. SEAT solvents recommends the use of a chrome care prod- Always use an acid-free detergent for alloy uct to clean stains and dirt from chrome sur- CAUTION wheel rims. Car polish or other abrasive faces. Use a soft dry cloth to polish chrome To prevent damage to the anodized surfaces: agents should not be used for maintaining parts. ● Do not use products containing solvents. the rims. ● Do not use polish or hard wax. If the protective coating on the paint has CAUTION ● Do not use abrasive products. been damaged (e.g. hit by a stone), it should To prevent scratching chrome surfaces: be repaired immediately. ● Do not polish anodized surfaces in sandy or ● Do not use abrasive products. dusty environments. ● Do not clean or polish chrome parts in a ● Do not polish dirty surfaces. sandy or dusty environment. Caring for rubber seals ● Do not polish dirty surfaces. The rubber seals on doors, windows, etc., re- Cleaning wheels main flexible, provide a better seal and last longer if they are regularly treated with a Cleaning steel wheels product specifically designed for use on rub- Use an industrial cleaner to remove brake ber. dust. Therefore, clean wheels regularly with a separate sponge. 254 Care and maintenance

Before applying the product, use a soft cloth ● Do not apply additional underseal or anti- Leaves and other loose objects should be to remove dust and dirt from the rubber corrosion products to the exhaust pipes, cat- regularly cleaned away from the water box ei- seals. alytic converters, heat shields or other parts ther by hand or with a vacuum. of the vehicle which reach high temperatures. WARNING

De-icing the door lock cylinder When working on the engine or in the engine data Technical Cleaning the engine compartment compartment, there is a risk of injury, burns, To de-ice the lock cylinders, SEAT recommend accident or fire. the use of genuine SEAT spray with lubricat- The engine compartment of any motor vehi- ● Before starting work, please ensure you are ing and anti-corrosive properties. cle is a potentially hazardous area familiar with the required procedure and the ››› page 268. safety precautions ››› page 268. Advice CAUTION The engine compartment should only be ● SEAT recommends getting a specialised The use of products containing degreasing cleaned by qualified personnel. If it is not workshop to do these jobs. agents to de-ice the locks may rust the lock correctly cleaned, the anti-corrosion coating cylinder. and consequently electrical components may CAUTION be damaged. Moreover, water may filter di- If water is manually poured into the water box rectly into the vehicle interior through the wa- (e.g. using a high pressure cleaning appli- Operation Protection of vehicle undercarriage ter chamber ››› . ance), this could cause significant damage to the vehicle. The vehicle underbody is coated to protect it If the engine compartment is very dirty, al- from chemical and mechanical damage. The ways take the vehicle to a specialised work- protective coat on the undercarriage may shop for professional cleaning. SEAT recom- For the sake of the environment mends taking your car in for technical serv- wear from use while driving. Therefore, SEAT Only wash the engine compartment in areas recommends that the protective coating on ice. allocated for this purpose, to prevent dirty the undercarriage and on the running gear water which may be contaminated by oil, Emergencies should be regularly checked, and repaired if Water box grease or fuel, from entering the drains. In necessary. The water box is in the engine compartment, some places, washing this compartment out- between the windscreen and the engine, and side the planned areas is even banned. WARNING beneath a perforated cover. Air is taken in Additional underseal or anti-corrosion prod- through the water box from outside to the ve- Safety ucts could catch fire due to the high tempera- hicle interior via the heating and air condi- tures reached by the exhaust gas system and tioner. other engine components.

255 Advice

Caring for and cleaning the ve- ● Keep all car-care products out of the reach How to care for the upholstery of children. hicle interior To treat and maintain your seat upholstery, ● Some products may give off harmful vapours during use. Therefore, they should be keep the following in mind ››› : Introduction used outdoors in well-ventilated places. ● Before entering the vehicle, close any Vel- The dye used in many modern garments, for ● Never use fuel, turpentine, engine oil, nail- cro fasteners that might snag on the uphols- example dark jeans, is not always sufficiently varnish remover or any other volatile product tery or trim fabric. Any open Velcro fasteners colour-fast. Seat upholstery (material and for washing, maintenance or cleaning. These may damage the trim or upholstery fabrics. are toxic and highly flammable. leather), especially when light-coloured, may ● To prevent damage, avoid direct contact visibly discolour if the dye comes out of between sharp decorative objects and the clothing (even when used correctly). This is WARNING upholstery and trim fabrics. Decorative ob- not an upholstery defect but indicates that Unsuitable maintenance and cleaning of vehi- jects include zips, rivets and rhinestones on the dye in the item of clothing is not suffi- cle components may impair proper operation clothing and belts. ciently colour-fast. of safety equipment and cause serious injury. ● From time to time, clean the dust that gath- The longer stains or dirt remain on the vehi- ● Maintain and clean vehicle components ac- ers in the perforations, folds and seams so cle surfaces, especially the fabrics covering cording to the manufacturer's instructions. that the surfaces of the seats are not dam- the padded upholstery, the more difficult it ● Only use approved or recommended clean- aged by its abrasive effect. becomes to clean and maintain them. If ing products. ● Make sure clothes are colour-fast to avoid stains and dirt are left for a long time, it may them running and staining the upholstery. be that they are impossible to remove. CAUTION This is especially important if the upholstery ● is light in colour. WARNING Cleaning products which contain solvents have a corrosive effect and may damage the Car-care products may be toxic and hazard- material irreparably. CAUTION ous. Using unsuitable car-care products or, ● Stains and dirt containing aggressive sub- If you ignore this advice, which is important using them in the wrong way, may cause acci- stances or solvents attack the material and for maintaining your seat upholstery, the fab- dents, serious injury, burns or intoxication. may damage it irreparably, even when they ric may be damaged or stained. ● Keep your car-care products in their origi- are cleaned quickly. nal containers. ● Dirt and stains should not be allowed to dry Note ● Read the instructions. and should be cleaned as quickly as possible. SEAT recommends you take the vehicle to a ● Never keep car-care products in empty food ● In the case of stubborn stains, take the ve- specialised workshop to treat any stains on containers, bottles or other similar contain- hicle to a specialised workshop to avoid dam- the upholstery caused by the discolouration ers. Other people may confuse them. age. of clothing. 256 Care and maintenance

Cleaning the trim and seat fabrics, the ● If in doubt, take the vehicle to a professio- Stain removal Alcantara® nal cleaning company. When removing stains, it may be necessary to clean the whole surface and not just the Cleaning the upholstery on heated seats and Cleaning the upholstery on non-heated seats stain itself. Especially if the surface has been electrically operated seats or seats with air- and non-electrically operated seats or seats dirtied through normal use. If you only clean bag components without airbag components the stained area, that part may then look data Technical It is possible that there are important airbag ● Before using any cleaning products, con- lighter than the rest. If in doubt, take the ve- components and electrical connections in- sult and keep in mind the instructions of use, hicle to a professional cleaning company. side the driver seat, passenger seat and pos- indications and warnings on the container. sibly the outer rear seats. If these seats and ● Use a vacuum cleaner (with the brush at- WARNING Advice seat backrests are damaged, or are cleaned tachment) on the trim and seat fabrics, the If there is a fault in the airbag system, it is and are treated incorrectly, or if they get wet, Alcantara® upholstery of the seats and the likely that the airbag will not deploy correct- the vehicle electric system may be destroyed carpet. ly, not deploy at all, or do so unexpectedly, and the airbag system damaged ››› . which could cause serious or fatal injuries. ● Do not use high-pressure or steam cleaning Electric and heated seats contain compo- equipment or cold aerosols. ● Have the system checked immediately by a specialised workshop. nents and electrical connections that may be ● For general cleaning, use a soft sponge or damaged if the seats are cleaned or incor- an ordinary lint-free microfibre cloth ››› . Operation rectly treated . Similarly, damage might ››› ® CAUTION be caused at other points in the vehicle's ● Clean Alcantara surfaces with a slightly If the upholstery on electrically operated electric system. damp cotton or woollen cloth, or a standard lint-free microfibre cloth ››› . seats or seats with airbag components gets For this reason, bear the following indica- soaked, the vehicle's electric system and cer- tions in mind for cleaning: If the dirt on the trim and upholstery fabrics tain other components may be damaged. is only superficial, you can use a standard ● If the seat gets soaked, take the vehicle im-

● Do not use high-pressure or steam cleaning foam cleaner. mediately to a specialised workshop to be Emergencies equipment or cold aerosols. dried and for the system components to be If the upholstery and trim are very dirty, be- inspected. ● Do not use cream detergents or detergent- fore cleaning them we recommend you find ● based solutions for delicate garments. out about the most suitable cleaning options Do not use steam cleaning equipment as the dirt becomes more encrusted and fixed in ● Prevent the fabric from getting wet at all from a professional cleaning company. If nec-

the material. Safety times. essary, the cleaning should be carried out by ● High-pressure cleaning equipment and cold ● a specialised company. Only use cleaning products approved by aerosols may damage the upholstery. » SEAT.

257 Advice

CAUTION ● After cleaning, regularly apply a condition- Before cleaning the leather upholstery, bear er with sun-screen and impregnating action. in mind the following recommendations ● Brushes should only be used to clean the These products nourish the leather, soften it ››› page 257, Cleaning the upholstery on carpet and floor mats! Other fabrics may be and make it more breathable, as well as re- heated seats and electrically operated seats damaged if cleaned with a brush. hydrating it. They also provide it with a pro- or seats with airbag components. ● If cream detergents or detergents for deli- tective film. cate garments are applied with a damp cloth CAUTION or sponge, they may, for example, leave rings ● Clean the leather every 2 or 3 months and when dry because of the surfactant compo- remove stains as they appear. ● On no account use solvents, wax polish, nents they contain. Generally, such rings are ● Treat the leather every 6 months with a shoe cream, stain removers or similar materi- very difficult or almost impossible to remove. suitable maintenance product. als on leather. ● If the stain remains on the leather for long, ● Apply as few cleaning and maintenance it will soak in and be impossible to remove. CAUTION products as possible, always using a dry, lint- ● In the event of spilt liquids, dry immediate- ● Do not let water soak into Alcantara® under free cotton or woollen cloth. Do not apply ly with an absorbent cloth to prevent the liq- any circumstances. cleaning and maintenance products directly uid penetrating through the leather or seams. ● Do not use leather cleaning products, sol- to the leather. ● If the vehicle is left standing in the sun for vents, wax polish, shoe cream, stain remov- ● Remove recent ball-point pen and ink long periods, the leather should be protected ers or similar products on Alcantara®. stains, lipstick, shoe cream and similar against direct sunlight to prevent it from fad- ● Never use brushes for cleaning damp mate- stains as soon as possible. ing. rial as they could damage the surface. ● Maintain the colour of the leather. To do this, use a special cream especially coloured Note for leather to achieve the same overall colour, Cleaning and maintenance of natural if necessary. The leather will usually change colour slightly with use. leather upholstery ● Afterwards, go over it with a soft cloth.

Consult a professional cleaning workshop if Cleaning the vehicle you have any doubts on cleaning and main- Cleaning synthetic leather upholstery SEAT recommends using a slightly damp cot- taining the leather equipment in your vehicle. ton or woollen cloth for general cleaning pur- Before cleaning synthetic leather upholstery, poses. Maintenance and treatment bear in mind the following recommendations Generally, the leather should never be ››› page 257, Cleaning the upholstery on Nappa natural leather is delicate because it heated seats and electrically operated seats has no additional protective layer. soaked at any point, nor should water pene- trate the seams. or seats with airbag components

258 Care and maintenance

Only use water and neutral cleaning products Care and cleaning of plastic parts, ● Pull the seat belt right out and leave it out. to clean synthetic leather upholstery. wooden trim and the instrument pan- ● Clean dirty seat belts with a gentle soap el and water solution. CAUTION ● Wait until they are completely dry. Do not use solvents, floor wax, shoe cream, ● Use a clean, damp, lint-free cloth to clean

● data Technical stain removers or similar products on syn- parts. Only allow the seat belt to retract when it is completely dry. thetic leather. These will stiffen the material, ● Clean plastic parts (inside and outside the causing it to crack prematurely. vehicle) and the dash panel with a special WARNING solvent-free product for the care and cleaning of plastic, approved by SEAT ››› . Check the condition of all the seat belts at Cleaning storage compartments, regular intervals. If the webbing or other Advice ● Wash wooden trims with a mild soap and parts of the belt are damaged, the vehicle drinks holders and ashtrays water solution. should be taken to a specialised workshop immediately and the belts should be re- Cleaning storage compartments and drinks WARNING placed. It is extremely dangerous to drive us- holders ing damaged seat belts and could result in Solvents cause the surfaces of the airbag serious injury or loss of life. Some storage compartments and drinks modules to become porous. If an airbag is ac- holders have a removable rubber mat. ● cidentally triggered, the detachment of plas- Seat belts and their components must nev- Operation tic parts could cause serious injury. er be cleaned with chemical products, nor ● Use a clean, damp, lint-free cloth to clean should they be allowed to come into contact ● Never clean the dash panel and the surfa- parts. with corrosive liquids, solvents or sharp ob- ces of the airbag modules with cleaners con- jects. This could affect the strength of the ● If this does not provide satisfactory results, taining solvents. we recommend using a special solvent-free seat belt webbing. plastic cleaning product. ● Seat belts should be completely dry before retracting. Damp could damage the belt re- Cleaning seatbelts Emergencies Cleaning the ashtray tractor so that it is does not operate correctly. ● Extract the ashtray and empty it. If the seat belt is very dirty, the belt retractor ● Do not allow liquids or foreign bodies to en- may not work correctly thus preventing the ● Clean the ashtray with a dishcloth. ter the buckle fastenings. This could damage seat belt from operating correctly. the buckles and seat belts.

Use a toothpick or similar to remove ash from Safety The seat belts should never be removed from ● the area where cigarettes are stubbed out. Never attempt to repair, modify or remove a the vehicle for cleaning. seat belt yourself. ● Always have damaged seatbelts replaced ● Use a soft brush to remove the worst dirt immediately by seat belts approved for the » ››› . 259 Advice

vehicle in question by SEAT. Seat belts which time of manufacture. It may also give the the radio or navigation system supplied at have been worn in an accident and stretched month and year of manufacture, together the factory does not work in another country. must be replaced by a specialised workshop. with the chassis number. Renewal may be necessary even if there is no CAUTION apparent damage. The belt anchorage should Warning of high voltage label* ● SEAT does not accept liability for any dam- also be checked. There is a label close to the bonnet lock age to the vehicle due to the use of a lower which warns of high voltage in the vehicle's quality fuel, an inadequate service or the electrical system. The vehicle ignition system non-availability of genuine spare parts. Notes for the user complies with several standards, including ● SEAT does not accept liability if the vehicle the Canadian standard, ICES-002. does not comply in part or in full with the legal requirements of other countries or conti- Labels and plates nents. Some parts in the engine compartment come Using your vehicle in other countries from the factory with certificates of safety, la- and continents bels or plates containing important informa- Radio and antenna reception tion regarding the operation of the vehicle, The vehicle is manufactured at the factory for for example, on the fuel tank flap, on the pas- use in a particular country in accordance with The aerial of radio and navigation systems senger's sun visor, on the driver door strut, or the national legislation in force at the time of fitted at the factory may be mounted in differ- on the floor of the boot. manufacture. ent parts of the vehicle: ● ● Never remove these certificates of safety, If the vehicle is sold in another country or On the inside of the rear window, next to labels or plates, and ensure they are kept in used in another country for an extended peri- the rear window heating, good condition and are legible. od of time, the applicable legislation of that ● on the inside of the rear side windows, country should be observed. ● If a vehicle part, bearing a certificate of ● on the inside of the windscreen, safety, label or plate, is replaced, the special- It may be necessary to fit or remove certain ● on the roof of the vehicle. ised workshop should attach the information pieces of equipment or to deactivate certain back in the same place. functions. Service work may also be affected. Aerials mounted on the inside of a window This is particularly true if the vehicle is used can be recognised by the fine wires. Certificate of safety in a different climate for an extended period of time. CAUTION A certificate of safety on the door strut states that all the safety standards and regulations As there are different types of frequency Aerials on the inside of windows may be dam- established by the national traffic authorities bands around the world, you may find that aged if knocked or if cleaned with corrosive or responsible for road safety were met at the acid cleaning products. Do not stick adhesive 260 Checking and refilling levels

labels over the heating elements and never the environmentally friendly scrapping of the Checking and refilling levels clean the inside of the rear window with cor- vehicle in accordance with applicable legislation. rosive or acid products or other similar chem- Filling the tank ical products. We will collect the used vehicle free of charge, provided it complies with all national Introduction data Technical Note legislation. If electrical equipment is used near an aerial Please see your technical service for further The fuel tank flap is on the rear right of the built-into the window, you may observe inter- information about the collection and scrap- vehicle. ference in the reception of AM stations. ping of end-of-life vehicles.

WARNING Advice Scrapping Refuelling or handling fuel carelessly can Notes on SEAT repairs The relevant safety requirements must be ob- cause an explosion or fire resulting in serious served when the vehicle or components of burns and injuries. WARNING the airbag or belt tensioner systems are ● Always make sure that you correctly close Repairs or modifications which are not per- scrapped. These requirements are known to the fuel cap to avoid evaporation and fuel formed correctly may result in damage or er- specialised workshops. spillage. rors in the vehicle operation, affecting the ef- ● Fuels are highly explosive and inflammable Operation fectiveness of the driver assist and airbag substances that can cause serious burns and systems. This could result in serious acci- injuries. dent. ● Fuel could leak out or be spilt if the engine ● Have any repairs or modifications carried is not switched off or if the filler fuel nozzle is out at a specialised workshop. not fully inserted into the tank filler neck when refuelling. This could lead to a fire, ex-

plosion and severe injuries. Emergencies Collection and scrapping of end-of-life ● When refuelling, turn off the engine, the auxiliary heating (››› page 177) and turn off vehicles the ignition for safety reasons. Collection of end-of-life vehicles ● Always turn off mobile telephones, radio

apparatus and other radio wave emitting Safety An extensive network of used car reception equipment before refuelling. Electromagnetic centres already exists in much of Europe. Af- waves could cause sparks and lead to a fire. » ter the vehicle has been delivered, you will receive a certificate of destruction describing 261 Advice

● Never enter the vehicle while refuelling. If it – Always place the canister on the ground petrol, kerosene, heating oil or any other is absolutely necessary to enter, close the to fill it. type of different fuel. Other types of fuels door and touch a metal surface before touch- – Insert the fuel nozzle into the neck of the could cause serious damage to the engine ing the filler nozzle again. This will prevent canister as far as possible. and to the fuel supply system and the result- the generation of static electricity. Sparks ing problems are not covered by the SEAT could cause a fire when refuelling. – If you are using a metal fuel canister, the warranty. nozzle must always touch the canister ● Never handle fuel close to flames, sparks or while it is being filled to avoid static elec- objects with slow combustion (e.g. ciga- tricity. For the sake of the environment rettes). – Follow the legal requirements for the use, Fuels can contaminate the environment. Col- ● Avoid static electricity and electro-magnet- storage and transport of spare fuel canis- lect any spilt service fluids and allow a pro- ic radiation when refuelling. ters. fessional to dispose of them. ● Observe the safety regulations of the serv- – Insure that the fuel container complies ice station. with manufacturing standards, for exam- Note ● Never spill fuel on the vehicle or in the lug- ple, ANSI or ASTM F852-86. gage compartment. There is no emergency mechanism for the manual release of the fuel tank flap. If neces- CAUTION sary, request assistance from specialised per- WARNING ● Always remove any fuel spilled on the vehi- sonnel. For safety reasons, SEAT does not recommend cle paintwork immediately to avoid damage carrying a spare fuel canister in the vehicle. to the wheel housing, the tyre and vehicle Fuel could be spilled and catch fire, above all paintwork. in case of an accident and this applies to a ● Refuelling a petrol engine with diesel or a full container as well as empty containers. diesel engine with petrol can cause serious This could lead to explosions, fires and inju- engine and fuel system damage; the resulting ries. malfunctions are not covered by the SEAT ● Observe the following if you exceptionally warranty. If you refuel with the wrong type of have to carry fuel in a canister: fuel, never start the engine. This applies to – Never place a fuel container to fill it in- even the smallest amount of the wrong fuel. side the vehicle or on the vehicle, for ex- Seek specialist assistance. With the engine ample, in the boot or on the hatch. Filling running, the composition of the wrong fuel in these circumstances could create an could significantly damage the fuel system electrostatic charge and spark that could and the engine itself. ignite fuel fumes. ● In vehicles with a diesel engine, under no circumstances should you refuel or drive with

262 Checking and refilling levels

Control lamps and fuel gauge verified. They will switch off after a few sec- Note onds. The arrow next to the fuel pump symbol on When the control lamp lights up  or  the the instrument panel ››› Fig. 234 indicates the auxiliary heating and heater running off pet- side of the vehicle on which the fuel tank flap rol automatically switch off. is located. Technical data Technical

WARNING Driving with insufficient fuel reserve could re- Refuelling sult in the vehicle breaking down in traffic and a serious accident. Advice ● If the fuel level is too low then the fuel supply to the engine can become irregular espe- Fig. 234 On the instrument panel: Fuel gauge cially on slopes. for petrol and diesel ● If the engine “is choked” or stalls due to lack of or irregularity of the fuel supply, the  It lights up power steering as well as all of the driver assistance systems including braking assis- Gauge posi- Operation Possible cause tance will stop working. tion ››› Solution ››› Fig. 234 ● Always refuel when there is only one quarter of the fuel tank left to avoid running out of Fig. 235 Open fuel tank flap with tank cap in The fuel tank is al- fuel. the holder most empty. Red mark (ar- Refuel as soon as The reserve tank is row) possible ››› . Read the additional information carefully being used CAUTION

›››  page 39 Emergencies ››› page 39. ● Always pay attention to any lit control lamps and to the corresponding descriptions Refuelling  It lights up and instructions to avoid damage to the vehicle. The correct petrol type for the vehicle is loca- Fuel tank not Stop the vehicle and close the tank ● Never run the fuel tank completely dry. An ted on a sticker inside the fuel tank flap closed cor-

flap properly. ››› page 264. Safety rectly. irregular fuel supply may lead to ignition faults and unburnt fuel could enter the ex- ● If the automatic filler nozzle is operated Several warning and control lamps light up haust system. This could damage the catalytic converter filter or the diesel particulate fil- correctly, it will switch itself off as soon as for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- ter! the tank is full ››› . » ed on, signalling that the function is being 263 Advice

● Do not continue to refuel if it is turned off! 51626-1 and must be unleaded. You can re- and a light throttle. Refuel with super as soon Otherwise, this will fill the expansion cham- fuel with a maximum ethanol proportion of as possible. ber and fuel may leak out if the ambient con- 10 % (E10). The types of petrol are differenti- ditions are warm. ated by their octane rating (RON). Petrol additives The following titles appear on the corre- The quality of the fuel influences the behav- WARNING sponding adhesive on the fuel tank flap: iour, power and service life of the engine. Do not continue refilling once the fuel nozzle This is why the petrol you use should carry has switched itself off. The fuel tank may be Super unleaded 95 octane or normal 91 oc- suitable additives already included by the filled too much. As a result, fuel may spurt tane unleaded petrol petrol industry, free of metals. These addi- out and spill. This could lead to a fire, explo- tives will help to prevent corrosion, keep the We recommend you use super 95 octane pet- sion and severe injuries. fuel system clean and prevent deposits from rol. If this is not available: normal 91 octane building up in the engine. petrol, with a slight decrease in power. CAUTION If good-quality petrol with metal-free addi- ● Always remove any fuel spilled on the vehi- Super unleaded petrol with a minimum of 95 tives is not available or engine problems cle paintwork immediately to avoid damage octanes arise, the necessary additives must be added to the wheel housing, the tyre and vehicle when refuelling ››› . paintwork. You should use super petrol with a minimum of 95 octanes. Not all petrol additives have been shown to be effective. The use of unsuitable petrol ad- If super is not available, in an emergency you For the sake of the environment ditives may cause significant damage to the may refuel with normal 91 octane petrol. In Spilt fuel can contaminate the environment. engine and the catalytic converter. Metal ad- this case only use moderate engine speeds ditives should never be used. Metal additives and a light throttle. Refuel with super as soon may also be contained in petrol additives for as possible. improving anti-detonation ratings or octane Fuel ratings ››› . Super unleaded 98 octane or super 95 oc- Types of petrol tane unleaded petrol SEAT recommends “genuine Volkswagen We recommend you use super plus 98 octane Group Fuel Additives for petrol engines”. The correct grade of petrol is listed inside the petrol. If this is not available: super 95 oc- These additives can be bought at SEAT deal- fuel tank flap. tane petrol, with a slight decrease in power. ers, where information on how to use them can also be obtained. The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con- If super is not available, in an emergency you verter and must only be run on unleaded pet- may refuel with normal 91 octane petrol. In rol. The petrol must comply with European this case only use moderate engine speeds Standard EN 228 or German standard DIN 264 Checking and refilling levels

CAUTION Diesel fuel to collect in the filter, this can cause engine performance problems. ● Do not refuel if the filler indicates that the Please note the information on the inside of fuel contains metal. LRP (lead replacement the fuel tank flap. petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of metal additives. Using them may damage the We recommend the use of diesel fuel which engine! complies to European standard EN 590. If Selective catalytic reduction* data Technical ● Never refuel with fuels containing a large diesel fuel which meets European standard (AdBlue) proportion of ethanol (for example, E50, E85). EN 590 is not available, the Cetane number This could damage the fuel system. (CZ) must, at minimum, be 51. If the engine Introduction ● Just filling one full tank of leaded fuel or is equipped with a particulate filter, the sul- fuel containing other metal additives would phur content of the fuel must be below 50 In vehicles with “Selective Catalytic Reduc- Advice seriously impair the efficiency of the catalytic parts per million. tion”, a special urea solution (AdBlue) is in- converter. jected into the exhaust gas system in front of ● Only use fuel additives that have been ap- Winter-grade diesel the catalytic converter to reduce nitrogen ox- proved by SEAT. Octane boosting or anti- Summer fuel becomes thicker in winter and it ide emissions. knock additives may contain metal additives is more difficult to start the engine. For this The consumption of AdBlue depends on indi- that could seriously damage the engine or reason, petrol stations in some countries al- vidual driving style, the temperature at which Operation the catalytic converter. These additives must so offer winter diesel with improved fluidity not be used. the system operates and the outside temper- when cold (winter-grade diesel). ature where the vehicle is driven. ● High engine speed and full throttle can damage the engine when using petrol with an AdBlue is kept in an independent tank in the CAUTION octane rating lower than the correct grade for vehicle and should be refilled at an official the engine. ● The vehicle is not designed for the use of supplier. The AdBlue tank holds approxi- FAME fuel (biodiesel). The fuel system would mately 17 litres.

be damaged if you used biodiesel. Emergencies Note ● Do not mix fuel additives, the so-called The AdBlue fill level must be checked when ● You may use petrol with a high octane num- “thinners”, petrol or similar additives with the vehicle is being serviced. ber than the one recommended for your en- diesel fuel. gine. WARNING ● If poor-quality diesel fuel is used, it may be ● In those countries where unleaded petrol is necessary to drain the fuel filter more fre- If the AdBlue fill level is too low, the vehicle Safety not available, you may refuel with a fuel with quently than is specified in the Maintenance may not restart after switching the ignition a low lead content. Programme. We recommend having this done off. The emergency start or jump start will not by a specialised workshop. If water is allowed be possible either! »

265 Advice

● Top up with AdBlue at the latest 1,000 km Control and warning lamps Several warning and control lamps should or 600 miles before it runs out. light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, signalling that the function is ● Do not allow the AdBlue to run too low.  It lights up red being verified. They will switch off after a few The engine cannot Stop the vehicle in a suitable, seconds. WARNING be restarted! The safe and flat area then top up level of AdBlue is with the minimum quantity of WARNING AdBlue is an irritant, corrosive liquid that can too low. AdBlue required ››› page 267. cause injuries if it touches the skin, eyes or Observe the safety warnings ››› in Control respiratory organs. and warning lamps on page 105.  It lights up red ● If AdBlue get in contact with eyes and skin, rinse for at least 15 minutes with plenty of together with water and seek medical help.  Information on AdBlue ● If the AdBlue is swallowed, wash your mouth with plenty of water for at least 15 mi- The engine cannot Contact a specialised workshop. A message will be displayed on the dash be restarted! AdBlue nutes. Do not try to provoke vomiting unless Have the system checked there. panel around 2,400 km before the next serv- system malfunction. recommended by a Doctor. Seek medical ad- ice to indicate that AdBlue must be refilled vice immediately. ››› page 267. If you ignore this message and  It lights up yellow do not refill, you will be unable to start the CAUTION Refill AdBlue over the next kilo- engine afterwards ››› page 266. metres or miles as indicated AdBlue damages surfaces such as painted ve- The AdBlue reserve SEAT recommends contacting a specialised ››› page 267. SEAT recommends hicle parts, plastic, items of clothing and car- is low. contacting a specialised work- workshop. If not possible, it should be parti- pets. Spilt AdBlue should be removed as ally filled with a minimum 5.0 litres of quickly as possible using a damp cloth and shop. AdBlue. Only refill using AdBlue expressly plenty of cold water. approved by SEAT. ● If the AdBlue has crystallised, remove with  It lights up yellow When the indicators  and  light simulta- warm water and a sponge. together with neously, there is a fault. SEAT recommends  visiting the closest specialised workshop. There is a fault in AdBlue® is a registered trademark in the US, the AdBlue system Contact a specialised workshop. Germany, the European Union and other or unsuitable Have the system checked there. countries belonging to the German automo- AdBlue fluid has bile industry association (“"Verband der Au- been used. tomobilindustrie e. V."”, VDA).

266 Checking and refilling levels

Refilling AdBlue Opening the tank filling neck ● Open the rear lid. ● Rotate the shut off on the cover clockwise ››› Fig. 236 and open the cover forwards.

● Unscrew the tank filler neck cap ››› Fig. 237 data Technical 1 anticlockwise.

Refilling AdBlue Only use AdBlue that is approved by SEAT and that complies with ISO 22241-1 Stand- Advice ard. Only use genuine bottles. Fig. 236 At the rear left of the luggage compartment: AdBlue tank, behind a cover panel ● Observe the instructions and information provided by the refill bottle manufacturer. ● Observe the expiry date. ● Unscrew the cap on the refill bottle. Operation ● Place the refill bottle 2 upside down inside the tank filler neck. ● Press the refill bottle against the filler neck and keep in this position. ● Add at least 5.0 litres of AdBlue (6 bottles). Fig. 237 AdBlue tank with filler neck cap and A lower quantity would be insufficient. Emergencies refilling bottle ● Wait until the contents of the refill bottle have been poured into the AdBlue tank. Do To refill AdBlue, the vehicle must be on flat not crush or damage the bottle! ground and not, for example, parked on a ● Unscrew the liquid bottle anticlockwise and kerb or slope. If the vehicle is not on flat remove it carefully .

››› Safety ground then the filling indicator cannot measure the filling quantity. ● You can tell when the AdBlue tank is full because the bottle will be empty. »

267 Advice

Closing the tank filling neck ● Do not add AdBlue to the diesel fuel tank! carried out by a specialised workshop if you ● Screw on the tank filler neck cap ››› Fig. 237 Otherwise you may damage the engine. are uncertain. Negligent work can cause serious injury. 1 clockwise until it is fully inserted. ● Never leave the refill bottle in the vehicle. It ● could become permeable due to temperature Place the cover and turn the shut off anti- WARNING clockwise to close it. changes and bottle damage and the AdBlue could damage the vehicle interior. If the vehicle moves unexpectedly, this could cause serious injury. Operations before driving For the sake of the environment ● Never work under the vehicle if it has not ● Only switch the ignition on after refilling. been immobilized. If you must work under- Dispose of the refill bottle in an environment- ● Keep the ignition switch on for at least 30 neath the vehicle with the wheels in contact friendly manner. seconds so that the system detects tank re- with the ground then it should be parked on filling. flat ground, the wheels should be prevented Note from moving and the key should be removed ● Wait 30 seconds before starting the en- from the ignition. gine! Suitable AdBlue refill bottles can be purchased from a technical service centre. ● If you have to work underneath the vehicle, you must use suitable stands additionally to WARNING support the vehicle, there is a risk of acci- Only keep AdBlue in its original container, dent!. The jack is not intended for this kind of tightly shut and in a safe place. Working in the engine compart- work and its failure could lead to severe inju- ● Never keep AdBlue in empty food cans, bot- ries. tles or other containers to avoid other people ment mistaking it for something else. WARNING ● Keep the AdBlue out of the reach of small Introduction The engine compartment is a dangerous area children. Before working in the engine compartment, capable of causing serious injury. make sure that the vehicle is parked on hori- ● For all type of work, always take the utmost CAUTION zontal and firm ground. precautions, work carefully and note the gen- ● eral safety standards in force. Never take per- Only refill using AdBlue expressly approved The engine compartment of the vehicle is a by SEAT. The use of any other type of AdBlue sonal risks. hazardous area. Never work on the engine or could cause engine damage! ● Never work on the engine or in the engine in the engine compartment if you are not fa- ● AdBlue should never be mixed with water compartment if you are not familiar with the miliar with the operations to be carried out, necessary operations. If you are not sure or any other additives. Any type of damage the applicable safety standards and especial- caused by a mixture will not be covered by about procedures then visit a specialised ly if you do not have the necessary instru- the warranty. workshop to carry out the necessary work. ments, liquids and tools ››› ! Have the work 268 Checking and refilling levels

Working incorrectly can cause serious ● When refilling liquids, avoid spilling them belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc., as well as injuries. on parts of the engine and the exhaust sys- from the high-voltage ignition system. Al- ● Never open the bonnet if you see steam or tem. Spilled liquids could cause a fire. ways work with the utmost caution. coolant escaping from the engine compart- – Always make sure that no parts of your ment. This may cause serious burns. Always WARNING body, jewellery, ties, loose clothing and wait until you cannot see or hear the sound of long hair can be trapped by the rotating data Technical steam or coolant coming from the engine The high voltages of the electrical system can parts of the engine. Before any work, re- compartment. give electric shocks as well as causing burns move ties and jewellery (necklaces, etc), and serious injury and possibly even death! ● Always allow the engine to cool down be- tie long hair back and tie all items of fore opening the bonnet. ● Never cause short circuits in the electrical loose clothing to your body to make sure

system. The battery could explode. that they cannot be trapped by engine Advice ● Contact with hot elements of the engine components. and the exhaust system can cause burns. ● To minimise the risk of electric shock and serious consequences while the engine is – Take extreme caution when operating the ● Once the engine has cooled, follow the in- running or starting the engine, note the fol- accelerator and remain attentive. The ve- structions below before opening the bonnet: lowing: hicle could move, even with the electron- – Turn on the electronic parking brake and – Never touch the electrical wiring of the ic parking brake activated. place the gear selector lever in P or the ignition system. ● Always make sure you have not left any ob- gearbox lever in neutral. – Never touch electric cables or the gas dis- jects, such as cleaning cloths and tools, in Operation – Remove the key from the ignition. charge lamps. the engine compartment. If any object is left – Keep children away from the engine com- in the engine compartment, this could cause partment and never leave them unsuper- malfunctions, engine faults and even a fire. vised. WARNING ● When the engine is warm or hot, the cool- In the engine compartment, there are rotat- WARNING ing parts that could cause serious injury. ing system is pressurised. Do not unscrew Refill liquids and certain materials can catch the cap on the expansion tank when the en- ● Never place your hands on or near the radi- fire easily in the engine compartment, caus- Emergencies gine is hot. Otherwise, coolant may spray out ator fan. Touching the rotor blades could seri- ing a fire and serious injury! under pressure causing burns and serious in- ously harm you. The ventilator works accord- jury. ing to the engine temperature and could start ● Never smoke. – Carefully and slowly unscrew the cap an- suddenly even when the ignition is turned off ● Never work close to places exposed to ticlockwise, gently pressing down on it. and the key is removed. flames or sparks. Safety – Always protect your face, hands and arms ● If any work has to be performed when the ● Never pour service fluids over the engine. from hot coolant and steam using a large, engine is started or with the engine running, These fluid may ignite hot engine parts and thick cloth. there is an additional, potentially fatal, safety cause injuries. » risk from rotating parts, such as the drive

269 Advice

● If it is necessary to work on the fuel system Opening and closing the bonnet ● Before opening the bonnet, make sure that or the electrical system, please follow the in- the windscreen wiper arms are in place structions below: against the windscreen ››› . – Always disconnect the vehicle battery. ● Open the driver door. When disconnecting the battery, ensure ● Pull the release lever ››› Fig. 238 in the di- that the vehicle is unlocked otherwise rection of the arrow. The bonnet is released the anti-theft alarm will be triggered. from the lock carrier by a spring mechanism – Never work close to heaters, heat sources ››› . or places exposed to flames or sparks. ● Lift the bonnet using the release lever ● Always keep a recently serviced and per- ››› Fig. 239 (arrow) and open the bonnet fully. fectly working fire extinguisher close by. The bonnet is held open thanks to the gas ● Never cover the engine with additional in- strut. sulating materials such as a blanket. Risk of Fig. 238 In the footwell on the driver side: Lever for unlocking the bonnet fire! Closing the bonnet ● To close the bonnet, pull it down to over- CAUTION come the gas strut pressure ››› . When refilling or changing service liquids, ● Allow the bonnet to fall into the lock carrier. ensure that you put the liquids into the right Do not press down. tank. Making a mistake when refilling could cause serious malfunctions and damage the If the bonnet is not correctly closed, open it engine! once again and close it correctly. The bonnet is correctly closed when it is flush For the sake of the environment with the corresponding parts on the body- Service fluids leaks are harmful to the envi- work. ronment. For this reason you should make Fig. 239 Release lever to open the bonnet in regular checks on the ground underneath the radiator grille WARNING your vehicle. Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop to be checked if you see stains, oil Opening the bonnet If the bonnet is not correctly closed, it could or other fluids on the ground. Collect any suddenly open while driving leaving the driv- The lever to open the bonnet can only be spilt service fluids and allow a professional to er without visibility. This could result in a se- dispose of them. used if the driver door is open. rious accident.

270 Checking and refilling levels

● After closing the bonnet, always check that Checking fluid levels tioned above. These operations are descri- it is properly secured by the locking mecha- bed in ››› page 268. nism in the lock carrier. The bonnet must be flush with the surrounding body panels. Overview ● While driving, if you notice that the bonnet Further explanations, instructions and restric- is not correctly closed then stop immediately tions on the technical data are contained as data Technical and close it correctly. of ››› page 294 ● Only open and close the bonnet when there is nobody within its range.

Engine oil Advice CAUTION ● To avoid damage to the bonnet and to the Introduction windscreen wiper arms, only open it when the windscreen wipers are in place against the windscreen. WARNING ● Before driving, always lower the wiper Fig. 240 Diagram for the location of the vari- Incorrectly handling engine oil can cause in- ous elements. jury and serious burns.

arms. Operation ● Always protect your eyes when handling From time to time, the levels of the different engine oil. fluids in the vehicle must be checked. Never ● Oil is toxic and must be kept out of the fill with incorrect fluids, otherwise serious reach of children. damage to the engine may be caused. ● Engine oil should only be kept in its origi- 1 Coolant fluid deposit nal packaging; the same goes for used oil un-

til it is disposed of. Emergencies 2 Engine oil dipstick ● Never store engine oil in empty food con- 3 Oil filler neck tainers or bottles as other people may acci- 4 Brake fluid reservoir dentally drink it. 5 Vehicle battery (underneath a cover) ● Regular contact with engine oil can be bad

for the skin. If you come into contact with en- Safety 6 Windscreen washer fluid reservoir gine oil, wash your skin with soap and water. The checking and refilling of service fluids ● With the engine running, the engine oil are carried out on the components men- gets extremely hot and can cause severe skin »

271 Advice

burns. Always wait until the engine has fully  Flashes Engine oils are being continuously further cooled. developed. Technical services are constantly  Stop the vehicle! updated with any modifications. SEAT there- Switch off the engine. Check the en- fore recommends that you have the engine For the sake of the environment gine oil level. oil changed by a technical service. - If the warning lamp flashes al- Similar to the other service liquids, spilled Engine oil pres- though the oil level is correct, do not sure too low. engine oil can be bad for the environment. continue driving or leave the engine CAUTION Collect these liquids in suitable containers running. Otherwise, the engine ● and dispose of them while respecting the en- Only use engine oils whose specifications could be damaged. Seek specialist are expressly approved by SEAT. The use of vironment. assistance. any other type of oil could cause engine damage! WARNING Warning and control lamps Observe the safety warnings ››› in Control and warning lamps on page 105.  It lights up

Insufficient en- Switch the ignition off. Check the engine oil. gine oil level ››› page 273. Engine oil specifications

 Flashes Replacement engine oil must strictly comply with the specifications. Contact a specialised workshop. The correct oil must be used to ensure the Engine oil sen- Have the engine oil sensor checked. sor faulty. Meanwhile, check the oil level man- correct operation and long service life of the ually. engine. The engine comes with a high-quality multigrade oil that can generally be used all year round. Only use an engine oil that complies to SEAT standards whenever possible ››› . If you wish to maintain the long-life service duration, only engine oils approved for this service according to the corresponding VW standard (›››  table on page 40) may be used. All oils indicated are synthetic multigrade oils. 272 Checking and refilling levels

Checking engine oil level ● Stop the engine and wait a few minutes for ● Only refill using approved SEAT engine oil the oil to drain back into the sump. When the in small quantities (no more than 0.5 l) engine has cooled down, immediately check ››› page 272. the oil level and top up if necessary. ● To avoid adding too much oil, each time ● Open the bonnet  ››› page 268. you add a quantity, wait until the oil has flow- Technical data Technical ● The engine oil filler neck can be recognised ed into the crankcase so that it can be meas- by the symbol  on the cap ››› Fig. 242 and ured with the dipstick. the dipstick by its coloured handle. ● Check the oil level before adding any more oil. Do not top up with too much engine oil Checking the engine oil level ››› . Advice ● Pull out the dipstick and wipe it on a clean ● When the oil level is at least in the ››› Fig. 241 B zone, insert the dipstick into Fig. 241 Marked engine oil dipstick cloth. the tube fully to avoid engine oil escaping ● Replace the dipstick, pushing it in as far as when the engine is running. it will go. If the dipstick has a mark, when you reintroduce it this mark should slot into the ● After topping up the oil, ensure that the corresponding groove located on the upper cap is screwed on to the filler neck correctly.

end of the tube. Operation WARNING ● Remove the oil dipstick again and check the engine oil level. Oil could catch fire if it comes into contact with hot engine components. This could lead ● After reading the oil level, replace the dip- to a fire, explosion and severe injuries. stick in the tube completely. ● Always ensure that after topping of oil, the engine oil filler cap is correctly tightened.

Adding oil after checking the level Emergencies Fig. 242 In the engine compartment: Engine This will avoid engine oil spilling onto hot en- oil filler cap. Only add engine oil in small quantities and in gine parts when the engine is running. steps: Read the additional information carefully ● Unscrew the cap from engine oil filler neck CAUTION ›››  page 39 on the cylinder head ››› Fig. 242. If you are ● If the engine oil level is above the area Safety not sure where the cap is, request help from ››› Fig. 241 A do not start the engine. Seek Preparations a specialist. specialist assistance. Otherwise catalytic ● Park the vehicle on flat ground so that the converter and engine damage may occur. » engine oil reading is correct.

273 Advice

● When refilling or changing service liquids, The engine oil must be changed regularly ac- CAUTION ensure that you put the liquids into the right cording to the specifications of the Mainte- No additives should be used with engine oil. tank. Making a mistake when refilling could nance Programme. This could result in engine damage. Any dam- cause serious malfunctions and damage the Due to the problems linked with disposing of age caused by the use of such additives engine! used oil and the need for suitable tools and would not be covered by the factory warranty. special knowledge, always visit a specialised For the sake of the environment workshop to have the engine oil and filter For the sake of the environment The oil level must never be above area changed. SEAT recommends taking your car ● Before changing the engine oil, find a suita- ››› Fig. 241 A . Otherwise oil can be drawn in in for technical service. ble location or service for proper disposal. through the crankcase breather and escape Detailed information on the service intervals into the atmosphere via the exhaust system. ● Always dispose of engine oil with the ut- is shown in the Maintenance Programme. most respect for the environment. Never dispose of used engine oil in places such as a WARNING garden, woods, drains, roads, paths, rivers Engine oil consumption If, in exceptional circumstances, you must and drainage systems. change the engine oil yourself, please note The consumption of engine oil can be differ- the following: ent from one engine to another and can vary during the useful life of the engine. ● Wear eye protection. Engine coolant ● Always wait until the engine has complete- Depending on driving style and the condi- ly cooled to avoid being burned. tions of use, the consumption of engine oil Introduction ● Always keep your arms horizontal when un- can reach 1 litre every 2,000 km (one quarter screwing the oil drainage bolt so that it does WARNING of a gallon every 1,200 miles); for new vehi- not run down your arms. cles, this could be higher for the first ● Engine coolant is toxic! 5,000 km (3,000 miles). For this reason the Use a suitable container large enough to collect all of the used oil in the engine. ● Only keep engine coolant in its original engine oil level must be checked at regular container, tightly shut and in a safe place. intervals, preferably when filling the tank and ● Never collect engine oil in empty food con- before a journey. tainers, cans, bottles or other containers as ● Never store engine coolant in empty food not all people are able to identify engine oil. containers or bottles as other people may ac- ● Oil is toxic and must be kept out of the cidentally drink it. ● Topping up engine oil reach of children. Always keep engine coolant out of reach of children. Read the additional information carefully ›››  page 39 274 Checking and refilling levels

● Ensure that the proportion of engine cool- vehicle to stop. As this would also cause the ance with legislation and with the utmost re- ant additive corresponds to the lowest out- heating to stop working, passengers without spect for the environment. side temperature to which the vehicle will be warm clothing could freeze. exposed. ● If the outside temperature is extremely low, For the sake of the environment the engine coolant could freeze causing the data Technical Coolants and additives can contaminate the environment. Collect any spilt fluids in suitable containers and dispose of them in accord- Advice Warning lamp and coolant temperature indicator

When driving normally, the needle will remain in the middle area. The temperature may also rise when the engine is working hard, especially at high outside temperatures

and so the indicator will move quite far to the Operation right-hand side. Several warning and control lamps light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few sec- Fig. 243 Engine coolant temperature gauge onds. » on the instrument panel: A cold area; B Emergencies normal area; C warning area Safety

275 Advice

Gauge position It lights up Possible cause Solution ››› Fig. 243

 Stop the vehicle! Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. Switch off the engine and wait Warning area C Excessive engine coolant temperature. for it to cool down and for the needle to return to the normal area. Check the engine coolant level ››› page 277.  Check the engine coolant when the engine has cooled and, if it is low, refill Normal area B Insufficient engine coolant level. with engine coolant ››› page 277. Although the coolant level is correct, there is a fault.

 Do not drive any further. -- Engine coolant system faulty. Obtain professional assistance.

Avoid revving the engine too much or making it work hard while it has not -- Cold area A -- reached normal service temperature.

 Flashes WARNING SEAT. Otherwise, you run the risk of causing severe damage to the engine and the engine Engine coolant If there is not enough anti-freeze in the cool- Seek specialist assistance. cooling system. system faulty. ant system, the engine may fail leading to serious damage. ● If the fluid in the expansion tank is not purple but is, for example, brown, this indicates ● Please make sure that the percentage of WARNING that the G13 additive has been mixed with an additive is correct with respect to the lowest inadequate coolant. The coolant must be Observe the safety warnings ››› in Control expected ambient temperature in the zone in changed as soon as possible if this is the and warning lamps on page 105. which the vehicle is to be used. case! This could result in serious faults and ● When the outside temperature is very low, engine damage. the coolant could freeze and the vehicle Coolant specifications would be immobilised. In this case, the heating would not work either and inadequately For the sake of the environment Read the additional information carefully dressed passengers could die of cold. Coolants and additives can contaminate the ›››  page 40 environment. If any fluids are spilled, they CAUTION should be collected and correctly disposed of, with respect to the environment. The original additives should never be mixed with coolants which are not approved by

276 Checking and refilling levels

Checking the coolant level and top- Preparations ● If, in the event of an emergency, you have ping up ● Park the vehicle on even, flat and firm no coolant that is compliant to the required ground. specifications (››› page 276), do not use another type of additive. Instead, top up with ● Allow the engine to cool ››› . distilled water only ››› . Then re-establish

● Open the bonnet  ››› page 268. the correct proportion of the mixture with the data Technical ● The coolant expansion tank is easily recog- correct additive as soon as possible nisable because of the symbol  on the cap ››› page 276. ››› Fig. 245. WARNING

Checking the engine coolant level Hot vapours and coolant can cause serious Advice ● When the engine is cold, check the coolant burns. level using the side marking on the expan- ● Never open the coolant expansion tank if Fig. 244 In the engine compartment: Marking sion tank ››› Fig. 244. steam or coolant is coming from the engine on coolant expansion tank compartment. Wait until you cannot see or ● If the level is below the “MIN” mark, top up hear any steam or coolant escaping. with coolant. When the engine is hot it may ● Always wait until the engine has complete-

be slightly above the marked area. Operation ly cooled before very carefully opening the expansion tank cap. Contact with hot ele- Topping up the engine coolant level ments of the engine can cause skin burns. ● Always protect your face, hands and arms ● When the engine is warm or hot, the cool- from hot coolant and steam using a large, ing system is pressurised. Do not unscrew thick cloth over the coolant expansion tank the cap on the expansion tank when the en- cap. gine is hot. Otherwise, coolant may spray out

under pressure causing burns and serious in- Emergencies ● Remove the cap very carefully ››› . jury. ● Only refill using new engine coolant ac- – Fig. 245 In the engine compartment: coolant Carefully and slowly unscrew the cap an- cording to SEAT specifications (››› page 276) ti-clockwise, gently pressing down on it. expansion tank cap ››› . – Always protect your face, hands and arms ● If the coolant level is low, the coolant warn- The engine coolant level should be be- from hot coolant and steam using a large, Safety ing indicator will light. tween the marks on the coolant expansion thick cloth. » tank ››› Fig. 244. Do not exceed the top level of the marked area ››› . ● Screw on the cap tightly. 277 Advice

● When refilling liquids, avoid spilling them Brake fluid safety and the safety of other road users on parts of the engine and the exhaust sys- ››› . tem. Spilled liquids could cause a fire. Under Checking the brake fluid level specific circumstances, the ethylene glycol Brake fluid specifications can catch fire. SEAT have developed a special brake fluid optimised for the brake systems of their vehi- CAUTION cles. To ensure the optimum working of the ● Only fill with distilled water. Any other type brake system, SEAT recommends the use of of water may lead to considerable rusting in brake fluid in accordance with the VW 501 14 the engine due to its chemical components. standard. If this brake fluid is not available or This could consequently damage the engine. another brake fluid is used for different rea- If you have not used distilled water but an- sons, use a brake fluid that complies with the other type of water to top up the coolant, a United States standard FMVSS 116 DOT 4 or specialised workshop must immediately re- the German standard DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 place all of the fluid in the engine cooling Fig. 246 In the engine compartment: brake ››› . system. fluid reservoir cap Brake fluids conforming to the standard ● Only top up coolant to the top level of the VW 501 14, fulfil the American requirements marked area ››› Fig. 244. Otherwise the ex- Read the additional information carefully of the FMVSS 116 DOT 4 standard and the cess coolant will be forced out of the cooling ›››  page 41 system when the engine is hot, causing dam- German DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standard. age. In the course of time, the brake fluid absorbs However, fluids that comply with the US FMVSS 116 DOT 4 standard or the German ● If a lot of liquid coolant has been lost, wait water from the ambient air. If there is too for the engine to cool down completely before much water in the brake fluid, the brake sys- DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standard do not nec- adding coolant. Extensive coolant loss is an tem could be damaged. In addition, the boil- essarily comply with the VW 501 14 stand- indication of leaks in the engine cooling sys- ing point of the brake fluid is significantly ard. Always check the information on the tem. Have the engine cooling system inspec- lowered. When the brake fluid contains too brake fluid container and ensure that you are ted immediately by a specialised workshop. much water and the brakes are subject to using suitable brake fluid. Otherwise engine damage may occur. considerable forces, bubbles of water vapour A suitable brake fluid can be obtained from ● When refilling service liquids, ensure that can form in the system. These bubbles can technical service centres. you put the liquids into the right tank. Mak- significantly reduce braking power, notably ing a mistake when refilling could cause seri- increasing braking distance, and could even ous malfunctions and damage the engine! result in the total failure of the brake system. Ensuring that the brake system is always functioning correctly is essential for your own 278 Checking and refilling levels

Brake fluid level ● The brake fluid should be changed regular- ● Always keep brake fluid in the original con- The level of the brake fluid should always be ly in accordance with the instructions given tainer; keep it correctly sealed and out of between the MIN and MAX marks, or above in the Maintenance Programme. reach of children. the MIN mark ››› . ● When the brake fluid is used and brakes are subjected to extreme braking forces, bub- CAUTION It is not always possible to check the level of bles of vapour form in the brake system. data Technical the brake fluid, as in some models the en- These bubbles can significantly reduce brak- Brake fluid damages the vehicle paintwork. gine components make it difficult to see the ing power, notably increasing braking dis- Wipe off any brake fluid from the paintwork brake fluid reservoir. If you cannot read the tance, and could result in the total failure of immediately. exact brake fluid level, consult a specialist. the brake system.

The brake fluid level drops slightly when the ● Only used brake fluid that conforms to the For the sake of the environment Advice vehicle is being used due to wear of the VW 501 14 standard, FMVSS 116 DOT 4 Brake fluid is an environmental pollutant. brake pads and the automatic readjustment standard or even the DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 Collect any spilt service fluids and allow a of the brake. standard. Other types of brake fluid could af- professional to dispose of them. fect brake operation and reduce braking power. Do not use a brake fluid if the container Changing the brake fluid does not specify compliance with the The brake fluid should be changed in accord- VW 501 14, FMVSS 116 DOT 4 or ance with the instructions given in the Main- DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards. Operation tenance Programme. Have the brake fluid ● The replacement brake fluid must be new. changed by a specialised workshop. SEAT ● Always ensure that you use suitable brake recommends taking your car in for technical fluid. Do not use a brake fluid if the container service. This means that only brake fluid does not specify compliance with the complying with the required specifications VW 501 14, FMVSS 116 DOT 4 or will be used. DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards. Emergencies

WARNING WARNING If the brake fluid level is low or unsuita- Brake fluid is poisonous. ble/old brake fluid is used, the brake system may fail or braking power may be reduced. ● To reduce the risk of poisoning, do not keep brake fluid in drinks bottles/containers or Safety ● Check the brake system and the brake fluid similar. Other people could drink from these level regularly! recipients even if the contents are clearly marked.

279 Advice

Windscreen washer reservoir ● In cold weather, a special antifreeze should Vehicle battery also be added to prevent the water from Checking and topping up the wind- freezing ››› . Introduction screen washer reservoir Filling amounts The battery is a component of the vehicle's The capacity of the tank is approximately 3 li- electrical system. tres; in vehicles with a headlight washer sys- Never work on the electrical system without tem, it is approximately 7 litres. fully understanding the operations required, the applicable safety standards and without WARNING the correct tools ››› ! If required, have any Never mix an unsuitable antifreeze or other work carried out by a specialised workshop. similar additives with the windscreen washer SEAT recommends taking your car in for tech- water. A greasy layer may be formed on the nical service. Negligent work can cause seri- windscreen which will impair visibility. ous injury. ● Use clean water with a window cleaner rec- Fig. 247 In the engine compartment: wind- ommended by SEAT. Location and number of batteries in the vehi- screen washer reservoir top ● If necessary, add a suitable antifreeze to cle the water in the reservoir. The battery is located in the engine compart- Read the additional information carefully ment. ›››  page 41 CAUTION Check the level in the windscreen washer ● Do not mix cleaning products recommen- Explanation of the warning indications on tank regularly and top up as required. ded by SEAT with other products. This could the vehicle's battery lead to flocculation and may block the wind- ● Open the bonnet  ››› page 268. screen washer jets. Symbol Meaning ● The washer reservoir is marked with the ● When topping up service fluids, make abso- Wear eye protection!   symbol on the lid ››› Fig. 247. lutely certain that you fill the fluids into the ● Check there is enough water in the reser- correct reservoirs. Using the wrong fluids Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Al- voir. could cause serious malfunctions and engine  ways wear protective gloves and eye pro- damage! tection! ● To top up, mix water with a window cleaner recommended by SEAT ››› . Please follow  Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking the instructions for use found on the packag- are prohibited. ing.

280 Checking and refilling levels

Symbol Meaning ● Never use a damaged battery. It can ex- Warning lamp plode. Replace a damaged battery immedi- A highly explosive mixture of gases is re- ately.  It lights up  leased when the battery is under charge. ● Replaced damaged or frozen batteries as Contact a specialised workshop. Keep children away from acid and batter- soon as possible. A flat battery can also

Have the electrical system checked. data Technical  ies! freeze at temperatures close to 0°C (+32°F). Disconnect any unnecessary electri- Faulty generator. ● For vehicles with the battery in the luggage cal devices. The generator does not WARNING compartment: Check that the battery gas charge the battery while the vehicle ventilation hose is securely attached. is in motion. Working on the vehicle battery and the electrical system can cause corrosion, fire and Several warning and control lamps light up Advice electric shocks. Always read and take into ac- CAUTION for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- count the following warnings and safety ● Never disconnect the battery if the ignition standards before carrying out any work: ed on, signalling that the function is being is switched on or if the engine is running. verified. They will switch off after a few sec- ● Before working on the battery, switch off This could damage the electrical system or onds. the engine, the ignition and all electrical de- electronic components. vices then disconnect the negative connec- ● Do not expose the battery to direct sunlight tion on the battery. WARNING

over a long period of time, as the intense ul- Operation If the warning lamps and messages are ignor- ● Keep children away from acid and the bat- traviolet radiation can damage the battery ed, the vehicle may stall in traffic, or may tery itself! housing. cause accidents and severe injuries. ● Wear eye protection. ● If the car is left standing for long periods, ● Never ignore the warning lamps or text ● Battery acid is very corrosive and caustic. It protect the battery from extreme cold temper- messages. can burn skin and cause blindness. When ature so that it does not “freeze up” and be- handling the battery, protect yourself from come damaged. ● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. splashes of acids, above all your hands, arms Emergencies and face. CAUTION ● Do not smoke and never work close to pla- Failure to heed the control lamps and text ces exposed to flames or sparks. messages when they appear may result in ● Avoid sparks and electrostatic discharges faults in the vehicle. when working with cables and electrical devi- Safety ces. ● Never short the battery terminals.

281 Advice

Checking the electrolyte level of the in hot countries and in older batteries. Other Colour in- Necessary operations vehicle battery batteries do not require maintenance. dicator Start-Stop systems (››› page 207) are equip- The electrolyte level of the vehicle's bat- ped with a special battery labelled “AGM”. Light yellow tery is too low. Have the battery checked For technical reasons, it is not possible to or Colourless and, where applicable, replaced by a check the electrolyte level of these batteries specialised workshop.

The electrolyte level of the vehicle's bat- Black Preparations tery is correct. ● Prepare the vehicle for work in the engine compartment ››› page 268 WARNING ● Open the bonnet  ››› page 268. Working with the vehicle battery involves a risk of corrosion, explosions or electric Fig. 248 In the engine compartment: remove Opening the battery cover shock. the lid from the vehicle's battery. The battery covers are different depending on ● Never tilt the vehicle battery. Battery acid the engine size of the vehicle: could spill out of the openings for the release of gases and cause corrosion damage. ● In the case of a lid: press the tab ››› Fig. 248 ● Never open the vehicle battery. A in the direction of the arrow and pull the ● If battery acid splashes on you, immediate- cover upwards. ly rinse your eyes and skin abundantly with ● In the case of a cover: fold the cover to one water for several minutes. Then seek medical side to remove ››› Fig. 249. care immediately. ● If acid is swallowed by mistake, consult a Checking the battery electrolyte level doctor immediately. ● Make sure there is sufficient lighting to clearly recognise the colours. Never use Fig. 249 In the engine compartment: lift off flames or flashing objects as a light source. Charging, replacing and connecting or the cover from the vehicle's battery. ● Depending on the level of acid, the Magic disconnecting the battery Read the additional information carefully eye on the top of the battery will change col- Charging the battery ›››  page 41 our. The vehicle battery should be charged by a The battery's electrolyte level should be specialised workshop only, as batteries us- checked regularly in high-mileage vehicles, ing special technology have been installed 282 Checking and refilling levels and they must be charged in a controlled en- ● The vehicle must be unlocked before dis- Automatically disconnecting devices vironment ››› . SEAT recommends taking connecting the battery, otherwise the alarm The intelligent vehicle electrical system auto- your car in for technical service. will be triggered. matically implements a range of measures to ● First disconnect the negative cable and prevent the battery from discharging when Replacing a vehicle battery then the positive ››› . high demands are made on it: The battery has been developed to suit the data Technical conditions of its location and has special Connecting the vehicle's battery ● the idling speed is increased so that the alternator provides more electricity. safety features. If the battery must be re- ● Before reconnecting the battery, switch off placed, consult a technical service for infor- the engine and all electrical devices. ● where necessary, the power of the most mation on electromagnetic compatibility, the powerful devices is reduced or even com-

● Advice size and maintenance, performance and First reconnect the positive cable and then pletely disconnected. the negative ››› . safety requirements of the new battery in ● On starting the engine, the power supply your vehicle before you purchase one. SEAT Different control lamps may light up after from the 12-volt power sockets and the ciga- recommends you have the battery replaced connecting the battery and switching the ig- rette lighter may be interrupted for a short by a technical service. nition on. They will be turned off after a short time. Use only maintenance-free genuine batteries trip at a speed of between 15-20 km/h The on-board management program cannot conforming to TL 825 06 and VW 7 50 73 (10-12 mph). If the warning indicators remain always prevent the battery from running flat. Operation Standards. These standards must be dated lit, please visit a specialised workshop to For example, if the ignition is left on for a April 2008 or later. have the vehicle checked. long period with the engine off or if the side Start-Stop systems (››› page 207) are equip- If the battery has been disconnected for a lights or parking lights are left on while the ped with a special battery. Therefore, it must long time, it is possible that the next service vehicle is stationary. only be replaced with a battery of the same date is not displayed or calculated correctly specifications. ››› page 100. Respect the maximum service Why does the battery run flat?

intervals permitted ››› Booklet Maintenance Emergencies ● When stationary for a long time without Programme. Disconnecting the vehicle's battery starting the engine, particularly if the ignition If you must disconnect the battery from the Vehicles with Keyless Access (››› page 115): is switched on. if, after connecting the battery, the ignition electrical system, please note the following: ● Use of electrical devices with the engine cannot be switched on, lock and unlock the switched off. ● Switch off the ignition and all electrical vehicle from outside. Then try to switch on Safety equipment. the ignition again. If the ignition does not ● If the auxiliary heater is running work, seek professional assistance. ››› page 177. »

283 Advice

WARNING lighter. This could damage the vehicle's elec- Wheels and tyres trical system. Incorrectly securing the battery or using the wrong battery can cause short-circuits, fire Tyres and serious injuries. For the sake of the environment ● Always use only maintenance free batteries ● Dispose of the battery in an environment- Introduction that do not run flat alone and whose proper- friendly manner. Batteries contain toxic sub- ties, specifications and size correspond to stances such as sulphuric acid and lead. The SEAT Alhambra is equipped as standard the standard battery. The specifications are ● Battery acid can contaminate the environ- with anti-puncture technology tyres (Conti- indicated on the battery case. ment. If it has leaked use adequate care col- Seal). In the event of a puncture or air leak of lecting it (gloves and protective glasses), and up to 5 mm, the tyre seals the hole with a WARNING dispose of it correctly. protective layer inside the tread. A highly explosive mixture of gases is re- The inclusion of this technology means that leased when the battery is under charge. there is no type of spare wheel included in ● The batteries should be charged in a well- the vehicle's equipment. ventilated room only. SEAT recommend that all work on tyres and ● Never charge a frozen or recently thawed wheels is carried out by a specialised work- battery. A flat battery can also freeze at tem- shop. These workshops have the necessary peratures close to 0°C (+32°F). special tools and replacement parts, trained ● Always replace a battery which has frozen. personnel and facilities for disposing of the ● Battery cables not correctly connected may old tyres while respecting the environment. cause a short circuit. Reconnect first the posi- SEAT recommends taking your car in for tech- tive cable and then the negative cable. nical service.

CAUTION WARNING ● Never disconnect the battery if the ignition The vehicle cannot be totally controlled or is switched on or if the engine is running. braked if the tyres (new or used) are worn or This could damage the electrical system or damaged. electronic components. ● Incorrect use of wheels and tyres could ● Never plug accessories that supply current, make driving more dangerous and result in such as solar panels or a battery charger, to serious accidents and damage. the 12-volt power sockets or the cigarette

284 Wheels and tyres

● All four wheels must be fitted with radial ● Never mount used tyres or wheels if you are The tyres of a vehicle are the components tyres of the same type, size (rolling not sure of their previous history. They may which are subjected to most stress and are circumference) and the same tread pattern. be damaged, although the damage is not im- the most underestimated. Tyres are very im- ● New tyres do not give maximum grip and mediately visible. portant, as the support offered by their nar- will not have reached their maximum braking ● Old tyres, even if they have never been row surface is the only point of contact be- capacity to start with, and therefore need used, may lose air or burst unexpectedly tween the vehicle and the road. data Technical running in. To prevent accidents and major while driving, resulting in serious accident or The service life of tyres is dependent on tyre damage, extreme caution should be taken for damage. If tyres are over six years old, they pressure, driving style, the care they receive the first 500 km (310 miles). should only be used in an emergency and and the correct fitting. ● Check tyre pressures regularly and ensure with extreme caution. they are maintained at the pressures indica- The tyres and wheel rims are an essential Advice ted. If the tyre pressure is too low, they could Note part of the vehicle's design. The tyres and overheat, resulting in tread detachment or rims approved by SEAT are specially matched even burst tyres. ● For technical reasons, it is not generally to the characteristics of the vehicle and our possible to use the wheels from other vehi- ● Never drive on damaged (punctured, cut, critical to good road holding and safe han- cles. In some cases, this may also be true for dling. cracked or dented) or worn tyres. Driving on the same model of wheel. Please refer to the damaged or worn tyres could result in burst vehicle documentation or ask at a technical tyres, serious accidents or damage. Worn or service. Avoiding damage to tyres and wheels Operation damaged tyres must be replaced immediate- ● If you have to drive over a kerb or similar ly. obstacle, drive very slowly and as near as ● Never exceed the maximum permitted possible at a right angle to the kerb. speed or loads specified for the type of tyre Handling tyres and wheels fitted on your vehicle. ● Inspect the tyres regularly for damage (punctures, cuts, cracks, dents). ● The effectiveness of driver and brake assist ● systems also depends on the grip of the Remove any foreign bodies found on the Emergencies tyres. outside of the tyre tread and ensure that they ● If you notice unusual vibration or if the ve- have not passed through the wall of the tyre hicle pulls to one side when driving, stop the ››› page 290. car immediately and check the tyres and ● In addition, the instructions for tyre control wheels for damage.

systems should always be observed. Safety ● To minimise the risk of losing control of the ● Replace damaged or worn tyres as soon as vehicle or causing a serious accident, never possible ››› page 290. » undo the bolted joints of beadlock wheels. Fig. 250 Diagram for changing wheels

285 Advice

● Regularly check tyres for non-visible dam- condition on the outside and which have a WARNING age ››› page 290. tread depth within the values stipulated by the Law ››› . Old tyres, even if they have never been used, ● Never exceed the maximum permitted may lose air or burst unexpectedly while driv- speed or loads specified for the type of tyre The date of manufacture, part of the tyre ing, resulting in serious accident or damage. fitted on your vehicle page 291. ››› identification number (TIN), indicates the age ● If tyres are over six years old, they should ● Do not allow tyres to come into contact with of the tyre ››› page 291. only be used in an emergency and with ex- aggressive substances, grease, oil, fuel or treme caution. brake fluid ››› . Storing tyres ● Lost valve caps should be replaced imme- Mark tyres when you remove them to indicate For the sake of the environment diately. the direction of rotation (left, right, forwards, Old tyres must be disposed of by qualified backwards). This ensures you will be able to personnel according to the laws in the coun- Changing wheels mount them correctly when you replace try concerned. them. When removed, the wheels and/or To ensure that the wear is equal on all tyres tyres should be stored in a cool, dry and pref- the wheels should be changed round from erably dark location. Do place tyres time to time according to the system not mounted on the wheel in a vertical position. Wheels ››› Fig. 250. The useful life of all the tyres will then be about the same time. Protect tyres not mounted on wheels from The design of wheel bolts is matched to the dirt by storing them in suitable bags and SEAT recommends you take the vehicle to a rims. If different rims are fitted, the correct standing them on the ground on their tread. specialised workshop to have the tyres wheel bolts with the right length and correct- changed. ly shaped bolt heads must be used. This en- WARNING sures that wheels are fitted securely and that the brake system functions correctly Tyres over 6 years old Aggressive fluids or substances could result in visible or invisible damage with the conse- ››› page 84. Tyres are subject to an ageing process as a quent risks. result of physical and chemical processes. For technical reasons, it is not generally pos- ● This may affect their performance. Tyres Always ensure that tyres do not come into sible to use the wheels from other vehicles. contact with chemical products, oil, grease, which are stored for long periods of time In some cases, this may also be true for the fuel, brake fluid or other aggressive substan- same model of wheel. without being used, harden and become ces. more fragile than tyres which are in constant The tyres and rims approved by SEAT are spe- use. cially matched to the characteristics of the SEAT recommends that tyres over six years vehicle and are critical to good road holding old are replaced with new tyres. This also ap- and safe handling. plies to tyres which appear to be in perfect 286 Wheels and tyres

Wheel bolts WARNING ● The tread depth of new tyres may vary, ac- Wheel bolts must be tightened to the correct cording to the type and make of tyre and the If the bolted joints of wheel rims with bolted tread pattern. torque ››› page 84. ring trims are not correctly tightened or loos- ened, this could result in serious accident. Replacing tyres Beadlock wheel rims ● Never loosen the bolted joints of wheel Technical data Technical Beadlock wheel rims have various compo- rims with bolted ring trims. ● Where possible, always replace both wheels on an axle (both wheels on the front nents. These are joined together by special ● Any work relating to wheel rims with bolted bolts using a special procedure. This ensures rims should be carried out at specialised axle or both wheels on the rear axle) ››› . good performance, a better seal, improved workshop. SEAT recommends taking your car ● Old tyres should only be replaced by SEAT safety and wheel run out. Therefore, worn in for technical service. approved tyres for the vehicle in question, Advice rims should always be replaced and must on- and in accordance with the maximum permit- ly be repaired in a specialised workshop. Note ted size, diameter, load and speed capacity. SEAT recommends visiting a technical service ● If replacing tyres, make sure the new ones ››› . A SEAT Service Centre should be consulted to find out whether wheels or tyres of different have an emergency ride system (Conti- sizes to those originally fitted by SEAT can be Seal/Run flat). Otherwise, we recommend Wheel rims with bolted trims fitted, and to find out about the combinations carrying a tyre mobility system.

Wheel rims may be fitted with interchangea- allowed between the front axle (axle 1) and ● Never use tyres which are larger than SEAT Operation ble trim parts which are attached to the rim the rear axle (axle 2). approved tyres. If the tyres are too big, they using self-locking bolts. Worn trims should may knock or rub against the chassis or other only be replaced at a specialised workshop. components, resulting in damage. SEAT recommends visiting a technical service Replacement of wheel rims and new ››› . tyres WARNING New tyres do not give maximum grip and will WARNING Emergencies New tyres not have reached their maximum braking ca- The use of worn or damaged wheel rims could ● When tyres are new, drive with extreme pacity to start with, and therefore need run- make driving more dangerous and result in caution for the first 500 km (310 miles), as ning in. serious accidents and damage. all tyres need to be run in. Tyres which have ● To prevent accidents and major damage, ● Only wheel rims which have been approved not been run in do not have such good grip extreme caution should be taken for the first for use with your vehicle should be used. or ››› braking capacity ››› . 500 km (310 miles). » Safety ● Inspect wheel rims regularly for damage ● All four wheels must be fitted with radial and replace as required. tyres of the same type, size (rolling circumference) and the same tread pattern. 287 Advice

WARNING Tyre pressure The pressure should therefore be checked at least once a month and before starting a There should be adequate space between the journey. tyres and the vehicle in accordance with the vehicle design. If this is not the case, the As a general rule, the pressures given are for tyres may rub against parts of the running cold tyres. When the tyres are hot, the pres- gear, chassis or brake lines, leading to faults sures are greater. in the brake system or to tread detachment, and the risk of burst tyres. Never deflate a hot tyre in order to obtain the required pressure. This could result in very ● The true tyre dimension should not be low tyre pressures which may lead to sudden greater than the dimensions of tyres manufactured and approved by SEAT and should blow-outs. not rub against parts of the vehicle. Checking tyre pressures

Note Tyre pressures should only be checked when the vehicle has not been driven for more than ● Although tyres may be shown as being the a few kilometres (miles) at low speeds in the same size, the true dimensions of different past three hours. types of tyre may vary with respect to the nominal size, or tread patterns may be differ- ● The tyre pressures should be checked regu- ent. Fig. 251 Position of tyre pressure specifica- larly, and only when the tyres are cold. Al- ● If you use tyres that are approved by SEAT, tion plate ways check all the tyres. Tyre pressures you can be sure that the true tyre dimensions should be checked more often in colder re- will be correct for your vehicle. For other tyre The correct tyre pressures for tyres fitted at gions, and only when the vehicle has not models, the tyre vendor should provide the the factory is shown on a label and is valid been driven recently. Always use a correctly- manufacturer's certificate with the tyre, indi- for summer and winter tyres. This label operating tyre gauge. cating that this type of tyre is suitable for ››› Fig. 251 is either on the driver door strut or your vehicle. This certificate should always ● Adjust tyre pressures to the loads carried in inside the fuel tank flap. be carried with the vehicle. the vehicle. Under-inflation or over-inflation will reduce ● After checking the pressure, always replace the life of the tyres considerably and also im- the valve caps, and where applicable, ob- pair the car's handling ››› . It is essential to serve the instructions given for adjusting the maintain the correct tyre pressures, especial- tyre control system ››› page 231. ly if driving at high speeds. Incorrect tyre pressure causes premature wear and could cause tyre blow-out. 288 Wheels and tyres

WARNING For the sake of the environment The minimum tread depth required by law in the majority of cases is 1.6 mm (1/16 of an If tyre pressures are too high or too low, the Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con- inch), measured in the tread grooves next to tyre may deflate or burst suddenly while driv- sumption. the tread wear indicators. Observe legal re- ing. This could result in a serious accident. quirements in each country. ● If the tyre pressure is too low, they could Note data Technical overheat, resulting in tread detachment or Winter tyres lose much of their performance even burst tyres. When checking tyre pressures, please ob- when their tread has worn to 4 mm serve the instructions for the tyre control sys- ● (5/32 inch). When driving at high speeds and/or fully tem ››› page 231. loaded, the tyre could suddenly overheat, The tread depth of new tyres may vary, ac- burst or be subject to tread detachment, with

cording to the type and make of tyre and the Advice the resultant loss of control of the vehicle. tread pattern. ● Tyre pressures which are too high or too Wear indicator depth profile low reduce the service life of the tyre, affect- Wear indicators on the tyre ing the vehicle's performance. The original tyres on your vehicle have ● Tyre pressures should be checked regularly, 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) high ››› Fig. 252 tread at least once a month and before long journeys. wear indicators running across the tread. A number of these indicators are equally Operation ● Adjust the pressures of all the tyres to the spaced around the tyre tread. Certain marks vehicle load. on the tyre walls (e.g. the letters “TWI” or ● Never deflate excess pressure from hot other symbols) indicate the position of the tyres. wear indicators. Tread wear indicators indicate if a tyre is CAUTION Fig. 252 Tyre tread: tread wear indicators worn. They must always be replaced before Emergencies ● Take care not to tilt the manometer when the tyre tread has worn to the level of the in- placing it on the valve. Otherwise, the valve Tread depth dicator. may be damaged. Certain driving conditions require a deeper ● If tyre valves are not protected by caps, or if tread, as well as needing the tread to be ap- WARNING the caps are not screwed on correctly, they proximately the same on the front and rear Driving with worn tyres is dangerous, and may become damaged. Check that the caps Safety tyres. This is particularly important when may lead to loss of control of the vehicle with are identical to the standard caps and have driving in winter, in cold temperatures and on serious consequences. » been correctly tightened. wet roads ››› .

289 Advice

● Tyres must be replaced before the wear in- ● If the vehicle comes with a tyre mobility Running gear settings: an incorrectly posi- dicators are at the same level as the tread system, where necessary seal the damaged tioned running gear increases the wear of pattern. tyre as shown in section ››› page 85. Use a tyres and affects your safety while driving. If ● Worn tyres have significantly reduced grip, specialised workshop for repair or replace- tyres wear too quickly, have the wheel align- especially on wet surfaces, increasing the ment. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT deal- ment checked at a specialised workshop. risk of “aquaplaning”. ership for this. WARNING ● Worn tyres make control of the vehicle The sealant at the lower part of the tyre tread more difficult in normal or difficult driving wraps around the foreign body and provision- If you notice unusual vibration or the car pulls conditions, increasing the braking distance ally seals the tyre. to one side while driving, this may indicate and the risk of skidding. that one of the tyres is damaged. Tyre wear ● Reduce speed immediately and stop, while observing the highway code. The wear of tyres depends on a number of Tyre damage ● Check the wheels and tyres for damage. factors, for example: ● Never carry on driving on worn tyres or Damage to wheels and tyres is often invisible ● Driving style. wheels. Request qualified assistance immedi- to the naked eye. If you notice unusual vibra- ately. tion or the car pulling to one side, this may ● Unbalanced wheels. ● If there is no visible exterior damage, drive ● indicate that one of the tyres is damaged Running gear settings. slowly and carefully to the nearest special- ››› . Driving style: Driving round bends quickly or ised workshop and have the vehicle checked. ● Slow down immediately if you think you sudden acceleration or braking speed accel- have a damaged wheel. erates tyre wear. When the driving style is ● Check the wheels and tyres for damage. normal, if the tyres wear too quickly, have the running gear settings checked at a special- ● If tyres are worn, stop driving and seek ised workshop. qualified assistance. Wheel run-out: The wheels on new vehicles ● If there is no visible exterior damage, drive are balanced. However, certain circumstan- slowly and carefully to the nearest special- ces may lead to imbalance (run-out), which is ised workshop and have the vehicle checked. detected as vibrations in the steering wheel. Run-out leads to wear of the steering and Foreign bodies in the tyre suspension. In the event of run out, the ● Do not remove foreign bodies if they have wheels should be balanced again. When a penetrated through the tyre wall! new wheel is fitted, it should be balanced again. 290 Wheels and tyres

Tyre code 12 Ratio of height to width (aspect ratio) Tyre code (example): Meaning

Tyre code (example): Meaning E4 ... E-mark certifying tyre complies with international legislation followed by Make, logotype Manufacturer a number denoting the country granting the authorisation. The au- Product name Name of tyre assigned by manufac- thorisation number ( several digits) data Technical turer. is shown below.

P215 / Size: DOT BT RA TY5 Tyre identification number (TINa), 55 R 16 1709 may be only on interior wall of wheel) P Passenger vehicle code. and date of manufacture: Advice Nominal width between 215 DOT The tyre complies with the walls, in mm. legal requirements of the US Department of Trans- 55 Height/width ratio in % port, responsible for tyre Tyre type (R indicates "ra- safety regulations. R dial"). BT Place of manufacture code. 16 Rim diameter in inches Operation Fig. 253 Universal code on tyres 91 V Load index ››› page 292 and speed RA Information about manu- 1 Radial rating ››› page 292. facturer and tyre size. 2 Rim diameter code XL Reinforced tyres (“Reinforced”). TY5 Manufacturer's tyre speci- 3 Load index & speed rating fications. M+S or M/S Winter tyres (mud and snow tyres) 4 DOT tyre identification number ››› page 292. 1709 Date of manufacture:

Week 17 of 2009. Emergencies 5 Severe snow conditions SSR or DSST, Specific manufacturer codes for run- 6 Tyre ply composition and materials used Eufonia, RFT, flat tyres. TWI This identifies the position of the ROF, RSC, ZP, Tread Wear Indicator ››› page 289. 7 Max. load rating Conti-Seal MAX LOAD US load rating, indicating maximum 8 Treadwear, traction and temperature RADIAL Radial tyre without inner tube. 615 KG permitted load per tyre. grades Safety TUBELESS (1356 LBS) 9 Max. permissible inflation pressure MAX INFLATION US limit, indicating maximum permit- 10 Passenger car tyre 350 KPA ted tyre pressure. » (51 PSI) 11 Nominal width of tyre in millimetres 291 Advice

Tyre code (example): Meaning mum grip and helps to avoid aquaplaning, Some manufacturers use the letters “ZR” for grip, noise and wear. tyres with a maximum authorised speed SIDEWALL 1 PLY Information about tyre wall compo- above 240 km/h (149 mph). RAYON nents: Tyre load rating 1 layer of rayon (artificial silk). The load rating code indicates the maximum TREAD 4 PLIES Information about tread compo- load in kilogrammes each wheel can carry Winter service 1 RAYON + nents: (load capacity). 2 STEEL + In the example, there are 4 layers be- 1 NYLON low the tread: 1 layer of rayon (artifi- 91 615 kg (1,356 pounds) Winter tyres* cial silk), 2 layers of steel reinforcement and 1 layer of nylon. 93 650 kg (1,433 pounds) In winter conditions winter tyres will consid- Information for the end consumer concerning the com- 95 690 kg (1,521 pounds) erably improve the vehicle's handling. The parative values of the established base tyres (standar- 97 730 kg (1,609 pounds) design of summer tyres (width, rubber com- dised test procedures): pound, tread pattern) gives less grip on ice 99 775 kg (1,709 pounds) and snow. Winter tyres also improve the vehi- TREADWEAR Relative service life of the tyre, with cle braking performance, reducing the brak- 280 respect to specific US standard test. Speed rating ing distance in winter weather. SEAT recom- TRACTION AA Braking capacity of tyre on wet sur- The speed rating indicates the maximum mend that winter tyres be fitted to the vehicle face (AA, A, B or C). speed permitted for the tyres. at temperatures below +7°C (+45°F).

TEMPERATURE A Tyre temperature resistance at higher P max. 150 km/h (93 mph) The performance of winter tyres is much re- test speeds (A, B or C). duced if the tyre tread is worn below 4 mm Q max. 160 km/h (99 mph) If there are different letters, they are specific codes of (1/16 inch). The age of the tyre is another the tyre manufacturer or specific national codes. R max. 170 km/h (106 mph) factor affecting performance, regardless of S max. 180 km/h (112 mph) the depth of the tyre tread. a) The letters TIN refer to the tyre serial number. T max. 190 km/h (118 mph) Please observe the following when using Tyres with directional tread patterns U max. 200 km/h (124 mph) winter tyres: Tyres with directional tread pattern have H max. 210 km/h (130 mph) ● Observe legal requirements in each coun- been designed to operate best when rotating V max. 240 km/h (149 mph) try. in only one direction. An arrow on the tyre Z max. 240 km/h (149 mph) sidewall indicates the direction of rotation on ● Winter tyres must be fitted on all four tyres with directional tread. Always observe W max. 270 km/h (168 mph) wheels. the direction of rotation indicated when Y max. 300 km/h (186 mph) ● Only use winter tyres in wintery weather mounting the wheel. This guarantees opti- conditions. 292 Wheels and tyres

● Only use winter tyres of the size authorised Please observe all instructions and warnings for the vehicle. when using snow chains ›››  page 49. ● Only use radial winter tyres of the same type, size (rolling circumference) and tread WARNING pattern. Although winter tyres help to make driving Technical data Technical ● Adjust speeds to within the limits indicated safer in the winter, you should not take un- (code letter on tyre) ››› . necessary risks. ● Adjust your speed and driving style to visi- Speed limit bility, road, traffic and weather conditions. ● Never exceed the maximum permitted

A code letter indicating the speed limit is Advice speed or loads specified for the type of winter stamped on all winter tyres page 292. ››› tyre fitted on your vehicle. In some vehicles, it is possible to set a speed warning in the MFD (multifunction For the sake of the environment display) menu on the instrument panel ›››  page 26. When winter is over, change back to summer tyres when you have the time. In tempera-

If you use V-rated tyres the speed limits and tures above +7°C (+45°F), performance will Operation tyre pressure will be determined by engine be improved if summer tyres are used. Fuel size. Please ask your technical service centre consumption, wear and noises while driving for further information on the maximum per- will all be reduced. mitted speed and the required pressures for the tyres. Note ● If the vehicle is fitted with a tyre control

All-wheel drive* Emergencies system, this should be “reprogrammed” Thanks to its all-wheel drive, your car will whenever a tyre is changed ››› page 233. have plenty of traction in winter conditions, ● Please ask at a technical service centre for even with the standard tyres. Nevertheless, information about the permitted sizes for SEAT still recommend that winter tyres or all- winter tyres.

season tyres should be fitted on all four Safety wheels when winter road conditions are expected, mainly because this will give a better braking response.

293 Technical data

Abbreviations used in the Technical Specifi- through a viewer in the windscreen Technical data cations section ››› Fig. 254. This viewer is located in the lower part of the windscreen. The vehicle identifica- Technical features kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement. tion number (chassis number) is also stam- Pferdestärke (horsepower), formerly ped on the right water drain channel. The wa- PS used to denote engine power. ter drain channel is located between the sus- Important information pension tower and the wing. Open the bon- rpm Revolutions per minute - engine speed. net to read the vehicle identification number Important Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.  ››› page 268.

The information in the vehicle documentation Cetane number, indication of the diesel CZ Vehicle data plate always takes precedence over the informa- combustion power. The vehicle data plate is attached to the lug- tion in this Instruction Manual. Research octane number, indication of RON gage compartment, and contains the follow- the knock resistance of petrol. All technical specifications provided in this ing information: documentation are valid for the standard model in Spain. The vehicle data card inclu- ● Vehicle identification number (chassis ded in the Maintenance Programme or the Vehicle identification data number). vehicle registration documents shows which ● Vehicle type, engine power, gearbox type. engine is installed in the vehicle. ● Engine and gearbox code, paint number, The figures may be different depending interior equipment. whether additional equipment is fitted, for ● Optional extras, PR numbers. different models, for special vehicles and for other countries. These data are also provided in the Mainte- nance Programme.

Type plate The type plate is visible when the driver door is opened, on the lower part of the strut. Ve- Fig. 254 Vehicle identification number. hicles for certain export countries do not Vehicle identification number have a type plate. The vehicle identification number (chassis The manufacturer's type plate contains the number) can be read from outside the vehicle following data:

294 Technical features

● Gross vehicle weight Weights proved trailer weights are valid for vehicles in ● Maximum authorised weight of vehicle and the EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (50 trailer Kerb weight refers to the basic model with a mph) (in certain circumstances up to 100 fuel tank filled to 90% capacity and without km/h (62 mph)). The figures may be different ● Maximum gross front axle weight optional extras. The figure quoted includes in other countries. All data in the official vehi-

● Maximum rear axle weight 75 kg to allow for the weight of the driver. cle documentation takes precedence over data Technical these data at all times . Special versions, optional equipment fittings ››› or retro-fitting accessories will increase the Fuel consumption weight of the vehicle ››› . Drawbar loads The maximum permitted drawbar load on the

Approved consumption values are derived Advice WARNING ball joint of the towing bracket must not ex- from measurements performed or supervised ceed 100 kg. by certified EU laboratories, according to the ● Please note that the centre of gravity may legislation in force at the time (for more infor- shift when transporting heavy objects; this In the interest of road safety, we recommend mation, see the Publications Office of the Eu- may affect vehicle handling and lead to an ac- that you always tow approaching the maxi- ropean Union on the EUR-Lex website: © Eu- cident. Always adjust your speed and driving mum drawbar load. The response of the trail- style to suit road conditions and require- ropean Union, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/) and er on the road will be poor, if the drawbar ments. load is too small. apply to the specified vehicle characteristics. Operation ● Never exceed the gross axle weight rating The values relating to fuel consumption and or the gross vehicle weight rating. If the per- If the maximum permissible drawbar load CO2 emissions can be found in the documen- missible axle load or the permissible total cannot be met (e.g. with small, empty and tation provided to the purchaser of the vehi- weight is exceeded, the driving characteris- light-weight single axle trailers or tandem cle at the time of purchase. tics of the vehicle may change, leading to ac- axle trailers with a wheelbase of less than 1 cidents, injuries and damage to the vehicle. metre), a minimum of 4% of the actual trailer Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions depend weight is legally required for the drawbar on the equipment/features of each individual load. Emergencies vehicle, as well as on the driving style, road conditions, traffic conditions, environmental Towing a trailer WARNING conditions, load or number of passengers. ● For safety reasons, do not exceed the 80 Trailer weights Note km/h (50 mph) limit. This is also valid in countries where higher speeds are permitted. Safety In practice, and considering all the factors Trailer weight ● Never exceed the maximum trailer weights mentioned here, consumption values can dif- The trailer weights and drawbar loads ap- or the drawbar load. If the permissible axle » fer from those calculated in the current Euro- proved are selected in intensive trials accord- pean regulations. ing to precisely defined criteria. The ap- 295 Technical data

load or the permissible total weight is excee- wrench ››› . The tightening torque for steel ded, the driving characteristics of the vehicle and alloy wheels is 140 Nm. may change, leading to accidents, injuries and damage to the vehicle. WARNING ● Check the tyre pressure at least once per month. Checking the tyre pressure is very important. If the tyre pressure is too high or too Wheels low, there is an increased danger of accidents - particularly at high speeds. Tyre pressure, snow chains, wheel ● If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts bolts is too low, they could loosen while the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tight- Tyre pressures ening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and The sticker with the tyre pressure values can threads can be damaged. be found on the inside of the fuel tank flap. The tyre pressure values given there are for Note cold tyres. The slightly raised pressures of We recommend that you ask your Technical warm tyres must not be reduced. ››› Service for information about appropriate The pressure for winter tyres is 0.2 bar wheel, tyre and snow chain size. (2.9 psi / 20 kPa) higher than that of summer tyres.

Snow chains Snow chains may be fitted only to the front wheels. Consult the section “wheels” of this manual.

Wheel bolts After the wheels have been changed, the tightening torque of the wheel bolts should be checked as soon as possible with a torque

296 Technical features

Engine data

Petrol engine 1.4 110 kW (150 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel Technical data Technical

110 (150)/5,000-6,000 250/1,500-3,500 4/1,395 Super 95 RON

Manual Automatic

5 seats 7 seats 5 seats 7 seats Advice

Top speed (km/h) 200 (VI) 198 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.7 6.7

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9.9 9.9

Maximum authorised weight (in kg) 2,300 2,420 2,310 2,430 Operation Weight in running order (with driver) (in kg) 1,703 1,755 1,717 1,768

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (en kg) 1,190 1,190 1,200 1,200

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (en kg) 1,160 1,280 1,160 1,280

Permitted roof load (in kg) 100 100

Maximum weight trailer without brakes (in kg) 750 750 Emergencies

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (in kg) 2,000 2,000

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (in kg) 1,800 1,800 Safety

297 Technical data

Petrol engine 2.0 162 kW (220 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

162 (220)/4,500-6,200 350/1,500-4,400 4/1,984 Super 95 RON

Automatic

5 seats 7 seats

Top speed (km/h) 226 (V)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 5.4

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 7.8

Maximum authorised weight (in kg) 2,360 2,490

Weight in running order (with driver) (in kg) 1,790 1,838

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (en kg) 1,250 1,250

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (en kg) 1,160 1,290

Permitted roof load (in kg) 100

Maximum weight trailer without brakes (in kg) 750

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (in kg) 2,300 2,400

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (in kg) 2,200

298 Technical features

Diesel engine 2.0 85 kW (115 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

Diesel according to standard EN 590, min. 85 (115)/3,500 280/1,750-3,000 4/1,968

51 CZ data Technical

5 seats 7 seats

Top speed (km/h) 184 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 8.4 Advice

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 12.6

Maximum authorised weight (in kg) 2,390 2,520

Weight in running order (with driver) (in kg) 1,772 1,822

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (en kg) 1,260 1,260 Operation Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (en kg) 1,180 1,310

Permitted roof load (in kg) 100

Maximum weight trailer without brakes (in kg) 750

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (in kg) 2,200

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (in kg) 2,000 Emergencies Safety

299 Technical data

Diesel engine 2.0 110 kW (150 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

Diesel according to standard EN 590, min. 110 (150)/3,500 340/1,750-3,000 4/1,968 51 CZ

Manual Automatic All-wheel drive

5 seats 7 seats 5 seats 7 seats 5 seats 7 seats

Top speed (km/h) 200 (VI) 198 (VI) 198 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.3 7.3 7.1

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.3 10.3 10.6

Maximum authorised weight (in kg) 2,390 2,520 2,410 2,540 2,560 2,590

Weight in running order (with driver) (in kg) 1,772 1,882 1,793 1,843 1,891 1,952

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (en kg) 1,260 1,260 1,280 1,280 1,320 1,320

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (en kg) 1,180 1,310 1,180 1,310 1,290 1,320

Permitted roof load (in kg) 100 100 100

Maximum weight trailer without brakes (in kg) 750 750 750

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (in kg) 2,300 2,400 2,300 2,400 2,400

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (in kg) 2,200 2,200 2,400

300 Technical features

Diesel engine 2.0 135 kW (184 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

Diesel according to standard EN 590, min. 135 (184)/3,500-4,000 380/1,750-3,000 4/1,968

51 CZ data Technical

Manual Automatic Automatic all-wheel drive

5 seats 7 seats 5 seats 7 seats 5 seats 7 seats

Top speed (km/h) 215 (VI) 213 (VI) 211 (VII) Advice

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.4 6.4 5.7

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 8.9 8.9 8.9

Maximum authorised weight (in kg) 2,400 2,550 2,400 2,550 2,560 2,590

Weight in running order (with driver) (in kg) 1,800 1,841 1,804 1,845 1,923 1,974 Operation Maximum authorised weight on front axle (en kg) 1,290 1,290 1,290 1,290 1,320 1,320

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (en kg) 1,160 1,310 1,160 1,310 1,290 1,320

Permitted roof load (in kg) 100 100 100

Maximum weight trailer without brakes (in kg) 750 750 750

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (in kg) 2,400 2,400 2,400 Emergencies

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (in kg) 2,200 2,200 2,400 Safety

301 Technical data

Dimensions

Fig. 255 Dimensions

ALHAMBRA

A/B Front and rear projection (mm) 968/966

C Wheelbase (mm) 2,919

D Length (mm) 4,854

E/F Front/reara) track width (mm) 1,569/1,617

G Width (mm) 1,904

H Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,720

Turning radius (m) 11.9

a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.

302 Index

Adjusting the seats All-wheel drive Index front seats ...... 140 snow chains ...... 49 rear seats ...... 141 winter tyres ...... 293 A AFS ...... 130 Ambient lighting ...... 134 Abroad Air-conditioning Anodized surfaces ...... 254 extended stay abroad with your vehicle . . . . . 260 malfunctions ...... 175 Antenna ...... 246, 260 sale of vehicle ...... 260 Airbag covers ...... 17 Anti-freeze ...... 40 ABS Airbags Anti-lock brake system ...... 203 see Anti-lock brake system ...... 203 see Airbag system ...... 18 Anti-lock system ...... 203 Accessories ...... 244 Airbag system ...... 17, 68 Anti-puncture ...... 44, 85 Acoustic alarm activation ...... 70 Anti-puncture kit ...... 44, 85 control and warning lamps ...... 32 cleaning dash panel ...... 259 Anti-puncture set ...... 85 seatbelt unfastened ...... 62 control lamp ...... 72 Anti-theft alarm ...... 117 Adaptive headlights description ...... 69 false alarms ...... 118 dynamic ...... 130 front airbags ...... 17, 71 trailer ...... 238 AdBlue functioning ...... 70 Anti-theft alarm system control and warning lamps ...... 266 head-protection airbag ...... 20 anti-tow system ...... 118 information ...... 266 knee airbag ...... 18 vehicle interior monitoring ...... 118 minimum quantity for a refill ...... 266 locking the vehicle after deployment ...... 113 Anti-theft security system ...... 117 refilling ...... 267 repairs ...... 246 Anti-tow system ...... 118 specifications ...... 267 side airbags ...... 19 Anti-trap function tank filling capacity ...... 265 use of child seats ...... 18, 73 panoramic sunroof ...... 127 Additional heater vehicle care ...... 259 sun blind ...... 127 see "Auxiliary heater" ...... 177 Air conditioning ...... 173 Antifreeze ...... 40, 276 Adjusting air recirculation ...... 176 Armrests ...... 149 folding the backrest of the front passenger air vents ...... 176 Ashtray ...... 170 seat ...... 148 climatronic ...... 36, 173, 174 ASR front seats ...... 140 controls ...... 36, 174 see Brake assist systems ...... 204 lights ...... 133 electronic manual air conditioning ...... 174 see Braking assist systems ...... 205 rear head restraints ...... 15, 142 indirect ventilation ...... 176 switching on and off ...... 205 seats ...... 57 rear seats ...... 174 see also Traction control system ...... 203 seat with position memory ...... 146 special features ...... 175 Assistance call ...... 109 Adjusting the head restraint user instructions ...... 174 Assistance systems rear head restraints ...... 15 Air recirculation ...... 176 electronic differential lock system (EDS) . . . . 204 Adjusting the head restraints Air vents ...... 176 electronic drive torque management (XDS) . . 204 rear head restraints ...... 142 Alcantara ...... 257 launch-Control programme ...... 196

303 Index

tiredness detection ...... 229 AUX-IN ...... 108 operating ...... 223 tyre monitoring indicator ...... 233 Auxiliary heater ...... 177 towing ...... 227 Assisted starting ...... 51 automatic off ...... 263 Bonnet ...... 11 Assist systems operating instructions ...... 180 opening and closing ...... 270 adaptive headlights ...... 130 programming ...... 179 Boot hatch auto Hold ...... 206 remote control ...... 178 emergency locking and unlocking ...... 10 blind spot detector (BSD) with rear cross traf- remote control range ...... 179 Bottle holders ...... 168 fic alert (RTA) ...... 222 remote control: replacing the battery ...... 179 Brake brake assist system (BAS) ...... 204 special features ...... 178 brake servo ...... 191 cruise control system ...... 219 switching off ...... 178 emergency braking function ...... 189 dynamic chassis control (DCC) ...... 230 switching on ...... 178 Brake assist system ...... 203 lane Assist ...... 220 things to note ...... 180 Brake assist systems ...... 203 lane assist system ...... 220 Auxiliary heater remote control Brake fluid ...... 41 optical parking system ...... 210 auxiliary heater ...... 178 specification ...... 278 park Assist ...... 211 replacing the battery ...... 179 Brakes ...... 187 park assist system ...... 211 brake assist systems ...... 203 parking assistance ...... 209 B brake fluid ...... 278 parking distance warning system ...... 209 BAS brake fluid level ...... 279 rear assist ...... 215 see Brake assist systems ...... 204 brake pads ...... 190 rear cross traffic alert (RTA) ...... 222 Battery changing the brake fluid ...... 279 rear View Camera ...... 215 changing in the vehicle key ...... 111 control and warning lamps ...... 187 sign Assist ...... 227 Before setting off ...... 56 electronic parking brake ...... 189 Start-Stop ...... 207 Belt height adjustment ...... 67 running in new brake pads ...... 190 start assistance ...... 206 Belt tension device Brake servo ...... 191, 203 traction control when accelerating (ASR) . . .204, 205 service and disposal ...... 68 Brake system traffic signal detection ...... 227 Belt tensioner ...... 67 fault ...... 191 Auto Hold ...... 206 Belt tension limiter ...... 67 Brake systems ...... 203 Automatic belt retractor ...... 67 Belt tightening ...... 67 Braking Automatic car wash Bicycle carrier brake assist system ...... 203 switching Auto Hold off ...... 207 fitting on the tow hitch ball ...... 237 BSD switching the start assist off ...... 207 maximum load ...... 237 see Blind spot detector ...... 222 Automatic dipped beam control ...... 130 Biodiesel ...... 265 Bulb malfunction Automatic gearbox ...... 193 Blind spot detector (BSD) ...... 222 see Changing bulbs ...... 91 driving tips ...... 195 control lamps ...... 222 emergency release ...... 35 driving situations ...... 225 C ignition key removal lock ...... 184 indication in the external rear view mirror . . . 223 Capacities ...... 39 kick-down ...... 195 malfunction ...... 222 windshield wiper fluid tank ...... 280 malfunction ...... 196 304 Index

Card compartment ...... 165 Changing windscreen wipers ...... 54 wheels ...... 254 Caring for paintwork ...... 253 Charging the battery ...... 51 windows ...... 252 Caring for the vehicle Checking Cleaning the vehicle exterior ...... 250 tyre pressures ...... 288 high pressure cleaners ...... 252 Catalytic converter ...... 201 Checking fluid levels ...... 271 Climatronic ...... 36, 173 control and warning lamps ...... 200 Child safety ...... 74 Close ...... 110 malfunction ...... 201 Child seat ...... 21 bonnet ...... 11 CCS ...... 219 deactivating the passenger front airbag ...... 18 Closing ...... 110 see cruise control ...... 32 integrated child seat ...... 78 bonnet ...... 11 CD changer ...... 163, 168 in the passenger seat ...... 76 electric windows ...... 11 Central locking ...... 112 ISOFIX system ...... 77 luggage compartment ...... 10, 123 anti-theft alarm ...... 117 mounting systems ...... 22 panoramic sunroof ...... 12 keyless Access ...... 115 on rear seats ...... 77 Clothes hook ...... 168 manual locking ...... 9 regulations ...... 76 Code number ...... 45, 83 opening doors individually ...... 113 safety instructions ...... 21, 75 Combined weight rating ...... 242 Central locking system securing with seat belt ...... 22 Coming Home ...... 131 after airbag deployment ...... 113 Top Tether system ...... 23 Compartment for (sun)glasses ...... 164 description ...... 113 transporting children in the vehicle ...... 75 Compartments remote control key ...... 113 weight categories ...... 76 centre console ...... 165 Centre armrest ...... 149 Child seats ...... 75 front central armrest ...... 165 Cetane number (diesel fuel) ...... 265 disabling the front passenger front airbag . . . . 73 Compass ...... 103 Changing a bulb Chrome parts ...... 254 Connectors control lamp ...... 92 Cigarette lighter ...... 170 faults ...... 172 Changing a wheel ...... 45, 84 Cleaning ...... 250 Control and warning lamps subsequent work ...... 49 compartments ...... 259 ABS ...... 187 wheel bolts ...... 46 dash panel ...... 259 adBlue ...... 266 Changing bulbs ...... 91 engine compartment ...... 255 airbag system ...... 72 body ...... 95 fabrics ...... 256 blind spot detector (BSD) ...... 222 front bumper ...... 94 folding the rear view mirrors ...... 140 brake system ...... 187 halogen headlights ...... 92 natural leather ...... 258 catalytic converter ...... 200 number plate light ...... 97 seatbelts ...... 259 changing bulbs ...... 92 rear lid ...... 95 stickers ...... 252 changing gear ...... 192 rear lights ...... 95 synthetic leather ...... 258 coolant ...... 275 xenon headlights ...... 93 textile covers ...... 257 door ...... 119 Changing gear trims ...... 257 emission control system ...... 200 control and warning lamps ...... 192 washing the vehicle ...... 250 engine management ...... 200 Changing the blades ...... 87 washing the vehicle with high pressure clean- engine oil sensor ...... 272 ers ...... 252 305 Index

ESC ...... 187 Correct position ...... 57 Disposal for the seat belt ...... 62 driver ...... 57 belt tension device ...... 68 fuel level ...... 263 Counter steering assistance system ...... 182 Door ...... 119 generator ...... 281 Crossing through water childproof lock ...... 121 indication of break pad wear ...... 187 salt water ...... 202 emergency locking and unlocking ...... 8 key ...... 111 Cruise control ...... 219 opening and closing ...... 8 lane assist system ...... 220 Cruise control system (CCS) ...... 219 warning lamp ...... 119 lights ...... 128 control lamp ...... 219 Door handle ...... 8 locking the steering column ...... 181 operations ...... 219 Door lock ...... 8 overview ...... 32, 105 warning lamp ...... 219 Door lock cylinder ...... 8 rear cross traffic alert (RTA) ...... 222 Cruise Control System (CCS) ...... 32 Drawbar load ...... 234 rear lid ...... 122 loading the trailer ...... 239 refuelling ...... 263 D Drawers ...... 167 remote control ...... 178 Dangers of not using a seat belt ...... 63 Drink holder tyre monitoring indicator ...... 232 Dash panel ...... 99 central console ...... 169 vehicle battery ...... 281 airbag system ...... 259 Drink holders ...... 168 windscreen washer fluid level ...... 135 Data registry ...... 247 rear ...... 169 Control of function Data storage during the journey ...... 247 Driving rain sensor ...... 137 Daytime running lights ...... 129 automatic gearbox ...... 195 Controls on the steering wheel DCC cross country ...... 56 operating the audio system and telephone . . 106 see Dynamic chassis control ...... 230 data storage ...... 247 Control units ...... 247 De-icing the locks ...... 255 driving abroad ...... 202 reprogramming ...... 247 Diagnostics connector ...... 248 driving through water ...... 202 Convenience closing Diesel economical ...... 198 windows ...... 125 refuelling ...... 265 fuel gauge ...... 263 Convenience functions Diesel particulate filter ...... 201 fuel level too low ...... 263 reprogramming ...... 247 malfunction ...... 201 parking downhill ...... 190 Convenience opening recommended gear ...... 197 parking uphill ...... 190 windows ...... 125 Differential lock towing ...... 89 Convenient entry function for the third row of see Braking assist systems ...... 204 trailer ...... 240 seats ...... 147 Digital clock ...... 100 undercarriage guard ...... 56 Cooling system Dimensions ...... 302 with a trailer ...... 234 checking the coolant ...... 274 Directional tread pattern Driving abroad topping up with coolant ...... 274 tyres ...... 49 headlights ...... 133 Cornering lights Disconnecting devices ...... 283 Driving in winter see "Static cornering lights" ...... 130 Disconnecting the passenger front airbag ...... 18 fuel consumption ...... 199 static ...... 130 Display ...... 100, 101 snow chains ...... 49 306 Index

tread depth ...... 289 Electronic differential lock ...... 203 Engine and ignition ...... 182 tyre pressures ...... 288 Electronic differential lock system (EDS) ...... 204 12 volt power sockets ...... 171 windscreen washer bottle ...... 253 Electronic drive torque management (XDS) . . . . 204 ignition lock ...... 183 Driving safety ...... 56 Electronic immobiliser ...... 186 immobiliser ...... 186 Driving through water ...... 202 operating fault ...... 182 pre-heating ...... 185 Driving tips Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...... 203 starting the engine ...... 183, 185 for a loaded vehicle ...... 150 Emergencies ...... 82 starting the engine with Keyless Access . . . . . 184 Driving with a trailer bulbs ...... 43 stopping the engine ...... 186 extinguisher ...... 236 changing a wheel ...... 45 unauthorised vehicle key ...... 183 technical requirements ...... 235 emergency towing of the vehicle ...... 50 Engine bonnet ...... 268 Duplicate keys ...... 110 extinguishers ...... 82 Engine compartment ...... 11, 268 Dynamic chassis control (DCC) first aid kit ...... 82 battery ...... 41, 280 control ...... 230 fuses ...... 42 brake fluid ...... 41, 278 operation ...... 230 hazard warning lights ...... 132 coolant ...... 40, 274 Dynamic Chassis Control (DCC) ...... 230 jump leads ...... 51 engine oil ...... 39, 271, 274 fault ...... 231 puncture ...... 44 opening and closing ...... 270 Dynamic headlight range control ...... 133 replacing a blown fuse ...... 43 windscreen washer reservoir ...... 41, 280 vehicle tool kit ...... 82 Engine coolant ...... 40 E warning triangle ...... 82 checking the level ...... 274, 277 E10 Emergency braking function ...... 189 control and warning lamps ...... 275 see Ethanol (fuel) ...... 264 Emergency locking and unlocking ...... 89 G12 plus-plus ...... 40, 276 EDL driver door ...... 8 G12 plus-plus ...... 40 see Electronic differential lock ...... 203 panoramic sliding sunroof ...... 13 G13 ...... 40, 276 EDS passenger side door ...... 9 specifications ...... 40, 276 see Braking assist systems ...... 204 Emergency unlocking tank filler neck ...... 277 Electric boot hatch ...... 10 temperature indicator ...... 275 windows ...... 11 doors ...... 8 topping-up ...... 277 Electrical devices ...... 171, 181, 239 Emergency unlocking the boot hatch Engine data ...... 297 Electrical socket boot hatch ...... 10 Engine management ...... 200 trailer ...... 238 Emission control system control lamp ...... 200 Electric child safety lock ...... 121 control and warning lamps ...... 200 Engine oil ...... 39, 271 Electric sliding door Emissions data ...... 294 checking oil level ...... 273 opening and closing ...... 120 Engine consumption ...... 273, 274 Electric sliding doors assisted starting ...... 51 control and warning lamps ...... 272 rollback anti-trap function ...... 121 noises ...... 186 dipstick ...... 273 Electric windows ...... 11 running in ...... 197 specifications ...... 272 see Windows ...... 125 topping up ...... 274 307 Index

Environment Filling capacities Fuel tank flap environmental compatibility ...... 197 AdBlue tank ...... 265 opening and closing ...... 39 Environmental Filling the tank ...... 261, 263 Function control ecological driving ...... 198 Fire extinguisher ...... 82 tow hitch ...... 239 Environmental tip First-aid kit Fuses ...... 42, 90 refuelling ...... 263 storage ...... 82 fuse box ...... 90 Equipment ...... 244 Fitting identification using colours ...... 42 ESC tow hitch ...... 241 identifying blown fuses ...... 43 electronic stability control ...... 203 Floor mats ...... 60 preparation before replacing ...... 43 Ethanol (fuel) ...... 264 Fluid Level control ...... 39 replacing ...... 43 Event Data Recorder ...... 247 Fog light ...... 25 Exhaust gas purification system ...... 200 Folding down rear seats G Exterior mirrors load space ...... 153 Gearbox ...... 192 adjusting ...... 16 Folding table ...... 167 emergency release ...... 35 vehicle care ...... 252 Folding the backrest of the front passenger seat 148 Gearbox lever ...... 34 Exterior rear view mirrors Folding wheel chocks ...... 83 Gear change ...... 34 control of the function ...... 140 Front airbags ...... 71 automatic gearbox ...... 34, 193 electric exterior mirrors ...... 140 Front passenger front airbag changing gears manually ...... 193 exterior ...... 139 control lamp ...... 73 gear recommendation ...... 196 folding the rear view mirrors ...... 140 disconnection ...... 73 manual gear change ...... 34 Exterior view ...... 5, 6 Front seat putting the vehicle in gear (automatic gear- Extinguisher manual adjustment ...... 13 box) ...... 193 driving with a trailer ...... 236 Front wiper blades putting the vehicle in gear (manual gearbox) 193 change ...... 54 Tiptronic ...... 195 F cleaning ...... 54 Gear engaged ...... 34 Fabrics: cleaning ...... 256 Fuel ...... 39, 264 General instrument panel Fastening rings ...... 157 diesel ...... 265 instrument panel ...... 99 Fault refuelling ...... 264 General overview of the engine compartment . . 271 dynamic chassis control (DCC) ...... 231 savings ...... 198 Generator ...... 281 panoramic sunroof ...... 127 Fuel consumption Glove compartment ...... 166 park assist system ...... 212 why does fuel consumption increase? ...... 201 Glove compartment lighting ...... 134 parking distance warning system ...... 210 Fuel gauge rear assist ...... 217 control lamp ...... 263 H Fault memory petrol ...... 263 Hand brake connector ...... 248 Fuel tank cap see Parking brake ...... 189 reading ...... 248 opening and closing ...... 39 Hazard warning lights ...... 25, 132 Head-on collisions and the laws of physics . . . . . 63 308 Index

Headlamp range adjustment ...... 99 Indications on the display ...... 101 Keyless Access locking and ignition system Headlight range control ...... 133 outside temperature ...... 102 see Keyless Access ...... 115 Headlights Information call ...... 109 Keys adaptive headlights ...... 130 Instrument panel ...... 27, 100 control lamp ...... 111 driving abroad ...... 133 control and warning lamps ...... 32, 105 locking and unlocking ...... 8 headlight adjustment ...... 130 display ...... 27, 100, 101 remote control ...... 110 headlight washers ...... 136 general instrument panel ...... 99 replacing the battery ...... 111 Head restraint instruments ...... 100 spare key ...... 110 assembly and removal ...... 143 menus ...... 28 synchronising ...... 112 Head restraints ...... 143 service intervals ...... 103 unlocking and locking ...... 113, 114 adjustment ...... 15, 142 symbols ...... 32, 105 vehicle key ...... 110 Headrests Instruments ...... 100 adjustment ...... 15, 142 Integrated child seat ...... 78 L assembly and removal ...... 143 removing ...... 80 Labels and plates ...... 260 Heat and air conditioning ...... 173 seat belt routing ...... 80 Lane Assist ...... 220 Heated rear window ...... 37 setting up ...... 79 Lane assist system ...... 220 Heated windscreen ...... 37 Interior door release lever ...... 99 control lamp ...... 220 Heating and air conditioning Interior lights ...... 26 malfunction ...... 220 controls ...... 36 Interior rear vision mirror ...... 137 operation mode ...... 221 Hitch ball anti-dazzle ...... 138 when is it necessary to disconnect it? ...... 221 electric release ...... 236 Interior view Lane Assist system ...... 220 Horn ...... 99 left guide ...... 7 Leaving Home ...... 131 How to jump start ...... 51 ISOFIX ...... 23 Lift platform ...... 249 Hubcaps ...... 45 ISOFIX system ...... 23 Lighting of the instrument panel ...... 133 Lights ...... 24, 128 I J AUTO ...... 130 Identifying letters on engine ...... 294 Jack ...... 45, 82, 84 automatic dipped beam control ...... 130 Ignition ...... 24 mounting points ...... 47 coming home ...... 131 see Engine and ignition ...... 182 Jump leads ...... 51 control and warning lamps ...... 128 Ignition lock ...... 24 cornering lights ...... 130 removal lock ...... 184 K daytime running lights ...... 129 unauthorised vehicle key ...... 183 Keyless Access dipped beam headlights ...... 128 Immobiliser ...... 186 keyless-Entry ...... 115 driving abroad ...... 133 In case of emergency ...... 82 keyless-Exit ...... 115 fog lights ...... 25 Indication on display locking and unlocking the vehicle ...... 115 functions ...... 129 Sign Assist ...... 228 starter button ...... 184 hazard warning lights ...... 25 things to note ...... 116 headlight range control ...... 133 309 Index

interior lights ...... 134 Locking the doors manually if central locking Mobile telephone leaving home ...... 131 fails to work ...... 9 use without an exterior aerial ...... 248 light controls ...... 128 Luggage ...... 152 Mobile tow hitch ball lighting of the instruments ...... 133 Luggage compartment ...... 10, 122, 152 fitting a bicycle carrier ...... 237 lighting of the switches ...... 133 closing ...... 123 Model plate ...... 294 main beam headlights ...... 128 driving with the rear lid open ...... 151 Motor oil main beam lever ...... 129 electronic locking ...... 123 oil properties ...... 40 main beams ...... 25 electronic opening ...... 123 Multifunction display ...... 29 parking light ...... 129 emergency unlocking ...... 10 reading lights ...... 134 extension ...... 153 N side lights ...... 128 folding down rear seats to create load space . 153 Net switch ...... 24 luggage compartment lighting ...... 134 luggage compartment ...... 161 turn signal lever ...... 129 net ...... 161 Net partition ...... 156 Load compartment in the luggage compartment net partition ...... 156 Noise see Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . 152 rails and attachment system ...... 158 tyres ...... 293 Loading the luggage compartment ...... 152 shelf ...... 155 Noises driving with the rear lid open ...... 151 see also Loading the luggage compartment . 152 auxiliary heater ...... 181 Loading the vehicle Luggage compartment baggage net ...... 161 brake assist systems ...... 205 fastening rings ...... 157 Luggage compartment hatch ...... 10 engine ...... 186 general advice ...... 150 Lumbar massage ...... 145 parking brake ...... 190 luggage compartment ...... 10 Lumbar support ...... 140 Notes for the user ...... 260 net partition ...... 156 Number of seats ...... 59 rails and attachment system ...... 158 M roof carrier system ...... 162 Main beam lever ...... 129 O trailer ...... 239 Main panel Octane rating (petrol) ...... 264 transporting a load ...... 151 turn signal and main beam lever ...... 129 Odometer vehicle loaded ...... 151 Malfunction partial ...... 100 Loads on the axles ...... 295 air conditioner ...... 175 total ...... 100 Locking and unlocking automatic gearbox ...... 196 Oil properties ...... 40 electric panoramic sunroof ...... 126 blind spot detector (BSD) ...... 222 Open and close ...... 110 electric sliding door ...... 120 catalytic converter ...... 201 Opening ...... 110 in the lock cylinder ...... 8 diesel particulate filter ...... 201 bonnet ...... 11 luggage compartment ...... 123 lane assist system ...... 220 electric windows ...... 11 sliding door ...... 119 windows ...... 126 fuel tank flap ...... 263 sun blind ...... 127 Mobile phone ...... 108, 246 panoramic sunroof ...... 12 with Keyless Access ...... 115 Mobile phones ...... 246 Locking button ...... 194

310 Index

Opening and closing ...... 8 preparing to park ...... 213 Pushing the vehicle ...... 182 bonnet ...... 11 stopping ...... 213 by remote control ...... 113 switching on or off (leaving the parking R door ...... 119 space) ...... 214 Radio-operated remote control electric panoramic sunroof ...... 126 switching on or off (parking) ...... 213 see Keys ...... 110 electric sliding door ...... 120 Park Assist system ...... 211 Radio reception electric windows ...... 11 Parking ...... 187, 190 antenna ...... 260 fuel tank flap ...... 263 Parking assistance ...... 209, 211 operating faults ...... 261 in the lock cylinder ...... 8 Parking brake Rails and attachment element system luggage compartment ...... 10 automatic release ...... 189 baggage net ...... 159 panoramic sunroof ...... 12 connection ...... 189 Rails and attachment system ...... 158 sliding door ...... 119 disengaging ...... 189 Rain sensor ...... 136 sun blind ...... 127 electronic ...... 189 control of function ...... 137 with Keyless Access ...... 115 emergency braking function ...... 189 Raising the vehicle ...... 47 Opening doors individually ...... 113 Parking distance warning system ...... 208 lift platform ...... 249 Operating fault fault ...... 210 Rear assist ...... 215 immobiliser ...... 182 optical parking system ...... 210 fault ...... 217 Optical parking system ...... 210 with towing ...... 210 mode 1 ...... 218 Outside temperature ...... 102 Parking light ...... 129, 209 mode 2 ...... 218 Overview Passenger front airbag things to note ...... 217 control and warning lamps ...... 32 disconnecting ...... 18 Rear Assist Pedals ...... 58, 60 instructions for use ...... 216 P Petrol screen ...... 216 Paintwork additives ...... 264 Rear cross traffic alert ...... 226 code ...... 294 fuel gauge ...... 263 Rear cross traffic alert (RTA) ...... 222, 226 Panoramic sunroof ...... 12, 126 refuelling ...... 264 control lamp ...... 222 anti-trap function ...... 127 Polishing ...... 253 Rear door ...... 10 emergency locking ...... 13 Portable waste bin ...... 167 Rear lid fault ...... 127 Power brake system warning lamp ...... 122 sun blind ...... 127 anti-lock system ...... 203 see also Luggage compartment ...... 122 Park Assist ...... 211 Power socket ...... 170 Rear view camera ...... 215 brake operation ...... 215 Power sockets Rear View Camera ...... 215 Park assist system 12 volts ...... 171 Rear view mirrors automatic stoppage ...... 214 faults ...... 172 adjusting the exterior mirrors ...... 139 fault ...... 212 Pre-heating ...... 185 Recommended gear ...... 196 leaving the parking space ...... 214 Protection of vehicle undercarriage ...... 255 Recycled ...... 261 parking ...... 213 Puncture Reflective vest ...... 82 action ...... 44 311 Index

Refuelling Running in Seat belts ...... 61 control and warning lamps ...... 263 brake pads ...... 190 adjustment ...... 15, 64 fuel gauge ...... 263 new engine ...... 197 automatic belt retractor ...... 67 mistakes ...... 262 belt height adjustments ...... 67 opening fuel tank flap ...... 263 S belt tensioner ...... 67 Remote control key Safe belt tension limiter ...... 67 unlocking and locking ...... 113 driving safe ...... 56 Seatbelts Repairs ...... 245, 261 SAFE ...... 117, 187 cleaning ...... 259 airbag system ...... 246 Safety ...... 56 Seat belts Repair work ...... 244 child safety ...... 74 protective function ...... 62 Replacement child seats ...... 74 purpose ...... 61 parts ...... 244 disconnecting the passenger front airbag . . . . 18 seat belt position ...... 65 Replacement parts ...... 244 Safe driving ...... 56 twisted belt ...... 64 Replacing bulbs Safety equipment ...... 57 unfastened ...... 63 see Changing bulbs ...... 91 Safety instructions use ...... 64 Reprogramming control units ...... 247 using child seats ...... 21, 75 warning lamp ...... 62 Retaining hooks ...... 160 Sale of vehicle with two buckles ...... 66 Rev counter ...... 100 in other countries / continents ...... 260 Seat belt tensioner ...... 16 Rims Salt water ...... 202 Seat belt tensioners ...... 67 changing a wheel ...... 45 Scrapping ...... 261 Seat belt with two buckles Roll-back function airbag system ...... 261 fastening ...... 66 windows ...... 126 vend-of-life vehicles ...... 261 twisting ...... 66 Rollback anti-trap function Seat unfastening ...... 66 electric sliding doors ...... 121 convenient entry function for the third row of Seat functions ...... 144 Roof carrier ...... 161 seats ...... 147 convenient entry function for the third row of Roof carrier system ...... 161 electric front seat ...... 14 seats ...... 147 fastening the supports ...... 162 folding down rear seats ...... 153 folding the backrest of the front passenger Roof rack ...... 161 folding the backrest of the front passenger seat ...... 148 RTA ...... 226 seat ...... 148 lumbar massage ...... 145 see Rear cross traffic alert ...... 222 heating ...... 144 Seat heating ...... 144 Rubber seals ...... 254 incorrect position ...... 59 SEAT information system ...... 26 Run-flat tyres number of seats ...... 59 structure ...... 27 codes ...... 291 rear seats ...... 141 Seats ...... 59 Run-in seat with position memory ...... 146 adjustment ...... 140 tyres ...... 287 Seat belt position ...... 65 Seat upholstery for pregnant women ...... 15 cleaning and maintenance of natural leather . 258 seat belts ...... 15 synthetic leather ...... 258 Selective Catalytic Reduction ...... 265 312 Index

Selector lever locking ...... 194 Steering Switching the ignition on and off ...... 24 Service fluids ...... 244 control and warning lamps ...... 181 Symbols Service interval display ...... 103 counter steering assistance system ...... 182 see Control and warning lamps ...... 32, 105 Service notification: read ...... 104 electromechanical ...... 182 Systems Signal lever ...... 25 power steering ...... 182 tyre monitoring systems ...... 231 Sign Assist ...... 227, 228 steering column lock ...... 182 connection ...... 229 tendency to pull to one side ...... 290 T disconnection ...... 229 Steering wheel Technical data indication on display ...... 228 adjustment ...... 16 engine oil specifications ...... 272 operation mode ...... 229 setting ...... 58 roof load ...... 162 trailer ...... 229 Steering wheel controls ...... 106 Technical details Sliding door ...... 119 Storage capacities ...... 280 childproof lock ...... 121 compartment for (sun)glasses ...... 164 loads on the axles ...... 295 manually opening and closing ...... 120 Storage compartment tyre pressure ...... 288 opening and closing electrically ...... 120 other storage compartments ...... 168 weights ...... 295 Snow chains ...... 49, 296 Storage compartment in the roof console . . . . . 164 Technical features ...... 294 all-wheel drive ...... 49 Storage compartments ...... 163 Technical modifications ...... 245 Spanner symbol ...... 104 cards ...... 165 Technical specifications Spare fuel canister ...... 262 drawers ...... 167 dimensions ...... 302 Spare parts ...... 244 folding table ...... 167 Telephone management Specifications glove compartment ...... 166 three button unit ...... 108 combined weight ...... 242 glove compartment lighting ...... 134 Tightening torque ...... 296 drawbar load ...... 234 instrument panel ...... 164 wheel bolts ...... 47 trailer weights ...... 242 portable waste bin ...... 167 TIN ...... 291 Speed rating ...... 292 rear footwell ...... 166 Tiptronic ...... 195 Stabilising the vehicle and trailer combination . 241 roof console ...... 164 Tiredness detection ...... 229 Start-Stop function Sun blind Top Tether ...... 23 driving with a trailer ...... 234 anti-trap function ...... 127 Top Tether system ...... 23 Start-Stop Function ...... 207 opening and closing ...... 127 Tow-starting ...... 51, 87 Start assist Sun blinds Tow hitch see Start assist systems ...... 205 rear side windows ...... 135 electric release ...... 236 Starter button ...... 184 Sun protection ...... 134 fitting a bicycle carrier ...... 237 Starting assistance Sun visors ...... 134 function control ...... 239 description ...... 53 Switch Towing jump leads ...... 53 hazard warning lights ...... 132 blind spot detector (BSD) ...... 227 positive pole ...... 52 Switching lights off ...... 128 parking distance warning system ...... 210 Starting the vehicle ...... 24 Switching lights on ...... 128

313 Index

special Characteristics ...... 227 Transport Tyre Mobility System things to note ...... 51 folding the backrest of the front passenger see Anti-puncture kit ...... 85 Towing a trailer ...... 295 seat ...... 148 Tyre monitoring systems ...... 231, 233 Towing bracket ...... 234 Transportation control lamp ...... 232 optical parking system ...... 211 baggage net ...... 161 Tyre pressure ...... 288 Towing the vehicle ...... 50, 87, 182 retaining hooks ...... 160 Tyre pressures ...... 296 driving tips ...... 89 Transporting Tyre profile ...... 289 front towline anchorage ...... 88 driving with a trailer ...... 240 Tyre repair ...... 85 rear towline anchorage ...... 88 driving with the rear lid open ...... 151 Tyre repair kit Towline anchorages ...... 50 load ...... 151 see Anti-puncture kit ...... 85 Traction ...... 292 loading the trailer ...... 239 Tyres Traction control system ...... 203 net partition ...... 156 avoiding damage ...... 285 Traction control (ASR) ...... 204, 205 rails and attachment system ...... 158 changing ...... 45 Traffic signal detection ...... 227 vehicle loaded ...... 151 changing wheels ...... 286 Trailer ...... 234 Transporting children ...... 74 code ...... 291 adjusting the headlights ...... 240 Transporting items deterioration ...... 290 anti-theft alarm ...... 238 fastening rings ...... 157 errors in wheel alignment ...... 290 connecting ...... 237 roof carrier ...... 161 foreign bodies in the tyres ...... 290 drawbar load ...... 234 roof carrier system ...... 161 handling ...... 285 driving with a trailer ...... 240 Transporting objects new ...... 287 electrically releasing the hitch ball ...... 236 roof carrier system ...... 162 old ...... 286 electrical socket ...... 238 trailer weights ...... 242 pressure ...... 288 fitting a tow hitch ...... 241 Treadwear ...... 292 replacing ...... 287 function control ...... 239 Turn signal convenience function ...... 129 run-flat tyre codes ...... 291 hitch ball ...... 236 Turn signal lever ...... 129 run-out ...... 290 hitching ...... 237 Tyre control systems serial number ...... 291 loading ...... 239 tyre pressures ...... 288 snow chains ...... 49 rear LED lights ...... 235, 238 Tyre load rating ...... 292 speed rating ...... 292 rear lights ...... 235, 238 Tyre mobility set ...... 44 storing ...... 286 stabilising the vehicle and trailer combina- components ...... 86 technical details ...... 291 tion ...... 241 more than one damaged tyre ...... 85 tyre code ...... 291 trailer cable ...... 235, 238 sealing a tyre ...... 86 tyre identification number (TIN) ...... 291 trailer weights ...... 242 Tyre Mobility Set tyre load rating ...... 292 wing mirrors ...... 235 inflating a tyre ...... 86 tyre pressure sensor ...... 289 Trailer cable ...... 235, 238 Tyre mobility system tyres with directional tread pattern ...... 292 Trailer weight cases where it should not be used ...... 85 tyre wear ...... 290 permitted maximum ...... 242 check after 10 minutes ...... 86 valve caps ...... 289 Trailer weights ...... 295 314 Index

wear indicators ...... 289 Vehicle battery ...... 41, 280 Vehicle interior monitoring ...... 118 wheel balancing ...... 290 acid ...... 282 Vehicle key set ...... 110 wheels ...... 286 assisted starting ...... 51 Vehicle tool kit ...... 45, 82 winter tyres ...... 292 automatically disconnecting devices ...... 283 components ...... 83 with directional tread pattern ...... 49 charging ...... 282 location ...... 82 Tyres with directional tread pattern ...... 292 checking the battery electrolyte level ...... 282 Vehicle undercarriage guard ...... 56 Tyre tread depth ...... 289 connecting ...... 282 Vehicle's battery Tyre wear ...... 289, 290 control and warning lamps ...... 281 running flat ...... 283 discharging ...... 181, 184 Vibrations U disconnect ...... 105 steering ...... 290 Unfastening the seat belt ...... 15 disconnecting ...... 282 Voice control ...... 109 Unfastening your seat belt ...... 64 positive terminal for starting assistance ...... 52 Unlocking and locking ...... 8 preparations ...... 282 W by remote control ...... 113 replacing ...... 282 Warning and control lamp door ...... 119 starting assistance ...... 53 cruise control system (CCS) ...... 219 from inside ...... 114 Vehicle care ...... 250 Warning lamps ...... 32 Upholstery cleaning airbag modules (dash panel) ...... 259 Warning triangle ...... 82, 132 textile covers ...... 257 anodized surfaces ...... 254 Washing the vehicle ...... 250 Upholstery: cleaning antenna incorporated in window ...... 260 sensors ...... 209, 212 upholstery ...... 256, 257 chrome parts ...... 254 special features ...... 251 USB/AUX-IN input ...... 108 cleaning wheels ...... 254 stickers ...... 252 USB/AUX-IN Input ...... 163 dash panel ...... 259 things to note ...... 116 de-icing the door lock cylinder ...... 255 Wax ...... 253 V engine compartment ...... 255 Wear indicators ...... 289 exterior mirrors ...... 252 Valve caps ...... 289 Weights ...... 295 interior ...... 256 Vanity mirror ...... 134 Wheel bolts ...... 84, 296 plastic parts ...... 259 Vehicle anti-theft ...... 45, 83, 84 protection of vehicle undercarriage ...... 255 chassis number ...... 294 caps ...... 46 rubber seals ...... 254 data label ...... 294 loosening ...... 46 special features ...... 251 identification data ...... 294 tightening torque ...... 47 vehicle paintwork ...... 253 identification number ...... 294 Wheel load capacity ...... 291 windows ...... 252 loading ...... 150 Wheel rims wooden trim ...... 259 parking downhill ...... 190 beadlock ...... 287 Vehicle care products ...... 250 parking uphill ...... 190 bolted trims ...... 287 Vehicle code raising ...... 47 Wheels ...... 284, 286, 296 vehicle data label ...... 294 recycling ...... 261 changing a wheel ...... 48, 84 Vehicle data label ...... 294

315 Index

changing wheels ...... 45 Wing mirrors hubcaps ...... 45 driving with a trailer ...... 235 Wheels and tyres Winter speed rating ...... 291 additional heater ...... 177 Wheel trim menu configuration ...... 30 hubcaps ...... 45 Winter conditions remove ...... 46 diesel ...... 265 Windows Winter driving automatic operation ...... 125 driving with a trailer ...... 234 automatic raising/lowering ...... 125 winter tyres ...... 292 convenience closing ...... 125 Winter operation convenience opening ...... 125 headlight washers ...... 136 malfunction ...... 126 heated windscreen washer jets ...... 136 removing ice ...... 252 salt on the roads ...... 137 roll-back function ...... 126 Winter tyres Window wiper ...... 135 all-wheel drive ...... 293 Window wiper blade ...... 26 speed limit ...... 293 Windscreen and rear window wiper blades . . . . . 87 Windscreen washer ...... 41, 135 X Windscreen washer fluid XDS control lamp ...... 135 see Brake assistance systems ...... 204 Windscreen washer water checking ...... 280 topping up ...... 280 Windscreen wiper ...... 135 heated windscreen washer jets ...... 136 window wiper lever ...... 135 Windscreen wipers ...... 26 functions ...... 136 headlight washer system ...... 136 lifting the wiper blade ...... 54 rain sensor ...... 136 replacing the wiper blade ...... 54 service position ...... 54 special characteristics ...... 136 Windscreen wipers service position ...... 54

316 About this manual The equipment marked with an aster- For the sake of the environment isk* is fitted as standard only in certain versions, and is only supplied as op- Texts preceded by this symbol contain rele- This manual contains a description of the vant information concerning environmental tional extras for some versions, or are equipment supplied with the vehicle at the protection. time this manual was published. Some of the only offered in certain countries. units described herein will not be available ® All registered marks are indicated with Note until a later date or are only available in cer- ®. Although the copyright symbol does tain markets. not appear, it is a copyrighted mark. Texts preceded by this symbol contain additional information. Because this is a general manual for the >> The section is continued on the follow- ALHAMBRA range, some of the equipment ing page. and functions that are described in this man- This manual is divided into six large parts, Important warnings on a given page which are: ual are not included in all types or variants of the model; they may vary or be modified Detailed contents on a given page 1. The essentials depending on the technical requirements and 2. Safety on the market; this is in no way deceptive ad- General information on a given page 3. Emergencies vertising. Emergency information on a given page 4. Operation The illustrations are intended as a general guide and may vary from the equipment fitted Audiovisual material on a given page 5. Tips in your vehicle in some details. 6. Technical data The steering indications (left, right, forward, WARNING At the end of this manual, there is a detailed SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under- reverse) appearing in this manual refer to the Texts preceded by this symbol contain infor- alphabetical index that will help you quickly stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason normal driving movements of the vehicle ex- mation on safety. They warn you about possi- find the information you require. no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook. cept when otherwise indicated. ble dangers of accident or injury. All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error The audiovisual material only is intended to or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print. help users to understand certain car function- CAUTION Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form. alities better. It does not replace the instruc- Texts with this symbol draw your attention to SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act. tion manual. Please use the instruction manu- potential sources of damage to your vehicle. al to obtain more comprehensive information All rights on changes are reserved. and indications. ❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose. © SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.16 OWNER’S MANUAL Alhambra 7N5012720BG Inglés (11.16)

7N5012720BG (11.16) SEAT recommends SEAT recommends

Inglés SEAT GENUINE OIL Castrol EDGE Professional Alhambra